JP7484996B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute effects that indicate a predetermined value (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-179176 A

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the above-mentioned pachinko machines.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a first effect execution means for executing a first effect , which is capable of changing a presentation mode from at least a first mode to any one of a plurality of second modes different from the first mode, and which does not change from the second mode to the first mode, for a predetermined presentation period , and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect, the first effect execution means being capable of executing the first effect so as to hide the second effect in a situation where an execution position of the first effect executed in the first mode overlaps with an execution position of the second effect, and the second effect execution means being capable of executing the first effect so as to hide the second effect in a situation where the first effect is executed in the first mode. The second performance can be executed at a position where the first performance is easier for the player to see when it is being executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode, and the second performance can be executed with the second performance including a first value mode in which the value granted to the player is a first value, and the second performance can be executed with the second value mode in which the value granted to the player is a second value different from the first value, and the gaming machine has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in which the performance mode of the first mode is not changed to the second mode, and is configured so that the execution position of the second performance differs depending on the variable mode of the first performance executed by the first performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a first effect execution means is provided which is capable of changing a presentation mode from at least a first mode to any one of a plurality of second modes different from the first mode, and which executes a first effect that does not change from the second mode to the first mode, for a predetermined presentation period , and a second effect execution means which executes a second effect different from the first effect, the first effect execution means being capable of executing the first effect so as to hide the second effect in a situation where an execution position of the first effect executed in the first mode overlaps with an execution position of the second effect, and the second effect execution means is capable of executing the first effect before a situation where the first effect is executed in the first mode. The second performance can be executed with a position where the first performance is easier for the player to see when it is being executed in the second mode as the execution position, and the second performance can be executed with the second performance including a first value mode in which the value granted to the player is a first value, and the second performance including a second value mode in which the value granted to the player is a second value different from the first value, and the gaming machine has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in which the performance mode of the first mode is not changed to the second mode, and is configured such that the execution position of the second performance differs depending on the variable mode of the first performance executed by the first performance execution means.

This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the upper combined unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the upper combined unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1A to 1C are schematic front views of a drive arm at a retracted rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a vertical rotation position, and an extended rotation position. 13 is a partial enlarged schematic front view of the drive arm when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the upper combined unit and the lower combined unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a lifting base and a rotating member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting base and the rotating member. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front view of the driver when placed at a first rotation position, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the driver when placed at a second rotation position. FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the lifting unit, FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lifting unit, and FIG. 4C is a side view of the lifting unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the lifting unit in a first state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the lifting unit in a second state. FIG. 13 is a front view of the lifting unit in a third state. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the lifting unit in the first state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lifting unit in the second state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lifting unit in a third state. 1A is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in a first state, FIG. 1B is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in a second state, and FIG. 1C is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in a third state. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operational unit in a combined state. A schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LIV-LIV in Figure 53. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 5A and 5B are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lifting base and rotating members of the protruding unit. 5A and 5B are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lifting base and rotating members of the protruding unit. 5A and 5B are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the lifting base and rotating members of the protruding unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4A and 4B are front views of the slide unit, the upper combined unit, and the lower combined unit. 4A and 4B are front views of the slide unit, the upper combined unit, and the lower combined unit. 65(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in Figure 65(a), and (b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in Figure 65(b). 66(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in Figure 66(a), and (b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in Figure 66(b). FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 4A is a rear view of the transmission gear, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the transmission gear. 1A is a schematic diagram of a front view of a slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are meshed, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. 72(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit according to a third embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit when the left rotation transmission rack gear of the main body base member and the transmission gear are engaged, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit when the accommodating member is displaced and the lower first rack gear of the main body base member and the transmission gear are disengaged. 75(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). FIG. 13 is a front view of a base member in a fourth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit when the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear are engaged, and (a) is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit when the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear are disengaged. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of a left sliding member in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. 1A is a schematic diagram of the left slide member viewed from the front in a state before the switching plate is operated, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the left slide member viewed from the front in a state after the switching plate is operated. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of a left sliding member in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. 1A is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit before the switching plate is operated, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a front view of the slide unit after the switching plate is operated. 84(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of a slide unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of a slide unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of a slide unit. FIG. 23 is a front view of a slide unit in the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of a slide unit. 93(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93(c). FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit in a ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97(c). 13A is a front view of a lifting/lowering unit in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 13B is a rear view of the lifting/lowering unit, and FIG. 13C is a side view of the lifting/lowering unit. FIG. This is the operating unit in the combined state. 101A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line CIIa-CIIa in FIG. 101, and FIG. 101B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. 11(a) is a front view of the driver in the eleventh embodiment when the driver is disposed in a first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the driver when the driver is disposed in a second rotation position. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. An exploded oblique view of the variable winning device in the first control example. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the first control example at La-La section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the first control example at Lb-Lb section, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device in the first control example. 13A to 13B are rear views of a portion of the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in a first control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. 1A is a diagram showing area divisions of a display screen when a reach navigation effect is displayed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a presentation display mode of the reach navigation effect. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a reach navigation effect. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in a main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value for special patterns, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and hits for normal patterns. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (high probability) fluctuation pattern table. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the navigation performance selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first navigation performance selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second navigation performance selection table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the reach navigation performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing an opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V performance command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing an error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the time when the composite press performance is started in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the time when the performance setting timing D3b is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the point in time when the timing press period Db1 is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing another example of the point in time when the timing press period Db1 is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period in the composite press performance in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the time when the second consecutive press period Dc is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example. A timing chart showing the flow of consecutive slot presentations executed in the second control example. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in a continuous slot presentation in the second control example. 13A is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a display example of the "sugoroku mode" in the second control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the presentation display of the point presentation in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the press scenario table in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal press scenario in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long press scenario in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the combined press scenario in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the character selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning character selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the losing character selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the point selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning point selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the losing point selection table. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a point effect setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the press performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the auto-press performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing a slot performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the processing during the first slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing processing during normal slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing processing during the first shortened slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing processing during the second shortened slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the processing during the extension slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the press performance related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 13A is a flowchart showing a press command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a long press command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example. 13A is a flowchart showing the auto-press start command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the auto-press command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example. 13A is a flowchart showing the auto-press end command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the release command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a slot presentation command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a point effect command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the press scenario table in the first variant of the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first composite press scenario, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second composite press scenario. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the second control example. A flowchart showing the slot performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the second control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a second modified example of the second control example. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the frame button control device in the second modified example of the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a frame button control device in a second modified example of the second control example. 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams showing examples of the display of each effect executed in each control example. 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams showing examples of the display of each effect executed in each control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing each mode used for point presentation in the third control example. 13A is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode A" in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a display example of the "sugoroku mode" in the third control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a display example of the "normal mode" in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a display example of the "bingo mode" in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an image layer on which a character is displayed in the third control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an image layer on which a point is displayed in the third control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a combination of multiple image layers in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the number of times selection table in the third control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the number of times selection table for winning in the third control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the number of times selection table for losing in the third control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the used point selection table in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the final display mode selection table in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table in the third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final third display mode selection table in the third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the character display selection table in the third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a display data table in a third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a transfer data table in a third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a drawing list in a third control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a point effect setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a mode transition process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode change process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing a point presentation mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 13A is a flowchart showing the point performance related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the point command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an indicator command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing another example of an image layer on which characters are displayed in the third control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of an image layer on which points are displayed in the third control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing another example of a combination of multiple image layers in the third control example. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of reach navigation presentation executed in the fourth control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the reach navigation effect in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a second internal level selection table in the fourth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the performance scenario memory area in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the performance scenario selection table in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing reach navigation performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a second modified example of the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a variant example 3 of the fourth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in variant example 3 of the fourth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in variant example 3 of the fourth control example. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed in a continuous slot presentation in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed in a slot presentation in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the display mode displayed in a slot presentation in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a display mode storage area in a fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display mode selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display mode selection table for a winning combination in the fifth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display mode selection table for a losing combination in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the win stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss stop mode selection table in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing processing 2 during the first slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing processing 2 during normal slot performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the first shortened slot performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the second shortened slot performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing extension slot performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode of a rear image in a sixth control example. A timing chart showing the flow of the composite press performance executed in the sixth control example. 13A to 13C are figures showing an example of a background change operation mode of a composite press performance executed in the sixth control example. 13A is a timing chart showing the flow of a composite pressing performance executed in the sixth control example. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the button operation content and performance mode executed in the composite pressing performance executed in the sixth control example. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an example of press effect 2 in a composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the auto-press performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A schematic diagram showing another example of press performance 2 in the composite press performance executed in the sixth control example. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects in the seventh control example. 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams showing examples of displays displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh control example. 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams showing examples of additional effects displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the second variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the additional performance selection table in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the performance counter in the seventh control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 4 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 13A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an additional performance command process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventh control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects in a modified example of the seventh control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modified example of the seventh control example; (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modified example of the seventh control example; 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams showing modified examples of additional effects. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a presentation in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and performance processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 42, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 4, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 2 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 2. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 4, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 4 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front door 5 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 5c formed in a roughly elliptical shape in the approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the rear side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

In the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape that protrudes forward and has an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front door 5 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 5c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the window 5c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by gluing together thin boards, and is formed so that the players cannot see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The center portion of the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 77 is set up inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize openings and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 76, 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 1, a lottery is held when either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" is a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in a probability change. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a jackpot increases, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 1 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change or a time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a jackpot for the second symbol is increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the first electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the first electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the first electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the first electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the first electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the first electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric role 140a and the second electric role 82 are opened with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are a number of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in a variable manner, triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66.

In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of this center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the first electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the first electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 and the third winning slot during the probability bonus or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the first electric device 140a is opened for one winning hit, or by other methods during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is set shorter during the probability bonus or time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the first electric device 140a is opened for one winning hit may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area to the right of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board to pass through as they flow down the game board. When a ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The assembly position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

The second winning opening 140 is provided with a first electric device 140a. This first electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric device 140a is in an open state (expanded state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the first electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate or time-saving period, the time that the first electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the state is low probability or high probability. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be selected when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the first electric device 140a found in the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the first electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the first through gate 66 to open the first electric device 140a, and aiming for a 15R special bonus jackpot by winning at the second winning port 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot lottery performed due to a winning of either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the opening is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front door 5 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, or 82 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 1, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 441, 475, and 476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to Figs. 5 to 98. Fig. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and Fig. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. Figs. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are moved back as far as possible in the direction away from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the lifting member 820 are each displaced to their retracted positions. FIG. 8 shows a state in which the left sliding member 430 is slid toward the right sliding member 450 from the state shown in FIG. 7, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to their extended positions. FIG. 9 shows a state in which the rotating member 730 and the lifting member 820 are displaced to their extended positions from the state shown in FIG. 7.

As shown in Figures 5 and 6, the operating unit 200 has a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the sliding unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, the lower combined unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800 are rotatably housed in the internal space of the rear case 300.

The rear case 300 comprises a bottom wall 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall 301 has an opening 301a that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

The slide unit 400 comprises a base member 410 that is rectangular in front view and is disposed in the upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 that are disposed on the base member 410 so that their upper end portions can be slidably displaced. The slide unit 400 is configured to be capable of performing an effect in which each slide member 430 is independently slidably displaced in the left-right direction (the longitudinal direction of the base member 410) on the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (i.e., the third pattern display device 81).

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that they can come into contact with each other, and in this embodiment, a structure is adopted that prevents the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 from being damaged when they come into contact with each other. Details of this structure will be described later.

A guide member 419, which is rectangular in front view and long horizontally, is disposed in a position parallel to the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slid left and right, the lower ends of the slide members 430, 450 are guided by sliding between the opposing guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301. This makes it possible to prevent the lower ends of the slide members 430, 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper combined unit 500 comprises a base member 510 that is rectangular in front view and long from side to side and is disposed in front of the base member 410 of the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 that is displaceably disposed on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower combined unit 600 comprises a base member 610 that is generally L-shaped in front view and is disposed on the left and lower parts of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a lower displacement member 640 that is displaceably disposed on the lower base member 610.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position where it is retracted to the rear side of the base member 510 and a protruding position where it protrudes to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position where it is retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and a protruding position where it protrudes to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300. When the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 protrude to the protruding position, the side surfaces of these two displacement members 530, 640 (upper abutment portion 533 and lower abutment portion 643) abut against each other (combine).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, which have been displaced toward each other, come into contact with each other, an impact may occur, causing them to bounce off each other and resulting in an unstable posture. In this embodiment, a structure is used to suppress such an impact when they come into contact with each other. Details of this structure will be described later.

The protruding unit 700 comprises a base member 710 that is rectangular in shape when viewed from the front and is disposed on the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a lifting base 720 that is disposed so as to be able to rise and fall on the base member 710, and a rotating member 730 that is disposed so as to be able to rotate on the lifting base 720, and the lifting base 720 is formed so as to be displaceable (lifted and lowered) together with the rotating member 730 between a retracted position where it is retracted to the front side of the base member 710 and an overhanging position where it overhangs to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

The protruding unit 700 also includes a protruding member 735 that is arranged on the rotating member 730 so that it can appear and disappear (slide), a swinging member 732 that is arranged on the rotating member 730 so that it can swing, and a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732.

The protruding unit 700 drives the protruding member 735 and the oscillating member 732 using a single drive motor 763. As a result, the drive force required to drive the protruding member 735 and the drive force required for the oscillating member 732 overlap, which increases the load and may reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In this embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load on the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The lifting unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is rectangular in front view and long horizontally, which is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, and a lifting member 820 that is disposed so as to be liftable on the base member 810. The lifting member 820 is formed so as to be displaceable (liftable) between a retracted position where it is retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position where it extends to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 18. First, the structure for sliding the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 relative to the base member 410 will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 12.

Figure 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. Figure 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and Figure 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. Note that Figures 10 to 12 show the left slide member 430 in the retracted position (the position furthest from the right slide member 450).

As shown in Figures 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 mainly comprises a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see Figure 6) of the rear case 300, a sliding bar member 420 disposed on the base member 410, a left sliding member 430 and a right sliding member 450 slidably connected to the sliding bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 along the sliding bar member 420.

The base member 410 is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding bar member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 410. In addition, a plate-shaped protruding plate portion 411 protrudes horizontally toward the front side from the lower part of the sliding bar member 420 on the base member 410, and a base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 (the side facing the sliding bar member 420), and a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body with a circular cross section that guides the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 to slidably hold both sliding members 430, 450. The sliding rod member 420 has both ends fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears that extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding bar member 420 (i.e., the sliding direction of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450). The base side rack gear 412 is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432 of the left sliding member 430, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are meshed with the transmission gears 437a, 457a (see Figures 13 to 16) of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, respectively.

The left sliding member 430 mainly comprises a first member 431 which is rectangular in shape when viewed from the front, a first side pinion gear 432 which is rotatably arranged on the first member 431, a second member 433 which is rectangular in shape when viewed from the front and has a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 meshes, a base member 434 which is rectangular in shape when viewed from the front and hangs down from the tip side of the second member 433, a rotating member 435 which is rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 434, a displacement member 436 which is rotatably arranged on the back side of the rotating member 435, and transmission gears 437a to 437f which transmit the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435.

The first member 431 has a sliding hole that extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and has a circular cross-sectional inner circumferential surface, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole, allowing the sliding (sliding) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. In other words, the first member 431 is disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420 so as to be able to slide and be displaced.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear that meshes with the left drive gear 471 described below, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as described below, when the left drive gear 471 is driven to rotate, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420.

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (axially supported) on the first member 431, and a cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front is arranged on the arrangement portion of the first side pinion gear 432 (the front side of the first member 431). In other words, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged while being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid along the sliding bar member 420, that is, when it is slid relative to the base member 410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

The second member 433 is displaceably disposed (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the tip side, so that the second member 433 can slide (slide) along the sliding rod member 420 while displacing relative to the first member 431. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface with a circular cross section, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 has a second side rack gear 433a engraved on its underside, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the first member 431, the second member 433 is acted upon by the first side pinion gear 432 (i.e., the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is converted into linear motion by the second side rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433), and the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431.

In other words, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, so that a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 433. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410, the second member 433 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 410 at a speed faster than that of the first member 431.

The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding bar member 420, and the movable ranges of these two slide members 430, 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 come into contact with each other, and the second member 433 does not come into contact with the rack member 451.

The right slide member 450 mainly comprises a rack member 451 which is rectangular in width when viewed from the front, a base member 454 which is rectangular in length when viewed from the front and hangs down from the base end side of the rack member 451, a rotation member 455 which is rotatably arranged on the front side of the base member 454, a displacement member 456 which is rotatably arranged on the back side of the rotation member 455, and transmission gears 457a to 457f for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotation member 455.

The rack member 451 has a sliding hole at the base end that extends along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and has a circular cross-sectional inner surface, and the sliding bar member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole, allowing the rack member 451 to slide (slide) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding bar member 420. In other words, the rack member 451 is disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding bar member 420 so as to be able to slide.

A rack gear 451a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. The right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is driven to rotate, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism mainly comprises a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively, and a left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 whose drive shafts are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474, respectively.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, by driving the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 to rotate via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be independently slidably displaced via the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a.

A cover member 416 is disposed on the front of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471, 472 and the pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. The drive motors 475, 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 has insertion holes formed therein, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475, 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473, 474 through the insertion holes.

Next, with reference to Figures 13 to 16, we will explain the structure that rotates the rotating members 435, 455 in response to the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450.

Figure 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and Figure 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the base member 434 comprises a rear-side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front-side base member 434b disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear-side base member 434a, and the transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the rear-side base member 434a and the front-side base member 434b. A pivot hole 434b1 that is circular when viewed from the front is drilled in the front-side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the transmission gear 437a at the front and the transmission gear 437f at the rear.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rear transmission gear 437f is coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435.

Therefore, by sliding and displacing the left sliding member 430 (base member 434) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 437f via transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f causes the rotating member 435 to rotate.

The rotating member 435 has a rotating shaft 435a and a support shaft 435b that protrude coaxially from the back surface. The rotating shaft 435a is the part that serves as the rotating shaft when the rotating member 435 rotates relative to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, a transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to the rotating member 435. Therefore, as described below, when the transmission gear 437f is rotated, the rotating member 435 rotates relative to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a part that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. An E-ring is fitted into a fitting groove recessed at the tip of the support shaft 435b, thereby preventing the displacement member 436 from coming off the support shaft 435b.

The displacement member 436 is a member that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotation member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotation member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, so that the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) relative to the rotating member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and interference between the rotating member 435 and the displacement member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the circumferential surface centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 can be rotated in one direction or the other with respect to the rotating member 435, with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed into a generally elongated shape in front view with the length dimension being greater than the width dimension, and the rotating shaft 435a is positioned at a position that is generally centered in the length and width directions. The displacement member 436 is formed into a shape in front view that divides the rotating member 435 into two at its center in the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 can be hidden on the back side of the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to see.

In addition, the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotating member 435 on the opposite side of the support shaft 435b from the displacement member 436, so that the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotating member 435 can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In this embodiment, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (when the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotating member 435 is approximately aligned with the rotating shaft 435a of the rotating member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (when the displacement member 436 visibly protrudes to the side of the rotating member 435), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure can be moved away from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 by the amount of protrusion of the displacement member 436. This allows the center of gravity to be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, allowing for smooth initial operation.

That is, when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is started from a stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of inertia force. In this case, if the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure with the displacement member 436 protruding to the side of the rotation member 435 is located on the side that is displaced downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (i.e., the rotation of the rotation member 435), the rotation can be assisted by the rotational action due to the weight of the above-mentioned structure by leaving the displacement member 436 protruding to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotating in one direction). This reduces the burden on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11), and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 can be started smoothly from a stopped state.

On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure with the displacement member 436 protruding to the side of the rotation member 435 is located on the side that displaces upward in the direction of gravity when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (i.e., rotation of the rotation member 435) begins, the displacement member 436 can be hidden behind the back of the rotation member 435 (rotated in the other direction) to bring the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure closer to (aligned with) the rotation shaft 435a, thereby preventing the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. This allows the left sliding member 430 to smoothly start sliding from a stopped state.

In addition, if the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure with the displacement member 436 protruding to the side of the rotation member 435 is located on the side that displaces upward in the direction of gravity when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (i.e., the rotation of the rotation member 435) stops, the rotation can be easily stopped by the weight of the above-mentioned structure. This allows the left sliding member 430 to be stopped quickly when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped.

Figure 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and Figure 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 comprises a rear-side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front-side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear-side base member 454a, and transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the rear-side base member 454a and the front-side base member 454b. A pivot hole 454b1 that is circular when viewed from the front is drilled in the front-side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the transmission gear 457a at the front and the transmission gear 457f at the rear.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rear transmission gear 457f is coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft 455a of the rotating member 455.

Therefore, by sliding and displacing the right slide member 450 (base member 454) relative to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 457f via transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f causes the rotating member 455 to rotate.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a support shaft 455b that protrude coaxially from the back surface. The rotating shaft 455a is the part that serves as the rotating shaft when the rotating member 455 rotates relative to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, a transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to the rotating member 455. Therefore, as described below, the rotating member 455 rotates relative to the base member 454 when the transmission gear 457f is rotated.

The support shaft 455b is a part that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. An E-ring is fitted into a fitting groove recessed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, thereby preventing the displacement member 456 from coming off the support shaft 455b.

The displacement member 456 is a member that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotation member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotation member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, so that the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 455a of the rotating member 455. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) relative to the rotating member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the escape hole 456b, and interference between the rotating member 455 and the displacement member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear engraved along the circumferential surface centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 can be rotated in one direction or the other with respect to the rotating member 455, with the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the center of rotation.

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a generally elongated shape in which the length dimension is larger than the width dimension when viewed from the front, and the rotating shaft 455a is disposed at one end in the length direction, and the drive motor 461 is disposed at the other end. In addition, the displacement member 456 is disposed on the rotating member 455 on the opposite side of the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b in between, so that the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotating member 455 can be positioned eccentrically at one end of the rotating member 455 (a position away from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, when the sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450 (i.e., the rotation of the rotating member 455) begins, the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotating member 455 can be positioned on the side that displaces downward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure can be made to act in a direction that rotates the structure itself. This reduces the burden on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11), and allows the right sliding member 450 to smoothly start sliding from a stopped state.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450 (i.e., the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure acts as a resistance, making it easier to stop the rotation of the structural value. This allows the right sliding member 450 to be stopped quickly when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped.

As described below, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) abuts (collides with) the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) and the right slide member 450 is retracted (displaced to the right in FIG. 10), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, allowing the weight of the structure to act as resistance and provide a cushioning effect through the rotation of the structural value.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figures 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, and show the transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced. Note that Figures 17 and 18 show the state in which the cover member 416, guide member 419, left drive motor 475, and right drive motor 476 have been removed.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the left slide member 430 is in the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction to the maximum extent, and the base member 434 is positioned at the left end of the movable range (left side of FIG. 17(a), the position furthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from this state, the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a act to slide and displace the first member 431 to the right relative to the base member 410 (right side of FIG. 17(a), in the direction approaching the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and the first side pinion gear 432 journaled on the first member 431 is interposed in a state in which it is meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 412. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slid together with the first member 431 by the action of the base side rack gear 412, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slid relative to the base member 410 at a speed increased from the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433, which has a relatively faster sliding displacement speed than the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 partially overlaps the first member 431 (the overall longitudinal length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is shortened).

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction from this state and the first member 431 is further slid and displaced to the right relative to the base member 410 (the right side of FIG. 17(a), in the direction approaching the right slide member 450), as shown in FIG. 18(a), the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is positioned at the right end of the movable range (the right side of FIG. 18(a), the position closest to the right slide member 450), i.e., in the extended position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(a), when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction from the above-mentioned case when the left slide member 430 is in the extended position, the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a act to slide the first member 431 to the left relative to the base member 410 (the left side of FIG. 18(a), in the direction away from the right slide member 450).

In this case, as in the above case, the second member 433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410 at a speed faster than the first member 431 due to the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 journaled on the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433, which has a relatively faster sliding displacement speed than the first member 431, precedes the first member 431, and the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction (the total longitudinal length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 is extended beyond the total length at the extended position).

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the reverse direction from this state, and the first member 431 is slid further leftward (left side of FIG. 17(b), in the direction away from the right slide member 450) relative to the base member 410, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum extent relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, as shown in FIG. 17(a), and the base member 434 is positioned at the left end of the movable range (left side of FIG. 17(a), the position furthest from the right slide member 450), i.e., in the extended position.

In this embodiment, a detectable portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor that detects the detectable portion is disposed on the base member 410 (both not shown). In this case, the detection sensor is disposed in a position where it can detect the detectable portion of the second member 431 (left sliding member 430) when the second member 431 is disposed in the retracted position, and when the detectable portion is detected by the detection sensor, it is determined that the left sliding member 430 is disposed in the retracted position, and the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

On the other hand, the driving of the left drive motor 475 in the extended position is stopped by accumulating the number of driving steps of the left drive motor 475 from the start of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 from the retracted position to the extended position. In other words, when the accumulated added value reaches a predetermined value, it is determined that the left sliding member 430 is positioned in the extended position, and the driving of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

In this embodiment, the movable range of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the extended position) overlaps with the movable range of the sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450. Therefore, the movable ranges of both can be increased to enhance the presentation effect.

However, if the movable ranges overlap in this way, there is a risk that the left sliding member 430, which has been slid to the extended position, will come into contact with the right sliding member 450 and be damaged due to variations in the amount of displacement caused by play (gaps) based on variations in component dimensions and assembly and tolerances, or due to poor control (for example, an error in the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps). On the other hand, if the speed of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is slowed down to prevent damage, the dramatic effect associated with that sliding displacement will be lost.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are formed to prevent damage to them while ensuring the dramatic effect associated with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430.

That is, as described above, the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 journaled on the first member 431, allows the second member 433 to be slid and displaced relative to the base member 410 at a speed faster than the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and displacement member 436) visible to the player is connected to the second member 433, so that the speed of the sliding displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, ensuring the presentation effect associated with the sliding displacement.

On the other hand, as described above, the left sliding member 430 abuts the first member 431, which has a relatively slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433, against the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451), thereby weakening the impact at the time of the abutment and preventing damage to both.

In this embodiment, the right sliding member 450 is kept waiting (stopped) closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left sliding member 430, and when the left sliding member 430 is slid toward the extended position, the left sliding member 430 is brought into contact with the right sliding member 450 and the left sliding member 430 is pushed in the direction of the sliding displacement, so that the two are slid and displaced together as one unit. Even in this case, the first member 431, which has a relatively slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433, can be brought into contact with the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451), thereby weakening the impact at the time of contact and suppressing damage to both.

The right sliding member 450 is disposed on the base member 410 so as to be slidably displaceable, and the direction of sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450 is parallel to the direction of sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. That is, when the right sliding member 450 is disposed in a position where it can abut against the left sliding member 430 disposed in the extended position (see FIG. 18(a)), it has a movable range for sliding displacement in a direction away from the left sliding member 430 (right side in FIG. 18(a)), and the direction in which the right sliding member 450 can slide is a direction that allows the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 when it abuts against it.

Therefore, when the left sliding member 430 abuts against the right sliding member 450 (see FIG. 18(a)), the right sliding member 450 is moved backward (removed rearward) while absorbing the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430, thereby providing a cushioning effect (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, damage to the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the directions of sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are parallel, so that when the left sliding member 430 comes into contact with the right sliding member 450, the right sliding member 450 can smoothly move away. This ensures a cushioning effect and makes it easier to prevent damage to both members.

In addition, in this case, by sharing the sliding bar member 420 between the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, the directions of sliding displacement of both are parallel, which allows for overall miniaturization. In other words, if a sliding bar member for guiding the left sliding member 430 and a sliding bar member for guiding the right sliding member 450 were arranged side by side at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement, this would require more space and lead to larger size. In contrast, according to this embodiment, one sliding bar member 420 is shared by both sliding members 430, 450, improving space efficiency and allowing for miniaturization.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged in the extended position (the right side in FIG. 18(a)), and can be arranged in a position where it does not abut against the left slide member 430. In other words, it is possible to create a state where the left slide member 430 does not abut against the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left sliding member 430 is slid at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the left sliding member 430 will extend beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variations and poor control, so the right sliding member 450 is actively brought into contact with the left sliding member 430 (functioning as a stopper). On the other hand, when the left sliding member 430 is slid at a relatively low speed, it is easy to make the stop position coincide with the target position, so by placing the right sliding member 450 in a position where it does not come into contact with the left sliding member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of times the sliding member comes into contact and the fatigue associated with the contact. As a result, the lifespan of both sliding members 430, 450 can be improved.

Here, in order to increase the speed of the second member 433 relative to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 requires the provision of separate members 431, 433 and the interposition of a first side pinion gear 432 between the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear 433a, which increases the number of parts and sliding parts, resulting in increased weight and drive resistance. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial movement of the left sliding member 430 (when it starts to slide from a stopped state), the force required for driving is at its maximum due to the influence of inertia. Therefore, the initial movement (the initial speed when it starts to slide from a stopped state) is slow, which may impede the dramatic effect that accompanies the slide movement.

In this case, in this embodiment, the right sliding member 450 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the left sliding member 430, and is also formed so as to be able to slide from this contacted state in a direction that pushes the left sliding member 430 back to the retracted position (to the left in FIG. 18(a)). Therefore, the initial movement of the left sliding member 430 (movement that starts sliding movement from a stopped state) can be assisted by the sliding movement of the right sliding member 450. This allows the left sliding member 430 to be swiftly slid from a stopped state. As a result, the initial movement (initial speed) can be made faster, improving the presentation effect associated with the sliding movement.

In addition, when the right slide member 450 is slid in a direction that pushes back the left slide member 430 to the retracted position (to the left in FIG. 18(a)), it abuts against the first member 431 of the left slide member 430 (pushes back the first member 431), thereby improving the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430.

In other words, the right sliding member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431, which has a slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433 of the left sliding member 430, and pushes back the first member 431. This makes it possible to lengthen the time during which the assisting force acts on the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) from the right sliding member 450 (i.e., the time from when the right sliding member 450 starts to push back the stopped left sliding member 430 until the speed of the left sliding member 430 exceeds the speed of the right sliding member 450 and the displacement of the left sliding member 430 precedes the displacement of the right sliding member 450), and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left sliding member 430 can be increased.

The gear ratio of the mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion and slides and displaces the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) is set to a different gear ratio from the gear ratio of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a) that converts the rotational drive force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion and slides and displaces the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451). In this embodiment, the gear ratio of the former (left sliding member 430) is set to a higher gear ratio than the gear ratio of the latter (right sliding member 450).

In this embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 are formed in the same shape, and the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a are formed in the same shape, so the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is set to be greater than the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. In other words, a large gear ratio means that the amount of displacement in the direction of sliding displacement of the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is large when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation.

This makes it easier to quickly slide the left sliding member 430 from a stopped state, and once the sliding movement has begun, the speed of the sliding movement of the left sliding member 450 (second member 433) can be increased, thereby improving the presentation effect associated with the sliding movement.

In other words, by setting the gear ratio of the right sliding member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, so that the force with which the right sliding member 450 pushes back against the left sliding member 430 is increased, and the initial operation of the left sliding member 430 (the start of sliding displacement from a stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left sliding member 430 can be quickly displaced linearly from a stopped state.

On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the left sliding member 430 to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) can be increased, and the speed of the sliding displacement of the second member 433 can be increased accordingly. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect associated with that sliding displacement.

When the gear ratio of the left sliding member 430 is reduced in order to perform the initial operation of the left sliding member 430 (start of sliding displacement from a stopped state) smoothly, the initial operation becomes smooth, but the speed (maximum speed) of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation is completed becomes low. On the other hand, when the gear ratio of the left sliding member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased, but the initial operation (start of sliding displacement from a stopped state) is hindered (delayed). In other words, it was previously impossible to perform the initial operation of the left sliding member 430 smoothly and to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, but by adopting a structure in which the right sliding member 450 pushes back the left sliding member 430, it has become possible for the first time to achieve both of these.

Next, the detailed configurations of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. First, the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 23.

Figure 19(a) is a front view of the upper combined unit 500, and Figure 19(b) is a rear view of the upper combined unit 500. Figure 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper combined unit 500, and Figure 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper combined unit 500. Note that Figure 19 illustrates a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is placed in the retracted position.

As shown in Figures 19 to 21, the upper combined unit 500 includes a base member 510, a rack member 520 that is slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, an upper displacement member 530 that is connected to the rack member 520, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520.

The base member 510 comprises a rear base 511 which is horizontally long and rectangular when viewed from the front, and a front base 512 which is horizontally long and rectangular when viewed from the front and is disposed (covered) on the front side of the rear base 511. The rack member 520 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the rear base 511 and the front base 512 so as to be capable of sliding and displacing.

The rear base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-like opening extending in a straight line, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc, and a support shaft 511c that protrudes to the front side and is inserted into the guide groove 522 of the rack member 520.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the rear base 511 (i.e., the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in accordance with the sliding displacement of the rack member 520, the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 slides along the guide hole 511b, thereby changing the posture (orientation) of the upper displacement member 530.

The rack member 520 is formed as a rectangular plate-like body having a support hole 521, which is a circular hole when viewed from the front, for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, a guide groove 522 formed as a groove-like opening extending in a straight line, and a rack gear 523 engraved in a direction parallel to the extension direction of the guide groove 522.

The support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the rear base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is supported by the shaft support hole 521, the extension direction of the guide groove 522 is parallel to the extension direction of the connecting hole 511a of the rear base 511. Therefore, the direction of sliding displacement of the rack member 520 is determined by the extension direction of the connecting hole 511a of the rear base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that protrude from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably supported in the support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511a of the rear base 511, and the guide pin 532 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b of the rear base 511.

A collar C1 with a diameter larger than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 with a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532, respectively, to prevent them from coming off. An upper abutment portion 533 is formed on the side of the upper displacement member 530. The upper abutment portion 533 is a portion that abuts against the lower abutment portion 643 (see Figures 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is formed on the side opposite (the tip side) the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 whose drive shaft is connected to the pinion gear 542. The drive gear 541 meshes with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by driving the drive gear 541 to rotate via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid and displaced via the rack gear 523 along the extension direction of the connecting hole 511a.

Next, the operation of the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 22 and 23. Figures 22 and 23 are front and rear views of the upper combined unit 500, and illustrate the transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in Figures 22(a) and 23(a), when the upper displacement member 530 is in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are located on one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b (right side in Figure 23), and the upper displacement member 530 is positioned in a horizontal position and hidden on the back side of the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from this state, the rack member 520 slides and displaces the connecting shaft 531 horizontally along the connecting hole 511a, and the guide pin 532 is guided along the guide hole 511b, so that the upper displacement member 530 is displaced horizontally while being tilted obliquely (while being rotated around the connecting shaft 531) as shown in Figures 22(b) and 23(b). In other words, the tip side of the upper displacement member 530 (upper abutment portion 533) is lowered while tracing a curved trajectory.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further tilted obliquely (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, and assumes a vertical position with its tip side (upper abutment portion 533) facing downward, as shown in Figures 22(c) and 23(c). In other words, it is positioned in the extended position (first position).

Next, the lower combination unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 24 to 29.

Figure 24 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600. Figure 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combined unit 600, and Figure 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combined unit 600. Note that Figure 23 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the retracted position.

As shown in Figures 24 to 26, the lower combined unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, a drive arm 630 whose base end is rotatably held by the drive arm holding member 620, a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 that connects the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, a biasing spring 660 for applying a biasing force to the drive arm 630, and a drive mechanism that applies a drive force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body that is roughly L-shaped when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding base 611 that protrudes from the front at the lower end of the roughly L-shape, and a connecting shaft 612 that protrudes from the front at the upper end of the roughly L-shape. The protruding base 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position that protrudes from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front), and protrudes along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610.

The drive arm holding member 620 comprises a rear side holding member 621 disposed on the protruding base 611 of the base member 610, and a front side holding member 622 disposed (covering) on the front side of the rear side holding member 621, and the drive arm 630 and transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the rear side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

The rear side of the rear side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding base 611 of the base member 610, so that a predetermined space can be formed between the rear side of the drive arm holding member 620 (rear side holding member 621) and the front side of the base member 610 by the protruding height of the protruding base 611. In this embodiment, such a space is formed so that the lower displacement member 640 arranged in the retracted position can be accommodated, so that the external shape of the lower combined unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

The drive arm 630 is formed as an elongated member having a shaft support hole 631 that is rotatably supported on the drive arm holding member 620, a gear part 632 having multiple teeth cut along the outer circumferential surface of a cylindrical part that is concentric with the shaft support hole 631, and a connecting hole 633 formed at the end opposite the gear part 632, with the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 spaced a predetermined distance apart.

The lower displacement member 640 has a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 that protrude from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650, and is displaced relative to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

The lower displacement member 640 has a lower abutment portion 643 formed on its side. The lower abutment portion 643 is a portion that abuts against the upper abutment portion 533 (see Figures 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is formed on the side away from the imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 in the projection direction (right side in Figure 24). In this embodiment, the lower abutment portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented approximately perpendicular to the imaginary line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 has connecting holes 651, 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610 are rotatably connected to these connecting holes 651, 652. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced relative to the base member 610, the displacement trajectory at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion of the lower displacement member 640 can be defined as an arc shape centered on the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610.

The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and one leg extending from the winding portion engages with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg engages with the drive arm 630, biasing the drive arm 630 in a rotational direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27(a)), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the biasing spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force biases the drive arm 630 in a rotational direction (right rotation in FIG. 27(a)) that displaces the displacement member 640 from the retracted position to the extended position. This assisted the driving force of the drive motor 672, allowing the lower displacement member 640 to smoothly perform its initial movement in the extended position.

The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a-671c disposed inside the drive arm holding member 620, and a drive motor 672 whose drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 671a and disposed in front of the drive arm holding member 620 (front holding member 622). The transmission gears 671a-671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the transmission gear 671a at the front and the transmission gear 671c at the rear.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotated, the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, causing the trailing transmission gear 671c to rotate. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, causing the drive arm 630 to rotate.

Next, the operation of the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to Figure 27. Figure 27 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600, and illustrates the transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the lower displacement member 640 is in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is in a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the "retracted rotational position") where it is rotated maximally counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left rotation direction in FIG. 27(a)), and is in a tilted position that is inclined downward from the base end side (center of rotation, i.e., the shaft support hole 631) to the tip end side (connection hole 633). The connection arm 650 is in a vertical position where the direction connecting the connection holes 651, 652 is approximately parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is in a position where its horizontal position is the leftmost position (the position furthest horizontally from the extension position, the left side in FIG. 27(a)) and its vertical position is the lowest position (the position furthest vertically from the extension position, the lower side in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from this state, the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, and as shown in FIG. 27(b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27(b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced rightward (right side in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 27(b), the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, causing the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 to be displaced further upward, and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 to be displaced further to the right. As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is positioned in the extended position as shown in FIG. 27(c).

In addition, in the extended position, the drive arm 630 is in a rotation position (hereinafter referred to as the "extended rotation position") where it has been rotated maximally in a clockwise direction (rightward rotation direction in FIG. 27(c)) when viewed from the front. In this rotation position, the drive arm 630 is positioned such that its tip end (connection hole 633) exceeds the vertical line passing through the base end (center of rotation, i.e., shaft support hole 631). Also, the connection arm 650 is in a tilted position with the connection hole 651 raised to the uppermost position. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is positioned in a position where its horizontal position is at the farthest right (the position furthest horizontally from the retracted position, right side in FIG. 27(c)), and is positioned in a position where its vertical position is slightly lower than the uppermost position (the position furthest vertically from the retracted position, upper side in FIG. 27(a)).

Now, the displacement speed of the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to Figures 28 and 29. Figure 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 in the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extended rotation position. Also, Figures 29(a) to 29(d) are partially enlarged schematic front views of the drive arm 630 when rotated from the retracted rotation position to the extended rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 rotates between the retracted rotation position and the extended rotation position. In the following, the rotation position at which the drive arm 630 is rotated from the retracted rotation position by an angle θ1 and assumes a horizontal position (a virtual line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is referred to as the "horizontal rotation position", and the rotation position at which the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position by an angle θ2 and assumes an upright position (a virtual line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as the "vertical rotation position". The extended rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29(a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), FIG. 29(b) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position, FIG. 29(c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), FIG. 29(d) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29(e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position (range of angle θ3).

The drive state (power supply) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and therefore the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is constant. In this case, the transition period from when the drive arm 630 is stopped to when it reaches a constant rotation speed through rotation is sufficiently small, and it can be assumed that there is no transient response.

As shown in Figures 28, 29(a) and 29(b), in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (within the range of angle θ1), the drive arm 630 is in an inclined position that positions the connecting hole 633 below the shaft support hole 631, and as it rotates from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position, it displaces the connecting hole 633 upward, so that the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 (the tangential velocity in the arc-shaped displacement trajectory of the connecting hole 633) gradually increases in the upward velocity component (velocity Vv) and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in this section (within the range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and its upward velocity gradually increases.

As shown in Figures 28 and 29(b) to 29(d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (within the range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 is in an inclined position that positions the connecting hole 633 above the shaft support hole 631, and as it rotates from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, it displaces the connecting hole 633 further upward, so that the upward velocity component (velocity Vv) of the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 gradually decreases and is set to 0 at the vertical rotation position. That is, in this section (within the range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward and its upward velocity gradually decreases.

As shown in Figures 28, 29(d) and 29(e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the extended rotation position (within the range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 is in an inclined position that positions the connecting hole 633 above the shaft support hole 631, and as the drive arm 630 rotates from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, it displaces the connecting hole 633 downward, so that the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in this section (within the range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced near the retracted position, and as described below, when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines with) the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position, the occurrence of an impact can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from bouncing off each other, and the postures of both displacement members 530, 640 can be stabilized.

Here, as shown in Figures 28 and 29(a) to 29(d), in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is such that the velocity component Vh toward the left gradually increases, while in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is such that the velocity component Vh toward the right gradually increases.

As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the left near the connecting hole 633 in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (within the range of angle θ1), while the displacement direction is reversed at the horizontal rotation position, and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (towards the retracted position) in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (within the range of angle θ2).

That is, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced horizontally to the left, stopped at the extreme left (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), and then the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced horizontally to the right in a gradually accelerating state. As a result, the lower displacement member 640 appears to be bending and stretching in the horizontal direction, and a performance can be created that gives a sense of dynamism to the movement of the lower displacement member 640.

In particular, according to this embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (angle θ1 range), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased, while in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle θ2 range), the vertical velocity component Vv is decreased, thereby emphasizing the horizontal bending and stretching movement described above, and as a result, the player is impressed with the dynamism of the lower displacement member 640.

On the other hand, as described above, in a configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0 in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (within the range of angle θ2) in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact (combines) with the upper displacement member 530, there is a risk that the dramatic effect associated with the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. In contrast, since the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased in this section (within the range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 can be visualized by displacing it in the horizontal direction (to the right) instead of upward, and as a result, the dramatic effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 is connected to the connecting arm 650 at a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) that is spaced upward from the portion (driving arm connecting shaft 641) to which the driving arm 630 is connected, so that the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as the connecting arm 650 rotates around the connecting hole 652 as the center of rotation. Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 640 is to bend and stretch in the horizontal direction, the bending and stretching motion can be made larger by the horizontal displacement to the right associated with the rotation of the connecting arm 650, so that the sense of dynamism of the lower displacement member 640 can be made greater. In addition, when the lower displacement member 640 is to be performed by displacing it in the horizontal direction (to the right) instead of displacing it in the upward direction, the horizontal (right) displacement can be made larger to make it easier to ensure the performance effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, the contact (combination) operation of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 at the extended positions will be described.

Figure 30 is a front view of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, illustrating the transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in Figures 30(a) to 30(c), the upper displacement member 530 is lowered from a retracted position where it is hidden behind the back side of the base member 510 while its tip end (upper abutment portion 533) traces a curved path as the drive motor 543 is driven, and is positioned at the extended position in a vertical position with its tip end (upper abutment portion 533) facing downward. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from a retracted position where its horizontal position is the leftmost position and its vertical position is the lowest position, and is positioned at the extended position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, which are arranged in the extended position, are combined with their upper abutment portion 533 and lower abutment portion 643 abutting each other. This allows the two to be integrated to form a specified character. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's legs. This forms a leaping horse character in the retracted position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the rising lower displacement member 640 come into contact in the retracted position, the impact generated by the contact causes them to bounce away from each other, making their posture (i.e., the shape of the character) unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 is slowed down to reduce the impact of the contact, it takes longer and longer for the two displacement members 530, 640 to be integrated to form a single character, which inhibits the effect of the presentation.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 directed upward (i.e., toward the upper displacement member 530) is reduced as the lower displacement member 640 approaches the extended position, thereby suppressing the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts against the upper displacement member 530. This prevents the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from bouncing away from each other, and stabilizes the postures of both displacement members 530, 640.

In addition, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually reduced in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (the range of angle θ2), so that the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 can be secured overall. This shortens the time it takes for the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to be integrated to form a single character, preventing the character from becoming drawn out. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the tip (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640, and when the drive arm 630 rotates to lift the lower displacement member 640, the connection part (connecting hole 633) is made to trace an arc-shaped trajectory, gradually reducing the upward velocity component Vv. This reduction in the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 can be achieved while keeping the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. In other words, there is no need to perform complex control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive motor 672 depending on the position of the lower displacement member 640. This simplifies the control of the drive motor 672, reducing control costs and improving reliability.

Here, in this embodiment, the extended rotation position of the drive arm 630 (i.e., the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 abuts against the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position (see FIG. 28). Therefore, the velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 toward the upper side (i.e., the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the extended position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the extended rotation position (range of angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 can be set to a component in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530).

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 come into contact in the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be moved downward (retracted) from the upper displacement member 530, so that the occurrence of impact can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, the two displacement members 530, 640 can be prevented from bouncing away from each other, and their postures can be stabilized.

In addition, by configuring the lower displacement member 640 to be positioned in the extended position with the velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 directed upward (i.e., toward the upper displacement member 530) being a negative value, even if a positional shift occurs at the contact (merge) position due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, or control variations in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, making it easier to contact the upper displacement member 530 within a range in which impact can be suppressed.

Next, the protrusion unit 700 will be described with reference to Figures 31 to 42. Figure 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit 700, and Figure 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit 700. Figure 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the lifting base 720, illustrating the transition state when the lifting base 720 is raised and lowered relative to the base member 710.

The protrusion unit 700 mainly comprises a base member 710, a lifting base 720 arranged so as to be liftable and lowerable on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 arranged so as to be rotatable on the lifting base 720, a drive mechanism for lifting and lowering the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710, and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720.

First, referring to Figures 31 to 33, we will explain the structure for raising and lowering the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710.

As shown in Figures 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 that opens in the approximate center of the width direction as a circular hole when viewed from the front, a support shaft 712 that protrudes from the front, and two support shafts 713 and 714 that protrude from the back. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. In addition, the shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 712 on the front, and the transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the support shafts 713 and 714 on the back.

The lifting base 720 comprises a rear base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the rear base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end sides of the rear base 721 and the front base (see Figures 34 and 35). The lifting base 720 has the rear base 721 and the front base 722 opposed to each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, which is the thickness dimension of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is rotatably housed (disposed) between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722.

The rear base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via a slide rail SL at one side in the width direction. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism and is arranged in a vertical position with its extension direction aligned with the vertical direction. The slide rail SL comprises a base end rail arranged on the front side of the base member 710, a tip rail arranged on the back side of the lifting base 720 (rear base 721), and an intermediate rail interposed between the base end rail and the tip rail and allowing the base end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Thus, by extending and retracting the slide rail SL, the lifting base 720 can be raised and lowered vertically relative to the base member 710.

The rear base 721 of the lifting base 720 is formed with a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotating shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. A sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via a collar C. As described below, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 slides along the sliding groove 721a, thereby lifting and lowering the lifting base 720 (rear base 721).

The connecting arm 719 includes a shaft support hole 719a that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, a sliding pin 719b that protrudes from the front at the end opposite the shaft support hole 719a and is slidably inserted into a sliding groove 721a of the lift base 720 (rear base 721), and a driven groove 719c that extends linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. The driving pin 771b of the driving arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719c via a collar C. As described below, when the driving arm 771 is rotationally driven, the connecting arm 719 rotates around the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 whose rotating shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, transmission gears 772a to 772d whose rear transmission gear 772d is connected to the rotating shaft 771a of the drive arm 771, and a drive motor 773 whose drive shaft is connected to the leading transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d and which is disposed in front of the base member 710.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771, and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the transmission gear 772a at the front and the transmission gear 772d at the rear.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotated in the forward direction from a state in which the lift base 720 is disposed at the lowest position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21(a)), the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 772a to the trailing transmission gear 772d, causing the trailing transmission gear 772d to rotate in one direction. This causes the drive arm 771 connected to the trailing transmission gear 772d to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) around the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 rotates in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) around the shaft support hole 719a, causing the lift base 720 to rise to the top (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the lift base 720 is positioned at the top (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)), the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 772a to the trailing transmission gear 772d, causing the trailing transmission gear 772d to rotate in the other direction. This causes the drive arm 771 connected to the trailing transmission gear 772d to rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) around the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 rotates in the tilted direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) around the shaft support hole 719a, and the lift base 720 is lowered to the bottom (retracted position) (see FIG. 21(a)).

Next, the structure for rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 36.

Figure 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the lift base 720 and the rotating member 730, and Figure 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lift base 720 and the rotating member 730. Figure 36 is a front view of the lift base 720 and the rotating member 730, illustrating the transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated relative to the lift base 720.

As shown in Figures 34 to 36, the lifting base 720 includes a rear base 721, a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed between the lower ends of the rear base 721 and the front base 722. As described above, the rotating shaft 731a is supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the rear base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably housed (disposed) between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 has a curved rack gear 731b arranged on its back surface. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear engraved along the circumferential surface with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and is meshed with the transmission gear 781a. Therefore, as described below, by rotating the transmission gear 781a, the rotating member 730 is rotated relative to the lifting base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the opposing rear base 721 and intermediate base 723 of the lifting base 720, and a drive motor 782 disposed in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 781b.

Here, when the transmission gear 781a is engaged with the circumferential center of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 is positioned in a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the "central rotational position") in which the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 (the direction of protrusion or retraction when protruding or retracting) is vertical (see FIG. 36(b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is driven to rotate in the forward direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36(b)) around the rotating shaft 731a as the center of rotation. As a result, the rotating member 730 is positioned in a position where the direction of the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (to the right in FIG. 36(c)) (see FIG. 36(c)).

When the drive motor 782 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction from this state (see FIG. 36(c)), and the transmission gears 781a and 782b rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 rotates in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36(c)) around the rotating shaft 731a. As a result, after passing through the central rotation position, the rotating member 730 is positioned in a position in which the direction of the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36(a)) (see FIG. 36(a)).

Next, the structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the oscillating member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 42.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 39. Figure 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and Figure 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Figure 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, illustrating the transition state when the protruding member 735 appears and disappears from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 swings.

As shown in Figures 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swinging member 732 swingably arranged on the front side of the rear base 731, an interposed member 733 interposed between the swinging member 732 and the rear base 731, a front base 734 arranged on the front side of the rear base 731, a protruding member 735 slidably arranged on the rear side of the front base 734, and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 relative to the front base 734 and the rear base 731.

The rear base 731 is formed in a generally circular container shape with an open front, with a portion of the outer periphery wall (the outer periphery wall located at the top) missing, and a portion of the bottom wall protruding upward from the portion where the outer periphery wall is missing. On the rear surface of the rear base 731, as described above, there are arranged a rotating shaft 731a supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the lifting base 720, and a curved rack gear 731b meshed with a transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35).

In addition, the rear base 731 is formed with a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotating shaft 732a of the oscillating member 732, a pair of guide holes 731d through which the tip of the acted shaft 732b of the oscillating member 732 is slidably inserted, and a slide hole 731e through which the slide pin 733b of the interposed member 733 is slidably inserted.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening with a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-like opening curved in an arc around the axis of the shaft support hole 731c, with one end side and the other end side being set at different positions in the up-down direction. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the acted shaft 732d of the oscillating member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the oscillating member 732 can be oscillated (rotated) so that its tip side moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-like opening that extends linearly, with the axis of the rotation shaft 731a positioned on the extension line of the extension direction, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 described later. Note that each pair of shaft support holes 731c and guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extension direction of the slide hole 731e.

The oscillating member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and a driven shaft 732b formed as cylindrical shafts, and the pair of rotating shafts 732a and driven shafts 732b are arranged with their base ends facing each other. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in a shaft support hole 731c in the back base 731, and the driven shaft 732b is slidably inserted through the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 and the guide hole 731d in the back base 731.

A collar C is fastened to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, the flange of the collar C prevents the rotating shaft 732a from slipping out, and the body of the collar C is slidably interposed between the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. Similarly, a collar C is fastened to the tip of the acted shaft 732d, the flange of the collar C prevents the acted shaft 732d from slipping out, and the body of the collar C is slidably interposed between the acted shaft 732d and the guide hole 731d and the actuating hole 733a.

The interposed member 733 is a plate-like portion interposed between the rear base 731 and the oscillating member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the elevation (sliding displacement in the up-down direction) of the interposed member 733 to the acted-up shaft 732b of the oscillating member 732, and the pair are arranged line-symmetrically in a V-shape when viewed from the front.

As described below, when the interposed member 733 rises (slides upward), the inner circumferential surface of the action hole 733a pushes the actuated shaft 732b upward, causing the oscillating member 732 to oscillate (rotate) in a direction that lifts its tip end, while when the interposed member 733 descends (slides downward), the inner circumferential surface of the action hole 733a pushes the actuated shaft 732b downward, causing the oscillating member 732 to oscillate (rotate) in a direction that swings its tip end down.

The slide pin 733b is a cylindrical part that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the rear base 731, and multiple pins (two in this embodiment) protrude from the rear surface of the interposed member 733 and are arranged on the symmetrical line of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined distance between them. Therefore, the interposed member 733 is raised and lowered along the extension direction of the slide hole 731e of the rear base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending in the horizontal direction (a direction perpendicular to the direction of the sliding displacement of the interposed member 733) and protruding from the front of the interposed member 733. The bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c abuts against the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 in the drive mechanism described below.

Therefore, when the driver 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the interposed member 733 is raised and lowered (slid upward or downward) according to the change (increase or decrease) in the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (the distance from the center of rotation of the driver 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). That is, when the cam diameter increases with the rotation of the driver 761, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, whereas when the cam diameter decreases, the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight.

Between the rear base 731 and the interposed member 733, a biasing spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed in an elastically stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 791 acts as a biasing force in a direction to lower (slide downward) the interposed member 733. That is, the lowering (sliding downward) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the weight of the interposed member 733 itself). This allows the swinging member 732 to swing (rotate) quickly in the tilting direction (the direction to lower the tip), as described below.

The front base 734 is a plate-like body that is circular when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the rear base 731. The front base 734 is formed with a slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-like opening that extends linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the rear base 731.

The protruding member 735 is a long plate-like body arranged on the back side of the front base 734 so as to be slidably displaced, and includes a slide pin 735a and a slide hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a cylindrical part slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and multiple pins (two in this embodiment) protrude from the front of the protruding member 735 and are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735 at a predetermined interval. Thus, the protruding member 735 is raised and lowered along the extension direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A retaining plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming out.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-like opening formed at one longitudinal end (base end) of the protruding member 735, through which a sliding pin 761c of a driver 761 in a drive mechanism described below is slidably inserted. Therefore, when the driver 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c slides along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed upward or downward by the sliding pin 761c, causing the protruding member 735 to rise and fall (slide upward or downward) along the sliding hole 734a.

Between the front base 734 and the protruding member 735, a metal torsion spring 792 is disposed in an elastically twisted state, and the elastic recovery force of the spring 792 acts as a force in the direction of lowering the protruding member 735 (sliding downward).

The drive mechanism for displacing (sliding and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 includes a driver 761 rotatably arranged on the front side of the rear base 731, transmission gears 762a-762e, the rear transmission gear 762d of which is connected to the driven gear 761a of the driver 761, and a drive motor 763, the drive shaft of which is connected to the front transmission gear 762a of the transmission gears 762a-762e and which is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 731.

Cam portion 761b of driver 761 is a portion formed as a disk cam with a curved surface formed on the outer circumferential surface corresponding to the rotational position of driver 761, and as described above, the outer circumferential surface (cam surface) is caused to slide against the bottom surface of sliding wall 733c of interposed member 733 to drive (slide and displace) interposed member 733. In addition, sliding pin 761c of driver 761 is formed at a position eccentric to the rotation center of driver 761, and as described above, acts on the inner circumferential surface of sliding hole 735b of protruding member 735 to drive (slide and displace) protruding member 735.

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the drive body 761, and are connected (meshed) in series to form a gear train with the transmission gear 762a at the front and the transmission gear 762e at the rear.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is driven to rotate in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(a), the rotational drive force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the driving body 761, whose driven gear 761a is meshed with the trailing transmission gear 762e, is rotated in one direction.

When the driver 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight. As a result, the acted shaft 732b of the oscillating member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 is also able to descend, and the oscillating member 732 is oscillated (rotated) by its own weight in a direction that displaces the tip side downward (see Figures 39(b) and 39(c)).

When the driver 761 is rotated in one direction, the sliding pin 761c is raised in the vertical direction. This causes the sliding pin 761c to push up the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, causing the protruding member 735 to rise (slide upward) (see Figures 39(b) and 39(c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the driver 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the intermediate member 733 is raised, so that the actuated shaft 732b of the oscillating member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733, and the oscillating member 732 is oscillated (rotated) in a direction that displaces the tip side upward.

When the driver 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding pin 761c presses down the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (slid downward).

Next, the details of the structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the oscillating member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to Figures 40 to 42.

Figure 40(a) is a front view of the driver 761 when placed in the first rotation position, and Figure 40(b) is a front view of the driver 761 when placed in the second rotation position. In Figures 40(a) and 40(b), the sliding wall 733c of the interposed member 733 and the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 when the driver 761 is placed in the first rotation position or the second rotation position are diagrammatically illustrated by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in Figures 40(a) and 40(b), the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 is configured so that the cam diameter (radius R1) at the cam surface (position P1) that abuts against the sliding wall 733c when the driver 761 is positioned in the first rotation position is set to a maximum diameter, and the cam diameter (radius R2) at the cam surface (position P2) that abuts against the sliding wall 733c when the driver 761 is positioned in the second rotation position is set to a minimum diameter, and the cam diameter continuously decreases from position P1 to position P2.

As described above, the bottom surface (the lower surface in Figs. 40(a) and 40(b)) of the sliding wall 733c is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the interposed member 733, the left-right direction in Figs. 40(a) and 40(b)). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (i.e., the interposed member 733) is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, and is continuously raised from the bottom to the top when the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

The sliding hole 735b is formed from a curved portion 735b1 that extends from one end side of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40(a)) to a predetermined range, and a straight portion 735b2 that extends from the end of the curved portion 735b1 to the other end side of the sliding hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40(a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is curved in an arc concentric with the center of rotation of the driver 761 when the driver 761 is placed in the first rotation position. In addition, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is positioned on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the driver 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (i.e., while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), no driving force is transmitted from the driver 761 to the sliding hole 735b (i.e., the protruding member 735). In other words, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b does not change, and therefore the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state at the lowest position.

The rotation position where the driver 761 is rotated a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position (i.e., the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is referred to as the "predetermined rotation position."

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in Figures 40(a) and 40(b)). Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (i.e., the protruding member 735) is continuously raised from the bottom to the top when the driver 761 is rotated toward the second rotation position by the action of the sliding pin 761c, and is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom when the driver 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position.

In this embodiment, when the driver 761 is in the second rotation position (see FIG. 40(b)), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, but is positioned at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end portion connected to the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, enters the straight portion 735b2, slides toward the end of the straight portion 735b2 (the other end side of the sliding hole 735b (left side of FIG. 40(a))), changes direction at the end, and slides along the straight portion 735b2 toward the curved portion 735b1, but is stopped just before entering the curved portion 735b1 (i.e., on the straight portion 735b2). This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required for the drive motor 763, as described below.

Figures 41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, illustrating the transition state when the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced and the oscillating member 732 is oscillated. Note that only a portion of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is illustrated in Figures 41 and 42. Also, Figure 41(a) illustrates a state in which the driver 761 is disposed in a first rotation position, Figure 41(b) illustrates a state in which the driver 761 is disposed in a predetermined rotation position, Figure 42(a) illustrates a state in which the driver 761 is disposed in a rotation position between the predetermined rotation position and the second rotation position, and Figure 42(b) illustrates a state in which the driver 761 is disposed in the second rotation position.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(a) (i.e., when the driver 761 is in the first rotation position), the tip of the oscillating member 732 is positioned at the topmost position, and the protruding member 735 is positioned at the bottommost position. When the driver 761 is rotated from this state to a predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the maximum diameter, radius R1 (see FIG. 40(a)), causing the interposed member 733 to descend under its own weight, and accordingly, the oscillating member 732 is rotated under its own weight in a direction that lowers its tip.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(b), while the driver 761 is rotating from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, so that the driving force from the driver 761 is not transmitted to the protruding member 735, and the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state at the lowest position (i.e., the same position as in FIG. 41(a)).

When the driver 761, which has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41(b)), is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is further reduced (see FIG. 40(a)) as shown in FIG. 42(a), and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. Meanwhile, the protruding member 735 is slid upward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driver 761 rotates.

When the driver 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum diameter, radius R2, as shown in FIG. 42(b) (see FIG. 40(b)), and the intermediate member 733 is lowered to the lowest position under its own weight, and accordingly the oscillating member 732 is rotated further under its own weight and its tip is positioned at the lowest position. Meanwhile, the straight portion 735b2 of the protruding member 735 is pushed up to the highest position by the sliding pin 761c, and is positioned at the highest position.

Conversely to the above-mentioned case, when the driver 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42(b) (i.e., the state in which the driver 761 is disposed in the second rotation position), as shown in FIG. 42(a), the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b gradually increases from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40(b)), and the intermediate member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is rotated in a direction that raises its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid downward by the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b, which presses down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driver 761 rotates.

When the driver 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42(a) to a predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1, so the upward lifting action of the interposed member 733 (sliding wall 733c) continues, and accordingly, the action of the oscillating member 732 rotating in a direction to raise its tip also continues. Meanwhile, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowest position as the straight portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowest position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the driver 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased to the maximum diameter, radius R1 (see FIG. 40(a)), as shown in FIG. 41(a), and the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the top, and the tip of the oscillating member 732 is positioned at the top. On the other hand, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, so that the driving force from the driver 761 is not transmitted to the protruding member 735, and the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state at the lowest position (i.e., the same position as FIG. 41(b)).

As described above, the rotating member 730 allows two members (the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735) to be displaced by one driving motor 763.

In conventional products, when member 2 is displaced by drive motor 1, the driving forces for driving each of the two members are overlapped, which increases the load on the drive motor and reduces its durability. On the other hand, in a configuration in which two members are displaced alternately (one at a time), the load on the drive motor can be reduced, but it is not possible to create a state in which both members are displaced, which impairs the dramatic effect of the displacement.

In contrast, with the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and interposed member 733) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the oscillating member 732 can reduce the load on the drive motor 763 in the section where the tip of the oscillating member 732 is lowered (the section where the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) compared to the load on the drive motor 763 in the section where the tip of the oscillating member 732 is raised (the section where the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the protruding member 735 can make the load on the drive motor 763 in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid downward (the section where the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) smaller than the load on the drive motor 763 in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid upward (the section where the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position).

In other words, with the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means is under a relatively high load, the second transmission means can be under a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means is under a relatively high load, the second transmission means can be under a relatively low load. Therefore, the load on the drive motor 763 can be distributed, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 763 and improving its durability.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 alternately (one at a time), and it is possible to create a state in which the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 are displaced together, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 763 while improving the presentation effect by displacing both members 732, 735.

The first transmission means displaces the oscillating member 732 by the interlocking of the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the protruding member 735 by the interlocking of the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. The displacement amount of the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 per unit displacement amount of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (i.e., per unit rotation of the driving body 761) can be changed according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. In other words, the load on the driving motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even if the driving state (supply power) of the driving motor 763 is maintained constant, the speed of displacement of the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. As a result, the load on the driving motor 763 can be suppressed while enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the section in which the load on the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, the section in which the tip of the oscillating member 732 is lowered (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), and in the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position)) is formed by making the displacement of the oscillating member 732 or the protruding member 735 have a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, that is, by utilizing the displacement due to the weight of the oscillating member 732 or the protruding member 735. Therefore, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b can be prevented from becoming complicated. This can reduce the cost of parts. In addition, by preventing the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated, the speed of the displacement of the oscillating member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be made constant, and the burden on the drive motor 763 can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, in this embodiment, the cam portion 761b of the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c of the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the space for separately arranging the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c is not required, and the rotating member 730 can be made smaller accordingly. Also, compared to the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are separately formed, deviation in the displacement of the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be suppressed, and the accuracy of synchronization between the two members 732, 735 can be improved.

Here, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the protruding member 735 in a stopped state starts to slide upward, the load on the driving motor 763 increases due to the influence of inertia, so the initial speed slows down and the performance effect may be hindered. In contrast, in this embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and the driving force is not transmitted from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c) to the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) in the curved portion 735b1. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the driving motor 763 is reduced, and the rotation of the driving body 761 can be given momentum accordingly, so that the protruding member 735 in a stopped state can start to slide upward smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (i.e., while the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state, and the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction that lowers the tip downward (see Figures 41(a) and 41(b)). Therefore, when the swinging member 732 is swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swinging can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the rotation of the driver 761 can be made stronger, so that the protruding member 735, which is in a stopped state, can smoothly start sliding upward.

In this way, by being able to oscillate the oscillating member 732 even while the protruding member 735 is maintained in a stopped state, it is possible to avoid both the protruding member 735 and the oscillating member 732 being in a stopped state, thereby improving the dramatic effect of the displacement.

As described above, in this embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b, and when the protruding member 735 starts to slide upward, the curved portion 735b1 is used to impart momentum to the rotation of the driver 761, thereby smoothly displacing the protruding member 735 from a stopped state.

In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 has started, the rotational drive of the driver 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, when the driver 761 is placed in the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, but is positioned at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end portion connected to the curved portion 735b1) (see Figures 40(b) and 42(b)). This makes it possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

In other words, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In a structure in which the pin part of the crank member reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmitting section becomes a convex arc toward the rotation center of the crank member after the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section and changes direction at a predetermined position. Therefore, when the pin part passes through the non-transmitting section after changing direction, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but the upward sliding displacement amount of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the driving body 761 increases rapidly, and the load on the driving motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the driving body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved part 735b1, the load on the driving motor 763 can be prevented from becoming excessive.

Next, the lifting unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the lifting/lowering unit 800 will be described with reference to Figures 43 to 45. Figure 43(a) is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 800, Figure 43(b) is a rear view of the lifting/lowering unit 800, and Figure 43(c) is a side view of the lifting/lowering unit 800. Figure 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting/lowering unit 800, and Figure 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting/lowering unit 800.

As shown in Figures 43 to 45, the lifting unit 800 is mainly formed with a base member 810 that is a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, a lifting member 820 that is disposed on the base member 810 so that it can be raised and lowered, a drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the lifting member 820, a transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the drive motor 891, a link member 850 that is journaled at one end on the base member 810 and arranged so that it can rotate around the journal part by the rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and arranged so that it can be slidably displaced by the displacement of the link member 850, and a transmission member 870 that transmits the sliding displacement of the slide member 860 to the lifting member 820.

The base member 810 is formed mainly with sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 formed in the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 43 (b)) and extending in the front-rear direction, and pivot pins 814 to 817 protruding cylindrically on the rear side.

The sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 are holes into which sliding pins 861, 862, and 863 of the sliding member 860 described later are inserted to regulate the sliding direction of the sliding member 860, and are formed as elongated holes that open long in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 43(b)). Therefore, the sliding member 860 can be arranged to slide along the longitudinal direction of each of the sliding holes 811, 812, and 813.

The sliding holes 811, 812, and 813 are formed side by side on the left and right, with the sliding hole 811 in the center and the sliding holes 812 and 813 formed on either side of the sliding hole 811. In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding holes 812 and 813.

The pivot pins 814-816 are protrusions that are inserted through the shafts of the gears 842-844 of the transmission gear 840 (described later) to rotatably support the gears 842-844, and are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the holes that pass through the shafts of the gears 842-844.

The pivot pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 formed through one end of the link member 850 described below and rotatably supports the link member 850, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the lifting member 820. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a rear cover 892 formed of a plate-shaped body on the rear side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted through a through hole 892a formed through the rear cover 892, and is fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

Transmission gear 840 is a gear train formed by connecting gears 841 to 844, and as described above, gears 842 to 844 are rotatably supported by pivot pins 814 to 816 that protrude from the rear side of base member 810. Therefore, when gear 841 rotates, the driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via gears 842 and 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving drive motor 891.

A cylindrical protrusion 844a is formed on the rear side of the gear 844. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850 described later, and is formed to protrude at a distance such that its tip overlaps with the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed from a horizontally elongated rectangular plate. The link member 850 is mainly formed with a circular through hole 851 penetrating one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 penetrating the other end in the shape of an elongated hole in approximately the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, and a connection side sliding groove 853 formed between the through hole 851 and the transmission side sliding groove 854.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole for inserting the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 inside to pivotally support the link member 850 relative to the base member 810, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 so that it cannot fall off, by inserting the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back side and fastening with a screw or the like.

A circular ring portion 852 that protrudes in a circular shape toward the front side (the rear side of the paper in FIG. 43(b)) is formed on the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850. The circular ring portion 852 is a gap forming member that forms a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably houses the transmission gear 840 in the gap, and is set to a protruding dimension that is greater than the thickness width of each of the gears 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840.

In addition, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer periphery of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by winding a wire made of a metal material into a cylindrical spiral, and can exert a circumferential force. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge of the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. This prevents the spiral of the torsion spring SP1 from collapsing when the torsion spring SP1 twists, and prevents the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting in the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can prevent the spiral state from collapsing, and stabilize the biasing direction.

In other words, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space between the base member 810 and the link member 850 in which the transmission gear 840 is disposed, but also serves the role of stabilizing the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a hook-shaped locking portion 855 that protrudes from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end is engaged with a hook-shaped locking portion 818 that protrudes from the rear side of the base member 810. Thus, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and apply a biasing force to the link member 850 in a direction around the axis of the rotation shaft.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the short direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, it can slide inside the connecting side sliding groove 853 and be displaced. This allows the link member 850 to rotate and displace around the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted and which displaces the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and its width dimension in the short side direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 that has been inserted through the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854.

In addition, by fastening collar C3 to the tip of pivot pin 816 from the rear side of link member 850 with a screw or the like, link member 850 and slide member 860 can be connected with base member 810 in between. Therefore, the rotational displacement of link member 850 arranged on the rear side of base member 810 can cause sliding displacement of slide member 860 arranged on the front side of base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed as a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and its length in the direction of gravity is set to be smaller than the length in the direction of gravity of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge of the base member 810. This makes it possible to reduce the overall outer shape of the lifting unit 800 when viewed from the front.

The slide member 860 is mainly comprised of a number of sliding pins 861-863 that protrude cylindrically from the rear side, a number of slide-side sliding holes 864-866 that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and two cylindrical protrusions 867 that protrude from the front side.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pins 862 and 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 of the base member 810, and the collars C3 are fastened to the tips of the sliding pins 862 and 863 from the back side of the base member 810 by screws or the like.

The sliding pins 862 and 863 of the sliding member 860 are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 formed in the base member 810 as linear long holes, so that the sliding member 860 is not rotatable relative to the base member 810 and is connected to be slidable in the long hole direction of the sliding holes 812 and 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotated about the through hole 851, so that the sliding member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the sliding holes 812 and 813).

The multiple slide-side sliding holes 864-866 are holes into which the protrusions 871a-871c of the second slide member 871, which will be described later, are inserted, and are formed as elongated holes that are long in the direction of gravity, with the width dimension in the short direction being smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a-871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and is formed mainly with a pair of racks 872 that extend in the direction of gravity and are disposed symmetrically, pinion gears 873 that mesh with the rack gears of the racks 872, and a second slide member 871 that is disposed between the pinion gears 873.

The racks 872 are formed into a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and are fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. A pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically about the center of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposing side of each rack 872, and is engaged with a pinion gear 873, which will be described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid and displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, since the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a, it rotates in conjunction with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly composed of an erect portion 871e that is bent toward the front side at the lower end, a rack gear 871d engraved on both the left and right side surfaces, and multiple protrusions 871a to 871c that protrude cylindrically from the rear side.

The erected portion 871e is a wall portion to which the lifting member 820 (described later) is fastened to its erected tip surface, and a connecting hole 871e1 is formed through the tip portion for inserting a screw therethrough to fasten to the lifting member 820. Thus, the second slide member 871 and the lifting member 820 can be fastened together.

The erected portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the lifting member 820 and the base member 810 and disposing the decorative member 830 (described later) in the gap, and is set to an erection dimension larger than the thickness of the decorative member 830 in the front-to-rear direction. This allows the decorative member 830 to be disposed between the lifting member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. In other words, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the second slide member 871 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the multiple protrusions 871a-871c are inserted into the slide side sliding holes 864-866 of the slide member 860, and collars C4 are inserted into the inside of the slide side sliding holes 864-866 from the rear side of the slide member 860 to the tip sides of the protrusions 871a-871c and fastened with screws or the like. This allows the second slide member 871 to rotate relative to the slide member 860 and to be held slidable along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide side sliding holes 864-866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, as described above, the pinion gear 873 rotates, and the second slide member 871 meshing with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides and displaces in the direction of gravity relative to the slide member 860, so that it can be displaced at a faster displacement speed relative to the base member 810 than the displacement speed of the slide member 860, and the displacement distance can be made larger than that of the slide member 860. Therefore, the size of the lifting unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the lifting member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be prevented from becoming smaller.

As described above, the lifting member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down in accordance with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The lifting member 820 has a protrusion 821 that protrudes from the rear side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion that is connected to the erected portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position opposite the connecting hole 871e1 of the erected portion. In addition, a fastening hole 821a for screw fastening is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened in the fastening hole 821a. This allows the second slide member 871 and the lifting member 820 to be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are disposed on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the transmission member 870 from being displaced toward the front side, thereby preventing the transmission member 870 from being displaced toward the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape that resembles the title or logo of the gaming machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. This allows light to be emitted from the title or logo toward the player, providing an interest to the player.

Next, the movable mode of the lifting unit 800 will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 52.

Figure 46 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, Figure 47 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and Figure 48 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. Figure 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, Figure 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and Figure 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. Figure 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, Figure 52 (b) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the second state, and Figure 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the lifting unit 800 is a state in which the lifting member 820 is located at the top and is disposed in front of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, the third state is a state in which the lifting member 820 is located at the bottom and is disposed below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the lifting member 820 is disposed in an intermediate position between the first and third states.

In addition, in FIG. 51, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 at the ends farthest from the rotation axis of the rotating members 435, 455 is shown by a two-dot chain line and is indicated by the imaginary line KS3.

As shown in Figures 46, 49, and 52(a), when the lifting unit 800 is in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed) is positioned higher in the direction of gravity than the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed). In this case, the transmission member 870 has a pinion gear 873 meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is positioned upward. Therefore, the lifting member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also positioned upward.

In the first state, an imaginary line KS1 connecting the axis of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840, which transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850, and the protrusion 844a is perpendicular to an imaginary line KS2 connecting the axis of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 and the midpoint of the short side of the connecting side sliding groove 853 (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the lifting member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, the link member 850 can be prevented from being displaced by the load of the lifting member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, thereby reducing energy consumption.

When power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in Figures 46, 49, and 52(a) and a rotational driving force acts, as described above, each gear 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotates and the driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted into the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and connected. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotated and displaced around the axis of the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, which is connected by inserting the slide pin 861 into the transmission side slide groove 854 of the link member 850, is slidably displaced. This displaces the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870, which is journaled on the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860. Thus, the pinion gear 873 can rotate by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 in accordance with the displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the lifting member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in Figures 47, 50, and 52(b), in the second state, the lifting unit 800 is in a state in which the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. Therefore, the lifting member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810, further than in the first state.

Next, as shown in Figures 48, 51 and 52(c), in the third state, the lifting unit 800 is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similar to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the lifting member 820 can be displaced downward relative to the base member 810 from the second state.

In this case, the lifting member 820 is positioned adjacent to and below the decorative member 830. This allows the player to see the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830. Furthermore, by positioning the lifting member 820 adjacent to and below the decorative member 830, the lifting member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form a single pattern (character). In other words, by displacing the lifting unit 800 from the first state, which is the initial position, to the third state, a pattern (character) combining the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 and the decorative member 830 can be displayed in front of the play area.

Furthermore, in the third state, each of the sliding pins 861-863 of the slide member 860 is positioned at the lower end of each of the sliding holes 811-813 of the base member 810. Therefore, the load of the lifting member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861-863, so that the load of the lifting member 820 can be prevented from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, damage to the gear 844 can be prevented.

Next, the combined state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 61.

First, with reference to Figures 53 and 54, the state in which each movable unit is displaced to the center of the game board 13 will be described. Figure 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. Figure 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 200 taken along line LIV-LIV in Figure 53.

The combined state shown in FIG. 53 is a state in which the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is lifted and lowered relative to the base member 710, the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is displaced downward relative to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing the members (lifting base 720, rotating members 435, 455, and lifting member 820) of each movable unit (protruding unit 700, sliding unit 400, and lifting unit 800) close to each other, the player can visually recognize them as a single pattern (such as the title, logo, or character of the gaming machine 10).

In addition, each movable unit is formed so that each component is shaped to resemble a pattern. For example, the rotating components 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are shaped to resemble an animal's feathers, the lifting base 720 and the rotating component 730 of the protruding unit 700 are shaped like a bow, and the lifting component 820 of the lifting unit 800 is shaped to resemble the title of a game machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the lifting unit 800 can combine the lifting member 820 and the decorative member 830 to form a single pattern (character), so when combined (extended state), the lifting base 720, the rotating members 435, 455, the lifting member 820, and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form a single pattern (character).

In other words, the lifting unit 800 can not only form one display surface by combining the lifting base 820 and the decorative member 830, but can also be combined with other movable units (the protruding unit 700 and the sliding unit 400) arranged on the operating unit 200 to form one display surface. As a result, by varying the displacement state of each movable unit (the lifting unit 800, the protruding unit 700, and the sliding unit 400) arranged on the operating unit 200, multiple display forms can be formed, providing interest to the player.

As shown in Figures 53 and 54, the operating unit 200 in the combined state is positioned so that a portion of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 overlaps with the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 in the front-to-rear direction (left-to-right direction in Figure 54). In other words, the lifting member 820 and each rotating member 435, 455 are disposed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction. The lifting member 820 is disposed in front of each rotating member 435, 455 (left side in Figure 54) (see Figure 54).

In other words, the operating unit 200 is formed with a protruding unit 700, a sliding unit 400, and a lifting unit 800 that are formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position, and the lifting member 820 is disposed at a different position in the front-to-rear direction from the protruding unit 700 and the sliding unit 400. Therefore, a single pattern can be formed by displacing each of the protruding units 700, the sliding unit 400, and the lifting unit 800 of the three movable units, so that a larger pattern (character) can be formed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this case, the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is arranged at a different front-rear position from the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 at the protruding position, so it does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 at the protruding position. That is, when the members come into contact with each other at the protruding position, or when there is a possibility of them coming into contact, it is necessary to set them taking into consideration damage caused by impact at the time of contact, but since the lifting member 820 does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later lifting member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the earlier rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 at the protruding position, and the presentation effect can be enhanced when forming a pattern (character).

In addition, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide members 430, 450 in the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430, 450 are displaced, if the displacement operation continues without stopping at the original stopping position due to a malfunction or malfunction, the rotating members 435, 455 can be prevented from coming into contact with the protruding member 735. As a result, damage to the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435, 455 can be prevented.

In some gaming machines, when multiple movable units (lifting unit 800, sliding unit 400, and protruding unit 700) move and combine in the space at the center of the gaming machine (in front of the third pattern display device 81), they collide with each other on their sides to combine. However, when combining by colliding sides, the collision can easily cause scratches on the colliding surfaces. This poses the problem that the design of the movable units can easily be damaged.

In addition, slowing down the speed of impact could be considered to prevent scratches from being formed on the impact surface, but this would require slowing down the displacement speed of the movable unit, which would slow down the speed of the combining action of the reels, resulting in a problem of losing interest for the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the multiple movable units (lifting unit 800, sliding unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are each arranged at different positions in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the movable units are displaced into the central space of the gaming machine and combined, their sides do not collide with each other. This prevents scratches from being formed on the movable units, and prevents the design of the movable units from being damaged.

Furthermore, when the movable units are displaced into the space in the center of the gaming machine and combined, their sides do not collide with each other, so the speed of displacement during the displacement can be kept constant during the combination. As a result, the speed of the combining action of the reels is prevented from slowing down, preventing the player's interest from being diminished.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the lifting unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are configured as a two-stage rack (the lifting unit 800 has a pinion gear 873 between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871, and the slide unit 400 has a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). This allows for a faster displacement operation than a conventional one-stage rack (configured only as a rack and pinion). By increasing the displacement speed, the combination operation of each operating unit (the lifting unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700) can be made faster. As a result, the time during which the player can see the combination operation can be shortened, which prevents the player's interest from being lost.

Here, if the movable units (lifting unit 800, sliding unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-to-rear direction, the front-to-rear dimension will become bulky and large. If the front-to-rear dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are each made small (thin) in order to suppress such front-to-rear dimensions, it will become difficult to ensure the configuration.

In response to this, the lifting member 820 is provided with a second slide member 871 that is formed by protruding toward the side that is at the same front-to-rear position as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455. This reduces the overall front-to-rear dimension (the sum of the lifting member 820, the rotating member 730, and the rotating members 435, 455) and allows the gaming machine 10 to be made smaller in the front-to-rear direction, while increasing the front-to-rear dimension of the lifting member 820 and ensuring its rigidity.

The lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is disposed at a position protruding from the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction. This allows the space on the rear side of the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 to be increased, and the width of the lifting unit 820 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54) to be reduced. That is, by disposing the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871, which has a smaller width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53), it is possible to reduce the width of the lifting unit 800 in the front-rear direction while suppressing interference between the lifting unit 800 and the slide unit 400 (see FIG. 54). In addition, the second slide member 871 is formed with a small width in the left-right direction, so that it does not intersect with the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455, and therefore collision between the second slide member 871 and the rotating member 871 during displacement can be suppressed (see imaginary line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement modes of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) when displacing to the combined state will be described with reference to Figs. 55 to 58. Figs. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. Figs. 55 to 58 sequentially illustrate the displacement modes of each movable unit when displacing to the combined state, with Fig. 55 being the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In this embodiment, the operations are described as the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation, in that order from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward relative to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protruding unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434, 435 of the sliding unit 400 are slid toward the center of the gaming machine 10, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated by about 45 degrees, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotated downward.

First, as shown in Figures 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the protrusion unit 700 sliding and displacing the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710. This displaces the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 upward. Note that the displacement of the lifting base 720 has been described in detail above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed when the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is in the middle of being displaced relative to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced relative to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455 and the lifting member 720.

As described above, when each sliding member 430, 450 is slid, each rotating member 435, 455 is rotated, so that the rotational angles of each rotating member 435 and 455 are rotated symmetrically around the center position of the game board 13 (the center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 57).

There is a gaming machine that has a first member and a second member that are each formed so that they can be linearly displaced between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position, and by displacing the first member and the second member to their respective combined positions and bringing them close together or into contact, the first member and the second member are associated (integrated) with each other, allowing the player to visually recognize them as a single character.

In this case, in order to enhance the dramatic effect, it is effective to be able to form a larger character when the first and second members are displaced to the extended position. To achieve this, it is necessary to form the first and second members large.

However, if the first and second members are each displaced to the combined (extending) position by linear displacement, there is a risk that they will interfere with each other while being displaced to the combined position if the first and second members are made large. As a result, the displacement of the first and second members cannot be performed simultaneously, and each displacement must be staggered, which increases the time it takes for the character to be formed, making it drawn out and impeding the dramatic effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lift base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is arranged at the combined position by linearly displacing up and down relative to the base member 710, and the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 are arranged at the combined position by rotationally displacing from the retracted position, so that the rotating members 730 and 435, 455 arranged on the lift base 720 can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the combined position. Therefore, the displacement of the lift base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, shortening the time until the character is formed and enhancing the presentation effect.

The displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the lifting base 720, which is displaced linearly, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435, 455 is set to a position adjacent to the end position of the displacement locus of the lifting base 720. In other words, with respect to the linear displacement locus of the lifting base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435, 455 is a rotation locus that has at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the lifting base 720, and the rotation locus is set so that the displacement component in the displacement direction of the lifting base 720 decreases as the rotation locus is displaced to the combined (extending) position.

This allows the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 to be a displacement trajectory that goes around the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 from the outside. Therefore, by rotating and displacing the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 can be a displacement trajectory that avoids the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700, which makes a linear displacement of lifting and lowering. Therefore, even if the displacement timing of the rotating members 435, 455 and the lifting base 720 is shifted, the trajectories of the rotating members 435, 455 do not cross each other, so interference between the members can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed simultaneously, so the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, by making the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 a displacement trajectory that goes around the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 from the outside, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435, 455 even if the external shape of the linearly displacing slide unit 700 in the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the lifting base 720 is enlarged. Therefore, the lifting base 720 can be enlarged.

As described above, the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are disposed on the base members 434, 454 that are capable of sliding displacement. That is, the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, and are displaced to the combined (extending) position. This makes it easier to cause the rotating members 435, 455 to form a curved trajectory. As a result, it is easier to prevent the rotating members 435, 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the combined position.

In other words, the rotating members 435, 455 can rotate in relation to the protruding unit 700 while moving to the combined (extending) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454, so that the rotation can be used as a displacement to avoid interference with the protruding unit 700 rather than as a movement to the combined position, making it easier to suppress interference with each other.

Here, when only the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated and displaced, the position of the rotation axis is fixed. Therefore, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435, 455 is set at the end of the rotating members 435, 455, when the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated, only the end opposite the rotation axis is rotated and displaced, making it difficult to set the displacement distance of the lifting base 720 large. Also, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435, 455 is set at the center of the rotating members 435, 455, when displacing from the retracted position to the extended position, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300, making it difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the rotating members 435, 455 is formed at the center of the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotation axis is connected to the base members 434, 454 that are slidably displaceable, so that the rotating members 435, 455 can perform a combination of linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by adding linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435, 455, it is possible to set a large displacement distance while preventing the rotating members 435, 455 disposed in the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when they are rotationally displaced.

In addition, since the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position can be specified independently of the posture at the combined position. In other words, when the rotating members 435, 455 are displaced between the retracted position and the combined position only by rotation, the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position is specified by the rotation angle from the extended position, but since the rotating members 435, 455 are displaced in a linear manner, the posture at the retracted position can be specified independently of the posture at the combined position. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, in the retracted position (where the base members 434, 454 are positioned outward), the rotating members 435, 455 have their longitudinal direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space in the retracted position. On the other hand, in the combined position (where the base members 434, 454 are displaced to the center), they rotate to be approximately the same as the longitudinal direction of the third pattern display device 81. This increases the degree of freedom of the orientation of the rotating members 435, 455 in the retracted position, and allows them to protrude further from the center of the game board 13 in the combined position.

Furthermore, since the third pattern display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is disposed in the center of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), the space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller as the third pattern display device 81 becomes larger. Therefore, if the rotating members 435, 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontal posture in the combined (extending) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed and the performance effect cannot be fully demonstrated. In other words, since the playing area is formed vertically, while the third pattern display device 81 is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the third pattern display device in the width direction of the playing area are relatively narrow, and it is difficult to secure the arrangement space for the components. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435, 455 from protruding into the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the retracted position, it was necessary to form such a second member small.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotating members 435, 455 are arranged in a horizontal orientation in the combined (extending) position, and in a vertical orientation in the retracted position, so that the arrangement space for the members on one or the other side of the third pattern display device 81 can be effectively utilized, and the rotating members 435, 455 can be made larger accordingly, and as a result, the pattern (character) formed together with the protruding unit 700 in the combined position can be made larger.

In other words, the retraction space into which the rotating members 435, 455 retract is reduced, ensuring space in the center of the gaming machine 10 (the third symbol display device 81), while at the combined position, the amount of protrusion into the center of the gaming machine 10 can be ensured. This allows the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435, 455 and the protruding unit 700 to be enlarged.

As described above, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434, 454, and the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be synchronized with the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454, improving the relative positional accuracy of the rotating members with respect to the protruding unit 700. As a result, it is easier to prevent the rotating members 435, 455 from interfering with the protruding unit 700 during the displacement to the extended position.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a separate driving means for rotating the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating members 435, 455 can be formed larger, and the character formed together with the protruding unit 700 in the combined (extending) position can be made larger. For example, even in an area where it is relatively narrow and difficult to secure space to arrange components, such as one and the other sides of the third pattern display device 81 in the width direction of the play area, the rotating members 435, 455 can be formed large while setting a retracted position for the rotating members 435, 455 in such an area.

The protruding unit 700 also includes a swinging member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swinging member 732 is displaced upward relative to the rotating member 730, so that it can be brought close to and brought into contact with the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped by contact with the swinging member 732. In this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 is displaced upward, so that the rotating members 435, 455 can be reliably contacted with the swinging member 732. A detailed explanation of the contact of the swinging member 732 with the rotating members 435, 455 will be given later.

Next, as shown in Figures 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 in conjunction with its displacement.

Therefore, by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, the tip of the protruding member 735 is displaced toward the rear side of the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800. As a result, the protruding unit 700 and the lifting unit 800 are connected, allowing the player to visually confirm the state in which each movable unit is integrated (combined state), and providing interest through the displacement of the reels.

Furthermore, since the oscillating member 732 can be displaced downward in conjunction with the displacement of the protruding member 735, the gap (space) between the rotating members 435, 455 of each slide member 430, 450 in the slide unit 400 and the oscillating member 732 can be made larger than during the second operation.

This ensures that there is sufficient space for the rotating members 435, 455 (sliding members 430, 450) to be displaced when the rotating members 435, 455 (sliding members 430, 450) are in the combined state. As a result, in the combined state of the operating unit 200, the rotating members 435, 455 (sliding members 430, 450) can be displaced to rotate further, thereby increasing the variety of displacement modes of the operating unit 200 when in the combined state.

In other words, when the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the oscillating member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and performs the role of absorbing the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455. Thereafter, the oscillating member 732 is displaced in a direction approaching the rotating member 730, and the space formed by this displacement can be used as a displacement space for the rotating members 435, 455, and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can enhance the presentation effect.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is shown. For example, when each component of each operating unit (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), lifting member 820) is combined, a shape that resembles a bow and arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435, 455 shaped like a bow, the gap between the above-mentioned oscillating member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455 can be used to operate the rotating members 435, 455 to create a state in which the bow is bent by being pulled by an arrow, or a state in which the bow is released and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow, the lifting base 720 (rotating member 730) is part of the rear end of the arrow (opposite the arrowhead), the lifting member 820 is the center of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is part of the tip side of the arrow (arrowhead side).

Next, referring to Figure 59, a case where the stopping position of the left sliding member 430 of the sliding unit 400 is shifted in the excess direction will be described. Figures 59(a) and (b) are front views of the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 and the lifting base 720 and rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that Figures 59(a) and (b) show the transition state when the stopping position of the left sliding member 430 is shifted in the excess direction and the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732.

In addition, in Figures 59(a) and (b), only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 is described. When the right rotating member 455 collides with the swinging member 732, this is considered to be the same as when the left rotating member 435 is disposed symmetrically about the center position in the left-right direction of the operating unit 200 (left-right direction in Figure 6), and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this case, due to a control failure, rattling of each member, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor, each slide member 430, 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state may not stop at the intended stop position in the combined state as shown in FIG. 59(a), and the side of each rotating member 435, 455 may collide with the oscillating member 732 of the protruding unit 700. As a result, there is a risk that the oscillating member 732 and each rotating member 435, 455 may collide, causing damage to the parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the oscillating member 732 is disposed is disposed rotatably relative to the lifting base 720, so that, as shown in FIG. 59(b), by rotating the rotating member 730 relative to the lifting base 720, it is possible to reduce the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the oscillating member 732. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the oscillating member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

In other words, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 relative to the lifting base 720, not only can the variation in the displacement mode of the protruding unit 700 be increased, but also damage caused by collision between the left rotating member 435 and the oscillating member 732 can be prevented.

Also, as shown in FIG. 59(b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the oscillating member 732 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced relative to the lifting base 720, the oscillating member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right sliding member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to mitigate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, the driving force that causes the rotating member 435 to rotate further can be applied to the rotating member 455 of the right sliding member 450. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the rotating member 730 from being rotated further.

That is, the oscillating member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed in two sets, one on the left and one on the right, and are formed so that when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) abuts against the oscillating member 732 in one set, the oscillating member 732 is displaced toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set upon such abutment. Therefore, for example, when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set is displaced beyond the reference position and abuts against the oscillating member 732, the oscillating member 732 can be displaced toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set upon such abutment. Therefore, in the other set, the oscillating member 732 abuts against the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the impact caused by the abutment of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) against the oscillating member 732 in one set is not received only by the oscillating member 732 (rotating member 730), but can also be received by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. This allows the kinetic energy to be dispersed, making it easier to stop the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set and suppressing damage to each member.

In this case, the oscillating member 732 collides with the side of the part above the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 07(b)). When the oscillating member 732 comes into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), a driving force can be applied in the opposite direction to the rotation moment acting around the rotation axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435). This makes it possible to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 730 by utilizing the rotation moment of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435). Therefore, there is no need to supply power to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 730, and the driving energy can be reduced.

Next, referring to Figure 60, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430, 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excess direction will be described. Figures 60(a) and (b) are front views of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the lifting base 720 and rotating member 730 of the protrusion unit 700. Figures 60(a) and (b) show the transition state when the stop positions of the slide members 430, 450 are shifted and the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

If the stop positions of the slide members 430, 450 were to shift excessively, the oscillating member 732 would collide with the rotating members 435, 455, which could result in damage to the oscillating member 732 or the rotating members 435, 455.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the third operation described above is performed at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455), thereby displacing the oscillating member 732 downward. Therefore, when each of the rotating members 435, 455 collides with the oscillating member 732, the oscillating member 732 can be displaced downward to mitigate the impact of the collision. As a result, damage to the oscillating member 732 or each of the rotating members 435, 455 can be suppressed.

In this case, the impact generated when the oscillating member 732 and each of the rotating members 435, 455 collide can be used as a driving force to protrude the protruding member 735, thereby reducing the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735. That is, the impact generated when the oscillating member 732 and each of the rotating members 435, 455 collide can be transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 via the sliding wall 733c, and can be applied in the direction in which the driver 761 (see FIG. 40) rotates. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

The third operation may be performed a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430, 450 are shifted in the excessive direction and the oscillating member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455 collide with each other, the rotational resistance of the drive motor 763 that displaces the oscillating member 732 and the protruding member 735 makes it easier to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 while displacing the oscillating member 732.

Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435, 455 can be applied in the rotational direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy required to drive the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, the displacement of each rotating member 435, 455 in the third operation will be described with reference to Figure 61. Figures 61(a) and (b) are front views of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the lifting base 720 and rotating member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 in the third operation. Note that Figure 61(b) illustrates the state in which each rotating member 435, 455 is displaced in the third operation.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the gap between each of the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation is increased by the fact that the oscillating member 732 of the rotating member 730 is displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61(a)) in conjunction with the displacement of the protruding member 735 when the third operation is performed. Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 in the third operation can be displaced further than in the second operation.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 61(b), by further sliding and displacing the base members 434, 454 of the left and right sliding members 430, 450 to the center of the gaming machine 10, the rotating members 435, 455 can be rotated and displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. This creates a greater sense of unity in the combined (extending) state of the lifting member 820 and each rotating member 435, 455 as viewed by the player.

Next, the second combined state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to Figures 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second combined state will be described with reference to Figs. 62 to 64. Figs. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that Figs. 62 to 64 each illustrate a transition state in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 is extended to a position of the second combined state. Fig. 62 illustrates the operating unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, Fig. 64 illustrates the operating unit 200 in the second combined position, and Fig. 63 illustrates the operating unit 200 in an intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position.

Furthermore, the state in which each member (rotating member 435, 455, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), and lifting member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to Figures 53 to 61 is in the combined (extended) position will be referred to as the first combined state below. Also, in the first combined state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is associated (integrated), allowing the player to recognize one pattern as the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 62, when the operating unit 200 is arranged in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is arranged in the retracted position (position shown in Figure 17(a)), the upper combined unit 500 is arranged in the retracted position (position shown in Figure 22(a)), and the lower combined unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position (position shown in Figure 27(a)). The formation of the second combined state by the operating unit 200 is performed from the state shown in Figure 62 by first sliding and displacing the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 to the center of the game board 13, displacing the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 downward, and displacing the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 upward, thereby forming the state shown in Figure 63. Next, the slide unit 400 is displaced to the extended position (position shown in FIG. 18(a)), the upper combined unit 500 is displaced to the extended position (position shown in FIG. 22(a)), and the lower combined unit 600 is displaced to the extended position (position shown in FIG. 27(c)), resulting in the second combined state shown in FIG. 64.

In the second combined state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, and lower combined unit 600) is associated (integrated) to allow the player to recognize one pattern as the second presentation mode. The pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part that forms the body of Pegasus is the lower combined unit 600, the part that forms the head of Pegasus is the upper combined unit 500, and the part that forms the wings of Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the second combined state, the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 has the base member 434, which is arranged to be slidably displaced, displaced to the extended position at the slide end position (position shown in FIG. 18(a)). That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged such that they are slid a different distance from the retracted position. In addition, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position of the rotating member 435 can be made different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

Furthermore, as described above, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, so that the rotational angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently in the first combined state and the second combined state due to the difference in the distance that the base member 434 slides from the retracted position. Note that in this embodiment, the rotational angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged in a posture that differs by approximately 180 degrees around the rotation axis in the first combined state and the second combined state.

As described above, the operating unit 200 can combine with each other to form a single pattern (character) by displacing each component (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), and lifting member 820) of each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) to the extended position.

In other words, as a first performance mode, the operating unit 200 can combine each component in the central space of the operating unit 200 (the space in front of the third pattern display device 81) to form a single pattern (character), and as a second performance mode, it can combine each component in the central space of the operating unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first performance mode.

As a result, different patterns can be formed in the first and second presentation modes, and the player can visually recognize each of the first and second presentation modes depending on the presentation, time, etc. This allows for an increased variety of presentations, making it possible to show the player a variety of presentations and provide excitement.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units that are formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position, and a second movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units that are formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a protruding position.

According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are placed in the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) to cause the player to recognize one pattern (character) as a first presentation mode, while when the movable units of the second movable unit group are placed in the extended position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated (integrated) to cause the player to recognize a different pattern (character) as a second presentation mode. That is, in the first presentation mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to a retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is placed in a protruding position, so that each movable unit of the first movable unit group forms a first pattern (character) in the play area, and in the second play state, each first movable unit is retracted to a retracted position, while each movable unit of the second movable unit group is placed in a protruding position, so that each movable unit of the second movable unit group forms a second character in the play area.

In this case, in order to enhance the dramatic effect, it is effective to be able to form larger patterns (characters). To achieve this, each movable unit in the first movable unit group and each movable unit in the second movable unit group must be formed large.

However, as with the conventional technology described above, when multiple characters (performance modes) are created, the total number of movable units required to create the multiple characters also increases accordingly, and because the area (space) for storing each movable unit is limited, it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. This makes it difficult to increase the size of each character (performance mode).

In contrast, according to this embodiment, one of the movable units in the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) is used as one of the movable units in the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, lower combined unit 600), so the total number of movable units required to form multiple (first and second) performance modes can be reduced and each movable unit can be made larger. As a result, each pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is used as part of the pattern (character) to be viewed by the player as the first presentation mode and as part of the pattern (character) to be viewed by the player as the second presentation mode, so that the number of movable units for forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since space is created in the retracted space on the inner edge of the rear case 300 (space other than the central space in the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (space in front of the third pattern display device 81)), each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, lower combined unit 600, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) can be made larger.

In addition, each component of each movable unit (rotating members 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, lifting base 720 (rotating member 730), and lifting member 820) can be enlarged, so the patterns (characters) formed in the first and second performance modes can be enlarged.

As described above, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is used both as part of the pattern (character) to be viewed by the player in the first presentation mode and as part of the pattern (character) to be viewed by the player in the second presentation mode, if it is positioned in the same position in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, it becomes easier for the player to see that a common movable unit member (rotating member 435) is used in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, which reduces interest.

In addition, if it is necessary to create the first and second performance modes using a component (rotating component 435) that is located in the same position, the degree of freedom is accordingly reduced, making it difficult to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second performance modes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 is placed in a combined (extending) position when forming the first presentation mode and in a combined (extending) position when forming the second presentation mode, which is different from the combined (extending) position when forming the second presentation mode, makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used for both the first and second presentation modes, preventing loss of interest.

In other words, because the position of the rotating member 435 is different between the first and second presentation modes, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the patterns (characters) formed in the first and second presentation modes. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased because the rotating member 435 can be placed in different positions (extending positions) between the first and second performance modes, making it easier to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second performance modes.

Here, if the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same position in the first combined state and the second combined state, it will be easier for the player to see that the rotating member 435 is used for both the first and second presentation modes, which will reduce interest. Also, if it is necessary to use the rotating member 435 in the same position to create the first and second presentation modes, the degree of freedom will be reduced accordingly, making it difficult to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 is in a different position when forming the first presentation mode and when forming the second presentation mode, making it difficult for players to recognize that the rotating member 435 is used for both the first and second presentation modes, preventing loss of interest. Also, it is easy to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

As described above, the rotating member 435 is placed in a different position and in a different attitude (rotation angle) in the first and second presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize that it is used in both the first and second presentation modes, and thus preventing the player's interest from being hindered.

In other words, if the rotating member 435, which is used in both the first and second presentation modes, were placed in a different position or posture in the first and second presentation modes, the player would likely recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first and second presentation modes. However, since the rotating member 435 is placed in a different position and posture in the first and second presentation modes, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first and second combined states.

The rotating member 435 is rotatably arranged on the base member 434, which is displaced linearly, and is displaced in a manner that combines rotational and linear displacement. This increases the degree of freedom of the projection position and attitude (rotation angle) when forming the first or second performance mode.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) with each other, allowing the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a separate drive means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be made larger, and the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode can be made larger. For example, even if there is a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure space to arrange the components, such as one side and the other side of the third pattern display device 81 in the width direction of the play area, the rotating member 435 can be made large while setting a retracted state position for the rotating member 435 in such an area.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in an area where the striking rotating member 435 of the base member 434 overlaps in a front view when in the retracted position, and the dimensions in the front-to-rear direction of other areas of the base member 434 (areas where the conversion mechanism is not arranged) can be reduced accordingly. This makes it possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side of the base member 434 when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced.

Next, the displacement mode of the operating unit 200 that forms the second combined state will be described in detail with reference to Figures 65 to 68. Figures 65(a) to 66(b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600. Figure 67(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIa in Figure 65(a), and Figure 67(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in Figure 65(b). FIG. 68(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, and lower combined unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66(a), and FIG. 68(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, and lower combined unit 600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66(b).

FIG. 65(a) to FIG. 66(b) show the transition from the retracted state to the second combined state, in that order. FIG. 65(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, and FIG. 66(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state.

The displacement from FIG. 65(a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) is performed by sliding the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 at an intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in Figure 65 (b) to the second combined state shown in Figure 66 (b). The transition to the second state shown in Figure 66 (a) is performed by displacing the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 while continuing the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 from the first state. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second performance mode. The transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, in Figures 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper combined unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated with dashed lines to facilitate understanding.

As shown in Figures 65(a) and 67(a), in the retracted state (disposed at the retracted position), the upper combined unit 500 has the upper displacement member 530 housed inside the base member 510, and the lower combined unit 600 is disposed in a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps with the lower base member 610 in the front-to-rear direction. Also, the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 has a part of the base member 434 disposed on the rear side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 disposed in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotating member 435 and base member 434 of the left slide member 430.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed from the front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and the rear side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the rear side as described above, and a step portion 434b2 recessed toward the rear side is formed below the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b (lower side in FIG. 67(b)).

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess to prevent interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600. The entire area below the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is recessed toward the rear surface, thereby making it possible to increase the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434.

That is, the side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is recessed toward the rear surface side, so that the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be made larger, and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 can be disposed in that gap.

In addition, because the thickness of the lower side of the base member 434 in the front-to-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other when the base member 434 is slid and displaced to the first state (the state shown in FIG. 65(b)) described below.

On the other hand, by increasing the thickness in the front-to-rear direction above the step portion 434b2 of the base member 434, it is possible to arrange transmission gears 437a to 437f (see Figure 13) that serve as transmission means for transmitting drive to the rotating member 435.

As described above, the upper end (upper side of FIG. 65) of the base member 434 is connected to the base member 410 so as to be slidably displaceable, and the lower end (lower side of FIG. 65) is slidably inserted between the rear case 300 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, since the upper side of the base member 434 is more susceptible to force when slidably displaced in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65(a)), the thickness of the upper part of the base member 434 in the front-to-rear direction can be made thicker, and deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the retracted position (the position in FIG. 65(a)), the rear side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower combined unit 600 abuts against the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. This prevents the lower combined unit 600 from tipping forward or backward in the retracted state.

In other words, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, its upper end is likely to tip over in the front-to-rear direction. However, by bringing the connecting arm 650 connected to the upper part of the lower displacement member 640 into contact with the base member 434, the upper end of the lower displacement member 640 is prevented from tipping over in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of the lower combined unit 600 in the retracted position can be stabilized. This makes it possible to prevent the base member 434 from abutting against the lower displacement member 640 when it is slid to the first state.

As shown in Figures 65(b) and 67(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the first state position, the rotation member 435 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the base member 434 is displaced a predetermined amount, causing the rotation member 435 to rotate, and the rotation member 435 and the lower combined unit 600 can be positioned so that they do not overlap in the front-to-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower combined unit 600 can be positioned so that they do not overlap in the front-to-rear direction.

That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed inside the area K2 (see FIG. 65(b)) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600 in a front view, and the portion of the lower displacement member 640 that does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, and the upper end portion is easily tilted in the front-rear direction. However, since the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed inside the region K2, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is positioned in a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the upper displacement member 530 on the side (upper abutment portion 533 side) away from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting (the rotational driving force) that displaces the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500. This makes it possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a that connects the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when displacing to the second state.

In other words, if the slide unit 400 and the upper combined unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 will collide with the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435. However, by delaying the start time at which the upper displacement member 530 begins its downward displacement beyond the start time at which the left slide member 430 begins its displacement, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

The downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the extended position is initiated when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. This prevents the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side of the base member 434 when displaced.

That is, since only one end of the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510, the other end (the upper abutment portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Also, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 rotates downward and protrudes as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction of the operating unit 200 (the center part in the left-right direction in FIG. 66(b)). Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in a state in which the base member 434 is slid and displaced toward the center more than the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced toward the back side of the base member 434 more than the front side of the base member 434 and collides with the side of the base member 434. However, since the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from colliding with the side of the base member 434 when it is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 66(a) and FIG. 68(a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced further to the right in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 66(a)) than in the first state. Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotated and displaced according to (linked with) the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotated and displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower combined unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65(b)) of the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by sliding and displacing the base member 434, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 66(a)) can be increased, and by rotating the rotating member 435, the width of the region K2 in the up-down direction (up-down direction in FIG. 66(a)) can be increased.

This prevents the upper end of the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when the upper end of the lower displacement member 640 tilts forward and backward when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced.

The upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state in which it overlaps with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when displacing from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be disposed on the rear side of the upper displacement member 530, so that, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 (the upper abutment portion 533 side) can be prevented from displacing in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side of the base member 434.

In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is positioned so as to overlap the base member 434 in a front view while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, so that the upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from abutting against the side of the base member 434 while being displaced to a position that forms the second combined state.

Furthermore, the protruding position of the upper displacement member 530 is set between the opposing base member 434 and the rotating member 435, so the rotating member 435 is positioned closer to the front, making it easier for the player to see, while the upper displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 are associated (integrated) to make the whole easier for the player to see as a specified pattern (character).

As shown in Figures 66(b) and 68(b), in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower abutment portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other, and a portion of the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower combined unit 600 (left side of Figure 68(b)).

This allows the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 to be positioned close to each other, allowing the player to see them as a single pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different projection positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first and second performance modes, and multiple stop states must be formed, which makes the control or structure complicated, and therefore the stop states (position and posture) tend to vary. Therefore, when the second performance mode is formed, if the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 abuts against the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600, if the position and posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, while if the position and posture of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are pushed out, causing a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 in the combined state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rotating member 435 is arranged in different positions in the front-to-rear direction from the movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, lift base 720 (rotating member 730), lift member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, lower combined unit 600, protruding unit 700, lift unit 800) in the first and second performance modes, and overlaps with a portion of the movable members of each movable unit in a front view. Therefore, even if there is variation in the stopped state (extension or posture) in the first and second performance modes, it is easy to maintain the relationship with each movable member of each movable unit. In other words, by overlapping in a front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between each movable member of each movable unit, and by having different positions in the front-to-rear direction, it is possible to prevent each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a positional shift even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive. As a result, it becomes easier to maintain the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member when in the combined state.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the upper abutment portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower abutment portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are positioned in abutment with each other, and the rotating member 435 is positioned in front of them, so that the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 are associated (integrated) with each other, making it easier for the player to recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

In other words, in the second presentation mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned in the same position in the front-to-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (extending) state can be integrated to make it easier for the player to see, making it easier for the player to see the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is prone to variation in its stopped state (position and posture), and in a structure in which the rotating member 435 abuts against the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 at the stopped position when forming the second performance mode, if the position and posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, preventing the association (integration).

Similarly, even if the position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out, causing a positional shift, and thus association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second performance mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are abutted, so that if the rotating member 435 abuts against the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out when the position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position. In this case, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the abutting state are displaced, so not only are the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced relative to the rotating member 435, but each member is also displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 abut against each other in the combined (extended) position, it is particularly effective to arrange the rotating member 435 in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640.

In this case, a portion of the rotating member 435 is disposed in front of at least a portion of the portion where the abutment portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the abutment portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 abut, so the rotating member 435 can make the abutment portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member less visible to the player. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 as a single pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to recognize them as a pattern (character) of the second presentation mode, which would result in a loss of interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 71. Figure 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. Figure 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the second embodiment, the left sliding member 2430 and the right sliding member 2450 are switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement, and a non-rotating state. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment is mainly composed of a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 that is rotatably arranged relative to the main body base member 2480.

The main body base member 2480 is formed from a plate-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the lower edge on the front side of the game board. In addition, the main body base member 2480 has protruding portions 2481 formed on the underside of both ends in the longitudinal direction.

The protruding plate portion 411 has a base side rack gear 412 engraved on the upper surface side for imparting rotation to a first side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 in response to sliding displacement of the first member 431.

As described above, the protrusions 2481 are formed on both longitudinal ends of the main body base member 2480. The protrusions 2481 are recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which the shaft 2486 of the rotation transmission member 2485, which will be described later, is inserted. In addition, the protrusions 2481 formed on one longitudinal end side (the right side of the gaming machine) of the main body base member 2480 have a through hole 2481b formed therethrough in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center of the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axes of the bearing holes 2481a are formed concentrically at both ends.

The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a generally rectangular cross section and in a prismatic column shape with dimensions set slightly smaller than the longitudinal distance dimension of the main body base member 2480. Rotational sections 2487 are formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 in a generally circular shape in side view and with a predetermined thickness, and shaft sections 2486 of shaft-shaped bodies are formed to protrude outward in the longitudinal direction from the axis of the rotational sections 2487.

In addition, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other longitudinal end side (left side of the game board) of the underside of the rotation transmission member 2485, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one longitudinal end side (right side of the game board).

The shafts 2486 formed on both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed so that their axes are concentric. As described above, the shafts 2486 are inserted into the bearing holes 2481a formed in the protrusions 2481, so that the diameter of the shafts 2486 is smaller than that of the bearing holes 2481a.

As a result, when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protrusion 2481 and placed on the main body base member 2480, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 2486.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side of the rotating part 2487 formed on one side (the right side of the game board) of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is placed on the main body base member 2480 with the circular rack 2487a meshing with a pinion gear 2488 arranged on one longitudinal side (the right side when viewed from the front) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmission member 2485, and its shaft center is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotating shaft inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protruding portion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened to the opposite surface of the protruding portion 2481.

Therefore, by applying a rotational driving force to the rotation drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and a driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed on the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmission member 2485. This allows the rotation transmission member 2485 to rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left sliding member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with a transmission gear 437b, and as the transmission gear 2437a rotates, a driving force is transmitted to the multiple transmission gears 437b to 437f. This allows a rotational drive to be imparted to the rotating member 435 in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with a transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right sliding member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with a transmission gear 437b, and as the transmission gear 2457a rotates, the drive is transmitted to the multiple transmission gears 457b to 457f. This allows a rotational drive force to be imparted to the rotating member 455 in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the right sliding member 2450.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Note that the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, so a detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

Figure 71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and Figure 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed with a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulge portion 2437a2 whose tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the rear side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is the portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and is formed with a thickness dimension that is approximately the same as the thickness dimension (front-to-back dimension) of the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges out so that the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the center of the tooth thickness as it approaches the back side. The distance dimension by which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges out from the tooth portion 2437a1 toward the back side is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension in the front-to-back direction of the tooth portion 2437a1, or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-to-back direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. This makes it possible to prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from decreasing, and to prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to Figures 72 and 73. Note that in the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

Figure 72(a) is a schematic diagram of slide unit 2400 viewed from the front when rotation transmission member 2485 and transmission gear 2437a are engaged, and Figure 72(b) is a schematic diagram of slide unit 2400 viewed from the front when rotation transmission member 2485 and transmission gear 2437a are disengaged. Figure 73(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in Figure 72(a), and Figure 73(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of slide unit 2400 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in Figure 72(b).

In FIG. 72, to facilitate understanding, a portion of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown with a dashed line. Also, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in Figures 72(a) and 73(a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is positioned downward (lower in Figures 72 and 73), the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are meshed.

As a result, the left sliding member 2430 slides relative to the base member 2410, causing the transmission gear 2437a, which is engaged with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, to rotate. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, causing the rotating member 435 to rotate.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotational driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward toward the rear side, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other.

That is, as shown in FIG. 72(b) and FIG. 73(b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates around the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 is displaced upward in accordance with the rotation of the rotation transmission member 2485. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged from each other.

Therefore, even if the left sliding member 2430 slides relative to the base member 2410, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged, so the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate. As a result, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so the left sliding member 2430 does not rotate even if it is displaced.

That is, a first drive state can be formed in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the rotating member 435 rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430; a second drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 2430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; and a third drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is stopped, and the rotation of the rotating member 435 continues by its inertial force.

This allows the number of combinations of movements (linear and rotational movements) of the left sliding member 2430 and the rotating member 435 to be increased, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor on the left sliding member 2430 to provide a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435. However, if a drive motor is arranged on the left sliding member 2430, the weight of the left sliding member 2430 increases, and there is a problem in that the load of the left driving motor 475 for driving (sliding and displacing) the left sliding member 2430 becomes large.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, a second drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435 can be formed by the rotational drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. In other words, since there is no need to dispose a drive means for rotating the rotating member 435 on the left sliding member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left sliding member 2430 can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, if the rotation transmission member 2485, which is equipped with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 2437a, is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, thereby disengaging the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 from the transmission gear 2437a, there is a problem that when switching from the second drive state in which the meshing is released to the first drive state in which the meshing is engaged, the gears cannot mesh and the sides collide with each other, preventing the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 from meshing with the transmission gear 2437a.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the bulge 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, so that the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which meshing is released to the first drive state in which meshing is engaged, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 can be easily inserted between the teeth of the transmission gear 2437a.

In addition, the tooth thickness of the bulge 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the rear side of the transmission gear 2437a, so that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 can be guided to the teeth 2437a1 along a gradually decreasing inclined surface.

In other words, by forming the bulge 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the second drive state in which meshing is released to the first drive state in which meshing is engaged.

In the second embodiment, it is preferable that the shaft center of the shaft portion 2486 is formed on the plane of the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 can be prevented from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 to 76. Figure 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the third embodiment, the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement, and a non-rotating state. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly comprises a main body base member 3480 and a storage member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed as a plate-like body that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and has a protruding plate portion 3411 erected on the edge.

A left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other longitudinal end (left side of the game board) on the underside of the protruding plate portion 3411, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one longitudinal end (right side of the game board) of the underside. Meanwhile, an insertion hole 3481c is formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side in the vertical direction.

The storage member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed as a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a protruding wall 3491 that protrudes from the edge toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the first member 431, second member 433 and rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

The housing member 3490 is also formed so that its outer shape in a front view is smaller than the shape of the inner circumferential surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. This allows the housing member 3490 to be positioned inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the storage member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a that penetrates in the vertical direction is formed in the upper protruding wall 3491 of the storage member 3490.

Through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of housing member 3490 to fasten the shaft of telescopic cylinder 3495 (described later) to housing member 3490, and is formed with a smaller diameter than the diameter of the shaft of cylinder 3495.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that displaces the housing member 3490 up and down by sliding it when driven, and is a member (solenoid) that displaces the distance that the shaft protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495 by applying power to it.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 with its shaft inserted into the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. The main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft of the cylinder 3495 is displaced up and down, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced up and down. In other words, the housing member 3490 can be displaced up and down relative to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the storage member 3490 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

Figure 75(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 3400 viewed from the front in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are engaged, and Figure 75(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 3400 viewed from the front in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged due to the displacement of the storage member 3490. Figure 76(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in Figure 75(a), and Figure 76(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in Figure 75(b). In Figure 75, a part of the storage member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown with dashed lines to facilitate understanding. Additionally, transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in Figures 75(a) and 76(a), when the storage member 3490 is in the upper position, the storage member 3490 is positioned in a state in which the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the storage member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is sufficiently secured, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are meshed.

As a result, the left sliding member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, causing the transmission gear 437a, which meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, to rotate. As a result, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, causing the rotating member 435 to rotate.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so that it protrudes from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged from each other.

In other words, when the storage member 3490 is in a downward position, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the storage member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is smaller than the distance dimension L1, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged (distance dimension L1>L2).

Therefore, even if the left sliding member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged, so the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, so even if the left sliding member 430 is displaced, it can be formed in a form in which it does not rotate.

In other words, a first drive state can be formed in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the rotating member 435 rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430; a second drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; and a third drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped and the rotation of the rotating member 435 is continued by its inertia force. This can increase the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left sliding member 430, thereby enhancing the presentation effect accordingly.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the first drive state and the second drive state can be switched by displacing the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed.

In other words, when the phase between the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is shifted, it is necessary to align the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a phase shifted state, the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, and the transmission gear 437a rotates along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 while engaging with it, so there is no need to align the phases of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a, and engagement can be performed smoothly.

Next, the slide unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 77 and 78. Figure 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the fourth embodiment, the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are switched between a state in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement, and a non-rotating state. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed from a plate-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the lower edge portion on the front side of the game board. On the bottom side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that imparts a rotational driving force to the rotating member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that imparts a rotational driving force to the rotating member 455 are formed.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed at a position on the left side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. In addition, at both ends and the center of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, notches 4413a are formed by cutting out the tooth surface. Furthermore, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notches 4413a have small tooth portions 4413b that are smaller in outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notches 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed at a position on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Also, at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414, a notch portion 4414a is formed by cutting out the tooth surface. Furthermore, the tooth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a has a small tooth portion 4414b that is smaller in outer shape than the non-adjacent teeth.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

Figure 78(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 4400 viewed from the front when the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 is engaged with the transmission gear 437a, and Figure 78(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 4400 viewed from the front when the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 is disengaged from the transmission gear 437a. Note that in Figure 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown with dashed lines to make it easier to understand. Also, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch portion 4413a, the transmission gear 437a meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is positioned below the notch portion 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is released from meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413.

That is, until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a, which is missing teeth, of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the rotating member 435 can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a, which is missing teeth, of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotating member 435 can be continued by the force of inertia.

Therefore, it is possible to form a first drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the rotating member 435 rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430; a second drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; and a third drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is stopped and the rotation of the rotating member 435 is continued by its inertia force. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left sliding member 430, thereby enhancing the presentation effect accordingly.

In addition, since the switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured to release the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a by removing some of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, there is no need to place a drive motor or the like for releasing the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left sliding member 430, and the weight of the left sliding member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left driving motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left sliding member 430 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with a small tooth portion 4413b, so that when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, damage to the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a can be prevented, and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

In other words, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are easily damaged due to collision with the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the notch portion 4413a.

In this case, a small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, so that the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can smoothly mesh with the transmission gear 437a when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state.

In other words, in the case of a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that does not have a small tooth portion 4413b, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is misaligned when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 may mesh and fail to mesh.

In this case, by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth, even if the rotation phase between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is shifted, the teeth of the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a are prevented from meshing with each other when they come into contact, and the transmission gear 437a can be rotated to adjust the phase. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed with each other.

Next, the left sliding member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 79 to 81. Figure 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left sliding member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. Figure 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left sliding member 5430. Note that in the following, the left sliding member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the left sliding member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the fifth embodiment, the left sliding member 5430 and the right sliding member 5450 are switched between a state in which the rotating members 5435 and 5455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement, and a non-rotating state. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 79 and 80, in the fifth embodiment, the left slide member 5430 has a one-way clutch 5439 disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 is mainly composed of an outer ring 5439b connected to a circular shaft hole 5437f1 formed through the axis of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, a plurality of rollers 5439d arranged on each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c, a retainer 5439e that holds each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a that is connected to the retainer 5439e and switches the phase of the rollers 5439d relative to the cam surface.

The switching plate 5439a has a sliding groove 5439a1 formed therethrough in the shape of an elongated hole, and a protrusion 5436d that protrudes toward the front side of the displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81(a) is a schematic diagram of the left slide member 5430 viewed from the front before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81(b) is a schematic diagram of the left slide member 5430 viewed from the front after the switching plate 5439a is operated. Note that in FIG. 81, the drawing is simplified for ease of understanding, and parts of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 are shown with dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), when the displacement member 5436 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on the end of the cam surface and is engaged with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a driven state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the displacement member 5436 is displaced relative to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is displaced relative to the rotation member 5435 in accordance with the displacement. This causes the switching plate 5439a to switch.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is positioned in the neutral position of the cam surface and moves away from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, the one-way clutch 5439 can be set to a state in which it allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which it blocks the transmission of rotation.

In other words, a first drive state is formed in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the rotating member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left sliding member 5430; a second drive state is formed in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the left sliding member 5430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating; and a third drive state is formed in which the one-way clutch 5439 is changed from a state that allows the transmission of rotation to a state that blocks it when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 is stopped, and the rotation of the rotating member 5435 continues due to its inertia force while the left sliding member 5430 is stopped.

This allows the first, second and third drive states to be formed, and increases the number of combinations of the movements (linear and rotational movements) of the left sliding member 5430 and the rotating member 5435. As a result, the dramatic effect can be enhanced.

In addition to the movements (linear and rotational movements) of the left sliding member 5430 and the rotating member 5435, the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined, so the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, so the displacement member 5436 can serve both to produce effects by displacement and to operate the switching plate 5439a. In other words, there is no need to provide a separate drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, so the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be reduced.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left sliding member 6430 will be described with reference to Figures 82 and 83. Figure 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left sliding member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. Figure 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left sliding member 6430. Note that in the following, the left sliding member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the right sliding member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the sixth embodiment, the left sliding member 6430 and the right sliding member 6450 are switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 rotate in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 and the right sliding member 6450, and a non-rotating state, by switching the one-way clutch 5439. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 82 and 83, in the sixth embodiment, the left slide member 6430 is disposed on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear base member 434a.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the rear base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the rear side to the front side, and the hole diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and a sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a connected to the operator 6438 described later.

The operator 6438 is formed as a rod-like body that is rectangular and elongated when viewed from the front. The operator 6438 has a connecting pin 6438a that protrudes forward from the lower end, and a through hole 6438b that penetrates in the front-rear direction slightly above the center in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole through which the insertion pin 6434a2, which protrudes cylindrically rearward from the rear side of the rear base member 434a, is inserted, and is formed with a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the rear base member 434a and a bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is positioned on the rear of the rear base member 434a in a state in which it can rotate around the through hole 6438b as an axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter is smaller than the groove width of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 rotates around the axis of the through hole 6438b, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes, displacing the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439.

A torsion spring (not shown) is disposed between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is engaged with the rear base member 434a, and the other end is engaged with the operator 6438. This causes the operator 6438 to be constantly urged in a right rotational direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis when viewed from the front. As a result, when no external force is acting on the operator 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can be constantly in a driven state (a state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435).

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be explained with reference to Figures 84 and 85.

Figure 84(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 6400 viewed from the front before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and Figure 84(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 6400 viewed from the front after the switching plate 5439a is operated. Figure 85(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in Figure 84(a), and Figure 85(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in Figure 84(a). Note that in Figure 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are shown with dashed lines to facilitate understanding.

As shown in Figures 84(a) and (b), the base member 6410 has a protrusion 6411a formed at the sliding end of the left sliding member 6430, which protrudes from the bottom side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410.

As shown in Figures 84(a) and 85(a), when no external force is acting on the operator 6438, the operator 6438 is positioned such that its longitudinal direction coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and engages with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a driven state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 84(b) and 85(b), the left slide member 6430 slides and displaces, and just before the end of the sliding displacement, the right side surface in front view of the other end (upper side) of the operator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 abuts against the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

After the side of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the base member 6410, when the left slide member 6430 moves further to the end, the operator 6438 is displaced in a left rotation direction as viewed from the front, centered on the through hole 6438b.

As a result, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is positioned in the neutral position of the cam surface and moves away from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a neutral idling state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operator 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to create a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

In other words, a first drive state is formed in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the rotating member 5435 rotates in conjunction with the displacement of the left sliding member 6430, and a third drive state is formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 continues due to its inertial force while the left sliding member 6430 is stopped by changing the one-way clutch 5439 from a state that allows the transmission of rotation to a state that blocks it when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 is stopped.

This allows the first and third drive states to be formed, and increases the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left sliding member 6430 and the rotating member 5435. As a result, the dramatic effect can be enhanced.

In addition, because the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 6430, there is no need to place a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430, and the weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 86 to 89. First, the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. Note that in the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and a description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. In the seventh embodiment, the left sliding member 7430 and the right sliding member 7450 are switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 and the right sliding member 7450, and a non-rotating state, by switching the one-way clutch 5439. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a recessed groove 7417 is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410, in which the second slide member 7460 described below is disposed.

The second slide member 7460 is mainly formed with a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged opposite the front and rear sides of the rack gear 7461, a shaft portion 7463 held by being clamped between the two plate members 7462, a roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7463 inserted therethrough, and a drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and engaging with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with the gear teeth 7461a formed on the upper surface. In addition, a stop hole 7461b that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed at approximately the center position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding the roller 7465 described later, and is formed as a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate member 7462 has a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side, which is recessed in the vertical direction on the side, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

Through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to stop hole 7461b of rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7463 is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. In addition, the axial dimension is formed to be larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is clamped and held between the two plate members 7462, the sliding groove 7462a is recessed long in the vertical direction, allowing the shaft portion 7463 to be slid and displaced in the vertical direction.

The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape and has an axial hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction at its axis. The roller 7465 is disposed between two plate members 7462, with the shaft 7463 inserted through the axial hole.

The drive gear 7464 is a member that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force that causes the rack gear 7461 to slide left and right, and is connected to a motor 7466, which will be described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 disposed at the front has a decoration (a design or other display) applied to the flat surface disposed at the front side. This allows the second slide member 7460 to be slid from a position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-to-rear direction to a position where it does not overlap, thereby making the decorative surface visible to the player.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to Figures 87 to 89. Figures 87 to 89 are schematic diagrams of the slide unit 7400 viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to Figure 87. As shown in Figure 87, the left slide member 7430 differs from the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment only in the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the operator 6438 before displacement, and in that a biasing spring is not disposed between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be explained with reference to Figures 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the left slide member 7430 is slid, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is positioned to the left of the through hole 6438b in the left-right direction. In other words, the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 is positioned in a state inclined to the right.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is disposed at the end of the cam surface and engages with the wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a driven state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operating member 6438 abuts the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87(b)), the rotation member 5435 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement of the left slide member 7430.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Therefore, since the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 is urged downward by the sliding displacement, and the operator 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as the axis.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the operator 6438 is rotated to a position where the longitudinal direction of the operator 6438 is approximately aligned with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the side of the roller 7465 located at approximately the same height as the axis of the roller 7465.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 is biased to the right by the sliding displacement, and the operator 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as its axis.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), when the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is positioned to the left of the through-hole 6438b.

As a result, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the drive state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is positioned in a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. This places the one-way clutch 5439 in a neutral idling state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

In addition, when the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 is rotated until it is tilted to the left, the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Therefore, since the other end (upper end) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the left, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the sliding displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, the roller 7465 is positioned above the operator 6438, so that the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89(b).

In addition, as described above, when the left sliding member 7430 is positioned to the right of the roller 7465, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is in a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 blocks the transmission of rotation, so that the rotation can continue due to the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when it slides to the left of the roller 7465.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operator 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to create a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

In other words, the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, forming a first driving state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates in conjunction with the displacement of the left sliding member 7430, and a third driving state in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 continues due to its inertial force when the displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is stopped.

This allows the first and third drive states to be formed, and increases the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, by stopping the inertial force of the third drive state (for example, by waiting until the inertial force no longer acts), the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and a second drive state can be formed in which the left sliding member 7430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

This allows the first, second and third drive states to be formed, and increases the number of combinations of the movements (linear and rotational movements) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435. As a result, the dramatic effect can be enhanced.

In addition, because the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the sliding displacement of the left slide member 7430, there is no need to place a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430, and the weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the second sliding member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left sliding member 7430, so that it is possible to change the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, i.e., the position at which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is changed from a permissive state in which rotation is permitted to a restricted state, or from a permissive state to a restricted state. This makes it possible to change the position at which the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left sliding member 7430 is slidably displaced, and the position at which the rotating member 5435 rotates when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is stopped, depending on the game state, etc., and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430, the second sliding member 7460 can also be slidably displaced, which enhances the presentation effect. Since the second sliding member 7460 serves both the role of producing presentation effects through displacement and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439, there is no need to provide a separate means for changing the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts, which in turn reduces product costs.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, so that the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displacing the second slide member 7460.

In other words, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displacing the second slide member 7460 to the other side in the left-right direction from a state in which the second slide member 7460 is positioned to the left or right of the left slide member 7430 while the left slide member 7430 is stopped.

Therefore, by switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 without sliding the left sliding member 7430, it is possible to form a first drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, causing the rotating member 5435 to rotate in conjunction with the displacement of the left sliding member 7430, and a second drive state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is not affected by the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, causing the left sliding member 7430 to slide while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Next, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 90 to 92. Fig. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. Fig. 91 is an exploded front oblique view of the slide unit 8400. Fig. 92 is an exploded rear oblique view of the slide unit 8400. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment mainly comprises a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a sliding bar member 420 disposed on the base member 8410, a left sliding member 8430 slidably connected to the sliding bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left sliding member 8430 along the sliding bar member 420.

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the sliding bar member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410. In addition, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear that extends along the longitudinal direction of the sliding bar member 420, and is engaged with the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left sliding member 8430.

The left slide member 8430 is mainly composed of a first member 8431 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a base member 8431b having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and suspended from the first member 8431, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably arranged on the first member 8431, a second member 8433 having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a second side rack gear 433a with which the first side pinion gear 432 meshes, a base member 8434 having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and suspended from the second member 8433, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably arranged on the second member 8433, a third member 8445 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a third side rack gear 8445a with which the second side pinion gear 8433d meshes, and a base member 8446 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and suspended from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole with a circular cross-sectional inner surface extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole, allowing the first member 8431 to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. In other words, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 in conjunction with the sliding displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end, allowing the second member 8433 to slide along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced relative to the first member 8431.

In this case, the second member 8433 has a second side rack gear 433a engraved on its underside. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

The second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by the action of the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the sliding displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably disposed on the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end, allowing the third member 8445 to slide along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced relative to the second member 8433.

In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is engraved on the underside of the third member 8445. The third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d rotates in response to the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433 by the action of the second side pinion gear 8433d.

In other words, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, so that a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 8433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed faster than the first member 8431.

In addition, the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, so that a driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied to the third member 8445. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed increased from that of the second member 8433.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to Figures 93 and 94. Figures 93(a) to 93(c) are schematic diagrams of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, illustrating the transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. Figure 94(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVa-XCIVa in Figure 93(a), Figure 94(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in Figure 93(b), and Figure 94(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along line XCIVc-XCIVc in Figure 93(c). Note that Figure 93 illustrates a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 have been removed.

As shown in Figures 93(a) and 94(a), when the left slide member 8430 is in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the third member 8445 is disposed inside the second member 8433.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is positioned in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is positioned in front of the base member 8434.

That is, the base members 8431b, 8434, and 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5(a)). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are each slidably displaced, the base members 8431b, 8434, and 8446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. In addition, the space required for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be reduced, thereby achieving miniaturization.

Furthermore, since the space required for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be reduced, it is possible to secure the performance area K formed in the center of the game board (in Figure 93 (a) , the area overlapping the underside of the base member 8410 and the left side of the base member 8446).

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction with the left slide member 8430 in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left drive gear 471 meshed with the left pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431, which meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and the first side pinion gear 432 journaled on the first member 8431 is interposed in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear 412. Therefore, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433. Therefore, a driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 8433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed faster than the first member 8431.

This shortens the time required to slide the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 into the performance area K (shielded state) or to retract them from the performance area K (open state), allowing for quick switching between the shielded state and the open state.

In addition, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and the second side pinion gear 8433d journaled on the second member 8433 is interposed in a state of being meshed with both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Therefore, the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445. As a result, a driving force associated with the linear movement of the second member 8433 and a driving force associated with the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied to the third member 8445. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed faster than the second member 8433.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 8431. Also, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

This shortens the time required to slide the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 into the performance area K (shielded state) or to retract them from the performance area K (open state), allowing for quick switching between the shielded state and the open state.

As shown in Figures 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 8430 is positioned in the extended position, the second member 8433 protrudes from the inside of the first member 8431 with some overlap, and the third member 8445 protrudes from the inside of the second member 8433 with some overlap.

In this case, in this embodiment, the left side surface as viewed from the front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431 and the right side surface as viewed from the front of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 are positioned at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction. Also, the left side surface as viewed from the front of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface as viewed from the front of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 are positioned at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction.

In other words, no gaps are formed between the base members. Therefore, base members 8431b, 8434, and 8446 can be positioned over the entire performance area K.

Next, the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 95 and 96. Figure 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment. Figure 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the base member 434 is suspended from the second member 433. In the slide unit 9400 of the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended from the first member 431, and the base member 9434 is disposed suspended from the second member 8433. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment mainly comprises a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a sliding bar member 420 disposed on the base member 8410, a left sliding member 9430 slidably connected to the sliding bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left sliding member 9430 along the sliding guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 is mainly composed of a first member 8431 that is rectangular in width when viewed from the front, a base member 9431b that is rectangular in height when viewed from the front and that hangs down from the first member 8431, a first side pinion gear 432 that is rotatably arranged on the first member 8431, a second member 9433 that is rectangular in height when viewed from the front and has a second side rack gear 433a that meshes with the first side pinion gear 432, a base member 9434 that is rectangular in height when viewed from the front and that hangs down from the second member 9433, a slide rail 9443 that is arranged on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 that is rectangular in height when viewed from the front and that is connected to the slide rail 9443, and a freely deformable thread-like wire 9444.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole with a circular cross-sectional inner surface extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole, allowing the first member 8431 to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. In other words, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b has a groove recessed from the rear side on the left side of the upper end when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9431b1 is formed inside the groove and extends in the vertical direction (see Figure 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably disposed on the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end, allowing the second member 9433 to slide along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced relative to the first member 8431.

In this case, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, so that a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed faster than the first member 8431.

The base member 9434 has a notch 9434c cut out in the front-rear direction on the right side of the upper end when viewed from the front, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. In addition, a slide rail 9443 (described later) is arranged on the front of the upper end of the base member 9434 with its extension direction being in the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described below, and is positioned in approximately the same vertical position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed from two plates that are formed so that the plates can slide relative to each other. In addition, a coil spring (not shown) is disposed inside the slide rail 9443, and the plates are biased in a direction in which they move apart.

The back side of the base member 9437 is fastened to the slide rail 9443, so that the base member 9437 is slidably disposed relative to the second member 9433.

The base member 9437 has a groove recessed from the back side on the right side of the upper end when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the groove. The connecting shaft 9446a is also positioned in a vertical direction at approximately the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed from a piano wire, fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. The wire 9444 is also arranged such that the connecting path connecting one end and the other end is located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and is partially in contact with the side surface of the roller 9434d of the second member 9433 (see FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figures 97(a) to 97(c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and show the transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid and displaced. Figure 98(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in Figure 97(a), Figure 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in Figure 97(b), and Figure 98(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in Figure 97(c). Note that Figure 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 have been removed.

As shown in Figures 97(a) and 98(a), when the left slide member 9430 is in the retracted position, the base members 9431b, 9434, and 9446 are positioned at different positions in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the base members 9431b, 9446, and 9446 can slide and displace without interfering with each other. The space required for arranging the base members 9431b, 9434, and 9446 can be reduced, thereby achieving miniaturization.

Furthermore, the space required for arranging base member 9431b, base member 9434, and base member 9446 can be reduced, thereby making it possible to secure the performance area K formed in the center of the game board.

In addition, when the left slide member 9430 is placed in the retracted position, the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base members 9434 and 9446 acts on the base member 9446 to slide leftward relative to the base member 9434. However, by connecting the wire 9444 to the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438 and by making the connection path between the base members 9431b and 9434, the base member 9434 can prevent the base member 9446 from sliding leftward relative to the base member 9434.

In other words, by setting the length dimension of the wire 9444 to the sum of the left-right length dimension of the base member 9434 and the thickness dimension of the base members 9431b, 9434, and 9446, the base members 9431b, 9434, and 9446 can be maintained overlapped in the front-to-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction with the left slide member 9430 in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left drive gear 471 connected to the left pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431, which meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 journaled on the first member 8431 is interposed in a state of meshing with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410, so that the driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied to the second member 9433. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 can be slidably displaced relative to the base member 8410 at a speed faster than the first member 8431.

This shortens the time required to slide the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 into the performance area K (shielded state) or to retract them from the performance area K (open state), allowing for quick switching between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, the base members 9431b and 9434 are arranged at positions where their front-to-rear positions are shifted. That is, the overlap dimension in the front-to-rear direction between the base members 9431b and 9434 is shifted from the overlap dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9(a) to the overlap dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9(b).

The wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlap dimension in the front-to-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3>L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slid relative to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail 9443 by the amount that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid relative to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid relative to the base member 9434 at an increased speed compared to the base member 9434.

This shortens the time required to slide the base members 9434 and 9446 of the slide unit 9400 into the performance area K (covered state) or to move them away from the performance area K (open state), allowing for quick switching between the covered state and the open state.

As shown in Figures 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 9430 is in the extended position, the left side surface of base member 9431b as viewed from the front and the right side surface of base member 9434 as viewed from the front are positioned at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Also, the left side surface of base member 9434 as viewed from the front and the right side surface of base member 9446 as viewed from the front are positioned at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction.

In other words, no gaps are formed between the base members. Therefore, base members 8431b, 8434, and 8446 can be positioned over the entire performance area K.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the sliding displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so there is no need to arrange the third member 8445 on the top of the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the longitudinal distance dimension of the base member 8410 and the sliding bar member 420 can be reduced, and the space required for arranging the base member 8410 can be reduced, resulting in a smaller size.

Next, the lifting unit 800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of the lifting/lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 99 and 100. Fig. 99(a) is a front view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, Fig. 99(b) is a rear view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800, and Fig. 99(c) is a side view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800. Fig. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting/lowering unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, the movable units (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 800) arranged in the operating unit 200 are not connected to each other in the combined (extended) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and lifting unit 10800) arranged in the operating unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

As shown in Figures 99 and 100, the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment is formed with a lifting member 10820 that is arranged to be liftable on the base member 810. The lifting member 10820 is formed in a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is formed mainly with a protrusion 821 that protrudes toward the rear side, and an engagement portion 10822 that is formed to protrude from the rear side.

The engagement portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that engages with the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, and is formed protruding from the rear side of the lifting member 10820. The left-right dimension of the engagement portion 10822 is set to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435, 455 in the combined state, and is formed in a state where it protrudes further toward the rear side than the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the rotating members 435, 455 can be abutted against the engagement portion 10822 (see FIG. 102(a)).

The engagement portion 10822 is formed to protrude in a rectangular shape from the rear side of the lifting member 10820, and has a through hole 10822a that penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is inserted, and is formed with an opening larger than the tip of the protruding member 735 when viewed from above. This allows the tip of the protruding member 735 to be inserted into the through hole 10822a when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state (see FIG. 102(b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to Fig. 101 and Fig. 102. Fig. 101 shows the operation unit 10200 in the combined state, Fig. 102(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 taken along line CIIa-CIIa in Fig. 101, and Fig. 102(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 taken along line CIIb-CIIb in Fig. 101.

As shown in Figures 101 and 102, in the combined state, the lifting unit 10800 (lifting member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 has the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 abutting against the side surfaces of the engagement portion 10822 (see Figure 102 (a)).

The engaging portion 10822 is formed in a generally trapezoidal shape in which the width decreases toward the bottom when viewed from the rear. In other words, the left and right side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822 (left and right in FIG. 99(b)) are inclined toward the center in the left-right direction toward the bottom.

As described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engagement portion 10822. In this case, the back side of the protruding member 735 is formed with an inclined portion 10735a in which the protruding distance increases toward the bottom, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be able to come into contact with each other.

The engagement portion 10822 allows the lifting unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the protruding unit 700 to be in contact (connected), preventing misalignment of the positions of the movable units (lifting unit 10800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) in the combined state. As a result, the player is given a sense of unity between the movable units in the combined state, enhancing the player's interest.

In addition, since each movable unit is connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 can be transmitted to each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

To explain in more detail, by repeatedly applying a relatively small rotational drive to and from the drive motor 891 that drives the lifting member 10820, the lifting member 10820 is displaced (vibrates) up and down by a relatively small distance.

In this case, each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right side surfaces of the engagement portion 10822 (left and right in FIG. 99(b)), so that the inclined shape of the left and right side surfaces allows the side in contact with the engagement portion 10822 to be displaced outward in the left and right direction of the operating unit 10200 (left and right direction in FIG. 101).

When the rotating members 435, 455 are in the combined (extended) position, a rotational moment is applied to them in a direction that displaces the side that contacts the engaging portion 10822 toward the inside in the left-right direction of the operating unit 10200 due to their center of gravity. Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 that are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the lifting member 10820 can contact the engaging portion 10822 again due to the rotational moment. As a result, the lifting member 10820 is displaced periodically and repeatedly, which causes the rotating members 435, 455 to be displaced periodically and repeatedly.

On the other hand, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 has the inclined portion 10735a abutting against the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, so that the lifting member 10820 is subjected to a periodic and repeated displacement, and the inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the inclined portion 10735. Therefore, the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a periodically displaces the distance by which the protruding member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102(b)). As a result, the lifting member 10820 is subjected to a periodic and repeated displacement, which causes the protruding member 735 to be subjected to a periodic and repeated displacement. Therefore, since there is no need to apply a driving force to the other driving motors 763, 475, 476, the driving energy can be reduced.

That is, the lifting member 10820 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the combined (extended) position, and the lifting member 10820 is formed so as to be able to be periodically displaced, so that the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 can be used to periodically displace the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720), the rotating members 435 and 455, and the lifting member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect. In addition, in this case, the lifting member 10820 is forced to be periodically displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 are spaced apart (not in contact) with each other, so that they can be subjected to periodic displacement from the lifting member 10820 without being affected by each other. In other words, the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455.

Furthermore, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 can be displaced (vibrated) periodically in different ways without being related to each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), they vibrate in different ways even if the same vibration is transmitted from the lifting member 10820. Therefore, the part of one character formed by the rotating member 730 and the part formed by the rotating members 435, 455 can be vibrated in different ways. This can enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435, 455 are arranged rotatably relative to the base members 434, 454, so that the periodic displacement of the lifting member 10820 causes the rotating members 435, 455 to periodically repeat the action of rotating and displacing in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis, and the rotating member 730 can be periodically pushed out in the forward and backward directions due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

In addition, each rotating member 435, 455 and protruding member 735 is directly connected to a driving source that displaces (vibrates), so the driving force can be transmitted efficiently.

That is, when the protruding member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435, 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the protruding member 735 is transmitted via each of the rotating members 435, 455, so the driving force transmitted to the protruding member 735 is small. However, in the tenth embodiment, each of the rotating members 435, 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to a driving source that displaces (vibrates), so the driving force can be transmitted efficiently.

Furthermore, the lifting member 10820 is positioned in a forward-backward position in the combined (extending) position relative to the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, so the lifting member 10820 disposed closer to the player can be periodically displaced (vibrated). In other words, the lifting member 10820 on the front side, which is easier for the player to see, serves as the vibration source to vibrate the pattern (character), so an effect can be created that easily conveys the impact of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 in the 11th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 103 to 107.

First, the driver 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the driver 11761 in the eleventh embodiment when the driver 11761 is disposed in the first rotation position, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the driver 761 when the driver 11761 is disposed in the second rotation position.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 is formed so that the interposed member 733 descends with the rotation of the driver 761 which displaces the protruding member 735 to the extended position (protruding from the rotating member 730). In the eleventh embodiment, however, the cam portion 11761b of the driver 11761 is formed so that the interposed member 733 ascends with the rotation of the driver 11761 which displaces the protruding member 735 to the extended position (protruding from the rotating member 730). Note that the same parts as in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 103(a) and 103(b), the cam portion 11761b of the driver 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is formed so that when the driver 11761 is positioned in the first rotation position, the cam diameter (radius R3) at the cam surface (position P1) that abuts against the sliding wall 733c is set to a minimum diameter, and when the driver 11761 is positioned in the second rotation position, the cam diameter (radius R4) at the cam surface (position P2) that abuts against the sliding wall 733c is set to a maximum diameter, and the cam diameter increases continuously from position P1 to position P2.

Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (i.e., the intermediate member 733) is continuously raised from the bottom to the top when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, and is continuously lowered from the bottom to the top when the driver 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

Therefore, when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b increases to position P2, which is the maximum diameter, and the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and the tip of the oscillating member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, the displacement modes of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) when displacing to the combined state will be described with reference to Figs. 104 to 107. Figs. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. Figs. 104 to 107 sequentially illustrate the displacement modes when each movable unit displaces to the combined (extended) state with Fig. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the operations are described as the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation, in that order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is slid upward relative to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protruding unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434, 435 of the sliding unit 400 are slid toward the center of the gaming machine 10, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated by about 45 degrees, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotated upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 in the initial position is arranged with the tip of the oscillating member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. This makes it possible to increase the space formed in the center of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state. In other words, the arrangement space for each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, allowing for a larger amount of extension during the extension operation.

Next, as shown in Figures 104 and 105, the first operation is to displace the protruding unit 11700. As shown in Figure 105, the displacement of the protruding unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710. This displaces the lifting base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 to the combined position. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the lifting base 720 is the same as in the first embodiment, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430, 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to the same distance.

By the displacement of the second operation, the lifting base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 is lifted and lowered relative to the base member 710, the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the lifting member 820 of the lifting unit 800 is displaced downward relative to the base member 810. In the third state, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

In this case, the tip of the oscillating member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is in a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, until the rotating member 11730 is arranged to the combined (extended position), the oscillating member 732 is maintained in a state close to the rotating member 11730, so that the rotating members 435, 455 can be prevented from interfering with the oscillating member 732 during the displacement to the combined position. This shortens the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (the lifting member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 is formed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, since the tip of the oscillating member 732 is in a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732 can be increased, so the rotating members 435, 455 can be made larger. This allows the pattern (character) formed by the combination of each member (rotating members 435, 455, lifting base 11720 (rotating member 11730), and lifting member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 11700, and lifting unit 800) can be made larger.

Next, as shown in Figures 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 (by rotating the driver 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (the slide unit 400 and the lifting unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 in conjunction with its displacement.

As a result, as the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is displaced, the tip of the oscillating member 732 can be raised in a direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is in the combined (extended) position, the tip of the oscillating member 732 can be moved away from the rotating member 11730, thereby making it possible to enlarge the pattern (character) formed by the lifting member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (lifting base 720).

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first embodiment described above, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is caused to abut (collide) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed to abut against the base member 410.

In this case, an abutment portion is provided on the base member 410, and the abutment portion is disposed at one end (end point) of the sliding displacement range of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431). When the stop position of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to dimensional variations in each part or variations in control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is caused to abut against the abutment member (i.e., the abutment member functions as a stopper that restricts the displacement of the left sliding member 430). By abutting the first member 431, which has a relatively slower sliding displacement speed than the second member 433, against the abutment member, the impact at the time of the abutment can be weakened and damage to both can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, in the slide unit 400, the displacement of the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451), which is the contact object (the member with which the first member 431 contacts) of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) is a sliding displacement (linear motion), and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431). However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the form of the displacement of the contact object of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) is arbitrary as long as it has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431). Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

In this way, if the abutment object has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431), when the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) abuts, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can cause the abutment object to retreat (escape), thereby exerting a cushioning effect. Also, by displacing the abutment object in the opposite direction to when it abuts, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can push back the left sliding member 430 (first member 431), assisting the initial operation of the left sliding member 430 (operation to start sliding displacement from a stopped state).

The contact object does not have to be driven by a driving means. Instead of or in addition to being driven by a driving means, it may be formed so as to be biased by a biasing means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is contacted, the biasing means is elastically deformed to exert the above-mentioned cushioning effect, and the elastic recovery force pushes back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), thereby assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430.

In the first embodiment, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are described as being positioned at the extended position by the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 at approximately the same time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper displacement member 530 may be positioned at the extended position first, and then the lower displacement member 640 may be positioned at the extended position (i.e., the lower abutment portion 643 abuts against the upper abutment portion 533 in a stopped state). Even in this case, as in the above embodiment, the impact at the time of abutment (collision) can be weakened and rebound suppressed by changing (reducing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment target.

In the above first embodiment, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are described as being formed so that the upper displacement member 530, which is the contact object of the lower displacement member 640 (the object against which the lower displacement member 640 contacts (combines) in the extended position), is displaceable; however, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact object may be stationary (undisplaceable). Even in this case, as in the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened and rebound suppressed by changing (reducing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact object.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the rotation position of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600 when the lower displacement member 640 is positioned in the extended position is set to the extended rotation position, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the extended position may be the vertical rotational position. In other words, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotational position may be the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 may be configured to abut against the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position.

Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is disposed in the extended position may be a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, a rotational position in which the drive arm 630 is rotated 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). In other words, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position may be the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 may be configured to abut against the upper displacement member 530 at the extended position.

In any of these configurations, the change (decrease) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target can reduce the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. As an example of another structure, a cylindrical guide pin is provided protruding from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin can slide is provided extending into the base member 610, and the guide pin is slid along the guide groove to displace the lower displacement member 640 between the retracted position and the extended position.

In the case of such a structure, the shape of the guide groove is set so that at least the component of the displacement (speed) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact object (the object with which the lower displacement member 640 contacts (combines) at the extended position) is reduced at least near the extended position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, the change (reduction) in the speed component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact object can weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

In the above first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, only the lower combined unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the speed component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper combined unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) may be formed so that the speed component in the direction toward the contact object can be reduced. In this case, the lower combined unit 600 may be turned upside down and disposed as the upper combined unit 500.

In the above first embodiment, the driving state (power supply) of the drive motors 543, 672 in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 is maintained constant (i.e., the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the driving state (power supply) of the drive motors 543, 672 may be increased or decreased (i.e., the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 may be increased or decreased). For example, a form is exemplified in which the power supply to the drive motors 543, 672 is reduced so that at least the component in the direction toward the other of the speed components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the vicinity of the extension position is reduced, thereby reducing the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630. Note that the target for reducing the supply power may be only one of the drive motors 543, 672, or both.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which in the protrusion unit 700, the position at which the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposed member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 abut is located on a vertical line passing through the center of rotation of the driver 761 when viewed from the front (see Figure 40), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the position at which the above-mentioned bottom surface and cam surface abut may be set to a position separated to one side in the horizontal direction from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of the driver 761. In this case, it is preferable that the weights of the oscillating member 732 and the interposed member 733 are applied to the driver 761 so that the driver 761 rotates in a rotation direction that raises the protruding member 735 when the oscillating member 732 and the interposed member 733 are lowered by their own weight, and that the weights of the oscillating member 732 and the interposed member 733 are applied to the driver 761 so that the driver 761 rotates in a rotation direction that raises the oscillating member 732 and the interposed member 733 when the protruding member 735 is lowered by its own weight. This is because the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced by utilizing the weights of the oscillating member 732, the interposed member 733, and the protruding member 735.

In the first embodiment, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 in the protruding unit 700 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of radius R1 to the minimum diameter of radius R2. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from position P1 when the driver 761 is placed in the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set to correspond to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driver 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swinging member 732 starts can be made to coincide with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 starts, enhancing the presentation effect.

In the first embodiment described above, in the protrusion unit 700, while one of the oscillating member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a vertical (gravity) upward displacement (speed) component, the other has a vertical (gravity) downward displacement (speed) component, and while one of the oscillating member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a vertical (gravity) downward displacement (speed) component, the other has a vertical (gravity) upward displacement (speed) component, thereby equalizing the load on the drive motor 763. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the load on the drive motor 763 may be equalized by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) of the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the center of rotation of the driver 761).

In other words, in an area where the load required for the cam portion 761b to act on the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so that the load required for the sliding pin 761c to act on the sliding hole 735b is relatively small, and conversely, in an area where the load required for the sliding pin 761c to act on the sliding hole 735b is relatively large, the shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required for the cam portion 761b to act on the sliding wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment described above, in the protrusion unit 700, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as a biasing force in a direction to lower the protrusion member 735 (slide downwards), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may act as a biasing force in a direction to raise the protrusion member 735 (slide upwards). In this case, the initial speed when the protrusion member 735 slides upward from a stopped state can be increased by the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above.

In the second embodiment described above, the sliding unit 2400 is described in which the transmission gear 2437a has a tooth portion 2437a1 and a bulge portion 2437a2, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the rotation transmission member 2485 may be formed with bulges whose tooth thickness gradually decreases. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the second drive state in which meshing is released to the first drive state in which meshing is engaged.

Furthermore, bulges may be formed on both sides of the vertically arranged gears of the transmission gear 2437a and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, bulges are formed on the gears that mesh when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, so that switching from the disengaged second drive state to the engaged first drive state can be performed more smoothly.

In this case, by forming bulges on both sides of the mating gears where the tooth thickness gradually decreases, the thickness dimension of the bulges (the dimension in the gear tooth width direction) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments described above, a case was described in which the left slide member 430, 2430 in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400 is displaced from the first drive state to the second drive state when it is displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide member 430, 430 may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state when it is displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine).

In the above fourth embodiment, a case was described in which the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a, 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 in the slide unit 4400 are made small to increase their rigidity, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the tooth width dimension of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a, 4414a may be made large to increase their rigidity.

In this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, it is possible to prevent damage to the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a, 4414a, and improve the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414.

In the sixth embodiment, the slide unit 6400 is described as having the protrusion 6411a that applies a displacement to the operator 6438 formed on the base member 6411, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a may be formed on the rear case 300 and disposed so as to abut against the operator 6438. In other words, the position at which the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and it is sufficient that it is formed on a member on the displacement trajectory of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the slide unit 6400 and slide unit 7400 are described as being displaced from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state when the left slide member 6430, 7430 is displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide member 6430, 7430 may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state when it is displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine).

In the seventh embodiment, the roller 7465 that applies a displacement to the operator 6438 is disposed on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The roller 7645 that applies a displacement to the operator 6438 may be disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 may be displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the distance by which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the distance by which the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d may be formed to be smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the distance by which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the distance by which the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433 are different.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments described above, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432, and the third member 8445, 9445 in the slide unit 8400, 9400 are slid and displaced into the performance area K, the performance area K becomes invisible. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, some or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432, and the third member 8445, 9445 may be formed from a light-transmitting material, making some or all of the performance area K visible.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the left side surface of the base member 8431b, 9431b as viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 8434, 9434 as viewed from the front are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction, and the left side surface of the base member 8434, 9434 as viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 8446, 9446 as viewed from the front are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-to-rear direction. However, the left side surface of the base member 8431b, 9431b as viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 8434, 9434 as viewed from the front may be arranged to overlap in the front-to-rear direction, and the left side surface of the base member 8434, 9434 as viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 8446, 9446 as viewed from the front may be arranged to overlap in the front-to-rear direction.

In the above first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extending) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732 come into contact with each other is described as a case in which the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the oscillating member 732 when they are closer than the reference position due to variation in control or dimensions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position in which they constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped by colliding with the oscillating member, and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435, 455 are displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the base members 434, 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475, 476 is lengthened. Therefore, while it takes time to transmit the stopping operation of the drive motors 475, 476, by stopping the displacement operation by abutting the rotating members 435, 455 against the oscillating member 732, the displacement can be stopped quickly at the combined (extending) position.

In the above first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extending) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732 is used to further displace the rotating members 435, 455, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the second members 436, 456 disposed on the rotating members 435, 455 may be rotated in the opposite direction to that in the first embodiment to extend into the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732.

In this case, the second members 436, 456 are disposed in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the oscillating member 732, and the size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating member 730 (lifting base 720), and the lifting member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

In the above eleventh embodiment, when the lifting unit 800, the sliding unit 400, and the protruding unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (extending) position, the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (lifting base 720) are arranged in a spaced apart state. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (lifting base 720) may be arranged in abutting contact. In this case, since the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 are arranged in abutting contact, it is easy to increase the size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating member 11730 (lifting base 720), and the lifting member 820 to the combined position.

In the above first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extending) position and the rotating members 435, 455 come into contact with the oscillating member 732, the rotating member 730 rotates to absorb the impact when the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the oscillating member 732, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lift base 720 may be rotated relative to the base member 710.

In this case, the rotating member 730 is connected to a transmission path that transmits the drive to rotate it relative to the lifting base 720, making it difficult for the rotating member 730 to rotate relative to the lifting base 720. However, by rotating the lifting base 720 relative to the base member 710, the rotating members 435, 455 can be easily rotated when they come into contact with the oscillating member 732, making it easier to absorb the impact when the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the oscillating member 732.

In the first embodiment described above, when the second performance mode is formed, the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a portion of the abutting portion of the abutting portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the abutting portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 may be disposed in a manner that covers the entire front side of the abutting portion of the abutting portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the abutting portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may also be disposed on the front side of an area beyond this.

In this case, the rotating member 435 can prevent the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 from being visible to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to recognize them as a pattern (character) of the second presentation mode, which would result in a loss of interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in Figure 2, the variable display unit 80 is provided in the approximate center area of the game board 13, and the first winning hole 64 is provided below it. Furthermore, in the right area (hereinafter referred to as the right area) of the game board 13 where the ball launched to jump over the variable display unit 80 along the outer rail 77 flows down, there are provided a through gate 66, a second winning hole 140, an electric role 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 and variable between an open state in which the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, a specific winning hole 65a, and a variable winning device 65 associated with the specific winning hole 65a and variable between an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, a lottery for a special symbol is executed based on the entry of a ball into the first winning slot 64, and a variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the variable displayed third symbol is displayed stopped in a predetermined stopped display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (bonus game) that is advantageous to the player is executed.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the player plays a game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as a right-hitting game) to get the ball into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters this specific winning port 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the normal game state, which is the game state in which the jackpot game is not being played, the ball is played by entering the first winning hole 64, and in the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is being played, the player aims for the variable winning device 65 by hitting the ball from the right. Therefore, by varying the area in which the ball is shot depending on the game state, the player can feel that he or she is playing a game.

Furthermore, the variable winning device 65, which is opened during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which a ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to Figures 108 to 110, but the variable winning device 65 has two paths through which a ball that has entered can pass, and is configured so that a ball that has flowed down one of these paths passes through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, when a ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a probability change game state (hereinafter referred to as the probability change state) is granted, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends and in which the lottery result for the special pattern is likely to be a jackpot.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right-side area unit (not shown) into which balls that are launched by right-hand play and pass through a through gate 66 provided in the right area of the game board 13 flow. This right-side area unit is provided with a crane with three discharge holes through which balls can pass, as a distribution means for distributing the inflowing balls to multiple paths. Of the three discharge holes formed in this crane, balls that pass through one discharge hole flow down the first path and are guided to the second winning hole 140. And balls that do not enter the second winning hole 140 are guided to a specific general winning hole (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, balls that pass through the other two discharge holes out of the three discharge holes formed in the crane flow down the second path and are guided to the variable winning device 65. And balls that do not enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 are discharged as they are from the second path, pass through the first outlet 71, and are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to simultaneously generate balls that can enter the second winning port 140 or a specific general winning port during a jackpot game, and balls that can enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, so it is possible to complicate the flow of balls during a jackpot game, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the configuration pays out prize balls for balls that enter the second winning port 140 or a specific general winning port, it is possible to receive prize balls for balls that enter multiple winning ports during a jackpot game, which has the effect of increasing the number of prize balls that a player can win during a jackpot, and encouraging the player to play with enthusiasm.

Furthermore, an effect may be executed based on balls that enter a specific general winning port during a jackpot game. For example, an effect may be executed based on the number of balls that enter a specific general winning port during a jackpot game exceeding a predetermined number. In this case, the number of balls that enter the specific general winning port can be increased for a jackpot that has a longer period during which the jackpot game is played (a jackpot with a large number of rounds, or a jackpot that is difficult to win at the specific winning port 65a), so that the player can be given a bonus even if a situation occurs during the jackpot game where it is difficult for balls to win at the specific winning port 65a.

In addition, the device may be configured to execute an effect based on a ball entering a specific general winning port during a period during which it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning port 65a during a jackpot game, i.e., during a period when the variable winning device 65 is closed (the opening period, interval period, or ending period). This allows the player to play a game in which balls are continuously fired during a jackpot game, and prevents the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing.

As described above, in addition to the effects based on the ball entering the specific general winning port during a jackpot game, effects (notifications) may be executed when the ball does not enter the specific general winning port during a jackpot game. For example, in a case where a distribution member is provided that distributes balls that can enter the specific winning port 65a and balls that can enter the specific general winning port at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1) by playing right-hand during a jackpot game, if it is determined that the ball did not enter the specific general winning port during a jackpot game or during one round of play during a jackpot game, a notification to that effect may be issued. This allows for early detection of cases where a jackpot game is not being played by normal right-hand play, or of abnormalities in various devices (distribution members, etc.) provided on the game board 13.

In addition, a moving member having a path through which the ball can pass is provided on the way of the ball that has flowed into the right area unit (not shown) to the Krun as a drop position changing means for making the position at which the ball falls on the Krun indefinite. This moving member is configured to move back and forth within a predetermined range (about 5 cm) in the left and right direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 2) by a motor not shown, and the position at which the ball is discharged (the position at which the ball falls on the Krun) can be made different depending on the timing at which the ball flows into the moving member. In this way, by providing a moving member as a drop position changing means above the Krun, which is the distribution means, it is possible to make the movement of the ball on the Krun more complex. It is preferable to set the moving speed of the moving member described above to a speed at which the drop positions of the balls that are continuously shot and fall on the Krun are separated by 10 mm or more. By setting it in this way, it is possible to suppress damage to the device caused by balls that fall continuously on the Krun colliding with each other and bouncing off. Furthermore, even if the distance between the crane and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent the balls that fell first from interfering with the balls that fell later, causing ball jams.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, a mechanism in the shape of a crane is used as the distribution means, but any configuration capable of distributing the balls to multiple paths may be used. For example, a flow path switching member may be used that switches the flow direction of the next ball flowing down depending on the weight of the ball flowing down, or a switching member may be used that electrically switches the flow path of the ball. Furthermore, in this control example, a moving member is used as the drop position changing means so that the position where the ball falls on the crane is not fixed, but any configuration capable of changing the drop position of the ball may be used. For example, the crane itself may be moved.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, if the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned probability change state will be entered, whereas if the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the normal game state will be entered, aiming for the first winning hole 64.

Here, in the probability variable state in this control example, as described above, the probability that the result of the lottery for the special symbol will be a jackpot is high, and the probability that the normal symbol, which is drawn by passing through the through gate 66, will be a winning symbol is also set to be high. Furthermore, the time until the lottery results for the special symbol and the normal symbol are determined (hereinafter referred to as the variable time) is set to be shorter than in the normal game state. In addition, the probability variable state in this control example is set to continue after the jackpot game ends until the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a lottery result other than a jackpot 100 times in a row, and after the lottery for the special symbol is a lottery result other than a jackpot 100 times in a row, it is set to transition from the probability variable state to the normal game state. By setting a limit on the period during which the probability variable state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play in order to win a jackpot, and there is an effect of improving the interest of the game. The duration of the probability change state may be set to something other than the above. For example, it may continue until the next big win is won, or a transition lottery may be held to transition the probability change state to the normal game state at the same time that the lottery for the special symbol is held. The duration of the probability change state may also be set by time.

Furthermore, in the high probability state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric device 140a, which is driven to open when a winning normal symbol lottery is won when the ball passes through the through gate 66, is set to be an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric device 140a set during the high probability state is set to have a longer period of time in the open state during which the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 than the opening pattern set during the normal game state.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to execute right-hand play during the special probability state, and to play efficiently by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second winning port. Therefore, right-hand play can be continued from the start of the jackpot game until the special probability state ends, providing the player with easy-to-understand gameplay.

<Regarding the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to Figs. 108 to 110. Fig. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in Fig. 108, the variable winning device 65 includes an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 65c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 65b for screwing the variable winning device 65 to the game board 13, an LED board 65d arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d between the base member 65c and the LED board 65d, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. the flow path cover body 65g which is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a switching member 65h which protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i which engages with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j which is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, a flow path solenoid 65k which is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j and which operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m which covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 65j with screws.

Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. Figure 109 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and Figure 109 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in Figure 109 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward and left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left in Figure 109 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in Figure 110 (b).

As shown in FIG. 109(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a can be switched between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 65f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from within the specific winning hole 65a by retreating to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

By configuring it in this way, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the top surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second winning port 140. Therefore, even during time-saving play (including during special bonus play), it is possible to have the game ball enter the second winning port 140 while still hitting it to the right, reducing the effort of having to immediately change the playing method to hitting it to the left after a jackpot play. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. This shortens the time required for a big win game, and improves the efficiency of the game.

Figure 109(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 109(b). As shown in Figure 109(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 110, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 65e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 described below.

Figure 110(a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 65e showing the state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in Figure 110(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game balls, and is rotatably supported on the flow path cover body 65g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 65h2 can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the special variable switch 65e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability game state (probability change game state). In other words, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning slot for granting the probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to allocate the game state after the jackpot game to either a low probability game state (normal game state) or a probability change game state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the specific winning port 65a during the jackpot game, so the interest of the player can be improved even during the jackpot game. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Also, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, the game ball that enters the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the case of jackpot B, it is configured not to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability change award rate can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it can be configured to prevent excessive advantages and disadvantages from occurring.

Referring to Figure 110(b), we will explain the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. Figure 110(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is not activated and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all of the game balls that entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the special chance switch 65e3.

This prevents a problem in which a winning ball that won 13 rounds ago is not released and wins in the 13th round, causing the probability of winning switch 65e3 to be triggered even if the winning ball is a jackpot B.

In this way, a game ball that has entered a specific winning port 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on that, prize balls (15 prize balls for each winning ball in this embodiment) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after detection to distribute whether it passes through the probability change switch 65e3 or not, a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to grant a probability change game state. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port for granting a probability change game state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, Fig. 111(a) is a diagram showing the area division settings and the effective line settings of the display screen, and Fig. 111(b) is a diagram showing an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is made up of 10 main designs numbered "0" to "9". Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" to "9" added above it, and the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols line up is performed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up is performed.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Big Win B", a variable display will be displayed in which the main symbols with the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" added will line up. Also, if it is "Big Win A", a variable display will be displayed in which the main symbols with the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" added will line up. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a predetermined combination of main symbols indicating a small win (for example, the combination of main symbols "3", "4", "1" in order from the left pattern column Z1 on the active line L1) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two, top and bottom, with the bottom 2/3 being the main display area Dm which displays the changing third pattern, and the remaining top 1/3 being the secondary display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The above-mentioned third pattern is displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern column Z1, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the center pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each play, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. When the third symbols stop, if they line up on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the secondary display area Ds is elongated horizontally and positioned above the primary display area Dm, and is further divided equally in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Of these, small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first winning slot 64 but have not yet been changed (reserved balls), and small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas that display preview performance images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third design are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a video is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot. In the small area Ds2 in the center, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning slot 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Also, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

In this control example, the balls entering the first winning hole 64 are configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Also, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

In addition, in this control example, the display form of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the performance display being executed. Therefore, when the same reference numerals are used in the explanation of each performance described below, this indicates that the display or area has the same function, and even if the location (display form) of the display or area is different, the same reference numerals will be used to explain the display or area.

Next, referring to Fig. 112 and Fig. 113, the display mode of the performance executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of this pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 112(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation performance executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol, and Fig. 112(a) and Fig. 113(a)-(c) are diagrams showing an example of the performance display mode of the reach navigation performance. This reach navigation performance is a performance (sub-performance) that allows the player to visually grasp the progress of the performance (main performance) performed by the predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) and gradually notifies or suggests it. In this way, by displaying the contents of the main performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 (the performance explanation of the main performance, the variation time, and the expectation of a jackpot) using the sub-performance, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Next, the reach navigation performance will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 112(a). As shown in FIG. 112(a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is reduced and displayed in a small area Dm5 provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the main performance based on the variation pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, the reach navigation performance, which is a sub-performance, is executed in a small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

In this small area Dm4, the images that make up the reach navigation performance include a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the period during which the main performance is executed, a character Dm4b that serves as a moving display unit that visually indicates the progress of the main performance, a notification unit Dm4c that notifies at least a portion of the performance results of the main performance, and guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e that guide the player through at least a portion of the performance results of the main performance.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating the period during which the main performance is executed, and is displayed as a moving display part, character Dm4b, progressing from left to right as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. A notification part Dm4c is displayed at the right end of this time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b, which moves in response to the main performance executed in the main display area Dm, reaches the notification part Dm4c, the notification content is displayed stationary on the notification part Dm4c. Note that in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as a period display part for indicating the period during which the main performance is executed, but other displays may be used, and for example, a configuration may be used that can display the process of creating a specified finished product (e.g., a building or dish).

The character Dm4b is a moving display part that moves in response to the progress of the main performance, and is displayed moving at a constant speed from left to right on the time gauge Dm4a from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. In this way, the character Dm4b moves at a constant speed on the time gauge Dm4a, allowing the player to predict the time it will take for the character Dm4b to reach the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. Note that while only an image resembling a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b in the diagram shown in FIG. 112(a), in reality, multiple character images with different speeds of movement on the time gauge Dm4a are stored, and the length of the time gauge Dm4a and the character to be selected are controlled to be set based on the length of the selected main performance (length of the variable time).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data required to display secondary effects in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple fluctuation patterns (main effects) with different fluctuation times. The display mode (e.g., color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display unit, and the effects attached to that character may be changed to indicate the likelihood that the lottery result for the special pattern corresponding to the main effect being executed will be a jackpot, or the display mode of the selected character may be configured to suggest the direction of progress in the main effect. This has the effect of combining the function of notifying the degree of progress in the main effect and the function of suggesting the result of the main effect, making it possible to execute a performance display with a high performance effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the result of the main performance, and displays a rotating display (see FIG. 112(b)) that rotates left and right on the small area Dm4. The notification unit Dm4c is configured so that an indicator showing the result of the main performance can be displayed on both sides, and when the rotating display of the notification unit Dm4c stops, the result of the main performance is notified by the indicator that is stopped and displayed on the small area Dm4.

In this pachinko machine 10, the indicators set to notify the result of the main performance are "V", which indicates a jackpot, "X", which indicates a miss, "Development", which indicates that the main performance will continue, and "?", which indicates that the result of the main performance will not be notified. Two of these indicators are selected and rotated on the notification unit Dm4c, with one indicator (e.g., "V") displayed on one side and the other indicator (e.g., "?") displayed on the other side.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the notification section Dm4c is rotated while a "V" indicator and an "X" indicator are displayed on both sides of the notification section Dm4c, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there will be no further development when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c. In other words, the performance time of this main performance (the time during which the special pattern corresponding to the main performance changes) can be known in advance, so that the main performance can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Also, when the notification section Dm4c is rotated while a "V" indicator and an "development" indicator are displayed on both sides of the notification section Dm4c, it is possible to notify the player in advance that either a jackpot will be reached when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c, or the main performance will develop further from there, so that the player can watch the main performance with peace of mind while looking forward to the specified timing (the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c).

In this control example, a configuration is used in which multiple indicators are displayed in a rotating manner so that the player can understand them, but other configurations may be used to allow the player to understand multiple indicators. For example, a configuration in which multiple indicators are displayed in a switching manner on the notification unit Dm4c, or a configuration in which multiple indicators are displayed simultaneously on the notification unit Dm4c, and the indicator to be selected for the current performance is deleted over time, may be used.

The information display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b reaches them, a information display is executed to suggest the content of the main performance this time. When the character Dm4b reaches these information display units Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, the word "chance" is displayed, or the indicator attached to the rotating notification unit Dm4c is switched, as a presentation suggesting that the result of the main performance this time will be a jackpot. In this way, by providing the information display units Dm4d and Dm4e in the middle of the main performance, it is possible to gradually notify the player of information based on the result of the main performance, so that the player can always pay attention to the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, the information display section is configured to be able to notify the player of the results of the main performance and the duration of the main performance when the character Dm4b reaches the information display section Dm4d, Dm4e, which has the effect of diversifying the information notified to the player by the information display section. Note that, although this pachinko machine 10 has two information display sections, it may have one or three or more.

Next, the display modes at each timing of the reach navigation performance described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 112(b) and Fig. 113(a)-(c). Fig. 112(b) is a diagram showing an example of small area Dm4 after the reach navigation performance has started, Fig. 113(a) is a diagram showing an example of small area Dm4 at the timing when character Dm4b reaches notification section Dm4c in the reach navigation performance, Fig. 113(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the reach navigation performance will continue further, and Fig. 113(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after the main performance has continued in the reach navigation performance.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(b), when a reach navigation effect is executed, a moving display is executed in which a character Dm4b moves from left to right (from the starting point to the ending point) on a time gauge Dm4a. In addition, a rotating display is executed on the notification unit Dm4c so that the player can see the indicators displayed on both sides. By executing the reach navigation effect in this way, it is possible to notify the player in advance (before the lottery results for the special symbols are displayed) of information regarding the performance period of the main effect and the lottery results for the special symbols corresponding to that main effect midway through the main effect executed in the main display area Dm.

Furthermore, in FIG. 112(b), character Dm4b is shown with the words "Chance!!" displayed below guide display section Dm4d. This is a display indicating the likelihood that the current special symbol lottery result will be a jackpot, and is displayed in small area Dm4 when character Dm4b reaches guide display section Dm4c, as described above. In this way, by providing guide display section Dm4d on time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to inform the player in advance of the timing at which the display indicating the likelihood that the current special symbol lottery result will be a jackpot will be displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change the display content of the indicator displayed in the notification section Dm4c when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4d or Dm4e. As a result, for example, when the reach navigation effect is executed, the two indicators "V" and "X" are displayed in the notification section Dm4c, but when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4d, it is possible to switch the indicator displayed in the notification section Dm4c to the two indicators "V" and "Development". By changing the display content of the notification section Dm4c at a predetermined timing (when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4d) in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation content of the reach navigation effect, which is a secondary presentation, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Next, referring to FIG. 113(a), a reach navigation performance in which character Dm4b reaches notification section Dm4c will be described. As shown in FIG. 113(a), when character Dm4b reaches notification section Dm4c, the rotating display of notification section Dm4c stops, and the indicator "?" displayed on one side of notification section Dm4c is displayed stationary in small area Dm4. When this indicator "?" is displayed, a performance is executed in which character Dm4b is knocked away and returned to the point on time gauge Dm4a where guidance display section Dm4d is located, as shown in FIG. 113(b).

The indicator "?" displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is an indicator that prevents the player from knowing whether the main performance will end at this timing or continue, and if the current main performance does not develop, the performance will end without the character Dm4b getting up after the performance display in Figure 113 (b). On the other hand, if the current main performance develops and continues, the reach navigation performance in which the character Dm4b gets up and moves on the time gauge Dm4a is executed again, as shown in Figure 113 (c). In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (the display mode of the surrounding effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can know that the reach navigation performance corresponding to the developed main performance is being executed.

The position to which character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113(b) is returned is determined based on the duration of the main performance after development. Specifically, if the time it takes for character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a and reach the notification section Dm4c is 20 seconds, and the time of the main performance after development (the remaining duration of the main performance is 10 seconds) is reached, character Dm4b is returned to the center position of the time gauge Dm4a. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to display the reach navigation performance corresponding to the main performance after development using the time gauge Dm4a and the movement speed of character Dm4b corresponding to the main performance before development, making it possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute the reach navigation performance, which is a secondary performance.

Furthermore, the player can predict the duration of the main performance after development based on the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. In this pachinko machine 10, a long variable time is likely to be selected when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, so the closer the character Dm4b is returned to a position near the start of the time gauge Dm4a, the more the player will think that they have won the jackpot, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. In addition, when the indicator displayed on the notification unit Dm4c is "?", the player is not notified of whether the main performance will develop this time, so after checking the position to which the character Dm4b is returned (after predicting the performance period if it develops), the player will pay close attention to the performance of whether the character Dm4b will stand up or not. This has the effect of enhancing the performance effect of the reach navigation performance.

As explained above, the reach navigation effect used in this embodiment makes it possible to notify the player in advance of information about the main effect, which is an effect that shows the lottery results for special symbols, and therefore has the effect of making the player focus on the main effect while predicting the direction of the main effect. Also, by displaying information about the main effect in stages, it is possible to make the player continue to focus on the effect, which has the effect of further improving the effect of the effect.

Note that the reach navigation performance described with reference to Figures 112 and 113 is merely an example, and the reach navigation performance used in this control example is executed in various other performance displays. For example, in the reach navigation performance described above, a character modeled after a rabbit is used as the moving display unit, but other characters such as a character modeled after a turtle or a character modeled after a person can be displayed. In this way, when selecting a character to be used in this reach navigation performance from among multiple characters, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special pattern and the performance content of the main performance being executed. This makes it possible to correlate the display content of the main performance and the sub-performance, and has the effect of providing a performance that does not feel strange to the player. In this case, it is also preferable to display a character in the reach navigation performance, which is a sub-performance, before the character is displayed in the main performance. This has the effect of allowing the content of the main performance to be understood in advance by looking at the reach navigation performance, and further enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, the movement speed of character Dm4b in the reach navigation performance executed in response to the main performance before the development may be different from the movement speed of character Dm4b in the reach navigation performance executed in response to the main performance after the development. This has the effect of preventing the performance period of the main performance after the development from being easily grasped, since the duration of the main performance after the development is notified based on the position to which the character is returned and the movement speed of character Dm4b.

The position to which character Dm4b is returned may also indicate the expected degree of development of the main performance. Specifically, areas with high and low expected degrees of development may be provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and if character Dm4b is returned to the area with high expected degrees of development, there is a high probability that the main performance will develop. This has the effect of drawing the player's attention to the position to which character Dm4b is returned, further enhancing the effect of the performance.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 299) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 299 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), for example, and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning slot 64. The value of the random number that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol has won. In addition, this first winning random number table is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and one for when the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is higher than that at the low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each type is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot changes when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high. Note that the first winning random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is high and the first winning random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is low are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The first winning random number table 202a will now be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) is set that is judged as a winning in each game state in the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a high probability game state, in the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9", and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is judged as a jackpot. Also, when the game state is a normal game state, it is judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is judged as a jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 when a special pattern jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first winning slot 64.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special pattern jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. In this first win random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random number value that results in a jackpot for the special symbol, and this random number value "0" is stored in the first win random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 400, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 10 random number values that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and these values, "0 to 9," are stored in the first jackpot random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 10 out of a total of 400, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is 1/40.

The random number value for a jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number value for a jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability may be set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for a jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, that random number value may be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In response to this, by changing the random number value for a jackpot depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for a special pattern or a low probability state for a special pattern), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value for a jackpot with a special pattern, thereby preventing fraud.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, in this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 29", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, when the random number value is any of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, the types of jackpots are two, but this is not limited to this, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is hit with the second special pattern, by setting a jackpot type that is executed in a larger number of rounds, the player can be more likely to expect a hit with the second special pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make a hit in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment of the game during the high probability state. This makes the player want to move to a high probability state, encouraging them to play for longer.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a miss occurs, and selects two stop (performance) patterns: a "miss reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) in which the final stop symbol stops with a symbol other than the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and a "complete miss" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second winning hole 140.

The random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this control example, the table is divided into one for when the special symbol has a high probability and one for when the special symbol has a low probability, and the range of random numbers set for each losing stop type is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of high probability of the special symbol or a state of low probability of the special symbol.

For example, in a high probability state, since a jackpot is likely to occur, a table for high probability with a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary, making it easier for "complete miss" to be selected. Also, in a low probability state, a table for low probability with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is selected to ensure time for the ball to enter the first winning slot 64, making it harder for "complete miss" to be selected.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. The display mode is determined, specifically, by the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 129) described below is executed once, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "Miss (for long time)", "Miss (for short time)", "Miss normal reach", various "Miss super reach" are defined as variation patterns for misses, and various "Normal reach" and "Super reach" are defined as variation patterns for jackpot A. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although not shown in the figure, the voice lamp control device 113 also has a variation pattern selection table 222a set, and more detailed variation pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in accordance with the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output by the main control device 110.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal pattern is set by a normal pattern winning random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal pattern set by the normal pattern winning random number table, it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning normal pattern. In addition, this normal pattern winning random number table is divided into two types: one for low probability of normal patterns (period in which the normal pattern is in the normal state) and one for high probability of normal patterns (period in which the normal pattern is in the time-saving state) in which the probability of a winning normal pattern is higher than that at the low probability, and the number of random numbers that result in a winning normal pattern included in each type is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a winning normal pattern different, the probability of a winning normal pattern is changed between low probability and high probability. In this control example, it is specified that the normal pattern is also set to a high probability in accordance with the timing when the special pattern transitions to a high probability state, and the normal pattern is also set to a low probability in accordance with the timing when the special pattern transitions to a low probability state. In other words, there is no game state in which the special symbols have a low probability and the normal symbols have a high probability.

As shown in Figure 116 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that will result in a winning normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a normal symbol winning random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 24 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a winning normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric device 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern is hit, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a winning normal symbol, ranging from 5 to 204. These random number values are stored in a normal symbol winning random number table for high probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are a total of 240 random number values, and the total number of winning random number values is 200, so the probability of a winning normal symbol is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the release period of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 opens only "1 second x 2 times" when a normal symbol is a winning symbol, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may open "3 seconds x 3 times."

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 121) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 129).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device (not shown), depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, the contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be explained with reference to Figures 115 to 117.

Figure 115(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in Figure 115(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d.

Now, with reference to FIG. 116(a), the contents of the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) is a table that specifies the random number value that results in a jackpot for a special pattern. When the random number value specified in this first winning random number table 202a matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined that a jackpot for a special pattern has occurred.

This first random number table 202a is provided with a jackpot determination value (low probability jackpot determination value) for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot when the probability of the special pattern is low, and a jackpot determination value (high probability jackpot determination value) for determining whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot when the probability of the special pattern is high, and the number of determination values (random numbers) that result in a jackpot for each is different. In this way, by making the number of determination values (random numbers) that result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot changes when the probability of the special pattern is low and when the probability of the special pattern is high.

Next, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116(b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected in accordance with the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). Specifically, for special symbol 1, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to "0 to 49" as the judgment value for jackpot A, and "50 to 99" as the judgment value for jackpot B, and for special symbol 2, the value of the first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is set as the judgment value for jackpot A.

As described above, "jackpot A" is configured so that the game ball that enters the variable winning device 65 can pass through the special probability switch 65e3 (i.e., a determination is made as to whether or not a special probability state will be entered), whereas "jackpot B" is configured so that it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the special probability switch 65e3 (i.e., a determination is not made as to whether or not a special probability state will be entered).

Furthermore, the allocation of the jackpot type is specified to be different between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and the ratio of "jackpot A" being selected among jackpots in special pattern 1 is 50%, and "jackpot A" is selected 100% among jackpots in special pattern 2. Here, as described above, special pattern 2 is a pattern for which a lottery is executed when a ball enters the second winning hole 140, and the lottery is executed in the probability variable state where the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 in a normal game state, and the lottery is executed in the probability variable state where the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. In this control example, when the lottery for the special pattern is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot once after the transition to the probability variable state, the game is configured to transition to the normal game state, so that it is possible to repeatedly play in the probability variable state by continuing to win a jackpot again before the 100th lottery for the special pattern is executed after the transition to the probability variable state. Therefore, the player will play eagerly to win the next jackpot as soon as possible after the transition to the probability variable state, which can improve the interest of the game.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 116(c). FIG. 116(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 116(c)) is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal pattern is stored. As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of the normal pattern is low (in the normal state of the normal pattern), it is judged that the normal pattern is a winning pattern when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. As described above, when it is judged that the normal pattern is a winning pattern, after the variable display on the second pattern display device (not shown) has ended, a "○" pattern is lit and displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is specified for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this variation pattern selection table 202d, multiple different tables corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(a), at least a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117(b)), a miss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117(c)), and a miss (high probability) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117(d)) are defined.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot is set. As the fluctuation patterns for a jackpot, various normal reaches (30 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as the judgment value.

Specifically, for the normal reach type (30 seconds) fluctuation pattern, "0 to 50" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, for the super reach type (60 seconds) fluctuation pattern, "51 to 179" is set as the judgment value, and for the special reach type (90 seconds) fluctuation pattern, "180 to 198" is set as the judgment value. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, it selects from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 a fluctuation pattern for which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set.

Figure 117 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 from a stop type selection table (not shown) as to whether the stop type is a complete miss (non-reach) or a reach miss (common to reach). Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a miss reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time are set. For a short miss (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a long miss (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set.

In addition, for missed reaches, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 149" for all missed normal reaches (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for all missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" for all missed special reaches (90 seconds).

In this way, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss during normal game mode, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type, and selects a fluctuation pattern from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 obtained from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

Figure 117 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (probable chance) variation pattern table 202d3. This miss (probable chance) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol that results in a miss when the gaming state is a probable chance gaming state. This miss (probable chance) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the miss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different.

As mentioned above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach is determined.

In this way, when in a probability variation game state, the probability of reaching a winning jackpot in the event of a miss is set lower than in a normal game state. This prevents the time it takes for a miss to fluctuate during a probability variation game from becoming longer, and the time it takes to hit a jackpot from becoming longer. This prevents the game from becoming drawn out during a probability variation game state, when a jackpot is more likely to occur, and makes the player feel bored.

Returning to FIG. 115, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 115(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 115(b), the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a special chance setting flag 203h, a special chance passing counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, an alarm counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203p, a special chance effective flag 203q, a special chance effective timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a special chance counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning slot 64.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this control example, in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3. This is a memory area for the second winning hole 140 (second special symbol), and differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the first winning hole 64 (first special symbol) is changed to the second winning hole 140 (second special symbol), so a detailed description is omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the first special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the second special pattern (second pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the second winning port 140 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning port 140 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a special pattern is executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 for the variable display of the first special pattern) or the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N2 for the variable display of the first special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206, S211 in FIG. 122 and S405, S411 in FIG. 124). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern (reserved pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 66. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 66 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When a ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, when a ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 126: No).

The high probability setting flag 203h is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to a high probability game state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to a high probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the high probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this high probability switch 65e3, the high probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown, it is set to OFF based on the high probability counter 203t being set to ON. Note that this high probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state it was in immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

If the special chance setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance switch 65e3 was passed, the special chance setting flag 203h may be set to on and restored. In this case, whether the special chance switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203i, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203h to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during a jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). The probability change passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later can be used to determine whether all game balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a have been discharged. The probability change passing counter 203i is updated by adding one each time the probability change switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). After executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the counter is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 135). The probability change passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the counter is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game. Specifically, the winning number counter 203j is updated by incrementing by one based on the detection of the passage of a game ball through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided on the variable winning device 65 (see S1403 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability change passing counter 203i) match, and then it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of this winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for timing (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a big win A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the case of a big win B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round in the case of a big win A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the case of a big win B. Meanwhile, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 at a time in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF based on the value of the operation counter 203k being determined to be 0. In addition, the operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the type of jackpot.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this control example, a sound saying "Look at the LCD") to attract the player's attention. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are entered into the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by subtracting one by one by the processing of S1302 of the notification processing (see FIG. 133) of the main control device 110. When the notification counter 203m becomes 0, a notification command is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the processing to output the above-mentioned sound.

By configuring in this way, before the start of the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, a voice saying "Look at the liquid crystal" is output, so the player looks at the third symbol display device 81, which corresponds to the liquid crystal. Here, details will be described later, but in the 12th round of the big win game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the word "Attention" is displayed as a notice to encourage the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. Since the flow path solenoid 65k is operated in the 13th round, if the player looks at the operation, the type of big win that is being executed will be determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to make the player continue to expect that the probability variable game state will be granted until the end of the big win game, a notice performance is executed that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. However, when the 12th round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during that interval period, a notification effect is executed to notify the player by audio to focus on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the display content that is displayed after the interval effect is executed, and to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h, but the player may be notified to hold his hand over the variable winning device 65 before the start of the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Also, the player may be notified to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like, not limited to the third symbol display device 81, to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be notified to display a three-dimensional code or the like during the 12th round and to read it with a mobile phone, to divert the player's attention. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends is set for the diversion effect. This can suppress the malfunction of determining whether the jackpot is A or B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag that indicates that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has closed in one round, making it possible to execute the abnormality processing described below. When this remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203p described below is updated by incrementing by one. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 closes. In this control example, the time required for the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p (3 seconds in this control example), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match (S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65. This prevents the fraudulent practice of leaving game balls in the variable winning device 65 and then causing the game balls to reach the switching member 65h earlier than they actually are by applying an impact or the like at the start of the 13th round, causing the game balls to pass through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot B. This remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round starts, so the next round will not be played and a new win will not occur before the remaining ball timer 203p reaches its upper limit.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203h may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch 65e3. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability game state from being improperly granted.

The high probability valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not a game ball passing through the high probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off is to be considered valid. When this high probability valid flag 203q is set to on, it indicates that the time required for the game ball that last entered the specific winning port 65a to pass through the high probability switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being on has not yet elapsed. In other words, it indicates that a period is in which it is possible for a game ball to pass through the high probability switch 65e3.

The special chance valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203r can determine the period required for a ball to pass normally through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned OFF. In this control example, it takes one second for a game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a to pass through the special chance switch 65e3. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and if the ball passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after that, it is determined to be an illegal ball and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as fraudulently changing the switching member 65h to pass the game ball through the special probability switch 65e3, or using a piano wire or the like to push the game ball up from below the special probability switch 65e3 to pass it through the special probability switch 65e3, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the dispense confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of dispensed balls have been determined (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The special symbol counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the special symbol state. This special symbol counter 203t is set to 100 if the special symbol setting flag is on when the jackpot game ends (S1203 in FIG. 132), is referenced when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referenced when drawing the special symbol (S213 in FIG. 123), and is decremented by 1 when the special symbol stops changing (S221 in FIG. 122).

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 4 for further explanation, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 127) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination section 29-33 and decorative lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, other devices 228, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Next, referring to Figures 118 and 119, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation performance selection table 222b, and various other data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

The navigation performance selection table 222b is a table for selecting performance information used in the reach navigation performance described with reference to Figures 112 and 113. Here, the details of the navigation performance selection table 222b will be described with reference to Figure 119. Figure 119(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the navigation performance selection table 222b. The navigation performance selection table 222b is a table used for setting the reach navigation performance that is executed when a specified variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the navigation performance selection table 222b includes a first navigation performance selection table 222b1 and a second navigation performance selection table 222b2. Here, we will briefly explain the reach navigation performance. As shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the reach navigation performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the content of the main performance of the variable pattern (the performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm), and is a sub-performance executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112). This reach navigation performance is a performance display that is composed of a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the performance period of the main performance, a movement display section (character Dm4b) that indicates the progress of the performance in the main performance, and a notification section Dm4c and guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e that suggest and notify the content of the main performance.

The reach navigation effect described above is set so that character Dm4b can move multiple times on time gauge Dm4a, with the effect relating to the first movement being set as the first navigation effect and the effect relating to the second movement being set as the second navigation effect. The first and second navigation effects are configured so that different times can be selected using navigation effect selection table 222b, and a variety of effect patterns can be set by combining the first and second navigation effects selected using navigation effect selection table 222b.

The first navigation performance selection table 222b1 is a table that is referenced when selecting the first navigation performance. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the performance pattern of the first navigation performance is selected based on the remaining change time and the value of the performance counter 223f when the first navigation performance is executed. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation performance is executed is fixed at 30 seconds after the start of the change, so if a super reach (change time 60 seconds) is set as the change pattern of the special symbol, the remaining change time when selecting the first navigation performance is 30 seconds, and if a special reach (change time 90 seconds) is set as the change pattern of the special symbol, the remaining change time when selecting the first navigation performance is 60 seconds.

If the remaining change time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", a 20-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect, and if it is "100 to 199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect. If the remaining change time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 69", a 20-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect, and if it is "70 to 199", a 30-second effect pattern is selected as the first navigation effect.

In this way, by configuring the first navigation effect to be selectable in different time durations, the remaining change time when selecting the second navigation effect described below can be made different, allowing the reach navigation effect's performance pattern to be set in a more complex way. Furthermore, when a special reach, which has a high probability of winning the jackpot in a special symbol lottery, is set as the special symbol change pattern (when the remaining change time is 60 seconds), the first navigation effect selection table is specified so that the 30-second change pattern is set more frequently as the first navigation effect than when a super reach is set (when the remaining change time is 30 seconds), so the player can play while predicting whether the current change will develop into a special reach by watching the progress of the first effect navigation.

In addition, in the first navigation performance, the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) is used, and by changing the movement speed of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, it is possible to set a 20-second performance pattern and a 30-second performance pattern. Specifically, in the 30-second performance pattern, a character modeled after a turtle is set as the character Dm4b, and in the 20-second performance pattern, a character modeled after a rabbit is set. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the movement speed of the character moving on that time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set multiple performance patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of the reach navigation performance.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display unit, is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a, so that the expectation of a jackpot can be predicted just by looking at the character displayed in the reach navigation effect, but it is also possible to set the movement speed to be different using the same character. By configuring it in this way, only players who have experienced the reach navigation effect multiple times can understand that the movement speed of the character in the current reach navigation effect is different from the movement speed of the character in the previous reach navigation effect, which has the effect of enhancing the effect of the performance for players who have been playing for a long time.

Furthermore, in this control example, the movement speed of character Dm4b is set not to change midway through the first navigation performance. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation performance. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of character Dm4b may also be changed midway through the first navigation performance. Setting it in this manner makes it harder to predict the length of the first navigation performance.

The second navigation performance selection table 222b2 is a table that is referenced when selecting a second navigation performance using the remaining change time after the performance pattern of the first navigation performance has been selected, and the performance pattern of the second navigation performance is selected based on the remaining change time stored in the remaining time storage area 223h and the value of the last digit of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(c), when the remaining time is 10 seconds, that is, when the Super Reach (60 seconds) is selected as the special symbol change pattern and a 20-second performance pattern is selected in the first navigation performance, the remaining time is 10 seconds, and "2nd time 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation performance regardless of the performance counter value. This second time refers to the first performance in which the character Dm4b reaches the notification unit Dm4c provided at the end of the time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 113(a)), and then the performance in which the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again begins (see FIG. 113(b)). Note that in this control example, it is configured so that up to a maximum of three movement performances can be set.

Next, if the remaining time is 30 seconds, i.e., if the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the special symbol change pattern, and a 30-second presentation pattern is selected in the first navigation presentation, if the last digit of the presentation counter 223f is "0-3", then "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation, if it is "4-6", then "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation, and if it is "7-9", then "2nd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation.

If the remaining time is 40 seconds, i.e., if the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the special symbol variation pattern, and a 20-second presentation pattern is selected in the first navigation presentation, if the last digit of the presentation counter 223f is "0-3", then "2nd 10 seconds, 3rd 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation, if it is "4-6", then "2nd 20 seconds, 3rd 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation, and if it is "7-9", then "2nd 30 seconds, 3rd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation presentation.

As explained above, when setting the presentation pattern for the reach navigation presentation, the presentation period can be divided into the first navigation presentation and the second navigation presentation, making it possible to select, and thus complex presentation patterns can be easily created. Furthermore, in this control example, only the last digit of the value of the presentation counter 223f is referenced when selecting the presentation pattern for the second navigation presentation. This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting presentation patterns, since it is possible to independently select multiple presentation patterns within a single process using a single presentation counter.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will continue. With reference to FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a round count counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first winning port 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S1902 in FIG. 140). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The performance counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199 and is used for preview performances and various lotteries. Although not shown in the figure, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see Figure 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds that have been played in a jackpot game. This round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). The value of the round number counter 223g is used to determine a specified round of play during a jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a memory area for storing the remaining change time that is referenced when selecting a presentation pattern for the reach navigation presentation. When the reach navigation presentation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the remaining time storage area 223h is set with a change time based on the acquired change pattern (S2102 in FIG. 141), and is then updated to the remaining change time after the first navigation presentation is set (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the setting of the reach navigation presentation is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using this remaining time storage area 223h, it is possible to select a performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol in multiple periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, first, information indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 60 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, one of multiple performance patterns having a performance period of 20 to 50 seconds is selected as the first performance. Then, when a 40-second performance pattern is selected as the performance pattern of the first performance, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated and 20 seconds is set as the remaining fluctuation time. After that, it is possible to select the second performance using the remaining period based on the remaining fluctuation time. This has the effect of reducing the processing when selecting a performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

The temporary variable pattern storage area 223i is a memory area for temporarily storing a selected presentation pattern in a reach navigation presentation in which a variable pattern is selected in stages. When the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the temporary variable pattern storage area 223i sets the main presentation selected corresponding to the variable pattern (S2101 in FIG. 141), then sets the presentation pattern of the selected first navigation presentation (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then sets the presentation pattern of the selected second navigation presentation (S2106 in FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.

Figure 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, the reason why not all of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts at a time. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2601 in FIG. 109) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (not shown) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the one frame of image information previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of this one frame of an image and the display process of this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 111(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area that stores image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The rear images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, rear A corresponding to the "town stage", rear B corresponding to the "sky stage", and rear C corresponding to the "island stage") are all images that are horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling horizontally from left to right. This allows the rear image to be scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 main patterns (see FIG. 5) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a number of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. This causes the image controller 237 to read the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfer the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, displays related to jackpot-related commands, round presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

By announcing the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period of the normal symbol, the more opportunities there are for the ball to pass through the normal symbol starting hole 66, so there are more opportunities for the lottery of the normal symbol and the more opportunities there are for the normal symbol to be drawn. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric role to be opened when the normal symbol is won, so the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 and the lottery of the special symbol is more likely to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the normal symbol displayed, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be won can be given to the player, and the more motivated the player to participate in the game can be increased. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the second winning port 140 is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so that when a normal jackpot is reached and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second winning port 140, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be depleted or are not depleted even when playing, so the player can get a sense of the period when the balls held are unlikely to be depleted or are not depleted and a jackpot with a special pattern can be obtained. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, by announcing in the ending performance that one of the reserved special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can recognize that the reserved special symbol lottery will result in a special symbol jackpot, and the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that the special symbol will definitely result in a jackpot. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and therefore the player can continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As mentioned above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each for displays related to game information related commands, displays related to big win related commands, round effects, and demo effects. In addition, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for variable effects, will have one table for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, we will explain the details of the display data table. The display data table corresponds to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type specifies whether to display one of rears A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to C. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to C is to be displayed, the rear type also specifies which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backs A to C is to be displayed based on the back type, it determines the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among backs A to C as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back image different from backs A to C is to be displayed, it determines the back image to be displayed from the back type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table, but instead, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads out the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of the controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table. Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, which corresponds to that address.

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list, which will be described later, and also obtains transfer data information for image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should be started, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is transmitted to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) on the third pattern display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2912 in FIG. 111(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S4601 in FIG. 123(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 then generates a drawing list (described later) that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays a performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (described later) that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (described below) that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S2903 in FIG. 111(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (described later), and obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the drawing list will be explained in detail. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 16, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information that causes the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, of whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S4814 in FIG. 124) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting display areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) in which the display of character designs and point designs is prohibited during the period in which the character designs and point designs are displayed in the point design. In the point design, a total of three periods in which the character designs and point designs are displayed are set, and therefore first to third prohibited area storage areas 223m are provided for each of these periods (first to third periods). This allows a different prohibited area to be set for each period, thereby increasing the variety of designs.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo performance is in progress. When this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo performance is in progress, and when it is off, it means that a demo performance is not in progress. This demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo performance is currently in progress.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation display effect is being performed. Here, the confirmation display effect refers to an effect in which the stopped pattern is displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the variable pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see, for example, S3405 in FIG. 115(a)). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not a confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 121 to 135. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, and 239, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 122 to 124.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 66 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the special pattern change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process (S104). This special pattern change process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and the period during a predetermined time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved times N2 of the changing display of the special symbol) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted values in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223, respectively.

After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special symbol change start process is executed to start the change display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and a reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) indicating the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special pattern 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Then, the processing of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B has elapsed (S214). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is set (S215). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special pattern change start process is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern jackpot has been won is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special pattern jackpot has been won, whether it will be jackpot A or jackpot B is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, if a jackpot A is obtained, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B. If a jackpot B is obtained, the red LED is turned on, and if a miss is obtained, the red and green LEDs are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next fluctuation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216). If the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning slot is set based on the type of jackpot (S217), and then the setting for starting the jackpot (setting the jackpot for 16 rounds, etc.) is executed (S218), and the process proceeds to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of this lottery is a miss (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the special chance counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the special chance counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221). Then, when the process of S218 or S221 described above is completed, a stop command is set (S219), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 123, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is a process for determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" is selected based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203t in the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S302).

If the value of the probability bonus counter 203t is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a probability bonus state (S302: Yes), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained from the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random number values set in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)). As described above, the 10 random number values "0 to 9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After obtaining the lottery result for the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In this control example, the judgment value for determining a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this and different random number values may be used. By configuring it in this way, a random number value that is determined to be a miss for the first special symbol is determined to be a win for the second special symbol, and bias in jackpots can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to the above, and the number of random numbers determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set to be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is held for the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player can have higher expectations of a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the value of the probability bonus counter 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if the current state is not the probability bonus state (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) of the special symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116(a)). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. The random number value for the special symbol is set to one, "0", and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and this random number value for the win match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined that the result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S305: Yes), a display mode for the jackpot indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special pattern has been missed (S305: No), the display mode in the event of a miss corresponding to the special pattern is set (S308). In this process of S308, the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B is set according to the determined miss. Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown in the figure, a variation pattern command is generated to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern. When this process is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) and determines whether or not there has been a win (start winning) in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140, and if there has been a start winning, it is a process for obtaining various random number counters and executing a reservation process for the values.

When the start winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning slot 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (S406). Note that in the process of S406, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

Next, in the process from S407 to S412, the same process as in the process from S401 to S406 is also executed for a winning entry in the second winning slot 140. The only difference is that a reservation process for the second special symbol is executed for a winning entry in the second winning slot 140. As the other processes are the same, detailed explanations will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning slot (S407: No), after the process of S412, a look-ahead process is executed (S413). Then, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 125, the normal pattern change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change process (S106). This normal pattern change process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is a process for controlling the change display of the second pattern performed by the second pattern display device, the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning when the second symbol display device is displaying a win indication and when the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second pattern display device is changing (S602), and if the display mode of the second pattern display device is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display times M for the normal pattern) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state for normal symbols (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state for normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S609). The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during play in which a special symbol jackpot is in progress) and the period during which a specified time has elapsed since play in which a special symbol jackpot has ended. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the second symbol hit random number table 202c for high probability (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol hit random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 116 (c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal pattern (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special pattern or is in the normal state of the normal pattern, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal pattern is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the second win random number table 202c for low probability (S611). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second win random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the normal pattern is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a miss (see FIG. 116 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S610 or S611 is a winning normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode at the time of the winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device has ended, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible during a jackpot for a special symbol, even if a normal symbol is in a winning state, the number of times and the opening time of the electric device 140a are set in the same way as when a normal symbol is not in a winning state.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is set to 1 second, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

If it is determined in the process of S612 that the normal pattern is a miss (S612: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S618). In this process of S618, after the variable display in the second pattern display device has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S619: Yes), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S619: No), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a jackpot of a special symbol, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the time of the change display becomes very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low, and further, the opening period of the second winning hole 140 becomes very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed (S622). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device.

In the process of S622, if the change time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device. When the stop display is set by the processing of S623, the next time the second pattern display update processing (see S1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing (Fig. 125, S106) is a win of the normal symbol (S624). If the current lottery result is a win of the normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening and closing control start of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is set (S625), and this processing is terminated. When the opening and closing control start of the electric role 140a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric role opening and closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see Fig. 129) is next executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set by the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is a loss of the normal symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66, and, if a ball has passed through, acquiring and reserving the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (Fig. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal pattern variable display M) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or if the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 but the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area of the vacant reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (S705), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power outage information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S912.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S912. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 129, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power outage information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S908) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S1010 and S1011 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 129), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 122) or the start winning process (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, ending command, notification command, and error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of a special pattern jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed and a jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning port 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the specific winning port 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 (S905). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the electric role opening/closing control is set by the process of S525 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 125), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and number of openings set by the process of S516 or the process of S517 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S906). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 123), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit) in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 123).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S907). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S520 or S521 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 125), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 125), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or S518 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 125).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S908). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S908: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-mentioned processes from S901 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (299 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S902 (S911).

Here, the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S908 (S908: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 127 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S912 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The process of S98 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from a power interruption state, the process can be started from the process of S901 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at the time of power interruption, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S801), and the process can be started from the process of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 129), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (Fig. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether a special jackpot will start (S1001). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see Fig. 122) is executed, and if the start of a special jackpot is set, it is determined that a special jackpot will start. In the process of S1001, if a special jackpot will start (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a special jackpot has not started in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (S1003). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during play of a special jackpot), and the period during which a predetermined time has elapsed since play of a special jackpot has ended. If a special jackpot is not in progress in the process of S1003 (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that a jackpot with a special symbol is occurring (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Now, referring to FIG. 131, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1101. After that, this process ends. In the process of S1102, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening door 65f1 for each round are set.

Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), the round number command is set (S1105), and this process ends. In this control example, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the round number command. Then, each time the round number command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the round number command is incremented, so that the current round number can be known. This has the effect of reducing the amount of data of the command output from the main control device 110. Note that the content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. In this way, even if a malfunction occurs in the data related to the round number on the voice lamp control device 113 side (the data stored due to a power outage, etc.) the latest round information can be received each time a new round starts, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a malfunction such as the jackpot game ending midway.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will continue. In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1004: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to operate the special rate solenoid 65k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the timing to operate the special rate solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the special rate solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1008). The timing to start the ending performance is determined as the timing to start the ending performance when 15 rounds are completed, the opening and closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) which is the ball discharge time has elapsed. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1008: Yes), the special rate solenoid 65k is set to off (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). After that, this process is terminated. Although not shown in the figure, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the special rate switch 65e3, the special rate solenoid 65k is set to off. However, in consideration of the case where the big win game ends without the game ball passing through the special rate switch 65e3, the special rate solenoid 65k is set to off in the process of S1009 just in case. In this control example, the timing for starting the ending performance is set to the end of the final round of play (when the opening and closing door 65f1 closes) and the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example), but the ending performance may be executed immediately after the final round of play ends. In this case, abnormality processing for the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 can be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1010) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), the special chance counter 203t is set to 100 (S1203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the special bonus setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the processing of S1203 is skipped and this processing ends.

In this way, in this control example, at the end of a jackpot game, it is determined whether the special probability setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the special probability counter 203t is set to 100. Therefore, at the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the special probability switch 65e3 and set the special probability. Therefore, the player can continue to expect a transition to a special probability game state until the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the game ball can be made to pass through the special probability switch 65e3 during a jackpot game, the special probability game state is granted after the jackpot game, so the player can play the game while being interested in whether the game ball will pass through the special probability switch 65e3 even during the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will continue. In the process of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S1008: No), notification processing is executed (S1011). Details of the notification processing (S1011) will now be explained with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The end timing of the 12th round is determined when it is detected that 10 balls have won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S1305 process that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter to 2 seconds in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball discharge time after the end of the 12th round, and a voice saying "Look at the LCD" is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, so the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, and the player is prevented from identifying the type of big win. Therefore, the player can play until the end of the big win game in the hope of being granted a high probability game state.

In this control example, the notification counter 203m is provided to draw attention to the LCD screen from one second before the end of the interval time through the 13th round, but this is not limited to the above and may be performed continuously from the 12th round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), a notification command is set (S1304). Then, this process ends. This notification command causes the voice lamp control device 113 to set the output of a voice saying "Look at the LCD".

If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will continue. Once the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) has been executed, the prize-winning process (S1112) is executed. Now, with reference to FIG. 134, this prize-winning process (S1012) will be explained in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this prize-winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (S1401). The valid round period is the period during which the round play is set, that is, the period from the opening of the opening and closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the valid round period (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed through the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a. If it is determined that it has passed through the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is set. Then, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the opening and closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1406). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1407). Then, the process of S1408 is executed. By setting this remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball discharge time has begun since the opening and closing door 65f1 was closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by decrementing it by 1 (S1409). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the special chance switch 65e3 (S1410). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the special chance switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), the value of the special chance passing counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411). The special chance setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). Then, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the game ball has not passed the special chance switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The special probability activation flag 203q is set to ON (S1415). This process then ends. Here, by setting the special probability activation flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 65e2 passes through the special probability switch 65e3, the special probability activation game can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the special chance valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If the special chance valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chance valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), the special chance valid timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the special chance valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2s in this control example) (S1418). If it is determined that the special chance valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the special chance valid flag 203q is set to off (S1419). The special chance valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1418 that the guaranteed bonus effective timer 203r is not at its upper limit (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203r is not at its upper limit, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable game state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to be cleared. Also, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variable game state from being granted by improperly passing the game ball through the probability variable switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will continue. Once the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) has been executed, abnormality process is executed (S1013). This process then ends. This abnormality process (S1013) will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality process (S1013). In abnormality process (S1013), a process is executed to monitor whether the special probability switch 65e3 has been passed illegally.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1501). If it is outside the round valid period (S1501: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503). Then, the processing of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the processing of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), since it is during the ball drain time period, the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1505). It is determined whether the remaining ball timer 203p has reached its upper limit (3 seconds in this control example) (S1506). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit (S1506: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), it is determined whether the number of discharged balls (the total value of the special chance passing counter 203i and the number of discharged balls counter 203s) and the number of winning balls (the value of the number of winning balls counter 203j) match (S1507).

If it is determined that there is a match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). Then, the process of S1509 is executed. When the error command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Winning number mismatch error") is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This prevents fraudulent attempts to leave game balls in the variable winning device 65 and pass them through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot B.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the paid-out number counter 203s, and the special chance passing counter 203i are each reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 136 to Fig. 141, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 136, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S1716 (see FIG. 137) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), it executes the power-off processing of S1716. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1714 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1714 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1603).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes) and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S1716 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No) and the process proceeds to S1608.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1716 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1604). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1607) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the decorative lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, so the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S1609) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S1608, this occurs because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S1604 to S1606 and then to S1608, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S1610, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S1610), interrupt permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The clearing process of S1609 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S1604 to S1606 and then to S1608, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 137, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S1701 was executed (S1701). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1701: No), the processing of S1702 to S1811 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S1712. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S1701 is that S1702 to S1811 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the variable display setting processing of S1712 and the command determination processing of S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1712 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1712 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1702). Next, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1704). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S1705.

In the process of S1705, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the presentation effect, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. In addition, input as to whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third pattern display device 81 is also monitored.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the sub-LED 290 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1709, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S1710). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110.

After completing the process of S1710, a command determination process is performed (S1711) to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process proceeds to S1712. In S1712, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (S1715), and power failure processing is executed (S1716). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S1714: No), the process returns to the process of S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 138, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This process also determines whether to start a continuous preview performance by the third pattern display device 81 when a reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is first read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1801). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). If a stop type command has been received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to on (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1807). If the reserved ball number command has been received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is a special pattern 1 reserved ball number command or a special pattern 2 reserved ball number command, and the value contained in the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 (the reserved number of times N1 of the variable display in the special pattern) is extracted, and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 (the reserved number of times N2 of the variable display in the special pattern) is extracted, and this is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1808). In addition, in the process of S1808, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command or the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held. Therefore, each time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control unit 110 by processing in S1808. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. When the process of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number pattern according to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If the reserved ball count command has not been received in the process of S1807 (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809). If it is determined in the process of S1809 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S1810) and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the jackpot-related processing (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1809 that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process proceeds directly to S1811.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. If the other command is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114.

If this processing of S1811 determines that a notification command output from the main control unit 110 has been received, the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "Look at the LCD") is selected, and a display command for the notification is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 139, the jackpot-related process (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related process (S1810). This jackpot-related process (S1810) is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1901). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S1902), and this processing ends. The opening command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S1903). If it is determined in the processing of S1903 that a round number command has been received (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the round number command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S1906). If it is determined in the process of S1906 that an ending command has been received (S1906: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1906 that an ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not a V pass command has been received (S1909). If it is determined in the process of S1909 that a V pass command has been received (S2016: Yes), a display V effect command is set (S1910) to execute an effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and a probability change game state has been granted, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 140, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S2001). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S2001: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 138), the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type corresponds to a super reach or a special reach (S2004). In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the acquired variation pattern type corresponds to a super reach or a special reach (S2004: Yes), then a reach navigation performance setting process is executed (S2005). The details of this reach navigation performance setting process (S2005), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, are a process for setting a reach navigation performance (secondary performance) that guides the main variation performance (main performance) executed in the third pattern display device 81 when the acquired variation pattern type corresponds to a super reach or a special reach.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2004, if the acquired variation pattern type is not a variation pattern type corresponding to a super reach or a special reach, i.e., if the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to a miss or a normal reach (S2004: No), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2006). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the variation display of the third pattern is performed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Now, the above-mentioned reach navigation performance setting process (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this reach navigation performance setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation performance setting process (S2005), a main performance to be executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the acquired variation pattern type and a sub-performance that informs the player of the performance content (expectation level, performance period) of the main performance are set.

When the reach navigation performance setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, display variation pattern information corresponding to the main performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2101). Here, the main performance is a performance for notifying the result of the lottery for the special pattern using a performance period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is a performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 112) of the third pattern display device 81.

After the processing of S2101 is completed, the remaining time storage area 223h is then set based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S2102). This reach navigation performance setting process (S2005) executes a process for gradually setting the sub-performance based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the acquired fluctuation pattern type. Therefore, the fluctuation time corresponding to the currently acquired fluctuation pattern is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process. Specifically, if the currently acquired fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to a special reach (fluctuation time 90 seconds), 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process.

Although not shown in the figure, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect (secondary effect) is displayed is 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, so a fluctuation pattern type with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is obtained, and after 90 seconds are set in the remaining time storage area 223h, a process is performed to subtract 30 seconds, which is the period during which the secondary effect cannot be executed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation performance is selected from the first navigation performance selection table 222b1, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation performance is selected using the first navigation performance selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119(b), and the first navigation performance period is set based on the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired performance counter 223f value, and variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the set first navigation performance period, and the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the first navigation performance is 60 seconds and the acquired performance counter 223f value is "80", "30 seconds" is selected as the first navigation performance period. Then, the performance pattern information corresponding to the first navigation performance period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i.

After completing the processing of S2103, the remaining change time in the remaining time storage area 223h is then updated based on the first navigation performance period selected in the first navigation performance (S2104). This allows the remaining change time for which the reach navigation performance, which is the secondary performance, should be set to be calculated. Specifically, if the remaining change time is set to "60 seconds" in the remaining time storage area 223h and a first navigation performance period of "30 seconds" is selected, the remaining change time in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated to "30 seconds" by this processing.

Then, it is determined whether the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105), and if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No), the setting of the reach navigation effect is completed and processing proceeds to S2107. In other words, if the same period as the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation effect period during which the first navigation effect is executed, the reach navigation effect is set with only the first navigation effect. Specifically, this corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type corresponding to a super reach (variation time 60 seconds), and the first navigation effect period "30 seconds" is selected with the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h as "30 seconds".

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the remaining change time in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation effect is selected from the second navigation effect selection table and updated in the change pattern temporary storage area. This second navigation effect is selected using the second navigation effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119(c), and based on the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, change pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is selected and the change pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, if the remaining change time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the second navigation effect is 30 seconds and the last digit of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0", the effect pattern information of "2nd time 10 seconds" and "3rd time 20 seconds" is selected as the effect pattern corresponding to the second navigation effect period "30 seconds", and the change pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

In this way, the second navigation effect is configured to generate a presentation pattern using the remaining change time after the first navigation effect is set. Therefore, rather than setting presentation patterns all at once for the entire period in which the reach navigation effect can be set, by dividing the period in which the reach navigation effect can be set into a first navigation effect period and a second navigation effect period and setting presentation patterns for each, and then combining them, it is possible to diversify the presentation patterns of the reach navigation effect, and this has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored.

In this control example, the period during which the reach navigation performance can be set is divided into a first navigation performance period and other periods, but it may be divided into more than this. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation performance (S2016), a performance pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period can be selected, and after executing the process of S2016, it is determined again whether the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 0 (S2105). This makes it possible to set a reach navigation performance that corresponds to the remaining variation time after the second navigation performance is set using the same process as the process of setting the second navigation performance, simplifying the process.

Returning to FIG. 141, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2105 that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (S2105: No) or if the processing of S2106 is completed, then a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the information in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area (S2107). Here, the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area is the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the main performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 set in the processing of S2101, the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the performance pattern of the first performance navigation set in the processing of S2103 constituting the reach navigation performance, which is the sub-performance, and the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the performance pattern of the second performance navigation set in the processing of S2106.

When processing of S2107 is completed, the information set in the temporary fluctuation pattern storage area is cleared (S2108), and the information regarding the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this processing is completed.

In this control example, the main performance and the sub-performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the acquired variation pattern are set as one display variation pattern command to reduce the number of commands output, but the display main performance variation pattern command and the display sub-performance variation pattern command may be output as separate commands. This allows, for example, the display control device 114 to display the main performance on a layer on the rear side of the third pattern display device 81, and control so that the sub-performance can be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the main performance is displayed, and the player can easily control the display and erasing of the sub-performance by operating the frame button 22.

Furthermore, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is easy to control the secondary performance by outputting additional commands to the secondary performance and switching the secondary performance pattern while the main performance is being displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, during the period from when the main performance is executed to when the secondary performance is executed (30 seconds in this control example), it is possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) used in the secondary performance and to change the content of the indicator displayed in the notification section Dm4c based on the operation content of the frame button 22 executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Regarding control process executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 142, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d, and since NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs, but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S2301). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2301.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2302, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2302, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S2303). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) to be executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 142) is completed (S2305), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex presentations using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2302. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S2301 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S2301 and S2302, and then execute the processes of S2303 to S2305.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without executing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 142. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, image controller 237 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2204, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 154(a)) (see S3302 in FIG. 154(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)) are executed so that the power-on images, that is, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image (not shown), are drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). Thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is cut off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2206, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 144(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S2501). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S2501: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so a command determination process (S2502) is executed to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image (not shown), and then a display setting process (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 145 to 150.

In the display setting process (S2503), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2504). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simplified display setting process (S2509), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 154 and 155.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, a drawing list is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2505), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S2507). An example of a counter updated by the process of S2507 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S2508) is executed to cause the power-on image (not shown) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S2504.

Next, the details of the command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 145 to 150. First, Figure 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 145, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S2602) to notify the display setting process (S2503) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S2603).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2605), and processing returns to S2601.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2605) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2701 is set to ON, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S2706), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705, extracts the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S2702 extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S2704, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2604 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2606), and if there is a variation type command for display (S2606: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2607), and processing returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, complete miss, or chance eye) is determined (S2801), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S2802 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S2803), this stop type command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information from the stop pattern set by the processing of S2802 (pattern offset information) is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2504), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S2802 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S2803, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, but image data required for drawing can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before drawing is performed in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained high.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S2802.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss as in this control example, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2606 that there is no stop type command for display (S2606: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and if there is a jackpot-related command, the jackpot-related command for display processing is executed (S2609), and the processing returns to S2601.

Now, with reference to Figs. 147 to 149, we will explain the details of the display jackpot-related command processing (S2609), which is one process of the command determination process (S2502, see Fig. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 147 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot-related command processing.

As shown in FIG. 147, in this display jackpot related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2901). If there is an opening command for display (S2901: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S2902) and the process proceeds to S2903.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(a). FIG. 148(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the timing counter 233h (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S3005), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the explanation will continue. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2901: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2903). If there is a round number command for display (S2903: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2904) and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, the details of the number of rounds command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3102).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S3105), the number of rounds command processing ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2903 that there is no round number command for display (S2903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and if there is an ending command for display (S2905: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2906) and the processing proceeds to S2907.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 149(a). FIG. 149(a) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3204). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S3205), the ending command processing ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 147. In the process of S2905, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2905: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a V performance command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and if there is a V performance command for display (S2907: Yes), V performance command processing is executed (S2908), and the jackpot-related command processing for display is terminated.

Here, the V performance command processing (S2908) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 149(b). FIG. 149(b) is a flowchart showing the V performance command processing. This V performance command processing executes processing corresponding to the display V performance command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V performance command processing, first, a V performance display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V performance indicated by the display V performance command is determined, and the determined V performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data to the buffer (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the timing counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S3805), the V effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 147. If it is determined in the processing of S2907 that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot related command processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S2608: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and if there is a rear image change command (S2610: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2611), and the processing returns to S2601.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 150(a). FIG. 150(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command processing, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S3903) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3401). Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S3402), after which the rear image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3401 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3402. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that one of the rear views A to C is to be displayed based on the rear view type of the rear view image specified in S3402, the rear view image type to be displayed at that time is identified from the rear view image discrimination flag set by S3402, and further, the range of the rear view image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which the image data corresponding to that range of the rear view image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. Since this change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, we return to the explanation of FIG. 145. If it is determined in the processing of S2610 that there is no rear image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and if there is an error command (S2612: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2613), and the processing returns to S2601.

Here, the error command processing (S2613) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 150(b). FIG. 150(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S3501). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S3502), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the error frame command processing, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing S3501, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing S3502, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S3502 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

In the process of S2601, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), the processes of S2602 to S2613 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2508), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 146(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2701, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S2702, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 151 to 153. Fig. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S3601: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the processes of S3602 to S3604 are skipped and the process moves to S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3602), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S3603 to S3604.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Now, with reference to FIG. 152, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S3701).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing of S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3702) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604), or in the process of S3603, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S3603: No), then the process proceeds to S3605.

In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3801, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S3802). If the data is End information (S3802: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3803), and if it is a demo display data table (S3803: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3805), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3802: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 151, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3606 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S3608). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag 233z is on (S3609).

If the final display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3610), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3611). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S3612), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after setting the final display flag 233z, which indicates that the final display is being performed in the on state, to on (S3614), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3615), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S3615 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S2504), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S3615 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the final display flag 233z is off and not on (S3609: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on or not (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), this means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3617), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3618). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that the demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S3621), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616: Yes), this means that the demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again as described above by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2509) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that the power-on variable image (not shown) corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figs. 154 and 155, the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. First, Fig. 154(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S3901 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S3901: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, referring to FIG. 154(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 154(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S4001). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S4001: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4002). In this S4002 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S4002 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4002: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4003. Also, if the result of processing in S4001 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4003), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S4003: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4003 (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 145-FIG. 150) and the display setting process (see FIG. 151-FIG. 153) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the previously executed display setting process (S2503) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4101). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S4103), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

In addition, in the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S4102: No), the processes of S4103 and S4104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S4105), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4106).

In this process of S4106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S4106 that the transfer process has not ended (S4106: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4106: Yes), the process proceeds to S4107. Also, if the result of the process of S4105 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S4105: No), the process proceeds to S4107.

In the processing of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107). If the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S4108), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), it is then determined whether or not the background image change flag is on (S4109). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag is set to off (S4110), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is identified, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4111). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S4112), and the process proceeds to S4113.

If the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the normal image transfer process ends as is.

In the process of S4113, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). This determination in the process of S4113 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S4113 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S4113 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4114). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S4114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the rear image is changed based on the receipt of a rear image change command during the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list is generated (S4201) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S2505). That is, in the process of S4201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprite that should be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are sent to the image controller (S4202). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S4202, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k (S4203). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 157 to Fig. 186, a second control example of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the above-mentioned first control example, a gaming machine in which a reach navigation effect is executed as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

In contrast, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a composite pressing effect in which the effect is advanced by successively pressing (hitting) the frame button 22 and by pressing the frame button at the right time; a continuous slot effect in which the pseudo-patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are stopped by pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example); and a point effect in which a predetermined value (points) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a specific effect (reach effect) is executed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. This makes it possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early and increasing the player's interest.

This second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 have been partially changed, the processing executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the processing executed by MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been partially changed. All other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, the composite press effect, which is one of the effects executed in this control example, will be described with reference to Figs. 157 to 159. Fig. 157(a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the composite press effect is started in the third pattern display device 81, Fig. 157(b) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the effect notification timing D3b, Fig. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the timing press period Db1, Fig. 158(b) is a diagram showing another example of the time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the timing press period Db1, Fig. 159(a) is a diagram showing an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period of the composite press effect being executed, and Fig. 159(b) is a diagram showing an example of the time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the second consecutive hit period Dc.

This composite press effect is a press effect in which three press effect periods are combined and displayed, and an effect is executed in which the meter in the meter display section D1 displayed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm accumulates based on the result of the player operating the frame button 22 during each press effect period. When a predetermined amount of meter accumulates in this meter display section D1, a special benefit is awarded to the player.

When the composite press effect is executed, the press effect corresponding to the first consecutive tapping period is executed as shown in FIG. 157(a). The third symbol display device 81 displays the meter display section D1 described above, a button display D2 that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and an effect gauge D3 to guide the composite press effect, and a comment section that provides textual guidance on the effect content is displayed in the lower area of the main display area Dm.

The meter display unit D1 is a display unit that finally displays the result of the composite pressing performance, and is controlled so that the meter is filled based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each pressing performance (see FIG. 157(b)). The meter display unit D1 displays the comment "fill up the meter" as a comment to encourage the player to participate in the game. In the initial stage, this meter display unit D1 displays "V" at the right end of the meter, and when the meter fills up to this "V", the player is notified that he has won a jackpot with a special pattern as a privilege that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the composite pressing performance and the lottery result of the special pattern (see FIG. 159(a)). When the meter area is extended as shown in FIG. 159(a), "VV" is displayed at the right end, and when the meter fills up to this "VV", the player is notified that a privilege that is even more advantageous to the player (for example, winning two jackpots) will be granted.

The bonus awarded by the combined pressing effect is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, an image that is not normally displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or value information (points) that the player has collected may be awarded. The display format of "V" and "VV" is also not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the conditions for the bonus to be awarded to the player are visibly displayed. Furthermore, there is no need to set a degree of advantage for the bonus awarded when "V" is reached and the bonus awarded when "VV" is reached, and it is sufficient that the settings are such that different bonuses are awarded.

The button display D2 is a display unit for informing the player of the operation content of the frame button 22. In the first continuous tapping period shown in FIG. 157(a), a schematic display for continuously tapping the frame button 22 and a comment "Continuous tapping!!" are displayed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, when the player is not operating the frame button 22, the button display is highlighted by blinking or enlarging, and when the player is operating the frame button 22, the button display is reduced or erased to a non-highlighted display. This makes it possible to prevent excessive display of game guidance to the player. Furthermore, it is preferable to change the button display D2 to a non-highlighted display when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating the frame button 22. This makes it possible to prevent the frame button from being continuously highlighted for players who do not want to operate it, and reduces frustration among players.

The performance gauge D3 is a display section that shows the overall flow of the composite press performance, and displays the composite press performance in chronological order from the left to right side of the performance gauge D3 (from left to right when viewed from the perspective of FIG. 157(a)). This performance gauge D3 is displayed in sections as a first successive tap period Da, a timing press period Db1, and a second successive tap period Dc in the order in which the press performances are executed, and is configured so that the player can grasp the current situation based on the position of the moving body D3a moving on the performance gauge D3. In this way, in a composite press performance in which press performances with different methods of operating the frame button 22 are executed in succession, a performance that is easy for the player to understand can be executed by displaying the composite press performance as a whole and the status of each press performance in a way that allows the player to grasp it.

In addition, since the moving body D3a is configured to move at a constant speed on the performance gauge D3, it is possible to grasp the duration of the entire composite press performance based on the movement status of the moving body D3a.

Furthermore, within this effect gauge D3, an effect notification timing D3b is set within the first successive tap period Da. This effect notification timing D3b notifies in advance the content of the press effect to be executed during the timing press period Db1 executed after the first successive tap period Da has elapsed. When the moving body D3a reaches the effect notification timing D3b during the combined press effect, a guide to the press effect to be executed in the next press effect period is displayed in the comment field described below. This prevents the mode of the press effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) from suddenly changing during the combined press effect, resulting in an unintended operation. Note that the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined at the time when this effect notification timing D3b is reached, and the performance mode of the next press effect period may be set.

In the comment field provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, comments explaining the gameplay content of the combined pressing effect and comments announcing the results of the effect are displayed. In FIG. 157(a), the comment "Press and hold the button to execute auto-rapid tapping" is displayed. Auto-rapid tapping is a control process in which the player performs a specified operation (a long press for 2 seconds or more) during a press effect in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly tapped, thereby simulating the frame button 22 being repeatedly tapped. By executing this auto-rapid tapping, even players who have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 multiple times can enjoy the rapid-tap effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 157(b), the case where the composite press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the composite press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b, the press effect of the first consecutive tapping period Da is continued while game guidance for the next press effect period, the timing press period Db1, begins. Specifically, a timing gauge Db2 that is an extension of the area of the timing press period Db1 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the target to be aimed at in the timing press effect is displayed within the timing gauge. Then, the comment field displays "Aim at the center of the X and press the button..." as part of the game guidance for the timing press period Db1, which is the next press effect period.

The timing gauge Db2 is displayed by stretching the same period as the timing press period Db1. Therefore, the moving body D3a is displayed to move on the timing gauge Db2 for the same time as the moving body D3a moves on the timing press period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing press period Db1, it is possible to set the speed at which the moving body D3a moves faster than the speed at which the moving body D3a moves on the performance gauge. In addition, by selecting and displaying one of multiple timing gauges Db2 with different lengths, the moving body D3a can move at a different speed. By configuring in this way, when a display is made to notify the player of the period of the composite press performance using the performance gauge D3 and the moving body D3a moving at a constant speed on the performance gauge D3, it is possible to diversify the performance of the timing display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 when the performance notification timing D3b is reached, it becomes possible to predict the speed of the moving object D3a in the timing press performance that is currently being executed, which has the effect of making it easier to plan the timing.

In FIG. 157(b), the target Db3 for manipulating the frame button in the timing press performance is displayed in the center of the timing gauge Db2, but the display position may be moved to the edge of the timing gauge Db2 to set the difficulty of the timing press performance. Also, the target Db3 may be configured to move on the timing gauge Db2, or multiple targets Db3 may be displayed.

Next, referring to Fig. 158(a) and (b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the timing press effect period will be described. Fig. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where auto-repeated tapping is not being performed when the timing press effect period is reached. As shown in Fig. 158(a), an image showing the moving object D3a starts moving rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. As described above, since the timing gauge Db2 is a display that extends the area of the timing press period Db1, the time required for the moving object D3a to pass through the timing press period Db1 is the same as the time required for the moving object D3a to pass through the timing gauge Db2. In the example shown in Fig. 158(a), the timing gauge Db2 is displayed with a length approximately eight times that of the timing press period Db1, so the speed of the moving object passing through the timing gauge Db2 is approximately eight times that of the moving object D3a passing through the timing press period Db1.

The target Db3, which indicates the timing for pressing the frame button 22 in the timing pressing effect, is highlighted by flashing. Furthermore, the comment field displays a comment indicating that the frame button 22 should be pressed as the timing pressing effect, and an image showing the frame button 22 being pressed.

On the other hand, Figure 158(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where auto-rapid taps are being executed when the timing press effect period is reached. The difference from Figure 158(a) above is that the third pattern display device 81 displays a message indicating that auto-rapid taps are currently in progress, and the comment indicating the game content displayed in the comment field has been changed to "Let go." In other words, when auto-rapid taps are in progress, the player is holding down the button when the timing press effect is reached, and therefore cannot press the button in that state.

Therefore, if it is determined that auto-repeated taps are being executed (the frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing press effect period is reached, the game guide displayed in the comment section is changed from "press" to "release," and the operation of the frame button 22 detected in the timing press effect is changed from the timing of pressing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 turns on) to the timing of releasing (the timing when the operation signal of the frame button 22 turns off). As a result, in a composite press effect, even if the timing press effect is executed when the auto-repeated tap operation was performed in the previous press effect (first repeated tap effect Da), the effect can be executed without causing any inconvenience to the player.

During the timing press performance period Db1 described in FIG. 158(a) or FIG. 158(b), when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed in the case of FIG. 158(a) or released in the case of FIG. 158(b)) at the timing when the moving object D3c reaches the center of the target Db3, as shown in FIG. 159(a), the moving object D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is displayed stopped at the center of the target Db3, and the comment "Perfect!!" is displayed in the comment field to notify that the frame button 22 was operated at the right time. Furthermore, the meter display section D1 is extended as a bonus for successful timing press performance, and this is notified in the comment field.

Even at this timing, the moving object D3c on the performance gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. This makes it possible to display the progress of the composite press performance on the performance gauge D3 while displaying the result of the timing press performance as a stationary display on the timing gauge Db2. This has the effect of making it possible to inform the player of both the result of the timing press performance and the progress of the composite press performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the case where the timing press effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second consecutive tapping period Dc has been reached will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b). When the second consecutive tapping period Dc is reached, a display is executed to prompt the player to repeatedly tap the frame button 22, just as in the first consecutive tapping period. What differs from the display during the first consecutive tapping period described above is that the game result of the timing press effect is displayed in the area of the timing press period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and that the meter display section D1 is in a state in which a bonus based on the game result of the timing press effect has been awarded. The other display contents are the same, so their description will be omitted.

When the second consecutive tapping period has elapsed, the composite press performance result notification period D3d is reached and the result of this composite press performance is notified. This ends the composite press performance. As described above, in the composite press performance of this embodiment, a continuous tap performance in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed as an operation of the frame button 22, and a timing press performance in which the frame button 22 is operated in good timing are executed in succession, and the result of the entire composite press performance is determined based on the results of each press performance. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute multiple types of frame button operations to achieve a satisfactory result, this has the effect of encouraging the player to participate in the game.

The auto-repeated-hits function to assist with rapid-hit operations also makes it easier for players to operate the frame buttons. However, a problem has arisen in that if a player who is using the auto-repeated-hits function during a rapid-hit performance enters a timing press performance with the frame button 22 held down, the frame button 22 is pressed by the auto-repeated-hits immediately after the timing press performance begins. Therefore, a period during which the auto-repeated-hits function is active and a period during which it is inactive are provided, and the auto-repeated-hits function is set to inactive during the timing press performance. This has the effect of preventing the frame button 22 from being pressed by the auto-repeated-hits during a timing press performance, and allowing a performance that the player does not intend to occur.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned solution alone, when the auto-repeated-tap function is being executed, that is, when a player enters a timing press effect while pressing the frame button 22, the problem is that it only prevents erroneous presses due to the auto-repeated-tap and does not allow the player to participate in the timing press effect. Specifically, if the same timing press effect as normal is executed by simply disabling the auto-repeated-tap function, a game guide such as "Press the button at the right time" is displayed to a player who has already pressed the frame button 22, which confuses the player and prevents the player from enjoying the timing press effect.

In this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the time when the timing press effect is executed, and if the auto-repeated-hit function is set to ON, the content of the timing press effect is changed to an effect in which the button is released at the right time. This makes it easy for a player who has already pressed the frame button 22 to understand that they only need to release the frame button 22 at the right time, and they can participate in an effect in which the operation of the frame button 22 is executed in accordance with the timing, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In this control example, the combined press effect switches the press effect while the effective operation period of the frame button 22 continues, but an operation invalid period during which operation of the frame button 22 is invalid while the press effect switches may be set. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the content of the next press effect within the operation invalid period. This has the effect of preventing the simultaneous display of information display regarding the press effect currently being executed and information display regarding the next press effect to be executed, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, the continuous slot presentation, which is one of the presentations executed in this control example, will be described with reference to Figs. 160 and 161. Fig. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous slot presentation executed in this control example. This continuous slot presentation is a presentation in which a slot presentation in which pseudo symbols displayed in a rotating manner are stopped and displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 is executed multiple times within a specified period (30 seconds), and the result of the presentation is displayed by combining the pseudo symbols displayed in a stopped state in each of the multiple slot presentations executed multiple times. Specifically, this is a presentation in which a special bonus (jackpot game) is awarded to the player when all of the specified combinations of symbols ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") are stopped and displayed during the continuous slot presentation.

As shown in FIG. 160, when the consecutive slot performance is executed, slot performance 1 (first slot performance) is executed first. This slot performance 1 (first slot performance) has a performance period of 15 seconds, of which 11 seconds (2 to 13 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) are set as a frame button operation valid period (BT) during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. If the frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-2) during the latter 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot performance 1 (first slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 1 has elapsed (13 to 15 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed), the pseudo pattern is displayed (one effective line is displayed) and then the game transitions to slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), and the second slot performance is executed.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated (operation 1-1) during the first 6 seconds (between 2 and 8 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 1 (first slot performance), the pseudo symbols are displayed frozen between 8 and 9 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed (one row of active lines is displayed frozen), and then slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance) is executed. Then, if the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 1 (first slot performance), the pseudo symbols are not displayed frozen and the special slot performance is started.

This special slot presentation is a presentation in which the frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set, and a presentation is executed in which the pseudo symbols that were rotating are displayed in a stopped state regardless of the player's operation, and the display mode of one of the 1st to 3rd valid lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot presentation ends.

The reason why the frame button operation valid period (BT) is not set for the special slot performance described above is that in slot performance 1 (first slot performance), a player who does not operate the frame button 22 despite the frame button operation valid period being set to 11 seconds may be a player who dislikes operating the frame button 22, so that a performance that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 again during the continuous slot performance is not displayed. By setting such a performance, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the performance. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In this control example, a special slot presentation in which the rotation of the pseudo symbols automatically stops is executed as a presentation in which the frame button operation valid period is not set, but it is sufficient if a presentation that does not require the operation of the frame button 22 is executed, and for example, the slot presentation may be ended and a different presentation may be executed.

Next, slot performance 2 (first abbreviated slot performance) will be explained. Slot performance 2 (first abbreviated slot performance) has a performance period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT) during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid. This slot performance 2 (first abbreviated slot performance) is a slot performance that is executed only if the frame button 22 is operated within a specified period (within 8 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) in slot performance 1 (first slot performance).

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot performance 2 (first abbreviated slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (18 to 20 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed), the pseudo symbols are displayed stationary (one row of active lines is displayed stationary), and then the game transitions to slot performance 3 (second abbreviated slot performance).

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance), an extended slot performance is executed without stopping the pseudo symbols. This extended slot performance has a performance period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT) during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) during this extended slot performance, the pseudo symbols will be displayed frozen (2 rows of valid lines will be displayed frozen) after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed), and the continuous slot performance will end.

Next, slot performance 3 (second abbreviated slot performance) will be explained. Slot performance 3 (second abbreviated slot performance) has a performance period of 10 seconds, of which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT) during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid. This slot performance 3 (second abbreviated slot performance) is a slot performance that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot performance 2 (first abbreviated slot performance).

When the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed), the pseudo symbols are displayed stationary (a single row of valid lines is displayed stationary), and the continuous slot performance ends.

Even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation effective period (BT) of slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance), the pseudo symbols are displayed (one line of valid lines is displayed) after the frame button operation effective period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed), and the consecutive slot performance ends. Note that in slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance), the ratio of the combination of pseudo symbols displayed as a predetermined combination (any of "AAA", "BBB", or "CCC") differs depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated or not within the frame button operation effective period (BT), and the predetermined combination is more likely to be displayed as described above when the frame button 22 is operated. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

Finally, we will explain slot performance 4 (normal slot performance). Slot performance 4 (normal slot performance) has a performance period of 15 seconds, of which the middle 11 seconds (between 17 and 28 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) are set as the frame button operation valid period (BT) during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid. This slot performance 4 (normal slot performance) is a slot performance that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the latter 5 seconds (between 8 and 13 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot performance 1 (first slot performance).

If the frame button 22 is operated during the last 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), the pseudo symbols will be displayed frozen (one or two valid lines will be displayed frozen) after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (between 28 and 30 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed), and the consecutive slot performance will end.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first 2 seconds of the frame button operation valid period (BT) (between 17 and 19 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed), the pseudo symbols will be displayed frozen (one valid line will be displayed frozen) immediately after 19 seconds have elapsed since the consecutive slot performance was executed, and the game will transition to the above-mentioned slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance).

In addition, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), the pseudo symbols are displayed stationary (one valid line is displayed stationary) after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the consecutive slot performance is executed), and the consecutive slot performance ends. Note that in slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), if the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT), whether the pseudo symbols are displayed stationary in one or two valid lines is set to be determined by lottery, with either being selected at a 1:1 ratio.

Next, the display mode of the above-mentioned consecutive slot performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161(a)-(e) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the consecutive slot performance. First, the initial slot performance, which is executed first among the consecutive slot performances, will be explained with reference to FIG. 161(a). As shown in FIG. 161(a), the initial slot performance rotates three rows of pseudo symbols having multiple pseudo symbols, and below that are displayed a guide diagram that simplifies the frame button 22 to guide the player to press the frame button 22, and a time gauge that indicates the valid operation period of the frame button. Furthermore, below the time gauge is displayed a history display section that displays the combination of predetermined pseudo symbols ("AAA", "BBB", "CCC") that have stopped and been displayed in the current consecutive slot performance.

When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shown in Figure 161 (b) will be transitioned to. Figure 161 (b) shows the state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol rows are displayed frozen. As shown in Figure 161 (b), the three pseudo symbol rows that were being displayed in a rotating manner are displayed frozen ("AAA"), and the guide map and time gauge are erased. Then, if the symbols that have been displayed frozen this time are a combination of the specified pseudo symbols mentioned above, "GET" will be displayed in the corresponding position in the history display section.

Next, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the initial slot presentation is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the display transitions to FIG. 161(c) and the normal slot presentation starts. This normal slot presentation, like the initial slot presentation described above, also rotates three pseudo symbol rows, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the three pseudo symbol rows that were rotating. The difference from the initial slot presentation is that the stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol rows stop is a stop display mode with two pay lines as shown in FIG. 161(c). Specifically, of the three pseudo symbol rows, the left and right symbol rows stop two seconds after the normal slot presentation starts, and the player operates the frame button 22 to stop the middle symbol row.

If the combination of pseudo symbols displayed in the normal slot performance is a combination of predetermined pseudo symbols, "GET" is displayed in the history display section. If you get all of the "A", "B", and "C" displayed in the history display section, you will be awarded a special bonus (jackpot game) after the consecutive slot performance ends.

In this way, when consecutive slot performance is executed by operating the normal frame buttons, two slot performances (the first slot performance and the normal slot performance) are performed, and the gameplay is provided in which three combinations of predetermined pseudo patterns are obtained through the slot performances.

On the other hand, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the initial slot performance is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the display transitions to FIG. 161(d) and the first abbreviated slot performance begins. This first abbreviated slot performance is a performance in which three pseudo symbol rows are displayed in a rotating manner, similar to the initial slot performance described above, and the three pseudo symbol rows that were displayed in a rotating manner are displayed in a stopped state when the player operates the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state on one active line ("BBB"). Then, the second abbreviated slot performance shown in FIG. 161(e) is executed.

This second shortened slot effect is similar to the first shortened slot effect described above, so we will not explain it in detail.

As explained above, in the continuous slot presentation in this control example, in slot presentations that are executed continuously within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the presentation mode of the next slot presentation to be executed is selected depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Specifically, the number of slot presentations executed during the continuous slot presentation is changed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22, and increasing the interest of the game.

The result of the continuous slot performance is displayed as a combination of the pseudo symbols displayed in each of the multiple slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, and the more slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, the more advantageous the result of the continuous slot performance becomes for the player. This has the effect of making the player more motivated to operate the frame button 22, and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the player fails to operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot performance (first slot performance) in the consecutive slot performance, the slot performance can be performed three times, so it is possible to motivate the player to play until the end. Furthermore, even if the number of slot performances performed during the consecutive slot performance is small, multiple combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in one slot performance, so the player can be kept excited until the end.

For players who refuse to operate the frame button 22, a special slot performance that does not require frame button operation is executed after the initial slot performance ends, so the player will not feel dissatisfied.

Next, the point effect, which is one of the effects executed in this control example, will be described with reference to Figs. 162 and 163. Fig. 162(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the third pattern display device 81 when "normal mode" is selected, and Fig. 162(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the third pattern display device 81 when "dice mode" is selected.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to transition between two game modes ("normal mode" and "dice mode") with different display modes of the third pattern display device 81 when a predetermined condition is met (when a frame button operation to transition between game modes is performed, or when a game mode transition lottery is won by the sound lamp control device 113).

"Normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol becomes a reach, an effect is executed in which any or all of the specified characters ("rabbit", "turtle", "hero") appear. In addition, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) are displayed that accumulate and display the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example, and when the accumulated points in any of the indicators (P1, P2, or P3) reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a special bonus (reach effect) is awarded to the player.

On the other hand, the "dice mode" is a game mode in which the variable display of the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the small area Dm5, and an effect is executed in the main display area in which the result of the lottery for the special symbol is notified to the player as the game using dice (not shown) progresses. Then, just like the "normal mode" described above, two indicators (P4-P5) are displayed which accumulate the points acquired by the point effect executed in this control example, and when the accumulated points in either of these indicators (P4 or P5) reach a predetermined number (6 points), a special bonus (reach effect) is awarded to the player.

First, the point presentation executed in "normal mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 162(a). FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing an example of display in "normal mode". As shown in FIG. 162(a), in "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, with a "rabbit", a "turtle", and a "hero" corresponding to each indicator. This is because the points awarded to the player in the point presentation (displayed on the third pattern display device 81) are set to a type corresponding to each character, and points are awarded to each indicator (P1 to P3) according to the type of points awarded to the player.

The characters "Rabbit", "Tortoise", and "Hero" associated with each indicator (P1-P3) are characters that appear in the third pattern change performance and reserved pattern display (not shown) executed in "normal mode", and are set so that the point type corresponding to the character is likely to be displayed based on the character's display in the third pattern change performance. This makes it possible to associate the display mode of the third pattern change performance with the situation in which points are accumulated in the point performance. It is not necessary to associate all points awarded in the point performance with the third pattern performance display, and the point type may be determined randomly. This allows the points associated with characters other than the character displayed in the third pattern performance display to reach a predetermined amount (7 points), providing a sense of surprise to the player.

Furthermore, in this control example, one of several characters that appear in the third pattern change presentation ("rabbit", "turtle", "hero") is displayed as a point presentation, and high points are awarded if the displayed character matches the character currently being displayed as the subject of the third pattern change display.

In addition, the period during which the character is displayed as a point effect is set to three times during one point effect, and points are set to be awarded at each timing. This makes it possible to better associate the progress of the third pattern variation effect (the presence or absence of a main character or the type of character) with the point effect, which has the effect of making the combined effect easier for players to understand.

In this control example, the same character as that displayed in the third pattern change presentation is displayed in the point presentation, but other display objects associated with the character displayed in the third pattern change presentation (for example, a "sword" associated with a "hero") may also be used. This has the effect of allowing the player to compare the display object displayed in the point presentation with the content of the third pattern change presentation and predict whether there is a correlation while playing the game.

The point effect may be associated with something other than the third pattern change effect. For example, if the reserved pattern display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or with the voice of the character output from the audio output device. In this way, associating some kind of effect provided to the player with the point effect has the effect of providing the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In addition, in this control example, points are accumulated in the indicator at various times while the special pattern is being displayed (while the third pattern is changing), and when the number of points reaches the maximum value (the seventh stage in Figure 162), an effect with a higher probability of winning than at least the third pattern change effect being executed at that time is executed.

This has the effect that the player can enjoy whether or not any of the indicators will reach their maximum value through the point presentation, and can play the game while anticipating the timing when the indicator will reach its maximum value.

The manner in which points are displayed in the point presentation will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As explained above, in this control example, the multiple presentation modes, "normal mode" and "dice mode", are set by the voice lamp control device 114, which is the presentation mode setting means. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating the presentation mode based on a variation pattern selected by the later-described variation display setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 114. Note that the multiple presentation modes may be configured to be set by operating the frame button 22.

Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as stage information of multiple stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points, which are variable information, on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the point presentation executed in the "dice mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 162(b). FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display in the "dice mode". As shown in FIG. 162(b), in the "dice mode", two indicators resembling dice are displayed, and the accumulated points are displayed according to the numbers on the dice. The two dice associated with each indicator are configured in the same display manner as the dice used in the "dice presentation" executed in the "dice mode".

As explained above, in the point presentation of this control example, the indicator is displayed in a display format related to the game mode being executed, so that displays that give the player a sense of discomfort can be prevented in each presentation.

In addition, the type and upper limit of points accumulated through the point effects are set to be different for each game mode, so that players can enjoy different point effects for each game mode. It is advisable to determine a point reference value to be awarded in advance for the points awarded in the point effects, convert the point reference value to correspond to the indicator display of the currently active game mode, and award the converted points to the player. This simplifies the control of awarding points.

Furthermore, if the game mode is switched while a point production is being executed, the points already stored in the indicator may be converted to points corresponding to the game mode to which it is to be switched and displayed. In this case, a point reference value corresponding to the points already awarded during the point production may be stored in a memory area (not shown) formed in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 114, which is the stage information storage means, and the point reference value stored at the time the game mode is switched may be converted to correspond to the indicator display of the game mode to which it is to be switched, and the display may be controlled accordingly. This allows an indicator display corresponding to the game mode to be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 in the point presentation will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm, and FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation display executed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points awarded to the player in the point presentation (points displayed in the main display area Dm) is determined based on the display mode of the third pattern change presentation being executed in the main display area Dm. This prevents the points displayed in the main display area Dm from overlapping with the third pattern change presentation, which would give the player a strange feeling.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a number of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. The location where the points are displayed is determined for each divided small area. In this control example, the display mode for displaying the points for each small area is pre-stored, so that when the small area where the point display is to be executed this time is determined based on the performance mode of the third pattern variation performance, the point display image pre-stored corresponding to that small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when the point display is executed, only the process for determining the display location needs to be executed, which has the effect of simplifying the process.

Note that methods other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, a control may be used in which the point display image to be executed in the current point display is first determined, and then the small area in which the point display is executed is determined.

In addition, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into nine parts, but it may be divided into more parts, and instead of displaying the points within one small area, it may be possible to display the points using multiple small areas.

Next, a specific example of point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). When point display is performed while the third pattern change performance shown in FIG. 163(b) is being performed, a distinction is first made between small areas used in the third pattern change performance and small areas not used, and as a result of this distinction, small areas not used in the third pattern change performance (small areas Dm11 to Dm13), that is, allowable areas that allow point display, are set.

Then, an image related to the "Hero" is displayed as a character indicating the indicator for which points will be awarded this time in small area Dm12, which is selected from the small areas set in the allowable area (small areas Dm11 to Dm13). Then, 2 points are displayed in small area Dm11, which is selected from the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, because the Hero Dc1 is displayed as the image that is the subject of the third pattern variation performance, 2 points will be accumulated for the indicator corresponding to the Hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162(a).

In this control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the subject of the third pattern change performance, the points that the player can earn are set to be higher than when other images are displayed. Therefore, before the points are displayed, the player can compare the character image displayed in the point performance with the character image that is the subject of the third pattern change performance, and predict whether the points that can be earned in this point performance will be high or not. This allows the player to watch the performance while looking forward to seeing it continue, increasing the interest of the game.

In this control example, a character image is displayed in the point presentation, and points are awarded to an indicator corresponding to the character image, but other configurations are also possible. For example, points may be accumulated in an indicator corresponding to a character that is the subject of the third pattern change presentation at the timing when points are displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the reserved image displayed on the reserved display section may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, by making it difficult to know whether the reason for the change in the reserved image is the point effect or whether the lottery result for the special pattern corresponding to the changed reserved image indicates the expectation of a jackpot, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect that will be executed later.

As explained above, the location where the points are displayed is set according to the presentation display mode of the third pattern change presentation, and further, points are allocated based on the character displayed in the third pattern change presentation, making it possible to execute a point presentation that is easy for players to understand.

When there are multiple small areas in which points can be displayed, the location where the points are displayed may be selected based on the number of points awarded or the result of the third symbol variation performance (the result of the lottery for the special symbol). For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a miss, the points are displayed in the small area Dm13, which is near the "monster" that is the main character of the third symbol variation performance, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed, and if the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a win, the points are displayed in the small area Dm11, which is near the "hero" that is the main character of the third symbol variation performance, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to predict in advance whether the lottery for the special symbol this time will be a big hit by grasping the location where the points are displayed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third pattern change performance is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, the proportion of one small area that is occupied by the main image of the third pattern change performance can be calculated, and if that proportion is below a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area can be determined to be an area in which points can be displayed. This makes it possible to display points near the main image displayed in the third pattern change performance. This prevents a player who is watching the third pattern change performance from missing the point display.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 164 to Fig. 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 164 to Fig. 167.

Figure 164 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Figure 164 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a press scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 165, the details of the press scenario table 222c will be described. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165(a), the press scenario table 222c has a normal press scenario 222c1, a long press press scenario 222c2, and a combined press scenario 222c3 set.

Figure 165 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of normal press scenario 222c1. Normal press scenario 222c1 is a scenario in which the period during which normal button presses are valid (normal press period) is determined according to the value of press performance scenario counter 223k (i.e., the time elapsed since the variable display began). The information of this normal press scenario 222c1 is set in press scenario storage area 223m when normal press performance is selected as the variable pattern, and it is determined that it is a normal press period based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m.

In addition, a timing type is set for each period during which pressing a button is valid. By executing (displaying) an effect according to this timing type, it is possible to execute (display) an effect according to the timing of pressing the frame button 22.

Specifically, in the normal press scenario 222c1, the press period type is set to normal press period for the value "5001 to 9000" of the press performance scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. As will be described in detail later, the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is 0 when the variable display starts, and is incremented by 1 every ms thereafter, so that the period from 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined to be the normal press period.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "END" information indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. In other words, when 15001 ms have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the end process of the press performance is executed.

When the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", no press period type is set and the button press is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the long press scenario 222c2. The long press scenario 222c2 is a scenario in which the period during which a long press of the button is valid (long press press period) is determined according to the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k (i.e., the time elapsed since the variable display began). The information of this long press press scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the long press press performance is selected as the variable pattern, and it is determined that it is a long press press period based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m.

Specifically, in the long press/press scenario 222c2, a long press/press period is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the long press/press period. The long press/press period is a period for determining whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (pressed for a long time) for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the long press/press performance, a predetermined performance (for example, a performance in which the text "Long press successful!" is displayed) is executed based on the fact that a long press operation has been performed during the long press/press period.

Then, for the value "15001" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "END" information indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. In other words, when 15001 ms have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the end process of the press performance is executed.

When the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", no press period type is set and the button press is invalid.

Next, FIG. 165(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the composite press scenario 222c3. The composite press scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which the period during which multiple types of button presses are valid is determined according to the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k (i.e., the time elapsed since the variable display began). The information of this composite press scenario 222c3 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the composite press performance is selected as the variable pattern, and it is determined that it is a various press period based on the information set in the press scenario storage area 223m. Note that in this embodiment, only one type of composite press scenario is used, but this is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the composite press scenario 222c3, the press period type is set to an auto press period for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the auto press period. The auto press period is a period during which an auto press is performed based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (2 seconds or more in this control example). In the auto press performance, based on the fact that a long press operation is performed during the auto press period, a performance is performed in which the frame button 22 is pressed every second while the long press operation continues (for example, a performance in which the gauge increases with successive taps of the frame button 22).

For the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "12001 to 13200," the release period is set as the press period type when auto press is in progress, and the normal press performance is set when non-auto press is in progress, and the timing type is set to "NG."

For the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "13201 to 13800," the release period is set as the press period type when auto press is in progress, and the normal press performance is set when non-auto press is in progress, and the timing type is set to "OK."

For the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "13801 to 15000," the release period is set as the press period type when auto press is in progress, and the normal press performance is set when non-auto press is in progress, and the timing type is set to "NG."

That is, when the auto button is pressed, a release effect is displayed, which is an effect when the frame button 22 is released, and by releasing the frame button 22 in the period from 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of the fluctuation, an effect based on the timing type of "OK" (for example, the text "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is released between 12001 ms and 13200 ms or between 13801 ms and 15000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the text "Bad timing!") is displayed.

When not in auto-press mode, a normal press effect is displayed, which is an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed, and by pressing the frame button 22 between 13201 ms and 13800 ms from the start of the fluctuation, an effect based on the "OK" timing type (for example, the text "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed between 12001 ms and 13200 ms or between 13801 ms and 15000 ms, an effect based on the "NG" timing type (for example, the text "Bad timing!") is displayed.

An auto press effect is set for the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k between 15001 and 18000, and the timing type is set to "OK."

Then, for the value "20001" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, "END" information indicating the end of the press scenario is stored. In other words, when 20001 ms have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the end process of the composite press performance is executed.

Next, the details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the character selection table 222d includes a winning character selection table 222d1 and a losing character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166(b). FIG. 166(b) is a table for determining the characters to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and is a table in which the characters are specified according to the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Although not shown in the figure, the effect counter 223f has three independent counters, and when selecting a character in each period, a different counter is used to select. This increases the variety of characters displayed in the first to third periods, enhancing the player's interest.

Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, a "hero" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "0-49", a "rabbit" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "50-100", and a "turtle" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "101-149". As the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "150-199", "the same character as the point effect type" is defined, and the same character as the character (hero, rabbit, turtle) that performs the main effect in the point effect is selected.

In other words, in the point presentation that is executed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the same character as the character that performs the main presentation in the point presentation is more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods. This increases the player's interest because the player plays the game in the hope that the same character as the character that performs the main presentation in the point presentation will be displayed in the first to third periods.

Next, the contents of the losing character selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 166(c). FIG. 166(c) is a table for determining the characters to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation when the result of the jackpot determination is a losing one, and is a table in which the characters are specified according to the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, in the losing character selection table 222d2, a "hero" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 65", a "rabbit" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "66 to 132", and a "turtle" is defined as the character corresponding to a value of the effect counter 223f of "133 to 199".

Next, referring to FIG. 167, the details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), the point selection table 222e includes a winning point selection table 222e1 and a losing point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and is a table in which the points are specified in accordance with the value of the presentation counter 223f. When selecting points in each period, a different counter is used for each selection, just as when selecting a character. This makes it possible to increase the variety of points displayed in the first to third periods, enhancing the player's interest.

Specifically, the winning point selection table 222e1 specifies that the point value "1" corresponds to the last digit value "0-2" of the performance counter 223f, that the point value "2" corresponds to the last digit value "3-6" of the performance counter 223f, and that the point value "3" corresponds to the last digit value "7-9" of the performance counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), the loss point selection table 222e1 specifies "1" as the point corresponding to the last digit value of the effect counter 223f "0-4", "2" as the point corresponding to the last digit value of the effect counter 223f "5-7", and "3" as the point corresponding to the last digit value of the effect counter 223f "8-9".

Therefore, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured to select higher points more easily than the losing point selection table 222e2. In other words, when the result of the big win determination is a big win, high points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation. This increases the player's interest because the player plays the game in the hope that high points will be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation.

Returning to FIG. 164, the explanation will continue. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a press performance flag 223j, a press performance scenario counter 223k, a press scenario storage area 223m, a slot performance flag 223n, a slot performance counter 223p, and a slot performance status 223q have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

The press performance flag 223j is a flag for determining whether a press performance is being performed (displayed); when it is on, it indicates that a press performance is being performed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that a press performance is not being performed (displayed). This press performance flag 223j is set to on (see S2031 in FIG. 170) when it is determined that the acquired variable pattern is a press performance (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170). It is then referenced in the press performance setting process (see FIG. 172) to determine whether a press performance is being performed (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to off when the press performance ends (see S4416 in FIG. 172).

The press performance scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the time that has elapsed since the variable display set for the press performance started. This press performance scenario counter 223k is incremented by one each time it is determined that a press performance is in progress in the press performance setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 when the press performance ends (see S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the press performance setting process is executed every 1 ms in main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is incremented by one every 1 ms. Whether or not the button press is valid is determined based on the value of this press performance scenario counter 223k (the time that has elapsed since the variable display started) and the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m, which will be described later.

The press scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing press scenarios stored in the press scenario table 222c described above. When a variation pattern for which a press performance is set in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) is acquired, this press scenario storage area 223m sets a press scenario corresponding to the set press performance (see S2033 in FIG. 170). Whether or not the button press is in a valid period is determined based on the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m and the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k described above.

The slot performance flag 223n is a flag for determining whether a slot performance is being executed (displayed); when it is on, it indicates that a slot performance is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that a slot performance is not being executed (displayed). This slot performance flag 223n is set to on (see S2305 in FIG. 170) when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is a slot performance (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172) in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170). Then, in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referenced to determine whether a slot performance is being executed (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to off when the slot performance ends (see S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot performance counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable display set for the slot performance. This slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4603 in FIG. 174) when it is determined that a slot performance is in progress (S4601 in FIG. 174: Yes) in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174). Since the slot performance setting process is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot performance counter 223p is referenced in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), the initial slot performance process (see FIG. 175), the normal slot performance process (see FIG. 176), the first shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 177), the second shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 178), and the extended slot performance process (see FIG. 179).

The slot presentation state 223q is an area in which information indicating the state of the slot presentation is stored, and values corresponding to the initial slot presentation, normal slot presentation, first shortened slot presentation, second shortened slot presentation, and extended slot presentation are stored. In the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), if it is determined that the acquired variable pattern has a slot presentation set (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170), the initial slot presentation is set (see S2036 in FIG. 170). In the initial slot presentation process (see FIG. 175), if the normal slot presentation is selected, the normal slot presentation is set (see S4705 in FIG. 175), if the first shortened slot presentation is selected, the first shortened slot presentation is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and if the special slot presentation is selected, the special slot presentation is set (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot performance process (see FIG. 176), when a display slot stop command for a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, a waiting-for-end state is set (see S4805 in FIG. 176), and when a display slot performance command corresponding to the second shortened slot performance is set, a second shortened slot performance is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the first shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 177), when a second shortened slot performance is selected, a second shortened slot performance is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when an extended slot performance is selected, an extended slot performance is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 178), when a display slot stop performance command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, a waiting-for-end state is set (see S5005 in FIG. 178). In the extended slot performance process (see FIG. 179), when a display slot stop performance command for a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, a waiting-for-end state is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot presentation setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referenced to determine which slot presentation is being executed (displayed), and is cleared when the slot presentation ends (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, referring to FIG. 168, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. The display control device 114 in this control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and character ROM 234 have been partially changed, but is otherwise the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233m added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m stores information indicating small areas (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163) of the display area consisting of a total of nine areas obtained by dividing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 into three areas vertically and three areas horizontally, and is controlled so that the character pattern and the point pattern are not displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, when, for example, Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m as information indicating the display area, the character pattern and the point pattern that do not correspond to the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m (not displayed in Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13) are selected to execute the point performance. In addition, after the character pattern is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area in which the selected character pattern is displayed, and then the point pattern is selected. This prevents the character pattern and the point pattern from being displayed overlapping in the same display area. When selecting a point pattern, if all display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, the image data of the character pattern and the point pattern may be combined (or reduced) to prevent overlapping, or one of the character pattern and the point pattern may not be displayed.

The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to it compared to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying character designs in the point performance described above is stored. This character data table 234a3 stores display information for the character designs displayed in the first to third periods in the point performance, and in the point performance command process (see FIG. 186), the display information for the character designs corresponding to the character information of the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The display information for the character pattern includes information regarding the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is processed so that display information that matches the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m is not selected. This prevents the character pattern from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, so that, for example, the point pattern displayed in the point performance and the character pattern are not displayed overlapping each other.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying the point patterns in the point performance described above is stored. This point data table 234a4 stores display information for the point patterns displayed in the first to third periods in the point performance, and in the point performance command processing (see FIG. 186), the display information for the point patterns corresponding to the point information of the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The display information for the point pattern includes information regarding the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is processed so that display information that matches the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m is not selected. This prevents the point pattern from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, so that, for example, the point pattern and character pattern displayed in the point performance are not displayed overlapping each other.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 169 to Fig. 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the main process 2 (see Fig. 169) is changed to execute a push effect setting process (S1731) and a slot effect setting process (S1732), and that the variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 169) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see Fig. 140), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 169, we will explain main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In main process 2, the processes of S1701 to S1710 are executed in the same manner as the main process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 101).

When the processing of S1710 is completed, the press effect setting process is executed (S1731), the slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the processing proceeds to S1711. Then, the command determination process is executed (S1711), the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S1712), and the processing proceeds to S1713. From S1713 onwards, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

Here, the details of variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. This variable display setting process 2 (S1712) differs from the variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 140) in that instead of the reach navigation effect, processing has been added to execute a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect, but otherwise is the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed as in the first control example, and then the variable display pattern command is set (S2006).

After completing the processing of S2006, it is determined whether or not the set variation pattern command is for executing a press performance (S2031). If it is determined in the processing of S2031 that a press performance is to be executed (S2031), the press performance in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), a press performance scenario corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is set in the press scenario storage area 223m (S2033), and the processing proceeds to S2007.

In the process of S2033, for example, if the acquired variation pattern is one that executes a normal press performance, a normal press scenario is acquired from the press scenario table 222c and set in the press scenario storage area 223m. This makes it possible to match the button valid period to the display of the performance based on the press scenario storage area 223m and the press performance scenario counter 223k.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2031 that the button press effect is not to be executed (S2031: No), it is then determined whether or not the button press effect is to be executed (S2034).

If it is determined in the processing of S2034 that the set variable pattern command is for executing a slot presentation (S2034: Yes), the slot presentation in progress flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), the slot presentation state 223q is set to the initial slot presentation (S2036), and the processing proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2034 that a slot presentation is not to be executed (S2034: No), then it is determined whether or not a point presentation is to be executed (S2037).

If it is determined in the process of S2037 that the set variation pattern command is for executing a point effect (S2037: Yes), the process executes a point effect setting process (S2038) and proceeds to the process of S2007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2037 that the variation pattern command is not for executing a point effect (S2037: No), the process skips S2038 and proceeds to the process of S2007.

The process proceeds to S2007 by executing steps S2007 to S2011, as in the first control example, and then terminating this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the details of the point effect setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114.

In the point effect setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether the hit/miss judgment result is a big hit or not (S4301). Then, based on the type of point effect, the value of the effect counter 223f, and the hit character selection table 222d1, the first to third character information are determined (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information are information for displaying the character pattern in the three periods in which the character pattern and the point pattern set in the point effect are displayed. The first character information is information on the character pattern to be displayed in the first period, which is the earliest of the three periods (the shortest time elapsed since the variable display began), the second character information is information on the character pattern to be displayed in the second period, which is the period following the first period, and the third character information is information on the character pattern to be displayed in the third period, which is the period following the second period.

As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured to easily select a character design that is the same as a character that is pre-determined in the point performance. This allows the player to expect a big win if the character that is primarily displayed in the point performance and the character design that is displayed in the first to third periods are the same character.

After completing the process of S4302, the first to third point information are determined based on the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4306. The first to third point information, like the first to third character information described above, is information for displaying point patterns during the first to third periods set in the point effect.

As described above, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured to make it easier to select high-point symbols than the losing point selection table 222e2. This allows the player to have hope that a big win will come after many high-point symbols are displayed in the point presentation.

On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss determination is determined to be a loss in the process of S4301 (S4301: No), the first to third character information is determined based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the loss character selection table 222d2 (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the last digit of the effect counter 223f and the loss point selection table 222e2 (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306.

When the processing of S4303 or S4305 is completed, a display point effect command is generated and set based on the type of point effect and the determined character information and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S1702) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving the display point effect command, the display control device 114 sets a point effect based on the point effect type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information, and displays the point effect on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to Figs. 172 and 173, the details of the press effect setting process (S1731) executed in main process 2 (see Fig. 169) will be described. This press effect setting process (S1731) is a process for detecting a press (normal press, long press, etc.) of the frame button 22 according to the press effect being executed (displayed), and transmitting a command according to the press to the display control device 114.

In the press performance setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether the press performance in progress flag 223j is on or not (i.e., whether a press performance is in progress or not) (S4401). If it is determined in the process of S4401 that the press performance in progress flag 223j is off (S4401: No), there is no need to set up the press performance, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the press performance in progress flag 223j is on (S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to S4402 to execute processing related to the press performance.

In the process of S4402, the press performance scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402) and the process proceeds to S4403. The press performance setting process (S1731) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in main process 2 (see FIG. 169), so while the press performance is being executed, the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

In the process of S4403, it is determined whether or not the current period is the period for detecting the normal press of the frame button 22 (normal press period) based on the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m (S4403).

If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the current period is a normal pressing period (S4403), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404). If it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal pressing period is set based on the timing type (S4405), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is obtained from the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k, and a display press command corresponding to the timing type is set. This makes it possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 was pressed, and to execute a performance corresponding to the press timing, when different performances are to be executed depending on the press timing of the frame button 22.

If it is determined in the process of S4403 that the current period is not a normal press period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a period in which a long press of the frame button 22 is detected (long press press period) (S4406). If it is determined in the process of S4406 that the current period is a long press press period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4407). Specifically, if the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time.

If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held (S4407), a display long press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held during the long press period is set (S4408), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed and held (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4407 that the current period is not a long press period (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is an auto press period (S4409). If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the current period is an auto press period (S4409: Yes), an auto press performance setting process is executed (S4410) and this process ends. Details of the auto press performance setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not the auto-press period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the current period is the release period (S4411). In the process of S4410, if it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been released (whether or not it has changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state) (S4412).

If it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a display release command is set indicating that the frame button 22 has been released during the release period, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the frame button 22 has not been released (S4412: No), the process skips the process of S4413 and ends this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S4411 that the current period is not the release period (S4411: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press performance period (whether the press period type of the press scenario obtained based on the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is "END" information) (S4414).

If it is determined in the process of S4414 that it is the end timing of the press performance period (S4414: Yes), the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), the press performance in progress flag 223j is set to off (S4416), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4414 that it is not the end timing of the press performance period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 173, the details of the auto press effect setting process (S4410) that is executed when it is determined that the auto press period is in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) will be described. This auto press effect setting process (S4410) is a process for transmitting a command to the display control device 114 indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed at regular intervals (every second) during the auto press period, based on the frame button 22 being pressed and held during the auto press period. That is, in the auto press effect, pressing the frame button 22 and holding it down causes the frame button 22 to be pressed automatically (automatically).

In the auto-press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not a long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501). Specifically, if the frame button 22 has been continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that a long press of the frame button 22 has started. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that a long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m is changed to a press scenario for auto-press (S4502). Then, an auto-press start command indicating that a long press of the frame button 22 has started during the auto-press period (auto-press has started) is set (S4503), and this process ends. By changing the press scenario to the press scenario for auto-press in the process of S4502, the effect mode displayed thereafter can be changed to an effect mode that assumes that the frame button 22 is pressed (for example, an effect that says "press the button" can be changed to an effect that says "release the button").

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that a long press of the frame button 22 has not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being long pressed (S4504). If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the frame button 22 is being long pressed (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether or not a certain period (one second in this embodiment) has elapsed since the previous auto press was executed during the period in which the auto press started by a long press of the frame button 22 is being executed (S4505).

If it is determined in the process of S4504 that a certain period (1 second) has passed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: Yes), the auto-press command for display is set (S4506) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that a certain period (1 second) has not passed since the previous auto-press was executed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed and held down (S4504: No), then it is determined whether the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507). Specifically, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 ms or more after being pressed and held down, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended. This makes it possible to prevent a mistaken determination that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being pressed for a short period of time (for example, 1 ms) due to the influence of noise or the like.

If it is determined in the process of S4507 that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m is changed to a press scenario for non-auto press (S4508). Then, a display auto press end command is set (S4509) indicating that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (auto press has started) during the auto press period, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the long press of the frame button 22 has not ended (S4507: No), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed normally (S4510).

If it is determined in the processing of S4510 that the frame button 22 has been pressed normally (S4510: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 has been manually pressed (repeatedly pressed) during the auto-repeated-pressing period, so a display press command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S4510 that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Figs. 174 to 179, the slot presentation setting process (S1732) executed in main process 2 (see Fig. 169) will be described in detail. This slot presentation setting process (S1732) is a process for carrying out processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the slot presentation, etc.

In the slot presentation setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether the slot presentation in progress flag 223n is on (whether or not a slot presentation is in progress) (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot presentation in progress flag 223n is off (S4601: No), this means that the slot presentation is not being executed (displayed), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the slot performance in progress flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot performance. In the processing of S4602, the value of the slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. Since the slot performance setting processing (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms while the slot performance is being executed (displayed).

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot presentation state 223q is a value indicating the first slot presentation (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the slot presentation state 223q is a value indicating the first slot presentation (S4603), the first slot presentation (first slot presentation) is being executed in the slot presentation, so a process during the first slot presentation is executed to execute processing in the first slot presentation (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the initial slot performance processing (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 175. The initial slot performance processing (S4604) is processing executed in the slot performance setting processing (see FIG. 174), and is processing for carrying out processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during the initial slot performance of the slot performance.

In the initial slot performance process (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the button press valid period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is valid is in effect (S4701). Specifically, it is determined that the button press valid period is in effect when the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 2000 and 13000 (i.e., between 2 and 13 seconds after the start of the slot performance).

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button press valid period is in progress (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4702: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). If it is determined in the processing of S4703 that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 was pressed early (between 2 and 8 seconds) in the button press valid period (between 2 and 13 seconds) and there is a lot of remaining performance time for the slot press performance, so the processing proceeds to S4706 to execute the first shortened slot performance.

In the processing of S4706, the first abbreviated slot presentation is selected (S4706), the slot presentation state 223q is set to the first abbreviated slot presentation (S4707), and the processing proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is not between 2000 and 8000 (i.e., the value is 80001 or greater) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 to execute a normal slot performance.

In the processing of S4704, the normal slot presentation is selected (S4704), the slot presentation state 223q is set to the normal slot presentation (S4705), and the processing proceeds to S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop effect command for the stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set (S4708), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the selected effect is set (S4709), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the button press is not currently in an effective period (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is greater than 13,000 (S4710).

If it is determined in the processing of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 13,000 (S4701: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 was not pressed during the valid button press period. In this case, a special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to a waiting for completion state (S4712), and the processing proceeds to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4710 that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is less than or equal to 13,000 (S4710: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the initial slot presentation is not set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not a normal slot presentation is set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4605). In the process of S4605, if it is determined that a normal slot presentation is set (S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to normal slot presentation in progress processing (S4606).

This normal slot performance process is a process for carrying out processes corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during a normal slot performance. In the normal slot performance process (S4606), it is first determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 is within a valid button press period (S4801). Specifically, it is determined that the button press period is valid when the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 17,000 and 28,000 (i.e., between 17 and 28 seconds have elapsed since the start of the slot performance).

If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the button press valid period is not in progress (S4801: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the button press valid period is in progress (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802).

If it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4802: No), this processing ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803).

In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), it means that the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of a normal slot performance, and then it is possible to execute a second shortened slot performance with a performance time of 10 seconds. In this case, a display slot stop performance command for a stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set (S4808), the slot performance state 223q is set to the second shortened slot performance (S4809), a display slot performance command corresponding to the second shortened slot performance is set (S4810), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4803 that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4804 to end the slot presentation.

In the process of S4804, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined to be an even number (S4804: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which two symbols are lined up is set, and the process proceeds to S4807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4804 that the value of the effect counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set, and the processing proceeds to S4807.

In the processing of S4807, the slot presentation state 223q is set to a waiting for termination state (S4807), and this processing ends.

In this way, in a normal slot presentation, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol is displayed, and then one symbol is displayed in the second shortened slot presentation, resulting in three symbols being displayed in total, including the symbols displayed in the initial slot presentation. In contrast, if the frame button 22 is pressed late, the value of the presentation counter determines whether two symbols or one symbol is displayed. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 early, the possibility of two symbols being displayed increases, allowing the player to actively participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the normal slot presentation is not set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4605: No), it is then determined whether or not the first shortened slot presentation is set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4607).

If it is determined in the processing of S4607 that the first abbreviated slot performance is set (S4607: Yes), the first abbreviated slot performance processing is executed (S4608) and the processing proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the first abbreviated slot performance processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 177. The first abbreviated slot performance processing (S4608) is processing executed in the slot performance setting processing (see FIG. 174), and is processing for performing processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first abbreviated slot performance of the slot performance.

In the first shortened slot performance process (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid during the first shortened slot performance (S4901). Specifically, if the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 12000 and 18000, it is determined that the button press is valid during the first shortened slot performance.

If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the button press valid period for the first shortened slot performance is in progress (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902).

If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4902: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot presentation is selected (S4902), and the slot presentation state 223q is set to the second shortened slot presentation (S4904). Then, a slot stop presentation command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4909.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the button press valid period is not in progress (S4901: No), it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is greater than 18,000 (S4906).

If it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is 18,000 or less (S4906: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is greater than 18,000 (S4906: Yes), this is the case where the frame button 22 was not pressed during the button press valid period in the first shortened slot presentation. In this case, the extended slot presentation is selected (S4907), the slot presentation state 223q is set to the extended slot presentation (S4908), and the processing proceeds to S4909.

When processing of S4905 or S4908 is completed, a display slot presentation command corresponding to the selected presentation is set (S4909), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of S4607, if it is determined that the first abbreviated slot presentation is not set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4607: No), it is then determined whether or not the second abbreviated slot presentation is set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4609).

If it is determined in the processing of S4609 that the second abbreviated slot performance is set (S4609: Yes), the second abbreviated slot performance processing is executed (S4610) and the processing proceeds to S4613.

Here, the second abbreviated slot performance processing (S4610) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 178. The second abbreviated slot performance processing (S4610) is processing executed in the slot performance setting processing (see FIG. 174), and is processing for carrying out processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 while the second abbreviated slot performance is being executed (displayed).

In the second shortened slot performance process (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid during the second shortened slot performance (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 22000 and 28000, it is determined that the button press is valid.

If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the button press valid period is not in progress (S5001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the button press valid period is in progress (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002).

If it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5002: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set (S5003), the slot effect state 223q is set to a wait-for-end state (S5004), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot presentation is not set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4609: No), it is then determined whether or not an extended slot presentation is set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4611).

If it is determined in the processing of S4611 that the extended slot performance is set (S4611: Yes), the extended slot performance processing is executed (S4612) and the processing proceeds to S4613.

Here, the details of the processing during the extended slot performance (S4612) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 179. The processing during the extended slot performance (S4612) is a process executed in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for carrying out processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 while the extended slot performance is being executed (displayed).

In the process during the extended slot performance (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid during the extended slot performance (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 22000 and 28000, it is determined that the button press is valid.

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the button press valid period is not in progress (S5101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the button press valid period is in progress (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102).

If it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is lined up is set (S5103), the slot effect state 223q is set to a wait-for-end state (S5104), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S4611 that the extended slot presentation is not set in the slot presentation state 223q (S4611: No), the processing proceeds to S4613.

In the process of S4613, in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the slot presentation, it is determined whether the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is greater than 28,000 (S4613). In the process of S4613, if it is determined that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is less than or equal to 28,000 (S4613: No), it is not the timing to end the slot presentation, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4613 that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is greater than 28,000 (S4613: Yes), it is time for the slot presentation to end, so it is then determined whether or not the slot presentation state 223q is in a state waiting for the end (S4614).

In the processing of S4614, if the slot presentation state 223q is in a state of waiting for termination (S4614: Yes), this means that the slot presentation has already been stopped and displayed by operating the frame button 22, or that a special slot presentation that does not require operating the frame button 22 is being executed. In this case, a display slot presentation end command is set, and processing proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4614, if the slot presentation state 223q is not in a waiting-to-end state (S4614: Yes), the presentation mode in the slot presentation is not displayed as stopped. In this case, in order to stop the presentation mode in the slot presentation and then end the slot presentation, a display slot presentation forced termination command is set (S4616), and processing proceeds to S4617.

In the processing of S4617, the slot performance in progress flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot performance counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot performance status 223q is cleared (S4619), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control process executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 180 to Fig. 186, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that a press-down performance-related command process, a slot performance command process, and a point performance command process are added to the command determination process 2 (see Fig. 180), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In command determination process 2, steps S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 145).

If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not a command related to a press performance has been received (S2631).

If it is determined in the processing of S2631 that a press-down performance-related command has been received (S2631: Yes), press-down performance-related command processing is executed (S2632), and processing returns to S2601. Details of the press-down performance-related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to Figures 181 to 184.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2631 that a command related to a press effect has not been received (S2631: No), it is then determined whether or not a slot effect command has been received (S2633).

If it is determined in the processing of S2633 that a slot presentation command has been received (S2633: Yes), the slot presentation command processing is executed (S2634) and the processing returns to the processing of S2601. Details of the slot presentation command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2633 that a slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), it is then determined whether or not a point effect command has been received (S2635).

If it is determined in the processing of S2635 that a point effect command has been received (S2635: Yes), point effect command processing is executed (S2635) and the processing returns to S2601. Details of the point effect command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2635 that a point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the process returns to the processing of S2601.

Next, the details of the press-down performance-related command processing (S2632) will be described with reference to Figs. 181 to 184. The press-down performance-related command processing (S2632) is processing for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) press-down performances.

In the press performance related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether or not a display press command has been received (S5201). If it is determined in the processing of S5201 that a display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command processing is executed (S5202) and the processing proceeds to S5203.

Here, the details of the press command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing the press command processing. This press command processing executes processing corresponding to the display press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the press command process, first, the press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S5302).

Then, based on the press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5301, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5304). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5305), the press command processing ends, and the processing returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5201 that a display press command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether or not a display long press command has been received (S5203).

If it is determined in the processing of S5203 that a display long press command has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command processing is executed (S5204) and the processing proceeds to S5205.

Here, the long press command processing (S5204) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing the long press command processing. This long press command processing executes processing corresponding to the display long press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the long press command process, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, and the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S5402).

Then, based on the long press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5401, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5404). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5405), the long press command processing ends, and the processing returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5203 that a display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether a display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

If it is determined in the processing of S5205 that a display auto-press start command has been received (S5205: Yes), the auto-press start command processing is executed (S5206) and the processing proceeds to S5207.

Here, the details of the auto press start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a flowchart showing the auto press start command processing. This auto press start command processing executes processing corresponding to the display auto press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto press start command processing, first, the auto press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press start command is determined, and the determined auto press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data to the buffer (S5502).

Then, based on the auto press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5504). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5505), the auto press start command processing ends, and the processing returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5205 that the display auto-press start command has not been received (S5205: No), it is then determined whether or not the display auto-press command has been received (S5207).

If it is determined in the processing of S5207 that a display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command processing is executed (S5208) and the processing proceeds to S5209.

Here, the details of the auto press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(b). FIG. 183(b) is a flowchart showing the auto press command processing. This auto press command processing executes processing corresponding to the display auto press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto-press command process, first, the auto-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto-press command is determined, and the determined auto-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S5602).

Then, based on the auto-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5601, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5604). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5605), the auto-press command processing ends, and the processing returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5207 that the display auto-press command has not been received (S5207: No), it is then determined whether or not the display auto-press end command has been received (S5209).

If it is determined in the processing of S5209 that a display auto-press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto-press end command processing is executed (S5210) and the processing proceeds to S5211.

Here, the details of the auto press end command processing (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing the auto press end command processing. This auto press end command processing executes processing corresponding to the display auto press end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the auto press end command processing, first, the auto press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press end command is determined, and the determined auto press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data to the buffer (S5702).

Then, based on the auto press end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5705), the auto press end command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5209 that the display auto-press end command has not been received (S5209: No), it is then determined whether or not a display release command has been received (S5211).

If it is determined in the processing of S5211 that a display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), the release command processing is executed (S5212) and this processing ends.

Here, the release command process (S5212) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing the release command process. This release command process executes processing corresponding to the display release command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the release command process, first, the release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, and the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5801). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5801, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5805), the release command processing ends, and the process returns to the press performance related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S5211 that the release command for display has not been received (S5211: No), this processing ends.

Next, the slot presentation command processing (S2634) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the slot presentation command processing. This slot presentation command processing executes processing corresponding to the display slot presentation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the slot presentation command processing, first, the slot presentation display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display slot presentation command is determined, and the determined slot presentation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S5902).

Then, based on the slot performance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S5905), the slot performance command processing ends, and the process returns to command judgment processing 2.

Next, the point performance command processing (S2636) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the point performance command processing. This point performance command processing executes processing corresponding to the display point performance command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the point effect command processing, first, a point effect display data table corresponding to the type of point effect indicated by the display point effect command is determined, and the determined slot effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, the information on the prohibited area corresponding to the point effect data table determined in the processing of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

Based on the information in the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the processing of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command, a character data table of the character design to be displayed in the first to third periods is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the information on the prohibited area corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the processing of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command, the point data table of the point pattern to be displayed in the first to third periods is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6007). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6008), the point effect command processing ends, and the process returns to command determination processing 2.

As described above, the composite press effect explained in this second control example is an effect in which the player executes different operation modes (rapid taps, timing presses) on the frame button 22 in succession, and therefore can increase the player's desire to participate in the effect. Furthermore, if it is determined that the player has executed the auto press function during a composite press effect, the press effect mode of the executed composite press effect is switched, so that an effect that does not feel strange to the player can be provided.

In this control example, the composite press effect is normally set to execute a press effect in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed (rapid press effect), followed by an effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed at the right time (timing press effect). If the auto press function is executed at the time when the effect switches from the rapid press effect to the timing press effect, the above-mentioned timing press effect is switched to a release effect in which the button is released at the right time, but other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the auto-press function is being executed at the time when the effect switches from the rapid-fire effect to the timing press effect, the timing of the press operation during the timing press effect may be automatically determined, or the rapid-fire effect may be continued. Even with this configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause discomfort to the player who is executing the auto-press function.

In addition, in this second control example, the composite press performance is configured to be capable of displaying a normal press performance, a timing press performance, and a release performance, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period during which a long press performance is executed may be set as part of the composite press performance.

In addition, in this second control example, the timing at which each press performance mode of the composite press performance is changed is the timing at which the press performance is switched, but the performance mode of the next press performance may be determined when the previous press performance is being executed. This makes it possible to notify the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 will be different during the composite press performance.

In addition, while the composite press effect executed in this second control example is configured to continuously accept operation of the frame button 22 during the effect period, it is also possible to provide an invalid period during which operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite press effect using the invalid period during which operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the execution of the composite press effect, thereby providing the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In the composite press effect described above in this second control example, the result of the composite press effect is displayed based on all of the operation results for each press effect executed during the composite press effect. This configuration can increase the player's motivation to play each press effect. Note that the method of displaying the result of the composite press effect is not limited to this, and the result may be displayed independently for each press effect executed during the composite press effect.

As explained above, in the continuous slot presentation in this control example, in slot presentations that are executed continuously within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the presentation mode of the next slot presentation to be executed is selected depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Specifically, the number of slot presentations executed during the continuous slot presentation is changed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22, and increasing the interest of the game.

The result of the continuous slot performance is displayed as a combination of the pseudo symbols displayed in each of the multiple slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, and the more slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, the more advantageous the result of the continuous slot performance becomes for the player. This has the effect of making the player more motivated to operate the frame button 22, and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, even if the player fails to operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot performance (first slot performance) in the consecutive slot performance, the slot performance can be performed three times, so it is possible to motivate the player to play until the end. Furthermore, even if the number of slot performances performed during the consecutive slot performance is small, multiple combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols can be displayed in one slot performance, so the player can be kept excited until the end.

Furthermore, for players who refuse to operate the frame button 22, a special slot performance that does not require frame button operation is executed after the initial slot performance ends, so the player will not feel dissatisfied.

In this second control example, slot effects are used as multiple operation effects executed during a continuous performance that is executed for a specific period of time, but effects other than slots may be used as long as the configuration allows for changing the presentation mode and number of times of other operation effects executed during the continuous performance based on the operation result of one operation effect executed during the continuous performance.

As explained above, according to the point presentation of this second control example, the display location of the points is set according to the presentation display mode of the third pattern change presentation, and further, points are allocated based on the character displayed in the third pattern change presentation, so that a point presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

When there are multiple small areas in which points can be displayed, the location where the points are displayed may be selected based on the number of points awarded or the result of the third symbol variation performance (the result of the lottery for the special symbol). For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the points displayed this time are 1 point (low points) or the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a miss, the points are displayed in the small area Dm13, which is near the "monster" that is the main character of the third symbol variation performance, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed, and if the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a win, the points are displayed in the small area Dm11, which is near the "hero" that is the main character of the third symbol variation performance, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 in which points can be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to predict in advance whether the lottery for the special symbol this time will be a big hit by grasping the location where the points are displayed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the display mode of the character displayed as the point effect (the character displayed in Dm12 in FIG. 163(b)) may be set to a display mode that guides the location (small area) of the point display that will be executed later. Specifically, the display mode may be set to guide the location (small area) of the point display by the character's line of sight.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third pattern change performance is set as an area in which points are not displayed, but, for example, the proportion of one small area that is occupied by the main image of the third pattern change performance can be calculated, and if that proportion is below a predetermined amount (10% or less), the small area can be determined to be an area in which points can be displayed. This makes it possible to display points near the main image displayed in the third pattern change performance. This prevents a player who is watching the third pattern change performance from missing the point display.

The following configuration may be used to set the display location of the point effect based on the location where the third pattern change effect is displayed. That is, when the display control device 114 receives a command to display points, it may control the display of points in all small areas, and control the display of points displayed in small areas other than the small area where the player can actually see the point display to be masked so that the player cannot see it. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to easily process cases where the display position of the main image displayed in the third pattern change effect moves to various small areas during the third pattern change effect, and the prohibited area and the allowed area are switched.

As a similar process, a point display image layer for displaying points may have points displayed in all small areas, and a performance display image layer for displaying the third pattern change performance may be provided in front of the point display image layer, and a process may be performed to make one of the small areas not used in the third pattern change performance transparent in the performance display image layer.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the small area where the third pattern change performance is being performed is set as a prohibited area that prohibits point display, but a small area where other displays are being performed may also be set as a prohibited area. For example, a small area where game information such as the display of the number of reserved balls is displayed, or in a gaming machine having a decorative accessory that is provided in the pachinko machine 10 and is activated when a predetermined condition (selection of a predetermined change pattern) is met to cover part of the front surface of the third pattern display device 81 (a specific small area), the above-mentioned specific small area when the predetermined condition is met, or in a gaming machine having a specific small area where abnormality information is displayed when an abnormality is detected, the specific small area when an abnormality is detected may be set as a prohibited area.

Furthermore, although this second control example describes a control example using the display area of one display device (third pattern display device 81), similar control may be performed using multiple display devices, and for example, when a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is placed in a specified position, it may be set to a prohibited area, and when it is placed in any other position, it may be set to a permitted area.

<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 187 to Fig. 189. The first modified example of the second control example differs from the above-mentioned second control example in that the contents of the ROM 203 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and that the slot performance setting process 2 (Fig. 189) is executed instead of the slot performance setting process (see Fig. 174), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first modified example of the second control example, three types of auto press periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the press intervals are different in each auto press period. This allows appropriate pressing depending on the type of press effect, such as an effect that requires pressing the frame button 22 multiple times during the button press period (rapid press effect) or pressing the frame button 22 only once at the right time during the button press period (timing press effect).

In addition, in this first modified example, a presentation mode is displayed in which a spin presentation in which the slot is rotated and stopped three times is displayed as a slot presentation, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on pressing of the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is pressed early in the spin presentation, the spin speed of the next spin presentation slows down, and the slower the frame button 22 is pressed, the faster the spin speed of the next spin presentation. In other words, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the spin speed of the next spin presentation slows down, making it easier to line up the target symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed late, the spin speed of the next spin presentation fastens, making it difficult to line up the target symbols. This allows the player to be given the privilege of being able to line up the target symbols more easily by pressing the frame button 22 early, which increases their motivation to participate in the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the second control example>
First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 187. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this first modified example differs from the second control example described above in that the contents of the press scenario table 222c have been changed, but the rest are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 187 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in Figure 187 (a), the press scenario table 222c in this first modified example differs from the press scenario table 222c in the second control example described above in that a first composite press scenario 222c4 and a second composite press scenario 222c5 are provided instead of the composite press scenario 222c3, but otherwise is the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, the contents of the first composite press scenario 222c4 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first composite press scenario 222c4. The first composite press scenario 222c4 differs from the composite press scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the press interval during the auto press period is different, but is otherwise the same. A description of the same points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 187(b), in the first composite press scenario 222c4, the press period type is set to auto press period A (press interval 1 second) for the press performance scenario counter 223k value of "5001 to 12000", and auto press period B (press interval 0.5 seconds) for the press performance scenario counter 223k value of "15001 to 18000".

In this way, by varying the press interval for the auto press period, which is set to a different period depending on the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k, it is possible to prevent a player who is executing the auto press function from quickly becoming bored with the performance based on the auto press function being executed.

In this modified example, the press interval is set in advance for each auto press period, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a predetermined condition is met and the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k reaches the auto press period, one auto press pattern may be selected from an auto press pattern selection table in which multiple auto press patterns with different press intervals are stored, and the press interval may be set based on the selected auto press pattern. By configuring in this way, even if a composite press performance based on the same composite press scenario is executed, auto press functions with different press intervals are executed, so it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

A predetermined auto-push pattern may also be selected from the above-mentioned auto-push pattern selection table based on the result of the special symbol discrimination. Specifically, when a presentation in which the degree of progress increases with the number of presses is executed, if it is determined that the special symbol discrimination result is a jackpot, the auto-push pattern with the shortest press interval among the auto-push patterns stored in the auto-push pattern selection table may be selected. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the presentation when the special symbol discrimination result is a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player who is executing the auto-push function predict the result of the special symbol discrimination based on the degree of progress of the presentation.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to notify the press interval while the auto press function is being executed. This allows the player to visually grasp the press interval of the auto press function currently being executed.

Next, the contents of the second composite press scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(c). FIG. 187(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second composite press scenario 222c5. The second composite press scenario 222c5 differs from the first composite press scenario 222c4 described above in that an auto press period is also set for the values "12001" to "15000" of the press performance scenario counter 223k, which is the period corresponding to the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)), but is otherwise the same. A description of the same points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 187(c), the second composite press scenario 222c5 has an auto press period C (press interval 2 seconds) set for the values of the press performance scenario counter 223k from "12001" to "15000". In this way, by executing the auto press function with a press interval of 2 seconds during the period in which a period of 3 seconds is set as the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)), it is possible to realize a situation in which the button is pressed at a predetermined timing within a substantially predetermined period.

Specifically, for example, if a press performance is executed by the auto press function when the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k during the auto press period A is "14000", the next press performance will be executed when the value of the press performance scenario counter 223k during the auto press period C is "16000", that is, two seconds after the previous press performance. Therefore, in the above case, the press performance will be executed one second after the start of the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)).

In this way, by setting different press intervals during auto press, it is possible to optimally execute button press effects with different gameplay characteristics while the auto press function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is held down and held).

Next, referring to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this first modified example differs from the second control example described above in that a press count counter 223r is provided, but is otherwise the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The press count counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (display) of a slot presentation. This press count counter 223r is incremented by one when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press valid period arrives in the slot presentation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) (see S6108 in FIG. 189). If the value of the press count counter 223r is 2 or less, the setting of the next spin presentation is executed, and if the value of the press count counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot presentation is set. Also, the button press valid period is set based on the value of this press count counter 223r.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 189, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the second control example will be described. The control process in the first modified example differs from the second control example described above in that the slot performance setting process 2 (Fig. 189) is executed instead of the slot performance setting process (see Fig. 174), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the slot performance setting process 2 (S1732). This slot performance setting process 2 (S1732) displays a performance mode in which a spin performance in which the slot is spun and stopped is executed three times as a slot performance, and performs processing to stop the rotation of the slot based on pressing of the frame button 22. Also, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, processing is performed to slow down the spin speed in the next spin performance so that the number of spins in each spin performance is the same. In other words, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the spin speed in the next spin performance will be slower, making it easier to line up the desired patterns.

In the slot presentation setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot presentation in progress flag 223n is on, thereby determining whether or not the slot presentation is being executed (displayed) (S6101).

If it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the slot performance in progress flag 223n is off (S6101: No), this means that the slot performance is not being executed (displayed), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the slot performance in progress flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), the slot performance is being executed (displayed), so the slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S6102) and the processing proceeds to S6103.

In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not it is the valid button press period (S6103). Specifically, the valid button press period is set by the process of S6115 described later, and for example, when the press count counter 223r is 0 (i.e., the first spin performance in the slot performance), the valid button press period is when the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 2001 and 8000 (i.e., from 2001 ms after the start of the slot performance to 8000 ms).

If it is determined in the processing of S6103 that the button is not currently in its valid period (S6103: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6103 that the button is in the valid button period (S6103: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104). If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command for stopping the symbols rotating in the spin effect is set (S6105), and the process proceeds to S6108.

If it is determined in the process of S6104 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the button press valid period (S6106). Specifically, if the press count counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 8000.

If it is determined in the process of S6106 that the end of the valid button press period has not arrived (S6106: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6106 that the end of the valid button press period has arrived (S6106: Yes), a display slot stop effect command is set to forcibly stop the symbols spinning in the spin effect (S6107), and the process proceeds to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether the incremented value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

If it is determined in the process of S6109 that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), this means that the spin effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times, so the process proceeds to S6113 to set the next spin effect.

In the process of S6113, the remaining time until the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18,000 as the value of the slot performance counter 223p, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is 28,000 as the value of the slot performance counter 223p, and the remaining time is calculated by subtracting the current value of the slot performance counter 223p from the upper limit time.

A slot presentation command for displaying a display mode that results in a rotation speed of 10 rotations in the remaining time calculated in the processing of S6113 is set (S6114), the button press validity period corresponding to the value of the press count counter 223r is set (S6115), and this processing ends.

Specifically, in the process of S6115, when the value of the press count counter 223r is 1, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is from 12001 to 18000 is set as the valid button press period, and when the value of the press count counter 223r is 2, the period during which the value of the slot effect counter 223p is from 22001 to 18000 is set as the valid button press period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6109 that the value of the press count counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 was pressed during the final spin performance of the slot performance (or the valid button press period has expired). In this case, a display slot performance end command is set (S6110), the value of the press count counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), the value of the slot performance counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this first modified example, in a slot presentation in which three spin presentations are performed, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the spin speed of the next spin presentation slows down, making it easier to line up the desired symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed late, the spin speed of the next spin presentation speeds up, making it difficult to line up the desired symbols. This allows the player to be given the privilege of being able to more easily line up the desired symbols by pressing the frame button 22 early, increasing their motivation to participate in the game.

It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above, and the length of the next button press effective period may be varied depending on the timing of pressing the frame button 22 during the button press effective period. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first spin performance, the button press period in the next spin performance may be made longer. As a result, since the button press period in the next spin performance is set longer, even if the rotation speed of the spin performance does not change, a benefit can be given in that there are more opportunities to stop the target symbol (i.e., more chances), which can increase the motivation to participate in the game.

<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a second modified example of the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 189 to Fig. 191. This second modified example differs from the above-mentioned second control example in that a frame button control device 290 is provided that outputs a press signal to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals when the pressed state of the frame button 22 is in automatic press, and outputs a press signal to the voice lamp control device 113 based on pressing of the frame button 22 when the pressed state of the frame button 22 is in non-automatic press, but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second modified example, the frame button control device 290 described above goes into an auto-press state based on a specific operation (pressing the frame button 22 for two seconds). During auto-press, even if the frame button 22 is not operated, a press signal is output based on the frame button 22 being pressed and sent to the voice lamp control device 113 at regular intervals. Therefore, even if an effect of repeatedly tapping the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly tapping the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, reducing the operational burden on the player.

<Electrical configuration in the second modified example of the second control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the second modified example will be described with reference to Figures 189 and 190. Figure 189 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical configuration of the second modified example.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second modified example via the frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected by processing of this MPU 291, and the detection result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, which stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Details of the RAM 293 will now be described with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an auto-press flag 293a, a press time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-press flag 293a is a flag that determines whether the frame button 22 is in an auto-press state (a state in which a press signal is output at regular intervals regardless of whether the frame button 22 is pressed or not), and when it is on, it is determined to be in an auto-press state (auto-press), and when it is off, it is determined to be in a non-auto-press state (non-auto-press).

This auto-press flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 has been pressed for 2 seconds or more. The auto-press flag 293a is referenced in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) when it is determined whether or not the button is in the auto-press state.

The pressing time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time that the frame button 22 is pressed. This pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is being pressed. Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is executed every 1 ms, the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms when the frame button 22 is being pressed. Then, when the value of the pressing time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modified example), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held down, and the setting of the auto pressing flag 293a is changed. The pressing time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 has ended.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during auto-pressing. This period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 192) (i.e., when the auto-pressing state is in progress). The timer interruption process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, so the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during auto-pressing. When the auto-pressing flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c counts, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modified example), a button press signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches the predetermined value (1000), so that a button press signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the period counter 293c reaches the predetermined value (1000) (i.e., every time 1 second has passed).

Note that by changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to vary the interval at which the button press signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during auto press. For example, the predetermined value may be set to 500 or 2000, and the timing for varying the value may be when a predetermined operation is performed (another long press, repeated taps, pressing another button, etc.), or when the performance changes. The timing for changing the performance may be notified by the voice lamp control device 113, or may be notified by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<Regarding control process by the frame button control device in the second modified example of the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 192, a control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modified example will be described. Fig. 192 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed periodically (every 1 ms in this modified example) by the MPU 291. This timer interrupt process is a process for detecting pressing of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (press signal) indicating pressing of the frame button 22 to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. Also, when a long press of the frame button 22 is detected, an auto press function is executed, and a press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 every predetermined period (1 second in this modified example).

The timer interrupt process first determines whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the pressing time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and it is determined whether the incremented value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203).

If it is determined in the processing of S6203 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), this means that two seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed, so it is determined whether the auto pressing flag 293a is on (S6204).

In the process of S6204, if it is determined that the auto-press flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), the auto-press function is not being executed, so in order to start the execution of the auto-press function, the auto-press flag 293a is set to on (S6205), a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6212. The press signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S6206, and the voice lamp control device 113 executes a performance based on receiving the press signal, so that the player can easily recognize that the auto-press has been set. Note that it is not limited to outputting a press signal, and it is also possible to notify that the auto-press has been set, and to execute a performance indicating that the auto-press has been set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6204 that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), this means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so in order to terminate execution of the auto-pressing function, the auto-pressing flag 293a is set to off (S6207) and the processing proceeds to S6212.

If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the process skips the processes of S6204 to S6207 and proceeds to the process of S6212.

If it is determined in the processing of S6201 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208).

If it is determined in the process of S6208 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the process proceeds to S6209 in order to output a pressing signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed. If the value of the pressing time counter 293b is greater than 5 in the process of S6208 (the frame button 22 has been pressed for 5 ms), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is determined to have been pressed for a short period of time (e.g., 1 ms) due to noise or the like, it is possible to accurately detect the pressing of the frame button 22.

The process of S6209 determines whether the value of the pressing time counter 293b is less than 2000 (S6209). If it is determined in the process of S6209 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is less than 2000 (S6209: Yes), this is a normal pressing of the frame button 22, so a pressing signal is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6210) and the process proceeds to S6211.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6209 that the value of the pressing time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), this means that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held down, so the processing of S6210 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6211.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether the auto-press flag 293a is on (S6212). If it is determined in the process of S6212 that the auto-press flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), this means that the auto-press function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 (S6213), and it is determined whether the incremented value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (1000 in this modified example) (S6214).

If it is determined in the processing of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 in order to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6214 that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processing of S6215 and S6216 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S6212 that the auto-press flag 293a is off (S6212: No), this means that the auto-press function is not being executed, so the processing of S6213 to S6216 is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, in the second modified example of the second control example, the auto press function can be switched on and off by performing a specific operation (long press of the frame button 22). Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 to execute the auto press function, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

In this second modified example, a push signal is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 even when execution of the auto push function is started. This allows the player to easily recognize that auto push has been set. Note that it is not limited to outputting a push signal, but it is also possible to notify the player that auto push has been set, and based on that notification, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute a presentation indicating that auto push has been set.

In this second modified example, even when the auto press function is being executed, the normal press of the frame button 22 is detected and a press signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, even when the auto press function is being executed, the presentation mode can be changed by the player's arbitrary operation of the frame button 22, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game. However, this is not limited to this, and when the auto press function is being executed, the normal press of the frame button 22 may not be detected. Also, when the auto press function is being executed, the execution of the auto press function may be terminated based on the normal press of the frame button 22. This makes it possible to easily terminate the execution of the auto press function, and provides a gaming machine that is easy for players to operate.

In the second modified example, the time that the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by the MPU, but this is not limited to the above. For example, an electrical circuit may be provided so that a capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and the button may be determined to have been pressed and held when the voltage of the capacitor reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 5V) or higher.

<Other examples of effects executed by each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be described. Note that the same components as those used in the above-mentioned control examples will be given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Mission Production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, when a specific variation pattern (for example, Super Reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the processing of the voice lamp control device 113, a mission performance is executed. This mission performance is a performance in which a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a special benefit (for example, a big win) is given if the performance content executed thereafter satisfies the command.

In each of the control examples described above, the command display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is composed of the command content (first command information) and the commander (second command information). Past command displays are also configured to be memorizable as command history. By configuring it in this way, when a mission performance is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are displayed simultaneously. Here, based on the relationship between the current command display and the past (previous) command display, the system is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the current mission performance will be successful.

Specifically, if the current and previous command displays (first command information and second command information) are identical, it suggests that the current mission performance is highly likely to be successful, and if they are different, it suggests that the current mission performance is unlikely to be successful. Furthermore, if part of the command display matches (for example, the commander, which is the second command information, matches), it is set to suggest that there is a high possibility of success if the mission performance progresses to the latter half.

In this way, the overlap between the previous mission performance and the current mission performance is set up to increase the expectation of a jackpot, so similar performances are executed repeatedly, making it possible to turn a situation in which the player would easily become bored with the game into one in which the player can hope for a jackpot. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this mission performance, when a command such as "gather people" is displayed as the command content, if the result of the performance is "0 people", the command fails, and if the result is "1 person" to "100 people", the command is successful, and if the command is successful, the command completion rate (for example, if "1 person" the command completion rate is 1%, and if "100 people" the command completion rate is 100%) is set. By setting this command completion rate, it is possible to set the expectation of a jackpot in more detail. Also, if the command content (first command information) of the current command display and the commander (second command information) are different, the performance is configured to be executed with the command completion rate inherited. This makes it possible to change the content of the performance even if the same command content is repeatedly executed. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored of the game early on.

In the above explanation, the performance is based on the previous command display history and the current command display, but for example, a means for storing multiple command displays displayed in the past and a selection means for allowing the player to select an arbitrary command display from among them may be provided. The command display selected by the selection means may be displayed on the display screen (third pattern display device 81), and the performance may be performed based on the command display selected by the selection means and the current command display. Also, information corresponding to the past command displays may be displayed as a two-dimensional code on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10, allowing the player to acquire the information, and the acquired information may be input into the pachinko machine 10 the next time the game is played, so that the command instructions executed in the past (for example, the day before) may be carried over and displayed.

<Chance Up Production>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, in order to indicate the expectation that the changing special symbol will win the jackpot, a performance is executed in which the color pattern of a part of the display mode of the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the comment display, the title name display of the reach, the background color, etc.) is changed to a different color pattern. As a result, when a similar performance is executed, the player will be watching the performance while hoping for the color pattern of the part of the display mode of the performance to be displayed, which prevents the player from getting bored of the game early.

However, because the above-mentioned partial display modes are displayed at various times during one performance (for example, 60 seconds), there is a problem that the player may not notice the change in the partial display mode, or may become dissatisfied when the player watches the performance with high expectations and then finds that the color and pattern that indicates a high expectation of a jackpot is not displayed.

In contrast, each of the control examples described above has a color/pattern advance notification means that can notify the player in advance of the color/pattern that will be displayed in the current performance when the performance is executed. This allows the player to know in advance the color/pattern that will be provided in the current performance.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the color/pattern advance notification means is configured to automatically select a specific color/pattern from among the multiple colors/patterns displayed. This allows a color/pattern with a high probability of winning to be displayed among the multiple colors/patterns displayed, making it possible to focus on the performance of selecting a color/pattern by the color/pattern advance notification means in the hope that that color/pattern will be selected.

Furthermore, the color/pattern advance notification means is able to notify multiple color patterns based on the number of changes in the above-mentioned partial display mode. This allows the player to focus on the presentation when multiple color patterns with high odds of a big win are pre-notified, and it is possible to suppress distrust in the game that arises from having excessive expectations for each presentation.

In addition, the above-mentioned multiple partial display modes have different expectations of a big win when they are changed to the same color and pattern, so you can enjoy watching the presentation while wondering which partial display mode will use the color and pattern notified in advance by the color and pattern advance notification means.

<Hold change effect>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display device 81 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as the reserved display area) in which information indicating the number of rights to execute the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as reserved number information) is displayed, and an area (hereinafter referred to as the execution display area) in which information corresponding to the special symbol currently being varied (hereinafter referred to as execution information) is displayed.The reserved number information displayed in the reserved display area is changed in the display mode of the reserved symbol, which is represented by the number of symbols, based on information obtained by reading in advance the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, so-called reserved pre-reading performance is executable.

Conventionally, this reserved symbol read-ahead effect was configured to change the display mode of the reserved symbols when a new variation of the special symbols begins. In this case, if a predetermined number or more of reserved symbol information was displayed, the player could enjoy the reserved symbol read-ahead effect, but there was a problem that the effect could not be fully enjoyed when the reserved symbol number was small.

In contrast, in the reserved symbol change presentation in each of the control examples described above, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed using the time it takes for the reserved symbol to move to the execution display area based on the information obtained by predicting the lottery result for the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. This makes it possible to execute a presentation that changes the reserved symbol using at least the time until the currently executed special symbol change ends, even if the number of reserved symbols is small.

Specifically, when the reserved symbol that is the subject of the reserved change (for example, the reserved symbol displayed in Reserve 3) changes into a character, and the reserved symbol that has changed into that character is displayed (transitioned) in a specified reserved display area (for example, the area where Reserve 2 is displayed), the reserved change performance begins (for example, a battle performance).The longer it takes for the reserved change performance to end, the more the reserved change will progress.

In other words, when the reserved symbol that is the subject of a reserved change is moved to reserved 2, the length of the reserved change presentation is determined based on the change time of the special symbol currently in progress and the change time of the reserved symbol displayed in reserved 1. As a result, even if the reserved change presentation is started in the reserved 1 state, if the change time of the currently changing special symbol is long, the reserved change can proceed sufficiently through the reserved change presentation.

The end of this reserve change effect may occur when the reserved symbol that is the subject of the reserve change effect moves to the execution display area, or it may end before that.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, when the reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change performance moves to the execution display area, a character image is displayed near the execution display area. Then, when the reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change performance is displayed in the execution display area, the character image is used for the pre-reading performance of the reserved pattern displayed in the reserve display area.

Specifically, the character whose reserved pattern has changed and which is the subject of the reserved change performance will execute the battle performance described above, along with a character displayed near the execution display area. By configuring it in this way, if the reserved pattern changes to a character when there are only a few reserved patterns, that character will be used in the reserved change performance of the subsequent reserved pattern, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the battle effects described above, the combination of characters competing may indicate the degree of expectation. Also, it is advisable to set the frequency of the reserved read-ahead effect and the expectation of a jackpot to differ depending on the type of character displayed near the execution display area.

<Button effect settings>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a plurality of frame button operation effects that can operate the frame button 22 can be executed as a variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 114. Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, various frame button operation effects are set in each of the above-mentioned control examples (for example, an effect in which the player is notified of the expectation degree of the special pattern corresponding to the currently varying third pattern by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 while the third pattern is varying, by changing the color emitted from the multiple light-emitting parts provided in the pachinko machine 10, or an effect in which the decorative mode is changed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without being based on the variation pattern set by the voice lamp control operation 114, etc.). In this way, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem that the frame button effects are frequently executed, making the action of the player operating the frame button 22 complicated.

In response to this, there are provided means for determining whether multiple frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, interval determination means for determining the interval between the multiple frame button operation effects set when it is determined that multiple frame button operation effects are set, and frame button operation effect setting means for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 even at the specified interval when the interval between the multiple frame button operation effects becomes a specified interval according to the interval determination means. This makes it possible to set the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled to span multiple frame button operation effects when multiple frame button operation effects are executed at specified intervals. This allows the player to continue operating the frame button 22, and prevents the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming cumbersome.

Specific examples of the interval discrimination means mentioned above include a means for setting a period during which multiple frame button operation effects are actually executed, and discriminating the interval between the multiple frame button operation effects based on the set period, and a means for storing combinations of frame button operation effects in which the interval between execution of multiple frame button operation effects is less than a predetermined amount, and a means for discriminating whether or not the combination of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means is set.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned frame button operation performance setting means may specifically be set to extend the effective operation period of a previously executed frame button operation performance, set to bring forward the effective operation period of a later executed frame button operation performance, or set a new frame button operation performance.

When the effective operation period of a previously executed frame button operation effect is set to be extended, the previously executed frame button operation effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a state in which the effective operation period has already been extended, or the frame button operation effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a state in which the normal effective operation period is set, and when the remaining period of the set effective operation period reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining), a display in which the effective operation period is extended may be executed. In this way, it is possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has been set until just before the previously executed frame button operation effect ends, so that the player can continue to operate the frame button 22 more easily, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, the result of the previously executed frame button operation effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the normal operation valid period is completed, and the display mode of the result of the previously executed frame button operation effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be changed depending on the operation of the frame button 22 during the extended operation valid period.

When setting the effective operation period of a frame button operation performance to be executed later to be brought forward, the frame button operation performance to be executed later itself may be executed earlier, or the frame button operation performance to be executed later may be left as is and the effective operation period set earlier may be used as a preparation period until the frame button operation performance to be executed later is started. For example, if a frame button operation performance in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly tapped is executed as a frame button operation performance to be executed later, a display indicating the degree of the rapid tapping operation can be displayed by executing a rapid tapping operation during the preparation period, or the auto rapid tapping function can be set to on during that preparation period.

In addition, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is unrelated to the previously executed frame button operation effect or the subsequently executed frame button operation effect is executed.

As explained above, when multiple frame button operation effects are set at a predetermined interval, the frame button operation effects are set so that the effective operation periods set in the multiple frame button operation effects continue, allowing the player to continue operating the frame buttons 22, thereby preventing the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 from becoming cumbersome.

The method of setting the frame button operation effects may involve setting multiple frame button operation effects when setting one effect, or may involve setting frame button operation effects for each effect that may be performed close together. For example, the frame button 22 may be repeatedly pressed during the period until the change in the third pattern based on the change in the special pattern becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (e.g., SP reach), and the expected probability of the current special pattern being a jackpot may be displayed in the color of the decorative lamp provided on the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, when setting a predetermined dynamic display mode (e.g., SP reach), a configuration may be configured in which a pattern in which the third pattern becomes a predetermined dynamic display mode (e.g., SP reach) can be selected from multiple patterns (e.g., three), and when a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set is selected from the predetermined dynamic display modes, the interval between the execution of the two frame button operation effects may be a predetermined interval.

In addition, in each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but this is not limited to this, and any other configuration that can be operated by the player may be used, such as an operation means equipped with a proximity sensor that can be operated by the player bringing his/her hand close, an operation means that reacts when the player touches it (detects pressure or changes in capacitance), or an operation means that allows the player to tilt the device back and forth or left and right, or to rotate it. Furthermore, in the above content, the operation means is made up of the frame button 22 alone, but the operation means may be made up of multiple devices.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned controls, the method of automatically setting the operating means to a state in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period of time or more is used, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the predetermined operation may be set when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing, or when the operating means is operated in a predetermined procedure. Also, a dedicated device for automatically switching to a state in which the operating means is operated may be provided.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Fig. 195 to Fig. 218. In the above-mentioned second control example, as the performance display executed by the third symbol display device 81, indicators P1 to P5 (see Fig. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the display state of each of the indicators P1 to P5 becomes a predetermined state (for example, the display state of the indicator P3 indicating MAX), a specific performance (for example, SP reach) is executed, and a predetermined value (for example, points) that changes the display state of each indicator in the point performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In contrast, this control example describes another example of the point presentation and another example of the point display described in the second control example above. This third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the contents of RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 have been partially changed, the processing executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the processing executed by MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been partially changed. In other respects, this is the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, the differences between the point presentation executed in this control example and the second control example described above will be explained. In the second control example described above, there were two modes used for the point presentation ("normal mode" and "dice mode"), whereas in this control example, there are four modes used for the point presentation (see FIG. 195).

Furthermore, while the second control example described above is configured to allocate points equally to each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in "normal mode," this control example differs in that the allocation of points is made different for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in "normal mode A" depending on the results of the lottery for the special symbol. Also, this control example adds a detailed explanation of the processing related to mode transitions during point effects, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, the point presentation in this control example will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 195 to 197. Fig. 195 is a schematic diagram explaining each mode used in the point presentation in the third control example. Here, the point presentation in this control example is a presentation that is performed while the special pattern is varied 1 to 4 times, and is a presentation that notifies the player that a special benefit (a presentation with a high probability of winning or a big win) will be awarded depending on the display state of the indicator, similar to the point presentation performed in the second control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point presentation in this control example is composed of four types of modes: "Normal Mode A", "Normal Mode B", "Dice Mode", and "Bingo Mode". In each of these modes, a different indicator is displayed, and when a mode transition is performed during the point presentation, the indicator is displayed in a display mode that inherits the display mode of the indicator displayed in the mode before the transition. Specifically, in the case of a display mode in which it is determined that special feature 2 (a presentation with a high probability of winning) will be awarded before the mode transition of the point presentation (for example, a display mode in which indicator P1 corresponding to a rabbit shows the maximum value (MAX) in "Normal Mode A"), the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also configured to display a display mode in which it is determined that special feature 2 (a presentation with a high probability of winning) will be awarded (for example, a display mode showing a repeat number in "Dice Mode").

Specifically, the display mode displayed on the indicator is divided into multiple stages (Bonus 1 display mode (a display mode indicating a confirmed jackpot), Bonus 2 display mode (a display mode indicating that a performance with a high probability of a jackpot will be awarded), and a high standard display mode (a display mode indicating a high standard state in which a bonus will soon be awarded)) that can be distinguished and stored, and when switching modes, the display mode that corresponds to the distinguished and stored display mode stage is set as the initial display mode after the mode transition.

By configuring it in this way, if a mode change occurs during a point presentation, the player can easily understand that the benefits acquired in the previous point presentation are not lost, and by switching to a different indicator during the point presentation, the presentation can be diversified, preventing players from becoming bored too quickly.

Here, the details of each mode used in the point presentation will be explained with reference to Figures 196 and 197. Figure 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode A" used in the point presentation in the third control example. This "normal mode A" has the same display form as the "normal mode" of the point presentation explained in the second control example above, and here only the differences from the above-mentioned "normal mode" will be explained, and other explanations will be omitted.

In "Normal Mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used, similar to the "Normal Mode" used in the point presentation of the second control example described above. In this control example, unlike the second control example described above, the value of indicator P3 corresponding to "Hero" is set to be higher than that of indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Tortoise". Specifically, the bonus given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) is different. When the indicator values of indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Tortoise" reach the maximum (MAX), the player is notified of a transition to a presentation (main presentation) with a high probability of winning as bonus 2, and when the value of indicator P3 corresponding to "Hero" reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is notified of a win as bonus 1 by the changing special pattern.

In addition, a display mode in which any of the indicators P1 to P3 shows the sixth stage is set as a display mode (high standard display mode) that indicates a high standard state in which a bonus will soon be awarded. As a result, if a mode transition occurs when any of the indicators P1 to P3 is in a display mode that shows the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition will be displayed in a display mode that shows the high standard state.

When "Normal Mode A" is set as the point effect, an effect is executed in which "Rabbit", "Tortoise", and "Hero" are displayed as the third pattern change effect (main effect). This allows for a correlation between the content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, and allows the main effect (third pattern change effect) and sub-effect (point effect) to be displayed (executed) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, the "dice mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "dice mode" used for the point presentation in the third control example. This "dice mode" has the same display form as the "dice mode" for the point presentation explained in the second control example above, and here only the differences from the above-mentioned "dice mode" will be explained, and other explanations will be omitted.

In the "dice mode", two indicators P4 and P5 that resemble dice are used, similar to the "dice mode" used in the point presentation of the second control example described above. In this control example, when the combination of the display modes of indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (e.g., a doublet), a bonus (bonus 1, bonus 2) is awarded to the player. Specifically, when indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in a display mode showing the same number (i.e., a doublet display mode), a presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot is awarded as bonus 2, and when the doublet display mode is "6.6", a notification that a jackpot has been won is given as bonus 1.

In the "dice mode", indicators P4 and P5, which resemble dice, are rotated, and if a doublet display mode is displayed statically, indicators P4 and P5 will not display different numbers (i.e., a non-doublet display mode) in the subsequent rotation display, but will instead display a rotation that indicates whether the number displayed statically in the doublet display mode will increase. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a non-doublet display mode from being displayed statically once a doublet display mode has been displayed statically, making it possible to clearly notify the player of the bonus that will be granted.

In addition, in "dice mode", the high reference display mode is set to the case where the number on indicator P4 is "5". For example, when transitioning to "dice mode" in "normal mode A" while the display mode is at the high reference (for example, the value of indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6"), the display mode of indicator P4 is fixed to "5" and an effect is executed in which only indicator P5 is displayed rotating. As a result, even if a mode transition is made during a point effect, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition will be displayed in a display mode that indicates the high reference state. This allows the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is being maintained.

In addition, because the display mode of indicator P4 is stopped at "5," when the doublet display mode is displayed, "5.5" will be stopped and displayed. Therefore, after the doublet display mode is stopped and displayed, it is possible to predict that the doublet display mode "6.6," which notifies the player that a jackpot has been won, is approaching, enhancing the presentation effect.

When "dice mode" is set as the point effect, an effect using dice is executed as the third pattern change effect (main effect). This allows for a correlation between the content of the main effect and the display mode of the indicator in the point effect, and allows the main effect (third pattern change effect) and sub-effect (point effect) to be displayed (executed) without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, "normal mode B" will be described with reference to FIG. 197(a). FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode B" used for point presentation in the third control example. In this "normal mode B", one indicator P6 is used that shows the whole at 100%, and it is set so that when the display mode of the indicator P6 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode showing 50% or 100%), a bonus (bonus 1, bonus 2) is given to the player. Specifically, when the indicator P6 displays a display mode showing 50%, a presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot is given as bonus 2, and when the indicator P6 displays a display mode showing 100%, a notification that a jackpot has been won is given as bonus 1.

In addition, in "normal mode B", a display mode in which indicator P6 indicates 40% is set as the high reference display mode. For example, when transitioning to "normal mode B" in a state in which a display mode of the high reference (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in "normal mode A", the display mode of indicator P6 after the transition is set to a display mode indicating 40%. This means that even if a mode transition is made during a point presentation, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition will be displayed in a display mode indicating the high reference state. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is being maintained.

Next, the "Bingo mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "Bingo mode" used for the point presentation in the third control example. In this "Bingo mode", a nine-square indicator P7 numbered 1 to 9 is used, and a presentation is executed in which the numbers on the indicator P7 corresponding to the numbers displayed by the point presentation are erased (designated). It is set up so that a bonus (bonus 1, bonus 2) is awarded to the player when the erased (designated) numbers are displayed in a straight line.

Specifically, when the display mode showing that two lines of indicator P7 are lined up is displayed, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is given as bonus 2, and when the display mode showing that three or more lines of indicator P7 are lined up is displayed, bonus 1 is displayed, notifying the player that a jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the "Bingo mode", a display mode indicating that one line of indicator P7 is lined up is set as the high standard display mode. For example, when switching to the "Bingo mode" in a state in which a display mode of the high standard (for example, the value of indicator P1 corresponding to the rabbit is "6") is displayed in the "Normal mode A", the display mode of indicator P7 after the transition is set to the high standard display mode indicating that one line is lined up. As a result, even if a mode transition is made during a point presentation, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition will be displayed in a display mode indicating the high standard state. This allows the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is being maintained.

As explained above, the multiple modes used for the point presentation in this control example use indicators (P1 to P7) with different display formats (appearance, number) and display modes (display modes that notify the player that a bonus will be awarded), and by transitioning between modes while the point presentation is in progress, the presentation effect of the point presentation, which was previously monotonous, can be improved.

In addition, even if a mode change occurs during a point presentation, the point presentation after the mode change is executed in a display mode that corresponds to the display mode before the mode change, so a point presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, in a certain mode (e.g., "normal mode A"), the display mode indicates a low reference value with a low expectation of a bonus being awarded (e.g., indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4"), but by transitioning to a different mode (e.g., "dice mode") while this display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the indicators after the mode transition will be a display mode indicating that a bonus (e.g., bonus 2) will be awarded to the player (e.g., indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4").

In this way, by shifting the display mode of the indicator that indicates that a bonus will be awarded to the player to a different mode, it is possible to seamlessly change from a display mode indicating a low base value, which indicates a low expectation of a bonus being awarded, to a display mode indicating that a bonus will be awarded (or a high base display mode, which indicates a high expectation of a bonus being awarded).

Furthermore, even if there is a low expectation that the display mode will result in a bonus being awarded in the current mode (for example, a state in which the special pattern has changed three times during the point presentation) at the end of the point presentation (for example, a state in which the indicators P1 to P3 are in a display mode showing low numerical values in "normal mode A"), there is a possibility of the mode transitioning from a display mode showing a low reference value with a low expectation of a bonus being awarded to a display mode in which a bonus will be awarded (or a high reference display mode with a high expectation of a bonus being awarded), allowing the player to enjoy the presentation until the very end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, the mode transition of the point presentation in this control example will be explained. The point presentation in this control example is set to start from "normal mode A", and if the result of the mode transition lottery carried out during the point presentation determines that a mode transition should occur, the mode transition is carried out (hereinafter referred to as the first mode transition). In addition to the mode transition determination described above, a mode transition is also carried out based on the result of the win/loss determination and the display state of the indicator (hereinafter referred to as the second mode transition).

In addition, restrictions (i.e., prohibition processing) are set for the mode transition destination based on the win/lose judgment result and the display state of the indicator, preventing situations from occurring where the presentation effect of the point presentation is reduced due to the execution of a mode transition.

First, in "normal mode A," as shown in FIG. 195, "dice mode," "normal mode B," and "bingo mode" are set as destinations for the first mode transition, and if the mode transition lottery is won, the mode that is set as the destination transition will be transitioned to. In other words, "normal mode A," which is set as the first mode when the point performance is executed, is set to be able to transition to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode transition.

Here, the first mode transition described above is executed, and if the display mode before the mode transition is a display mode notifying that bonus 2 will be awarded, the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in a display mode notifying that bonus 2 will be awarded, and if the display mode before the mode transition is a display mode indicating a high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in a display mode indicating a high standard (high standard display mode). This makes it possible to notify the player of the status of the indicator (display mode) in an easy-to-understand manner, even if a mode transition is executed in the middle of a point presentation.

This "normal mode A" is also configured to be able to transition to the "dice mode" as a second mode transition when all of the indicators P1 to P3 are in a predetermined display mode (e.g., "4.4.4") with the same display mode. In this case, in the "dice mode" after the mode transition, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in a display mode (e.g., "3.3") with the same result (i.e., a doublet). In this way, by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display mode, it is possible to execute the mode transition in various situations in the point presentation, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in "normal mode A", if the transition conditions for the first mode transition and the second mode transition are met simultaneously, the second mode transition is configured to be executed with priority. This is because, unlike the first mode transition, which is intended to enhance the presentation effect, the second mode transition is likely to be set based on the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, in "normal mode A", if the lottery result (hit/miss determination result) for the special symbol is a jackpot, the transition condition for the second mode transition is likely to be met. In other words, since the state in which the second mode transition condition is met is a state in which a jackpot can be expected, by executing the second mode transition condition with priority over the first mode transition condition, it is possible to execute a mode transition that gives the player hope for a jackpot.

In this way, in a point presentation where multiple modes can be switched, the conditions for the establishment of multiple mode transition conditions are set so that they have different chances of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, if multiple mode transition conditions are established simultaneously, a mode transition is executed based on the establishment of the mode transition condition with the higher chance of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to execute the mode transition during the point presentation as a presentation in which the player hopes for a jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, when the mode set during the point production is "dice mode", "normal mode A" or "bingo mode" is set as the first mode transition. In other words, it is set not to transition from "dice mode" to "normal mode B". This is a pre-set prohibition process, and it is set not to transition to a mode in which it is difficult for the player to associate the display state of the indicator before the mode transition with the display state of the indicator after the mode transition, even if the transition condition for the first mode transition is met (if the mode transition lottery is won). This ensures that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if a mode transition is executed during the point production.

When transitioning from "Dice Mode" to "Normal Mode A", the current point performance is set so that the display state of indicators P1 to P3 is not lower (so that the numerical values of each indicator do not decrease) than the display state of indicators P1 to P3 in "Normal Mode A" that was displayed when transitioning from "Normal Mode A" to "Dice Mode". Specifically, the display state of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display state of the mode to which the mode will transition can be set based on the stored display state of each indicator.

This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when multiple mode transitions are performed during one point performance, resulting in a transition back to the initially set mode. Note that a limit may be placed on the number of mode transitions performed during one point performance (for example, once), so that a mode transition to a mode that has already been displayed during one point performance is not permitted.

When "Normal Mode B" is set, only "Normal Mode A" is set as the destination to transition to when the transition conditions for the first mode transition are met (when the mode transition lottery is won), and when "Bingo Mode" is set, only "Normal Mode B" is set as the destination to transition to when the transition conditions for the first mode transition are met.

As explained above, the mode transitions executed in the point presentation in this control example are easy for players to understand, thanks to multiple mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and are a presentation that builds anticipation.

In this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination and the display state of the indicator) is set only to "normal mode A", but it may be set in other modes. Also, more mode transition conditions may be set, and an upper limit (for example, 1 time) may be set on the number of mode transitions executed in one point performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of mode transitions during point performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 198, a method of displaying points that changes the display mode of the indicator in the point performance will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram that shows a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, multiple layers are overlapped (see FIG. 206 to FIG. 208). FIG. 198(a) is a schematic diagram that shows one of the multiple layers that displays a character image of the third symbol variation performance (main performance), FIG. 198(b) is a schematic diagram that shows one of the multiple layers that displays a point image (sub-performance), and FIG. 198(c) is a schematic diagram that shows an image that combines multiple layers (a layer that displays a character image and a layer that displays a point image).

As shown in Figure 198 (a), the layer that displays the character image is divided into multiple small areas (Dm11-Dm13, Dm21-Dm23, Dm31-Dm33) based on coordinates, and the small areas where characters are displayed (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21-Dm23, Dm31-Dm33) are distinguished from the small area where characters are not displayed (Dm11), and image processing is performed so that the small area where characters are not displayed (Dm11) becomes transparent.

As shown in FIG. 198(b), the layer that displays the point images is divided into a number of small areas (Dm11-Dm13, Dm21-Dm23, Dm31-Dm33) based on coordinates, just like the layer that displays the character images, and a point display process is executed to display points for all the small areas. Note that this point display process receives a command indicating the number of points output from the voice lamp control device 113, and a point image indicating the corresponding number of points is displayed for all the small areas.

By creating an image for each layer, as shown in FIG. 198(c), only in the small area (Dm11) of the character image where no character is displayed, the layer displaying the point image composited behind the layer displaying the character image becomes visible, making it possible to display the point in a position that does not interfere with the character image.

By performing the image creation process described above, it is no longer necessary to perform a process to determine the display position of the point when displaying the point, thereby reducing the control load.

In the point display method described using FIG. 198, since there was only one small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed, that is, one allowable area where point display is possible, the process of making the small area transparent was executed as it is. However, if there are multiple small areas where no character is displayed, a process of selecting one small area from among them may be executed. For example, the type of character image (subject image) displayed as the third pattern change performance (main performance) may be determined, and one may be selected from the allowable areas adjacent to the small area (subject image Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, Dm32 in the case of FIG. 198(a)) where a specific character (for example, character Dc1 simulating a hero as a character associated with the indicator of the point performance) is displayed. This makes it possible to execute the point display near the subject image displayed in the third pattern change performance (main performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a malfunction such as a player who is watching the third pattern change performance (main performance) missing the point display.

In addition, the point display is made visible to the player by making one of the allowable areas, which is a small area in which the character image is not displayed, transparent among the layers displaying the character image, but other control methods may be used. For example, a small area in which a character is displayed in the image currently being created but will later no longer be displayed may be identified, and a transparent process may be applied to that small area at the timing when the character is no longer displayed. By configuring in this way, a time lag can be created between receiving a command for point display and actually displaying the points, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the point display. Furthermore, since the points are displayed based on the movement of the character moving in the third pattern change presentation, a display (presentation) that is related to the third pattern change presentation, which is the main presentation, and the point presentation, which is the sub-presentation, can be executed, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect.

When using such a control method, it is preferable to execute an effect in which two types of characters face off in the third pattern change effect (main effect), and display points when an ally character (e.g., character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks, and display no points when an enemy character (e.g., character Dc2 in FIG. 198) attacks, or display points that are lower in value (lower in numerical value) than the points displayed when an ally attacks. This makes it possible to execute a display that is more closely related to the third pattern change effect, which is the main effect, and the point effect, which is the sub-effect, and thus enhances the effect of the effect.

In the above-mentioned control example, the same number of points is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Also, the method of displaying points described in the above-mentioned second control example may be used.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 199 to Fig. 208. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 199 to Fig. 205.

Figure 199 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Figure 199 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in each of the control examples described above in that an internal level selection table 222aa, an internal score selection table 222ab, a number of times selection table 222ac, a used score selection table 222ad, a final display mode selection table 222ae, a character selection table 222af, a mode selection table 222ag, and a display form selection table 222ae have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, the details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 200(a). FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the internal level selection table 222aa is a table that selects an internal level based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the current special chart change and the hit/miss judgment result of the winning information currently reserved and stored, and the value of the performance counter 223f. The hit/miss judgment result of the current special chart change is determined based on the change pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the hit/miss judgment result of the winning information currently reserved and stored is determined based on the winning command output from the main control device 110.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referenced in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the current hit/miss judgment result is "hit" and the hit/miss judgment result in the reserved is "hit" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "3" is selected, if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected, if the current hit/miss judgment result is "hit" and the hit/miss judgment result in the reserved is "miss" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. Also, if the current win/loss judgment result is a "miss" and the pending win/loss judgment result is a "win" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected, if the current win/loss judgment result is a "miss" and the pending win/loss judgment result is "miss" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "1" is selected, if it is "150 to 198", the internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected by this internal level selection table 222aa is configured to select a high numerical value according to the advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which a jackpot has been won) that is favorable for the game. In this way, by providing an index (internal level) according to the gaming state and executing a performance based on that index, it is possible to easily set the expectation that the gaming state will be advantageous for each performance that is executed.

Next, the internal score selection table 222ab will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 200(b). FIG. 200(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referenced when selecting an internal score to be used when executing a point effect based on the internal level and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, if the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-198", then "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point performance, if the value of the internal level is "2" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-99", then "5" is selected as the internal score, and if it is "100-198", then "6" is selected as the internal score. Also, if the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-149", then "4" is selected as the internal score, and if it is "150-198", then "5" is selected as the internal score.

As described above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point presentation is executed is selected based on the value of the internal level set in accordance with the game state, so that a point presentation that gives the player a sense of anticipation can be executed.

Next, the number of times selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 201(a). FIG. 201(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the number of times selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201(a), the number of times selection table 222ac has a winning number of times selection table 222ac1 and a losing number of times selection table 222ac2 set. This number of times selection table 222ac is a table that is referenced when setting the number of times the point performance is executed (i.e., the number of times the special pattern changes during which the point performance is continuously executed), and is configured so that different selection tables are referenced depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the current special pattern change or the hit/miss judgment result of the winning information that has been reserved and stored.

Figure 201 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the hit count selection table 222ac1. This hit count selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be executed when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, and the number of point effects is selected so that the point effect ends with the variation of the special pattern which results in a hit. Specifically, if the hit/miss judgment result of the current special pattern variation is a hit, the number of point effects is "1 time", if the hit/miss judgment result of the special pattern variation after one rotation (i.e., the reserved memory which is executed after the end of the current special pattern variation) is a hit, the number of point effects is "2 times", and if the hit/miss judgment result of the special pattern variation after two rotations is a hit, "3 times" is selected.

In this way, by setting the number of times the point effects are played based on the timing of the execution of the special symbol variation that results in a win, it is possible to prevent a winning game from starting in the middle of a point effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the point effects.

Figure 201 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss count selection table 222ac2. This miss count selection table 222ac2 is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be executed when the hit/miss judgment result is a miss (i.e., when neither the hit/miss judgment result of the current special pattern change nor the hit/miss judgment result corresponding to the reserved winning information is a hit), and the number of point effects is selected based on the number of reserved winning information (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", the number of point effects is set to "-". This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command to execute a point effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a point effect that can be executed across multiple special pattern variations when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss and the number of reserved balls is "0", thereby improving the presentation effect of the point effect that is executed. Note that in this control example, the point effect is not executed when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss and the number of reserved balls is "0", but other configurations may be used, and for example, the point effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (10%).

If the number of reserved balls is "1", the number of point effects is set to "2", if the number of reserved balls is "2", the number of point effects is set to "3", and if the number of reserved balls is "3", the number of point effects is set to "4". In this way, by selecting the number of point effects using the number of reserved balls when the point effects are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing between a point effect when the hit/miss judgment result is a miss and a point effect when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit based on the number of point effects.

In this control example, the number of times the point performance is performed is selected based on the timing at which the special pattern variation that results in a win is executed when the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit, and is selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point performance is executed when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of a point performance when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the number of reserved balls may be set as the maximum number of times the point performance can be performed, and the number of times may be selected by lottery within that range. By configuring in this way, the number of times the point performance can be performed can be set in a more complex manner.

Next, the score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the score selection table 222ad. This score selection table 222ad is for selecting the score to be used in each point performance, and as shown in FIG. 202(a), the score selection table 222ad selects the score to be used based on the number of point performances (remaining number of times) and the remaining internal score.

Specifically, if the counter value of the performance count counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", then "1" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "5", then "2" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "6", then "3" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", then "-" is selected as the used score. Also, if the counter value of the performance count counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", then "1" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "4", then "2" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "5", then "3" is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is "6", then "4" is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is "7", then "-" is selected as the used score.

Furthermore, when the counter value of the performance count counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the used score is "1", when the remaining score is "3", when the remaining score is "4", when the remaining score is "5", when the remaining score is "4", when the remaining score is "6", when the remaining score is "5", when the remaining score is "7", the used score is "-". Also, when the counter value of the performance count counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the used score is "1", when the remaining score is "2", when the remaining score is "3", when the remaining score is "3", when the remaining score is "4", when the remaining score is "4", when the remaining score is "5", when the remaining score is "6", when the remaining score is "7", the used score is "-".

In this way, by selecting the points to be used in the point effect executed during the current special pattern change based on the remaining number of times the point effect will occur and the remaining points, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the number of times the point effect will continue (the number of times the special pattern will change).

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be described with reference to FIG. 202(b). FIG. 202(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202(b), the final display mode selection table 222ae has a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display mode selection table 222ae4 set therein.

This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referenced when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point performance. The final display mode for each mode is selected in advance when the point performance is executed, and the final display mode corresponding to the mode that is set at the final stage of the point performance (the last change in the special pattern in which the point performance is executed) is displayed.

Figure 203 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. This final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in "normal mode A", and the final display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 is selected based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-49", the indicators P1-P3 are selected to show "4.7.7", when the internal score is "50-99", the indicators P1-P3 are selected to show "5.6.7", when the internal score is "100-149", the indicators P1-P3 are selected to show "4.4.4", and when the internal score is "150-198", the indicators P1-P3 are selected to show "7.7.7". In other words, when the internal score "7" is selected, which is selected only when the current special pattern variation is a big win, the final display mode is set to be selected in which the indicator (indicator P3) that is awarded a higher score value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2) is at the maximum value.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "7.6.5" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "4.7.4" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "5.4.7" is selected; when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "4.4.4" is selected. When the internal score is "5" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "6.3.1" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "5.5.3" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "5.6.2" is selected; and when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 indicating "4.4.4" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-49", the display mode of the indicators P1-P3 indicating "4.3.2" is selected; when the value is "50-99", the display mode of the indicators P1-P3 indicating "5.5.1" is selected; when the value is "100-149", the display mode of the indicators P1-P3 indicating "5.4.3" is selected; and when the value is "150-198", the display mode of the indicators P1-P3 indicating "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score that is selected when the point presentation is executed, it is possible to differentiate the degree to which the display mode of each indicator changes in "normal mode A", and the expectation of a win can be increased by changing the display mode of a specific indicator (indicator P3) to one that indicates a high value.

In addition, in the point performance of this control example, the display mode of the indicator during the intermediate stage is selected based on the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point performances, and the score to be used this time, so an indicator with a higher final display mode value (the closer the display mode is to the maximum value) is more likely to increase in value during the intermediate stage. Therefore, by understanding the degree of increase in the indicator during the intermediate stage of the point performance, the final display mode can be predicted, allowing the player to continue paying attention to the point performance.

Figure 203 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. This final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in the "dice mode", and the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected based on the internal score set when the point performance is executed and the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-49", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "5.5" is selected; when the value is "50-99", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "3.3" is selected; when the value is "100-149", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "4.4" is selected; and when the value is "150-198", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "6.6" is selected. In other words, when the internal score of "7" is selected, which is selected only if the current special pattern variation has won a jackpot, the display mode of the indicator that awards a high value of points as the final display mode, "6.6", is selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "5.3" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "6.3" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "1.1" is selected; when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "2.2" is selected. When the internal score is "5" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "3.2" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "6.2" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "2.4" is selected; and when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "1.1" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "1.4" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "2.3" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "3.2" is selected; and when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicators P4 and P5 indicating "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point performance is executed, it is possible to make a difference in whether or not the combination of display modes of each indicator in "dice mode" will result in a doublet depending on the internal score.

Figure 204 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. This final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in "normal mode B", and the final display mode of indicator P6 is selected based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "100%" is selected, and when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "90%" is selected. In other words, when the internal score of "7" is selected, which is selected only if the current special pattern variation is a big win, the display mode of the indicator that awards a high value of score, "100%, is set to be selected as the final display mode.

Next, if the internal score is "6" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "70%" is selected; if it is "50 to 149", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "80%" is selected; if it is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "90%" is selected; if the internal score is "5" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "50%" is selected; if it is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "60%" is selected; if it is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "70%" is selected; if it is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "80%" is selected.

When the internal score is "4" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "40%" is selected; when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "50%" is selected; when the value is "100 to 149", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "60%" is selected; when the value is "150 to 198", the display mode of the indicator P6 indicating "80%" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point performance is executed, it is possible to vary the extent to which the display mode of the indicator in "Normal Mode B" ultimately rises depending on the internal score.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, the character display selection table 222af will be explained. This character display selection table 222af is a table that is referenced when the point performance is being performed in "normal mode A", and is a table for selecting a character (a mini character for secondary performance (see FIG. 163)) that is to be made to appear to indicate an indicator whose display mode changes among the indicators P1 to P3.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", the "Hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", the "Tortoise" is selected as the character. In other words, when the internal score "7" is selected, which is selected only when the current special pattern variation is a big win, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the Hero is always changed, so that the "Hero" is likely to be selected as the character.

Next, if the internal score is "6" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", the character "Hero" is selected, if it is "100 to 149", the character "Rabbit" is selected, if it is "150 to 198", the character "Tortoise" is selected, if the internal score is "5" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the character "Hero" is selected, if it is "50 to 99", the character "Rabbit" is selected, if it is "100 to 198", the character "Tortoise" is selected.

Furthermore, if the internal score is "4" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", a "rabbit" is selected as the character, and if the value is "100 to 198", a "turtle" is selected as the character.

In this way, by selecting a character that indicates which of the indicators P1 to P3 will change its display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point effect is executed, it becomes possible to predict from the displayed character whether or not the current point effect is the one that will be executed if the hit/miss determination result is a hit, which increases the excitement of the game.

When changing the indicator display mode during a point presentation in which "Normal Mode A" is set, the indicator of the character selected in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. This makes it possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the indicator display mode, enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 199 for further explanation, the mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referenced when selecting a mode transition destination during point presentation. This mode selection table 222ag is referenced (S6406 in FIG. 212) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is on during the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6406 in FIG. 212).

In this mode selection table 222ag, the destination mode is set based on the currently set mode and the value of the effect counter 223f. As described above with reference to FIG. 195, it is set so that a mode with a prohibition on the destination mode is not selected. This makes it possible to prevent mode transitions between modes that are difficult to find a relationship between indices displayed in response to each mode from being executed.

The display form selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display form (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode transition destination that is displayed when transitioning between modes. This display form selection table 222ah is referenced when determining the display form (S6451 in FIG. 213) in the display form selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212).

In this display mode selection table 222ah, whether or not to change the display mode to a "high expectation mode" is selected based on the internal score set in the current point performance and the value of the performance counter. This "high expectation mode" is a display mode for informing the player that the current point performance is a point performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

Specifically, this display form changes the outer shape of the indicators (P1-P7) displayed in each mode to a "special color (red)" or a "special pattern (fish pattern)." It is advisable to set the same content for each indicator (P1-P7) as this "high expectation form." This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the "high expectation form" has been displayed, regardless of which mode is switched to at which point presentation.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display format only for the indicator that is displayed when a mode transition is performed, it is possible to make the player anticipate that a mode transition will be performed during the point presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 199, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199(b), the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous performance start flag 223ab, a performance count counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, a remaining score information storage area 223ae, a display information storage area 223af, a score performance temporary storage area 223ag, a mode information storage area 223ah, a mode transition flag 223ai, and a character information storage area 223aj are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. In this control example, there are multiple counters as the performance counter 223f, and each counter updates its value independently, but the explanation will be omitted and the performance counter 223f will be used as a general term for the explanation. Therefore, even if a process that references the value of the performance counter 223f is executed at multiple points in a single control processing routine, a different counter value is actually obtained in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point effect. In the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211), an internal level determined based on the win/lose determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa is set in this internal level storage area 223aa (S6351 in FIG. 211). The set internal level is then referenced when determining the internal score set for the point effect (S6352 in FIG. 211), and when it is determined in the point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) that the point effect is to end (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the information about the stored internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous performance start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the point performance, which is a continuous performance, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point performance is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the point performance is not being executed. This continuous performance start flag 223ab is set to on in the point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the next or subsequent point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), it is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the point performance initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) that is executed when starting the continuous performance (S6301 in FIG. 210), and is set to off (S6313 in FIG. 210) when it is determined that the point performance is ending (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes).

The performance count counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of consecutive performances (point performances) executed this time. In the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211), a value corresponding to the determined number of performances is set in this performance count counter 223ac (S6351 in FIG. 211), and one is subtracted each time the point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of this performance count counter 223ac is referenced in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether a point performance, which is a consecutive performance, is in progress (S2051 in FIG. 209), when determining whether the consecutive performance is ending in the point performance setting process (see FIG. 210) (S6307 in FIG. 210), and when determining the points to be used in the current variation in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal score selected in the internal score selection table 222ab described above and the used score selected in the used score selection table 222ad described above. In the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211), the determined internal score is set in this score information storage area 223ad (S6351 in FIG. 211), and in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214), the determined used score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in this score information storage area 223ad is referenced when determining the final display mode in the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6355 in FIG. 211), when determining the character (S6356 in FIG. 211), and when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). The used points stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad are referenced when updating the remaining point information in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214), and are referenced when determining the display mode when the value of the effect count counter 223ac is greater than 1 (S6503 in FIG. 214: No) (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point effect has ended (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used score already used from the internal score set for the continuous performance (point performance) currently being executed. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referenced when determining the used score in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6501 in FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point performance is ending (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode of the point performance, which is a continuous performance, and the display mode to be displayed this time. The final display mode determined in the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set in the display information storage area 223af (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). When it is determined that the point performance is to end (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). The display information storage area 223af is configured so that display modes for modes other than the currently set mode can be set, and is configured so that the indicator can be displayed smoothly even if a mode transition is executed during the point performance.

The score effect temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various effects set in the point effect so that they can be output to the display control device 114 with a single display command. The score effect temporary storage area 223ag temporarily stores information regarding the determined display form (such as the color and pattern of the indicator) in the display mode change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213), temporarily stores information regarding the determined display mode (the display mode displayed after the mode change) (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), temporarily stores information regarding the determined display mode in the point effect mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214), is referred to when setting the point effect command for display (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information regarding the various effects is initialized (S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. When a mode transition is performed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212), this mode information storage area 223ah is updated to information corresponding to the mode after the transition (S6409 in FIG. 212), is referenced when setting a display background command (S6410 in FIG. 212), and is referenced when determining the display mode in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point performance is to end (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In this control example, since the point performance is preset to start from "normal mode A", when the point performance is executed, information corresponding to "normal mode A" is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah.

The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether the mode transition conditions (conditions for the first mode transition to occur) are met during the point performance, which is a continuous performance; when it is on, it indicates that the mode transition conditions are met, and when it is off, it indicates that the mode transition conditions are not met. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to on (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined that a mode transition has occurred (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes) in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214), is referenced in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) to determine whether the mode transition conditions are met (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is set to off when the process related to the mode transition (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) has ended.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point effect of this control example will be explained. When the point effect is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in the current special pattern change is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). After that, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the mode transition (S6509 in FIG. 214), and if it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed (the mode transition lottery is won) (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) executed in the change display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) executed when the next special pattern change is started, it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406 in FIG. 212), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S6406 in FIG. 212: Yes), the process related to the mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

In other words, the point presentation in this control example is configured to cause a mode transition when the next special pattern change is executed, so for example, by configuring the lottery to determine whether or not to execute a mode transition to be drawn based on the display state of each indicator displayed by the current special pattern change, the player can be made aware of the display state of each indicator at the end of the special pattern change and can be made to expect that a mode transition will be executed with the next special pattern change.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information related to the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in this character information storage area 223aj is a character displayed to suggest which of the indicators P1 to P3 will change its display mode when "normal mode A" is set. This character information storage area 223aj is set with information related to the character determined in the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211), and is referenced when setting the display point performance command in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6505 in FIG. 214). When it is determined that the point performance is to end (S6307: Yes in FIG. 210), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). In this control example, a character is displayed to suggest whether the display mode of the indicator will change only in "normal mode A", but a performance suggesting whether the display mode of the indicator will change for each mode may be executed, or character information may be used to suggest whether the mode will change. In this case, for example, when a mode other than "normal mode A" is set, the character stored in the character information storage area 223aj can be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point presentation will be changed to "normal mode A."

Next, referring to Figs. 206 to 208, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described in terms of differences from the above-mentioned control examples. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned control examples will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example differs in that, when generating a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to points is set to be written behind the character in one frame of image. By generating a drawing list in this manner, it is possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 209 to Fig. 214, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that variable display setting process 3 (see Fig. 209) is executed instead of variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 170), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in this third control example. In this variable display setting process 3, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above.

After completing the process of S2006, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2051: No), it is determined whether the set variable pattern command is for executing a point effect (S2052). Here, if it is determined that the variable pattern command is for executing a point effect (S2052: Yes), point effect setting process 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is completed, the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2051 that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if a point effect is already being executed, the process proceeds to S2053 without executing the process of S2052. This prevents a situation in which a new point effect is executed while a point effect is being executed.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S2052 that the variable pattern command does not execute a point effect (S2052: No), and if the process of S2053 is completed, the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, as in the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 210, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the point effect setting process 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect of the determined display mode to the display control device 114.

In point effect setting process 2 (S2053), it is first determined whether the continuous effect start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined that it is off (S6301: No), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set on (S6302), and the point effect initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous effect start flag 223ab is set on (S6301: Yes), this means that the point effect, which is a continuous effect, is already being executed, so the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6304.

Now, referring to FIG. 211, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). The point effect initial setting process (S6303) is a process for executing various initial settings when it is determined that the variable pattern command set in the variable display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) is for executing a point effect, and a point effect is to be executed.

When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined by referring to the internal level selection table 222aa, and set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). This determines whether the point effect being executed this time is a point effect that leads to a special symbol win.

Next, the internal score to be used in the currently executed point performance is determined by referring to the internal score selection table 222ab based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa in S6351 and the value of the performance counter 223f, and set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used to set the final display mode in the point performance and to set the characters, as described above. It is also used to set the used score, which is used each time the special pattern starts to change while the point performance is continuing, and to set the remaining score.

After completing the process of S6352, the number of times the point effect will be performed is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of times is set in the effect number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, the number of times selection table 222ac refers to different tables depending on whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, if the winning information corresponding to the reserved memory executed after three spins is a win, the win count selection table 222ac1 is referenced and the number of effects is determined to be "4". Then, the effect count counter 223ac is set to 4 as a value corresponding to the number of effects "4". The value of this effect count counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed, and continues to be decremented until the counter value becomes "0".

Next, the display mode of each indicator that will be ultimately displayed in this point performance is determined based on the internal score set by the processing of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, and set in the display information storage area 223af (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to the four modes ("normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode") that are transitioned to during the point production, and in this process, the final display mode for all modes is determined and set in the display information storage area 223af. This makes it possible to display an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score regardless of which mode the point production ends in.

When processing of S6355 is completed, the character to be used when the point presentation mode is set to "Normal Mode A" is determined based on the internal score set in processing of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and set in the character information storage area 223aj (S6356), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the initial point effect setting process (S6303) sets most aspects, including the final display aspect of the currently executed point effect. By setting the point effect aspect in advance in this way, it is possible to progress the point effect aspect at an intermediate stage in accordance with the final display aspect, and it is possible to execute an optimal effect that minimizes discomfort to the player.

In this control example, the final display mode is set to the final display mode for all indicators, but, for example, it is also possible to set the final display mode only for indicators related to the display mode that notifies the player that a bonus will be awarded, and set the display modes of the other indicators randomly. This makes the display mode of each indicator in the point presentation more diverse, and prevents players from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this case, it is recommended to execute prohibition processing so that the randomly set display mode does not notify the player that a bonus will be awarded that will not actually be awarded. This makes it possible to execute a point presentation that does not cause a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this control example, the internal level is set based on the win/lose determination result when the point effect is executed, but the internal level based on the win/lose determination result may be constantly set by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, the internal level can also be used when setting the presentation mode of effects other than point effects, and there is an effect that the presentation corresponding to the game state of the special pattern can be easily set.

In addition, in this control example, the win/lose judgment result is determined by referring to not only the special pattern that is currently being executed but also the winning information that has been reserved and stored, but the win/lose judgment result may be determined based only on the lottery result of the special pattern that is currently being executed, and the internal level may be set.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will continue. After the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is completed, the mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process is executed to determine whether a mode transition will occur during the point effect, and a process is executed to change the display state of the indicator when a mode transition occurs.

Now, referring to FIG. 212, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process (S6304). The point presentation in this control example has two mode transition conditions: a mode transition occurs when it is determined that a mode transition should be made (when the mode transition flag 223ai is set to on) as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point presentation mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) described below), and a mode transition occurs based on the set mode, the current display mode, or the internal score.

In this way, by combining mode transitions that are performed randomly by lottery with mode transitions that are performed when mode transition conditions (e.g., display mode) are met, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player for the mode transition that will be performed during the point presentation.

In this control example, the details will be described later, but when the result of the hit/miss judgment is highly likely to be a hit (internal score is 6 points or more), and the display state of each of the indicators P1 to P3 in "normal mode A" is a double number ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"), the mode is configured to transition to "dice mode". This is to make it easier to grant a special benefit to the player when a specific display state (double number display state) is reached even in a situation in which it is difficult to grant a special benefit to the player in "normal mode A" (for example, a notification that a performance with a high expectation of a big win will be executed, or a notification that a big win has been won), that is, even if the display state of the indicators P1 to P3 has not reached the maximum value. As a result, even in a situation in which the display state of the indicators is not good in the point performance (for example, a situation in which the points have not increased in "normal mode A"), it is possible to increase the expectation that a special benefit that is advantageous to the player will be granted by mode transition, so that the player can enjoy the performance to the end.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the display mode of each of the indicators P1 to P3 becomes a doublet in "normal mode A," it is possible to transition to "dice mode," in which the display mode of the doublet gives a special benefit to the player, so that the change in the display mode of the indicators due to the mode transition does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will continue. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the currently set mode information is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402). If it is determined that the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402: Yes), it is then determined whether the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

If it is determined in the process of S6403 that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is "6" or greater (S6404), and if it is determined that it is "6" or greater (S6404: Yes), "dice mode" is set (S6405) and the process moves to S6408. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6404 that it is not "6" or greater ("5" or less") (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to off (S6411), and the process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S6402 that the currently set mode is not "Normal Mode A" (S6402: No), or if it is determined in the process of S6403 that the current display mode is not "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406).

This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag that is set in the point effect setting process (S6305) described below, and when this mode transition flag 223ai is set to on, it is referenced in the mode transition process (S6304 in FIG. 212) of the next point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210), and a mode transition is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to on (S6406: Yes), a transition destination mode is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6406 that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to on (is set to off) (S6409: No), this process ends.

Here, we will explain the mode selection table 222ag referenced in the processing of S6407. This mode selection table 222ag selects the mode to transition to based on the currently set mode and the performance counter 223f. Note that restrictions are placed on this mode transition to limit the mode transition (see FIG. 195). For example, when "dice mode" is set, it is set so that mode transition to "normal mode B" is not possible, and when "bingo mode" is set, it is set so that mode transition to "dice mode" is not possible.

This prohibition processing is intended to prevent a situation where a mode transition during a point presentation causes the indicator display mode to change, resulting in a presentation that is difficult for the player to understand. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to take advantage of the benefits of mode transitions during point presentations (changing the indicator display mode in line with the mode transition keeps the player excited until the end of the presentation) while minimizing the drawbacks (a presentation that is difficult for the player to understand due to a change in the indicator display mode resulting from a mode transition).

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will continue. After the processing of S6405 or S6407 is completed, a display mode change process (S6408) is executed. This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on a mode transition.

Next, this display mode change process (S6408) will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode change process (S6408). This display mode change process (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, and determines whether the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is a predetermined display mode (a display mode that notifies the player that a special benefit will be given, or a display mode that is similar to a display mode that notifies the player that a special benefit will be given), and sets the display mode after the mode transition based on the result of this determination.

When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, the display mode is first determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). This display mode selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display mode (color, pattern) of the indicator after the mode transition based on the internal score set in the current point effect and the value of the effect counter 223f. This allows the player to focus on not only the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition but also the display mode (color, pattern) when a mode transition occurs during a point effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, even if a mode transition is performed early in the point performance, i.e., when the indicator display mode is significantly different from the final display mode, the indicator display mode is set based on the internal score set in the point performance, making it possible to execute a performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot.

After completing the process of S6451, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is compatible with SP Reach (S6453). This SP Reach compatibility is a display mode that notifies the player that a performance with a high probability of winning (SP Reach) will be executed. Specifically, in "Normal Mode A", the display mode is one in which either the display mode of indicators P1 or P2 is at the maximum value (MAX); in "Dice Mode", the display mode is one in which indicators P4 and P5 are "double numbers (excluding 6.6)"; in "Normal Mode B", the display mode is one in which indicator P6 is "50% to 90%"; and in "Bingo Mode", the display mode is one in which indicator P7 is "2 lines completed."

If it is determined in the processing of S6453 that the current display mode is compatible with SP Reach (S6453: Yes), a display mode compatible with SP Reach is decided and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6454), and this processing ends. In other words, if the display mode before the mode change was a display mode compatible with SP Reach, the display mode after the mode change will also be set to a display mode compatible with SP Reach. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a bonus displayed before the mode change (announcement that an SP Reach is being executed) disappears after the mode change (a display mode not compatible with SP Reach is displayed), and it is possible to execute a suitable effect that does not dissatisfy the player.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6453 that the current display mode does not correspond to the SP reach (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode that meets the high standard (S6455). As described above, this high standard is a display mode that is not a display mode that grants a bonus to the player, but is set as a display mode that is close to it.

Specifically, in "normal mode A," any of the indicators P1 to P3 will display "6," in "dice mode," the number on indicator P4 will display "5," and in "normal mode B," indicator P6 will display "40%."

By configuring it in this way, even if a mode transition occurs during a point effect, it is possible to prevent the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition from being significantly different from the display mode of the indicator displayed during the previous point effect.

For example, in "normal mode A," if a mode transition is performed while the indicator P1 is displaying "6," which is a display mode that corresponds to the high standard, and then the mode transition is to "bingo mode," the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition becomes a display mode that indicates "1 line completed." This allows the point presentation after the mode transition to be executed while still allowing the player to maintain the expectation of receiving the special bonus that was there before the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 213 for further explanation. In the process of S6455, if it is determined that the current display mode is a display mode that indicates a high standard (S6455: Yes), a display mode that corresponds to the high standard after the mode transition is determined and set in the score presentation temporary storage area 223ag (S6456), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not a display mode that indicates a high standard (S6455: No), a display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined and set in the score presentation temporary storage area 223ag, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the point presentation in this control example, when a mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition, so that a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Furthermore, when a mode transition is executed while a display mode that notifies the player that a bonus will be granted is displayed, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode that notified the player that a bonus will be granted, so that dissatisfaction among the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that a bonus will be awarded is determined and stored as a high reference value, and if a mode transition is executed while a display mode indicating the high reference value is being displayed, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value. Therefore, even if a mode transition is executed while the player is paying close attention to the point presentation in the hope that the display mode notifying the player that a bonus will soon be awarded, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, thereby maintaining a sense of anticipation.

In this control example, when the display mode is not a display mode that notifies the awarding of a bonus, the display mode is stored in two levels, high standard and other, but the display mode may be stored in three or more levels. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce dissatisfaction among players caused by differences in the display mode of the indicator before the mode change and the display mode of the indicator after the mode change.

In addition, in this control example, when a mode transition is executed while a display mode that meets the high standard or a display mode that does not even reach the high standard is being displayed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode that has the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition, but it is also possible to set the display mode after the mode transition to a display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, for example, based on the internal level or internal score that is set when the point presentation is executed. This makes it possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will continue. When the display mode change process (S6408 in FIG. 213) is completed, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is then updated to mode information corresponding to the currently set mode (S6409), a display background command corresponding to the set mode is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to off (S6411), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will continue. After the mode transition process (S6304) is completed, the point presentation mode setting process (S6305) is executed. This point presentation mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator that will be changed in the variable display that is currently being executed.

Here, the point presentation mode setting process (S6305) will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point presentation mode setting process (S6305). When the point presentation mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the remaining points set in the remaining point information storage area 223ae and the value of the presentation count counter 223ac are used to refer to the used point selection table 222ad to determine the used points to be used in the current change (S6501).

Then, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated based on the determined used score (S6502). Specifically, the remaining score information is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the currently used score from the set remaining score information.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and if it is determined to be 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, if this is the last point effect, the final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in the display information storage area 223af and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a display point effect command is set based on the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6503 that the value of the effect counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the current display mode is determined based on the used score determined in S6501, the final display mode set in the display information storage area 223af, and the current display mode, and is set in the temporary score effect storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), and then it is determined whether a mode transition is to be performed (S6509). If it is determined that a mode transition is to be performed (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), and the above-mentioned processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a mode transition is not to be performed (S6509: No), the above-mentioned processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will continue. When the point effect mode setting process (S6305) is completed, the value of the effect count counter 223ac is then decremented by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223ac after decrement is equal to or less than "0" (S6307). If it is determined that the value is not equal to or less than "0" (is equal to or greater than 1) (S6307: No), this means that the point effect will continue, and so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6307 that the value of the effect count counter 223ac is 0 or less (0) (S6307: Yes), this is the end of the point effect, so the score information storage area 223ad is cleared (S6308), the remaining score information storage area 223ae is cleared (S6309), the display information storage area 223af is cleared (S6310), the mode information storage area 223ah is cleared (S6311), the internal level storage area 223aa is cleared (S6312), the continuous effect start flag 223ab is cleared (S6313), and the character information storage area is cleared (S6314), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control 114 in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 215 to Fig. 217. This control example is different from the second control example described above in that a point performance related command process is added to the command determination process 3 (see Fig. 215), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 215, command determination process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing command determination process 3. In command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed in the same manner as command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above.

If it is determined in the processing of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), it is then determined whether or not a display point effect-related command has been received (S2637).

If it is determined in the processing of S2637 that a display point effect related command has not been received (S2637: No), various processes described in the control examples above are executed as other command processing (S2614), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2637 that a display point effect related command has been received (S2637: Yes), point effect related command processing is executed (S2638), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the point effect related command processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 216(a). FIG. 216(a) is a flowchart showing the point effect related command processing (S2638). This point effect related command processing is executed when multiple display commands related to point effects are output from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the point effect related command processing (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display point command (S6601), and if it is determined that there is a display point command (S6601: Yes), the point command processing (S6602) is executed and the process proceeds to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command processing (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the processing of S6603, it is determined whether or not there is a display indicator command (S6603), and if it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), indicator command processing (S6604) is executed, and if it is determined that there is no display indicator command (S6603: No), this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 216(b), the point command processing (S6602) will be described. FIG. 216(b) is a flowchart showing the point command processing (S6602). This point command processing (S6602) executes processing corresponding to the point command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is processing for displaying points (see FIG. 198) indicating changes to the display mode of each indicator during point performance on the third pattern display device 81.

In point command processing (S6602), first, the effect display data table corresponding to the point type (e.g., number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the point command processing ends, and the process returns to command determination processing 3.

Next, referring to FIG. 217, the indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point performance related command processing (see FIG. 216(a)) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the indicator command processing (S6604). This indicator command processing (S6604) executes processing corresponding to the indicator command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is processing for displaying the display mode of each indicator during the point performance.

In the indicator command process (S6604), first, the display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the display mode information (e.g., the display mode or the set mode) of the indicator indicated by the display indicator command is determined, and the determined display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6754). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6755), the point command processing ends, and the process returns to command determination processing 3.

Next, referring to FIG. 218, a modified example of the point display method explained using FIG. 198 above will be explained. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of point display in the third control example. FIG. 218(a) is a schematic diagram showing a layer that displays a point image (secondary performance) among the multiple layers in this modified example, FIG. 218(b) is a schematic diagram showing an image synthesized from the multiple layers in this modified example, and FIG. 218(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example that is displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218(b) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 218 (a), data that allows points to be displayed at different display positions (display positions within each small area) is stored in multiple small areas (Dm11-Dm13, Dm21-Dm23, Dm31-Dm33) that display character images, and among these, a small area that corresponds to the main performance being executed this time is set, and a point display process is executed to display the points of the set small area. An image that combines the layer that displays the point image and the layer that displays the character image is then displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 218 (b)).

As shown in Figure 218 (b), in an image of two characters (Dc1, Dc2) facing each other when the main performance has started, the points executed in the point display process (points displayed in small area Dm31) overlap with character Dc1, and the display process is performed so that the player cannot see the point display.

Then, as the main performance progresses, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player when the character Dc1 moves, as shown in FIG. 218(c). In this case, it is advisable to set multiple movement patterns as the main performance, such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern) from the state shown in FIG. 218(b), and to configure so that whether or not points are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined depending on the progress of the main performance. This makes it possible to execute a display that is more closely related to the third pattern change performance, which is the main performance, and the point performance, which is the sub-performance, and to further enhance the performance effect.

In this control example, the small area in which the points are displayed is specified based on the performance pattern of the main performance. However, if multiple movement patterns (patterns in which each of the multiple characters moves) can be set as the main performance as described above, the points may be displayed in multiple small areas corresponding to the multiple movement patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218(b), a display process may be executed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 overlapping with the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 overlapping with the character Dc2, and points corresponding to the movement pattern set as the main performance are displayed. In this case, the display setting may be executed so that the value (number) of the points displayed when the friendly character Dc1 moves is different from the value (number) of the points displayed when the enemy character Dc2 moves.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to associate the movement pattern in the main performance with the value of the points to be displayed, further enhancing the performance effect.

As explained above, in this control example, when the display contents of the point performance are determined by the voice lamp control device 113, a display point command and a display indicator command are output in addition to the display variable pattern command. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated, each command can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings when displaying points on the third pattern display device 81 or changing the display mode of the indicator.

Therefore, it is no longer necessary for the display control device 114 to output a command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to the display data when the frame button 22 is not operated each time, and to perform processing such as rewriting the display data when a command indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated is output, thereby reducing the control load.

In this control example, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them may be set as common display commands and output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the point presentation in this third control example, when a mode transition is executed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display mode of the indicator displayed before the mode transition, so that a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Furthermore, when a mode transition is executed while a display mode that notifies the player that a bonus will be granted is displayed, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode that notified the player that a bonus will be granted, so that dissatisfaction among the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a display mode that is close to the display mode that notifies the player that a bonus will be awarded is determined and stored as a high reference value, and if a mode transition is executed while a display mode indicating the high reference value is being displayed, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value. Therefore, even if a mode transition is executed while the player is gazing at the point presentation in the hope that the display mode notifying the player that a bonus will soon be awarded, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in the display mode indicating the high reference value, thereby maintaining a sense of anticipation.

In this control example, when the display mode is not a display mode that notifies the awarding of a bonus, the display mode is stored in two levels, high standard and other, but the display mode may be stored in three or more levels. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce dissatisfaction among players caused by differences in the display mode of the indicator before the mode change and the display mode of the indicator after the mode change.

In addition, in this control example, when a mode transition is executed while a display mode that meets the high standard or a display mode that does not even reach the high standard is being displayed, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode that has the same meaning as the display mode before the mode transition, but a display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition may be set as the display mode after the mode transition based on, for example, the internal level or internal score that is set when the point presentation is executed. This makes it possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the mode transition.

It is of course possible to combine the configuration used for the point presentation in this control example with the configuration used for the point presentation in the second control example described above. For example, four modes may be set for the point presentation in the second control example described above, as in the third control example, and the configuration for mode transition processing in this control example may be added. Alternatively, the method for determining the points to be displayed in this control example may correspond to the display content of the third pattern change presentation (main presentation) as in the second control example described above. Also, the configuration for determining the position at which the points are displayed in this control example may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. This allows a greater variety of presentations to be offered to the player.

Furthermore, in "Normal Mode A", "Special Bonus 1" is awarded when indicator P1 reaches MAX, and "Special Bonus 2" is awarded when indicator P2 or P3 reaches MAX. These are special bonuses that notify the player that the currently executed third pattern variation effect content, in which the expected probability of a jackpot is set in stages, will be increased in a step. "Special Bonus 1" may be, for example, a special bonus that notifies the player that the expected probability of a jackpot will increase by multiple steps (two steps), and "Special Bonus 2" may be, for example, a special bonus that notifies the player that the expected probability of a jackpot will increase by one step.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the expectation of a jackpot depending on the content of the presentation executed in the third pattern variation presentation and the timing when the indicator reaches MAX, making it possible for the player to pay close attention to the presentation. In this case, it is advisable to differentiate the timing when the indicator reaches MAX from the timing when the bonus is awarded. This allows the player to play while predicting under what condition the bonus will be awarded when the indicator reaches MAX and it is confirmed that the bonus will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 219 to 226. In the above-mentioned first control example, the control of the reach navigation effect (see Figures 112 and 113), which is a sub-effect executed in the small area Dm4 (see Figure 112) to suggest and notify the contents of the main effect (effect executed in the center of the main display area Dm) of the variation pattern, was described. This reach navigation effect is an effect display consisting of a time gauge Dm4a indicating the performance period of the main effect, a movement display section (character Dm4b) indicating the progress of the performance in the main effect, and an indication section Dm4c and guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e that suggest and notify the contents of the main effect.

In contrast, this control example describes another example of the reach navigation presentation described in the first control example above. This fourth control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and multiple patterns of reach navigation presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 have been described. In other respects, it is the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are given the same symbols, and illustrations and descriptions of them will be omitted.

First, the flow of the reach navigation effect will be described in detail with reference to Figures 219 and 220. Figure 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the reach navigation effect. As with the first control example described above, this reach navigation effect is a sub-effect that is executed in accordance with the change time of the effect (main effect) executed by a specified change pattern (super reach or special reach) during the change time of the special pattern, and allows the player to visually grasp it, and notifies or suggests it in stages. In this way, by displaying the contents of the main effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 (explanation of the main effect, change time, and expectation of a jackpot) using the sub-effect, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In Figure 219, the special symbol change time is set to 60 seconds (see Figure 117 (b)), and 30 seconds after the change starts, it develops into a Super Reach, and 20 seconds later (i.e., 50 seconds after the change starts), the flow of the Reach Navi presentation is shown when a change pattern is selected in which the main presentation develops further.

As shown in Figure 219, for 15 seconds after the special symbol starts to change, the main performance displays a pre-reach performance (the third symbol changes at high speed), and then a reach performance (the two third symbols on the left and right stop at the same number, and only the middle third symbol changes) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, the main performance displays a super reach performance for 30 seconds (for example, the change in the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the small area Dm5 of the main display area Dm (see Figure 112), and a performance in which characters face off in the main display area Dm (see Figure 163)).

In the example shown in Figure 219, 20 seconds after the start of this super reach effect, a timing is set to occur where an effect that increases the likelihood of a big win (for example, an effect where an ally character avoids an attack from an opposing character or attacks an opposing character with a weapon different from usual) or an effect that indicates a loss (for example, an effect where a character is knocked down by an attack from an opposing character) will occur, and the player is configured to pay close attention to what effect will be executed at this timing.

At the same time that this Super Reach effect is displayed, a Reach Navi effect is displayed as a secondary effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). The details of this Reach Navi effect are the same as those in the first control example described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, a presentation pattern is set in which the first reach navigation presentation lasts for 20 seconds and the second reach navigation presentation lasts for 10 seconds, and the presentation branch timing of the super reach presentation executed in the main presentation (the timing 20 seconds after the super reach presentation is displayed) is configured to correspond to the timing of switching from the first reach navigation presentation to the second reach navigation presentation.

In this reach navigation effect, like the reach navigation effect of the first control example described above, guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e are provided along the way, and when the character reaches guidance display units Dm4d and Dm4e, the word "Chance" is displayed, for example, as an effect suggesting that the result of this main effect will be a jackpot, or the indicator attached to the rotating notification unit Dm4c is switched (points B and C).

Then, when the branching timing of the Super Reach effect, which is the main effect, is reached, that is, when 20 seconds have passed since the Super Reach effect was displayed (point D), the Super Reach effect continues to develop in the main effect, and the Reach Navi effect switches from the first Reach Navi effect to the second Reach Navi effect. At this time, since the second Reach Navi effect is set to a period (10 seconds) half that of the first Reach Navi effect (20 seconds), the second Navi effect starts from a point halfway through the time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) used in the first Navi effect. Then, of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes through the guide display section Dm4e again (point E) in the second Reach Navi effect, and various notification modes are changed again, and the second Reach Navi effect ends in time with the result display timing of the Super Reach effect (the timing of the stopped display of the third symbol) (point F).

In this way, among the third pattern change effects that use the change display of the third pattern to notify the result of the lottery for the special pattern, by executing the reach navigation effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect, which is a specified change effect (super reach effect or special reach effect) that has a high expectation of a jackpot, the player can visually grasp the progress of the main effect and it becomes possible to notify or suggest it in stages, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

Next, referring to Figure 220, the contents displayed in small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation performance shown in Figure 219 described above is executed will be described. Figure 220(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point C shown in Figure 219 in the reach navigation performance, Figure 220(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point D shown in Figure 219 in the reach navigation performance, and Figure 220(c) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point E shown in Figure 219 in the reach navigation performance. Note that the same symbols are used for the parts explained in the first control example described above, and their explanations will be omitted.

First, the display contents of point C during the first reach navigation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 220(a). As shown in FIG. 220(a), in the first reach navigation performance (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section Dm4d, "Chance" is displayed, indicating a high probability of winning the jackpot, and when the character passes through the guide display section Dm4e, "Chance" is not displayed, and "X" is displayed instead. In this way, by notifying the probability of winning the jackpot on the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation performance, the notification contents of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e and the performance of the main performance can be combined to predict the lottery result of the current special pattern change, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Next, referring to Figure 220 (b), the display content of point D during the first reach navigation performance will be described. As shown in Figure 220 (a), the second reach navigation performance (10 seconds) starts from the halfway position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, during the second reach navigation performance, character Dm4b will pass through the guidance display section Dm4e again. In this way, by setting it so that character Dm4b passes through the guidance display section that he passed through in the first reach navigation performance again in the second reach navigation performance, it is possible to seamlessly change the notification content of the guidance display section.

As shown in FIG. 220(c), when character Dm4b reaches guide display section Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, the notification content of guide display section Dm4e changes to display "Chance." In this way, by setting the presentation so that character Dm4b passes again through the guide display section that it passed through in the first reach navigation effect when switching from the first reach navigation effect to the second reach navigation effect, the player will be watching the reach navigation effect in the hope that the second reach navigation effect will be set so that it will pass again through the guide display section that did not receive a high-promise notification ("Chance") in the first reach navigation effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, since it is possible to efficiently reuse the same display data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, the amount of data used for the effects can be reduced.

In the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect may be provided in which the notification content does not change even if the character Dm4b passes through the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e again. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action to avoid the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e (for example, jump) when it reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the character Dm4b will pass through or avoid the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game early on, and prevents an effect that lowers the expectation of a jackpot when the second reach navigation effect starts from a position where the character Dm4b can pass through a guide display unit that has been notified of a high expectation of a jackpot ("chance") in the first reach navigation effect.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 221 to 223, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example will be described.

Figure 221 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Figure 221 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, a performance scenario memory area 222bb, and a performance scenario selection table 222bc have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 222, the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described in detail. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. This second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the win/loss determination result of the pachinko machine 10, and differs from the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above in that it does not execute the win/loss determination process based on the winning information that is reserved and stored.

Specifically, if the result of the win/loss determination is a "win" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-149", then "2" is selected as the internal level, and if it is "150-198", then "3" is selected as the internal level. If the result of the win/loss determination is a "win" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0-149", then "1" is selected as the internal level, and if it is "150-198", then "2" is selected as the internal level.

This makes it possible to set the internal level to "3" approximately 25% of the time when the hit/miss determination result is "hit", to "2" approximately 75% of the time when the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and to "2" approximately 25% of the time when the hit/miss determination result is "miss", and to "1" approximately 75% of the time when the hit/miss determination result is "miss". By setting the internal level in this way and executing the performance in response to this internal level, it becomes easier to set multiple expectations of a jackpot for the performance than if the performance was executed in response only to the hit/miss determination result.

In this control example, the internal level is set to three levels, but the number of internal levels is not limited to this and may be set to four or more levels. In this case, for example, an internal level is set that is set only in about 1% of cases where the win/loss determination result is a "win", and an effect corresponding to that internal level is executed, thereby providing the player with a valuable effect that is rarely displayed. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, the performance scenario memory area 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram showing the performance scenario memory area 222bb. This performance scenario memory area 222bb is an area in which multiple performance scenarios for reach navigation performances are stored, and is an area in which each scenario is stored to be referenced when selecting a performance scenario in the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later.

As shown in FIG. 223, the performance scenario memory area 222bb is set as a scenario pattern of the performance scenario, with the expectation indication to be notified (displayed) by the guidance display Dm4d (first location) and the guidance display section Dm4e (second location) as "Chance" with high expectation or "X" with low expectation, and the return position of the character Dm4b when switching from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance is set as return position "1", which is a position that can be passed through both the guidance display section Dm4d and the guidance display section Dm4e, or return position "2", which is a position that can be passed through only the guidance display section Dm4e.

Specifically, in scenario 1, the first location "x" and the second location "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation performance, the return position is returned to "1", and the first location "chance" and the second location "chance" are displayed during the second reach navigation performance; in scenario 2, the first location "x" and the second location "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation performance, the return position is returned to "1", and the first location "chance" and the second location "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation performance; and in scenario 3, the first location "x" and the second location "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation performance, the return position is returned to "1", and the first location "x" and the second location "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation performance. In this way, by providing multiple scenarios in which the display mode of the first reach navigation performance and the return position are the same and only the display mode of the second reach navigation performance is different, and by setting the scenarios in accordance with the above-mentioned internal level, it is possible to easily execute a performance that matches the expectation of a jackpot.

The display mode shown in FIG. 223(a) is set for scenarios 4 to 12 in the same way. Note that the "Super" displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation performance in scenario 11 indicates a display with a much higher probability of winning than the "Chance" display (for example, "Super Hot").

In this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as the scenario patterns for the reach navigation performance, but more scenarios may be used. Also, the type of character Dm4b and the movement speed of character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern, as explained in the reach navigation performance of the first control example above.

In addition, in this control example, the same time gauge Dm4a is used for the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance, thereby sharing the display data used for the performances, but the display data may be shared in other ways. For example, when the second reach navigation performance starts, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation performance may be displayed side by side. In this case, the display area in which the reach navigation performance is executed can be reduced by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in accordance with the movement direction of the character Dm4b.

In addition, in this control example, a time gauge Dm4a with one path is used in the direction of movement of character Dm4b, but a time gauge Dm4a with multiple paths may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to set a scenario pattern so that the path along which character Dm4b moves differs between the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance. This allows for more variety in the content of the reach navigation performance.

Next, the performance scenario selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram showing the performance scenario selection table 222bc. This performance scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referenced when selecting a performance scenario in the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224) described later.

As shown in FIG. 223(b), the performance scenario selection table 222bc is set up so that each scenario is selected based on the internal level, the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 129", scenario "5" is selected, and if it is "130 to 198", scenario "4" is selected. Also, if the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "1" is selected, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "66 to 129", scenario "2" is selected, and if it is "130 to 198", scenario "3" is selected.

Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "7" is selected, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "66 to 129", scenario "8" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "10" is selected. Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "2", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "9" is selected, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "66 to 129", scenario "6" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "1" is selected.

If the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "7" is selected, and if the value of the performance counter 223f is "66 to 198", scenario "12" is selected. Also, if the value of the internal level is "3", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "1" is selected, if the value of the performance counter 223f is "66 to 129", scenario "6" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "11" is selected.

Returning to Figure 221, we will continue with the explanation. Figure 221 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in Figure 221, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is an area for storing the internal level selected by the above-mentioned second internal level selection table 222ba based on the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination (lottery result) when the reach navigation performance is executed. This second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) with the internal level determined in the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), is referenced when selecting a performance scenario (S2153 in FIG. 224), and is initialized when the reach navigation performance ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 224, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that reach navigation performance setting process 2 (see Fig. 224) is executed instead of reach navigation performance setting process (see Fig. 141), but the rest is the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Figure 224 is a flowchart showing reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. This reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005) is a process that is executed when the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is one that executes a reach navigation performance, and the performance mode of the reach navigation performance is determined.

When the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, display variation pattern information corresponding to the main performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 is selected and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the main performance is a performance for notifying the result of the lottery for the special pattern using a performance period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is a performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 112) of the third pattern display device 81.

After completing the processing of S2151, the internal level is then determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then a performance scenario is selected based on the internal level and the performance scenario selection table 222bc and set in the variation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2153).

Then, when processing of S2153 is completed, processing of S2107 and S2108 is executed in the same manner as the reach navigation performance setting processing (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

Next, the modified display mode of the reach navigation effect used in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 225 and 226. Fig. 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing modified example 1 of the fourth control example, Fig. 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing modified example 2 of the fourth control example, Fig. 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing modified example 3 of the fourth control example, Fig. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in modified example 3 of the fourth control example, and Fig. 226(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed in modified example 3 of the fourth control example. Note that these modified examples 1 to 3 are modified display modes used in the reach navigation effect, and the control content uses the configuration described in the first or fourth control example described above, so the same parts are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 225 (a) shows the content of the second reach navigation effect in variant 1 of the fourth control example. As shown in Figure 225 (a), in this variant, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a for the second reach navigation effect. In this way, the display data used in the effects can be reused.

Next, FIG. 225(b) shows the content of the second reach navigation effect of Variation 2 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(b), when the second reach navigation effect starts, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation effect is extended and displayed, and an effect is executed in which the character Dm4b continues to move. In this case, guide display sections Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of locations notifying the expectation of a jackpot increases to four. This means that a maximum of four "chance" indicators notifying that the expectation of a jackpot is high are displayed, making it possible to widely notify the player of the expectation of a jackpot.

In this modified example, guidance display sections Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e. However, for example, the display may be scrolled in the direction of movement of character Dm4b (to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 225(b)) so that the area in which the first reach navigation performance was executed is erased as the second reach navigation performance progresses. This allows the performance of this modified example to be executed without expanding the area of small area Dm4.

In this case, the display results of only the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e may be displayed within the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed on the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e may be replaced and displayed on the guidance display sections Dm4f and Dm4g, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display sections Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation performance.

Next, FIG. 226(a) shows the contents of the reach navigation performance of variant 3 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226(a), the reach navigation performance of this variant uses a time gauge Dm4a that branches into two routes, with a first route that ultimately reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 and a second route that ultimately reaches the second notification unit Dm4c2. Of these, when character Dm4b moves along the first route, he passes through guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4e along the way, and when character Dm4b moves along the second route, he passes through guidance notification units Dm4d and Dm4f along the way.

When the reach navigation performance is executed in this modified example, the first navigation performance moves along either the first route or the second route, and reaches either the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. The player is then returned to a return position that is set before the branch point where the first route and the second route branch off, and the second navigation performance is executed.

In the second navigation performance, character Dm4b moves along either the route that character Dm4b moved along in the first navigation performance or the route that character Dm4b did not move along in the first navigation performance. This makes it possible to change the display result in the guidance display section Dm4e through which character Dm4b passed in the first navigation performance in the second navigation performance when the first and second navigation performances select the same route.

In addition, if the first navigation effect and the second navigation effect select different routes, it is possible to display the display results on the three guidance display sections Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as reach navigation effects.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226(b), when the first route is selected in the first navigation performance, and "Chance" is displayed in the guide display section Dm4d and Dm4e to notify the player that the odds of winning are high, if the second route is selected as the second navigation performance, as shown in FIG. 226(c), the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section Dm4f provided midway along the second route, and "Chance" is displayed to notify the player that the odds of winning are high. Note that if different routes are selected for the first and second navigation performances, the notification section (notification section Dm4c1 or notification section Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation performance displays "Development," indicating that the player is currently in the second navigation performance. This allows the player to easily grasp the current situation.

In addition, if the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance select the same route, for example, if the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the first navigation performance is "X", the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the second navigation performance may be changed to "Chance."

In other words, if the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e in the first navigation effect is "X", and the second navigation effect starts from the return position shown in FIG. 226(b), the player can expect either the second navigation effect to select the same route as the first navigation effect, and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e where "X" was displayed in the first navigation effect to change to "Chance", or the second navigation effect to select a different route from the first navigation effect, and the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e will remain "X", while the display result of "Chance" is displayed on the guidance display unit Dm4f.

In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation effect so that it is more advantageous for the player to move along a different route from the first navigation effect. Specifically, it is preferable to set the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f shows "Chance" higher than the probability that the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e changes from "X" to "Chance," or to set the expectation of winning the jackpot higher when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4f shows "Chance" than when the display result of the guidance display unit Dm4e shows "Chance." This makes it possible for the player to expect that a route different from the first navigation effect will be selected as the route selected in the second navigation effect, and makes it possible for the player to continuously pay attention to the reach navigation effect.

In this way, in the reach navigation presentation in this modified example, the time gauge Dm4a that guides the progress of the game has multiple (two) paths, and the path expected by the player can be changed in the second navigation presentation depending on the result of the first navigation presentation (the display result of the guidance display section).

This has the effect of making the player focus on the path along which character Dm4b moves during reach navigation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this modified example, the position (return position) where the second navigation performance starts is described as one location (the position before the route branches), but multiple return positions may be provided as in the fourth control example described above. In this case, for example, a return position may be provided before the guidance display unit Dm4d, or between the route branch point and the guidance display unit Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation performance is executed, the route (the guidance display unit passed through) along which the character Dm4b moves in the second navigation performance will change depending on the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of performances based on the result of the first navigation performance (the display result of the guidance display unit) and the position where the second navigation performance starts (return position).

In addition, while in this modified example the time gauge Dm4a branches into two routes, it may branch into more than two (three or more) routes, or multiple branching points may be provided. Also, a specific position may be set midway along the route along which the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move onto another route when passing through that specific position. This allows for a more diverse range of reach navigation effects.

In addition, in this modified example, multiple routes are displayed in small area Dm4 when a reach navigation performance is executed, but for example, only the route along which character Dm4b moves (e.g., the first route) may be displayed during the first navigation performance, and multiple routes (the first route and the second route) may be displayed only if a route different from that in the first navigation performance is selected in the second navigation performance. By configuring in this way, the player is not informed in advance (during the first navigation performance) of the type of route that will be taken in the second navigation performance, allowing the player to predict the performance and increasing the interest of the game.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, the contents of the main performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 (explanation of the main performance, variable time, and expected probability of winning the jackpot) are displayed using the sub-performance, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, the timing of branching of the Super Reach effect executed in the main effect (20 seconds after the Super Reach effect is displayed) is configured to correspond to the timing of switching from the first Reach Navi effect to the second Reach Navi effect. Therefore, by executing the Reach Navi effect, which is a sub-effect, in accordance with the timing of the main effect (branching timing) that becomes a specified variable effect (Super Reach effect or Special Reach effect) with a high expectation of a jackpot among the third pattern change effect (main effect) that uses the change display of the third pattern to notify the result of the lottery for the special pattern, the player can visually grasp the progress of the main effect and it is possible to notify or suggest it in stages, providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, by displaying the probability of winning the jackpot on multiple information display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation performance, the results of the lottery for the current special pattern change can be predicted by combining the notification content of the information display sections Dm4d and Dm4e with the performance of the main performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, by setting the character Dm4b to pass again in the second reach navigation effect through the guidance display section that was passed through in the first reach navigation effect, it is possible to seamlessly change the notification content of the guidance display section. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display section that was passed through in the first reach navigation effect, the player will be watching the reach navigation effect in the hope that the second reach navigation effect will be set so that the character Dm4b will pass again through the guidance display section that was not notified of a high expectation ("chance") in the first reach navigation effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e again, but an effect may be provided in which the notification content does not change even if the character Dm4b passes through the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e again. In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action to avoid the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e (for example, jump) when it reaches the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the character Dm4b will pass through or avoid the guide display units Dm4d and Dm4e in the second reach navigation effect, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game early on, and prevents an effect that lowers the expectation of a jackpot when the second reach navigation effect starts from a position where the character Dm4b can pass through a guide display unit that has been notified of a high expectation of a jackpot ("chance") in the first reach navigation effect.

Furthermore, since it is possible to efficiently reuse the same display data for the first reach navigation effect and the second reach navigation effect, the amount of data used for the effects can be reduced.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 227 to 238. In the above-mentioned second control example, in the slot effects that are executed consecutively within a specific period (within 30 seconds) as consecutive slot effects, the effect mode of the next slot effect to be executed is set depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

In contrast, this control example differs in that detailed control has been added regarding the dynamic display (rotating display) manner and the stopped display manner of the pseudo symbols in each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance of the second control example described above.

This fifth control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the dynamic display mode and stop display mode in the various slot performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 have been changed. In other respects, it is the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Figures 227 and 228, the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbols in the slot performance of this control example will be described. In this control example, multiple dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbols in the slot performance can be set, and different dynamic display modes are executed based on the type of slot performance being executed (initial slot performance, normal slot performance, first shortened slot performance, second shortened slot performance, extended slot performance) and the remaining time of the effective operation period of the frame button 22.

227(a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol in a slot presentation. As shown in FIG. 227(a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols "A" are displayed statically, and the center pseudo symbol is dynamically displayed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the left, center, and right pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row, the pseudo symbol "A" is acquired. As explained in the second control example above, in the continuous slot presentation, when multiple slot presentations are performed and multiple types (three types) of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" are acquired, the player is notified that he or she has won a special prize (for example, a big win game) that is advantageous to the player (a special prize that is advantageous to the player is granted).

Next, other examples of settings for the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol will be described with reference to Figures 227(b) to (e). In this control example, multiple dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbol can be set, and the pseudo symbol can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes, so that the player can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 during the slot presentation. This makes it possible to motivate the player to participate in the operation presentation (slot presentation) in which the frame button 22 is operated.

Figure 227 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the number of reels as a dynamic display mode in a slot presentation. As shown in Figure 227 (b), this control example is configured to be able to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which the pseudo patterns used in the slot presentation are displayed is set to one as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo patterns. This makes it possible to enlarge and display the pseudo patterns being dynamically displayed in a limited display space.

In this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is reduced to one, but the number of reels may be reduced to two as long as it is less than the normal number. Also, in this control example, the number of reels is reduced to one and the dynamically displayed pseudo symbols are enlarged, but a dynamic display mode in which only the number of reels is reduced without enlarging the display may be used. In this case, a display that encourages the player to press the frame button 22 (for example, a display of the timing when the pseudo symbols "A" will line up in a row, or a display of the expectation that pressing the frame button 22 will cause the pseudo symbols "A" to line up in a row) may be executed in the empty area (the area where the left and right reels are normally displayed). This makes it possible to execute an effect that encourages the player to press the frame button 22.

Figure 227(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the size of a pseudo pattern as a dynamic display mode in a slot presentation. As shown in Figure 227(c), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the dynamically displayed pseudo pattern is enlarged among the pseudo patterns used in the slot presentation as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo pattern. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo pattern that is the subject of the current stopped display is dynamically displayed, which makes it possible to motivate the player to press the frame button 22.

In this control example, the pseudo pattern "A" is displayed larger than the other patterns to make it easier for the player to understand, but for example, the other patterns may be displayed in a reduced size to make the pseudo pattern "A" relatively easier to see than the other patterns. This makes it possible to make the pseudo pattern "A" easier to see without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Figure 227 (d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the pattern arrangement of the reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in a slot performance. As shown in Figure 227 (d), in this control example, among the reels used in the slot performance as a dynamic display mode of pseudo patterns, a dynamic display mode can be set in which the pattern arrangement of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo patterns being dynamically displayed is different. Specifically, a dynamic display mode can be set in which the number of pseudo patterns (pseudo pattern "A") that are the subject of the current stopped display is increased among the dynamically displayed patterns. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo patterns that are the subject of the current stopped display are dynamically displayed, which can motivate the player to press the frame button 22.

In this control example, the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbol "A") that are the subject of the current stopped display is increased to allow the player to easily identify the pseudo symbol "A", but it may also be configured to relatively increase the number of pseudo symbols "A" by, for example, decreasing the number of pseudo symbols that are not the subject of the current stopped display, that is, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols "B" and "C"). In this case, the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the center reel is reduced, making it easier to identify the individual symbols that are dynamically displayed (rotating display).

Figure 227 (e) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the dynamic display speed (spinning speed) of a reel (middle reel) that is dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in a slot presentation. As shown in Figure 227 (e), in this control example, it is possible to set a dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display speed (spinning speed) of the reel (middle reel) that displays the dynamically displayed pseudo pattern among the reels used in the slot presentation as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo pattern is lowered. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo pattern that is the target of the current stopped display is dynamically displayed, which can motivate the player to press the frame button 22.

The dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed down near the pseudo symbol that is to be the target of the current stopped display, and may be fast elsewhere. This allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is to be the target of the current stopped display, and also shortens the time it takes for the reels to complete one revolution.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the reel on which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed may be set to normal speed until the reel is rotated a predetermined number of times (e.g., two revolutions), and thereafter (e.g., the third revolution), the dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. This allows a player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (the period for the reel to rotate two times) to easily grasp the pseudo symbol that will be the subject of the current stopped display, and encourages the player to operate the frame button 22.

As explained above, in this control example, in each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance, the pseudo symbols are configured to be displayed in various dynamic display modes, which makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

In addition, in each of the dynamic display modes described above, the pseudo symbol that is the subject of the current stopped display may be displayed with a higher brightness than the other symbols, or the display mode may be changed to one that emphasizes the edges of the symbol, making it even easier for the player to understand.

In addition, when the number of rotations of the reel reaches a predetermined number (dynamically displays as if the reel has rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the slot performance but the frame button 22 has not been operated, the dynamic display modes may be switched and displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with a variety of dynamic display modes, encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22.

Next, the stop display mode of each slot performance in the continuous slot performance of this control example will be explained. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, but in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot performance is determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, and if the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a hit, it is set so that three types of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" can be obtained in the multiple slot performances executed in the continuous slot performance, and if the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol is a miss, it is set so that the number of the three types of pseudo symbols that can be obtained in the multiple slot performances executed in the continuous slot performance will be 0 to 2.

Therefore, when the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a miss, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance, the stop control is performed so that the pseudo symbol to be displayed as the stopped symbol is not displayed as a stopped symbol on the line. Specifically, by setting symbols different from the pseudo symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol before and after the pseudo symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol, the player can easily grasp the pattern, and when the frame button 22 is operated aiming at the pseudo symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol, the stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed one symbol before or after the pseudo symbol to be displayed as a stopped symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the line. In this way, it is possible to display a miss stop display mode without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition to the above-mentioned stop control, this control example is also configured to be able to execute stop control that displays a losing stop display pattern without giving the player a sense of discomfort by changing the starting position of the dynamically displayed reels without changing the arrangement of the symbols on the dynamically displayed reels. Next, the above-mentioned stop control will be explained with reference to FIG. 228.

Figure 228(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the pattern arrangement and stop positions of a reel (middle reel) dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in a slot performance. In the dynamic display mode shown in Figure 228(a), the pattern arrangement is a continuous pattern arrangement in which the pseudo pattern (pseudo pattern "A") that is the target of the current stop display is not set (points where a pseudo pattern that is not the target of the current stop display is set). Specifically, one pattern arrangement is made up of 11 patterns, one of which is set to pseudo pattern "A" (see Figure 228(b)).

By using reels with such pattern arrangements, it is possible to execute stop control that displays a losing stop display pattern without causing a sense of discomfort to the player, simply by changing the starting position and dynamic display speed of the reels in each slot performance.

This stop control will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a timing chart that explains the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a). As shown in FIG. 228(b), in this dynamic display mode, the dynamically displayed symbol arrangement of the reels is set to arrangement 4 with the pseudo symbol "A" that is the current target for stopped display, and the remaining symbols are set to pseudo symbols "-" that are different from the current target for stopped display.

The dynamic display mode using this reel has rotation start position 1, which is pattern arrangement 1, and rotation start position 2, which is pattern arrangement 9, set as the position where the dynamic display of the reel begins. Two types of speeds are set for the dynamically displayed reel: "high" and "ultra-low." The "high" reel speed is specifically set at a speed where it takes 0.7 seconds for the dynamically displayed pattern to move one position, and the "ultra-low" reel speed is specifically set at a speed where it takes 1.2 seconds for the dynamically displayed pattern to move one position.

In other words, when a slot presentation is executed in which the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (button operation valid period) is set to 6 seconds, if the reel speed is "high", then 9 to 10 symbols will move, and if the reel speed is "ultra-low", then 5 symbols will move. Therefore, by simply changing the position where the dynamic display of the reel begins or the reel speed, it is possible to change the type of pseudo-symbols that are dynamically displayed during the button operation valid period without changing the arrangement of the symbols. This makes it possible to set various dynamic display modes without increasing the number of types of symbol data, and reduces the amount of data required for presentation data.

Next, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 228(b). When rotation start position 1 is set, a dynamic display mode is executed that can display the pseudo symbol "A" that is the target of the stopped display regardless of whether the reel speed is set to "high" or "ultra-low". In this case, the reel speed "ultra-low" (the period during which one symbol is displayed is 1.2 seconds), which displays the pseudo symbol "A" for a longer period than the reel speed "high" (the period during which one symbol is displayed is 0.7 seconds), allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol that is the target of the current stopped display.

In addition, when the spin start position 2 is set, if the reel speed is set to "high", the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid button operation period will be in the range of array 9 to array 5, resulting in a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol "A" that is the target for the stopped display can be displayed, and if the reel speed is set to "ultra-low", the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid button operation period will be in the range of array 9 to array 2, resulting in a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol "A" that is the target for the stopped display cannot be displayed.

As a result, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination is a miss, it is possible to execute a dynamic display that does not display the pseudo symbol "A" by starting the dynamic display with the reel speed set to "ultra-low" from the spin start position 2. Also, when executing such stop control, it is advisable to set the symbols set other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped to the same symbol. This prevents the player from knowing whether the dynamic display mode executed in this slot performance is a dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped is displayed based on the dynamic display content of the symbols set other than the pseudo symbol to be stopped.

Furthermore, when the reel speed is "ultra-low," if the dynamic display starts from rotation start position 1, the dynamic display mode allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be displayed (dynamic display mode advantageous to the player), and if the dynamic display starts from rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode does not allow the pseudo symbol "A" to be displayed (dynamic display mode disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, simply by knowing the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reels starts in a slot performance, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example will be described.

Figure 229 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Figure 229 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode memory area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 230, the display mode memory area 222ca will be described in detail. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display mode memory area 222ca. This display mode memory area 222ca is a table in which multiple dynamic display modes of the reels of each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance are stored, and when it is determined that there is a slot performance in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later (S2034: Yes in FIG. 223), the display mode to be selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, the display mode memory area 222ca stores multiple display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) with different rotation speeds (dynamic display speeds) and pattern arrangements as dynamic display modes in slot performances. This makes it possible to set multiple patterns as the dynamic display modes to be executed in each slot performance when consecutive slot performances are executed in this control example.

This spin speed indicates the period during which the dynamically displayed symbols are displayed in the display area where the slot performance is displayed, and in this control example, it is set so that at a "high" spin speed, the number 1 symbol is displayed for 0.7 seconds. At a "low" spin speed, the number 1 symbol is displayed for 1 second. At an "ultra-low" spin speed, the number 1 symbol is displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the reel spin speed to three levels in this way, it is possible to set dynamic displays for each slot performance that are easy for the player to distinguish between pseudo symbols and dynamic displays that are difficult to distinguish. Therefore, different performances can be executed even when the dynamic display mode uses the same symbol arrangement.

Furthermore, by providing three different reel rotation speeds, it is possible to vary the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot performance. For example, if the duration of one slot performance (the period during which operation of the frame button 22 is judged to be valid) is six seconds, nine pseudo symbols can be displayed at a "high" rotation speed, six pseudo symbols can be displayed at a "low" rotation speed, and five pseudo symbols can be displayed at a "super-low" rotation speed. This makes it possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbols that are the current stop display mode are displayed, depending on the reel rotation speed.

Specifically, display mode 1 is set so that the rotation speed is "high" and the pattern arrangement alternates between pseudo patterns that are subject to stop display (shown as "circles" in FIG. 230) and pseudo patterns that are not subject to stop display (shown as "x" in FIG. 230), while display mode 2 is set so that the rotation speed is "low" and the same pattern arrangement as display mode 1 is set.

Display mode 3 has the same rotation speed as display mode 1, and is set so that the pattern arrangement is set so that two pseudo patterns that are not subject to the stopped display (shown as "x" in FIG. 230) are displayed side by side with the pseudo patterns that are subject to the stopped display (shown as "circles" in FIG. 230), and further so that the pseudo patterns that are subject to the stopped display (shown as "stars" in FIG. 230) are displayed in an emphasized manner (enlarged, illuminated, etc.). Display mode 4 has a "low" rotation speed, and is set so that the same pattern arrangement as display mode 3 is set.

Display mode 5 is set so that the rotation speed is "ultra-low" and the pattern arrangement is such that the pseudo-pattern of the stop display target is displayed in array 4, and the other arrays are set so that pseudo-patterns other than the stop display target are displayed. Display mode 6 is set so that the rotation speed is "ultra-low" and the pattern arrangement is such that the pseudo-pattern of the stop display target is displayed in array 11, and the other arrays are set so that pseudo-patterns other than the stop display target are displayed.

Note that display mode 5 and display mode 6 use the same pattern array data, but are display modes that differ in the position at which the dynamic display starts. In other words, in display mode 6, the dynamic display starts from array 5 shown in display mode 5. Display mode 5 and display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stopped display mode described in FIG. 228 above is executed.

Display mode 7 is set so that the rotation speed changes during the period when pattern arrangements 1 to 6 are displayed, the rotation speed is "low", and when pattern arrangements 7 to 11 are displayed, the rotation speed is "high". Pattern arrangements 1 to 6 alternate between pseudo patterns that are not eligible for stop display and pseudo patterns that are eligible for stop display, and pattern arrangements 7 to 11 are set so that pseudo patterns that are not eligible for stop display are displayed.

In this way, by slowing down the rotation speed in the range where the pseudo symbols to be displayed in a static display are displayed (arrays 1 to 6) and speeding up the rotation speed in the range where the pseudo symbols to be displayed in a static display are not displayed (arrays 7 to 11), it is possible to vary the speed of the dynamic display to attract the player's interest, and by lengthening the period during which the pseudo symbols to be displayed in a static display are displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, because the rotation speed is increased in the range (arrays 7-11) where the pseudo symbols to be displayed are not displayed, it is possible to shorten the time it takes for the reel to rotate once, and the range (arrays 7-11) where the pseudo symbols to be displayed are displayed can be dynamically displayed multiple times during one slot performance period (the period during which operation of frame button 22 is valid), which motivates the player to operate frame button 22.

Display mode 8 is a display mode in which the rotation speed changes as the pattern array rotates, with the rotation speed being "high" on the first rotation and "low" from the second rotation onwards, and is set to display the same display mode as display mode 7. Display mode 9 is a display mode in which the pseudo pattern to be displayed as a stop is highlighted as the pattern array rotates, with the rotation speed being "high" on the first rotation and the same pattern array as display mode 7, and from the second rotation onwards, a pseudo pattern "star" that highlights the pseudo pattern "A" to be displayed as a stop is displayed.

In this control example, the nine types of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) described above can be set as dynamic display modes executed in the slot performance, but the types of display modes are not limited to these, and more display modes may be used. In this way, the performance effect of each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance can be further improved.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. This display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referenced when selecting the dynamic display mode of each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance, and is referenced when it is determined that there is a slot performance in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes).

As shown in FIG. 231(a), this display mode selection table 222cb has a winning display mode selection table 222cb1 and a losing display mode selection table 222cb2 set in it, and the dynamic display mode of each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance is selected based on the winning/losing determination result of the special pattern.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance is selected based on the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment, so the player can predict whether or not they have won the jackpot for the special symbol by understanding the performance content of the continuous slot performance.

Figure 231 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning display mode selection table 222cb1. This winning display mode selection table 222cb1 selects the display mode of each slot presentation (initial slot presentation, normal slot presentation, first shortened slot presentation, second shortened slot presentation, extended slot presentation) executed in the consecutive slot presentation based on the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 1" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect; when the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 4" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 4" is set as the extended slot effect; When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 8" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 4" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 5" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 5" is set as the extended slot effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 9" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 4" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 7" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 7" is set as the extended slot effect.

Figure 231 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the loss display mode selection table 222cb2. This loss display mode selection table 222cb2 selects the display mode of each slot presentation (initial slot presentation, normal slot presentation, first shortened slot presentation, second shortened slot presentation, extended slot presentation) executed in the consecutive slot presentation based on the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 1" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 1" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 2" is set as the extended slot effect; when the value of the effect counter 223f is "50 to 99", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 4" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 4" is set as the extended slot effect; When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 149", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 2" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 7" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 6" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 6" is set as the extended slot effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", "display mode 1" is set as the initial slot effect, "display mode 4" is set as the normal slot effect, "display mode 8" is set as the first abbreviated slot effect, "display mode 9" is set as the second abbreviated slot effect, and "display mode 7" is set as the extended slot effect.

As explained above, this control example is configured to set the dynamic display mode in advance for all slot performances that may be executed in consecutive slot performances, so that the next slot performance can be executed smoothly regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance executed in consecutive slot performances.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. This stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting the stop mode of each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance, and is referenced when it is determined that there is a slot performance in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) described later (S2034: Yes in FIG. 233).

As shown in FIG. 232(a), this stop mode selection table 222cc has a winning stop mode selection table 222cc1 and a losing stop mode selection table 222cc2 set, and the stop mode is selected by referring to the table corresponding to the winning/losing determination result of the special pattern.

Figure 232 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning stop mode selection table 222cc1. The winning stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting a stop pattern with a different number of symbols in each slot performance based on the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols that are completed as the initial slot effect is "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols that are completed as the first shortened slot effect is "0", the number of symbols that are completed as the second shortened slot effect is "2", and the number of symbols that are completed as the extended slot effect is "2".

When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols that are completed as the initial slot effect is "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the normal slot effect is "2", the number of symbols that are completed as the first shortened slot effect is "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the second shortened slot effect is "1", and the number of symbols that are completed as the extended slot effect is "1".

In this way, if the result of the win/lose determination is a win, three symbols will be formed after each slot performance is executed in the consecutive slot performance. This notifies the player that they have won.

Furthermore, in this control example, multiple stop patterns are provided for each slot performance when the hit/miss determination result is a hit, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to determine whether or not the current consecutive slot performance is a consecutive slot performance that would have been executed if the hit/miss determination result was a hit, while the consecutive slot performance is being executed.

Figure 232 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the loss stop mode selection table 222cc2. The loss stop mode selection table 222cc2 is a table for selecting stop patterns with different numbers of symbols that are achieved in each slot performance based on the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols that are completed as the initial slot effect is "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the normal slot effect is "0", the number of symbols that are completed as the first shortened slot effect is "0", the number of symbols that are completed as the second shortened slot effect is "0", and the number of symbols that are completed as the extended slot effect is "0".

When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 199", stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols that are completed as the initial slot effect is set to "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the normal slot effect is set to "0", the number of symbols that are completed as the first shortened slot effect is set to "1", the number of symbols that are completed as the second shortened slot effect is set to "0", and the number of symbols that are completed as the extended slot effect is set to "0".

As explained above, in this control example, the initial slot performance executed first in the consecutive slot performance will have the same stopping pattern regardless of whether the hit/miss determination result is a hit or a miss, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to tell immediately after the consecutive slot performance starts (at the end of the initial slot performance) whether or not the current consecutive slot performance is a consecutive slot performance executed when the hit/miss determination result is a hit.

Returning to Figure 229, the explanation will continue. Figure 229 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in Figure 229, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. This display mode storage area 223ca is set with the selected display mode in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) (S2071 in FIG. 233), and is referenced when setting the display slot performance command corresponding to each slot performance of the consecutive slot performance (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238), and the information related to the stored display mode is initialized when the consecutive slot performance ends.

The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the stop mode selection table 222cc described above. This stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S2072 in FIG. 233) in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233), and is referenced when setting the display slot performance command corresponding to each slot performance of the continuous slot performance (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851, S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238), and the information related to the stored display mode is initialized when the continuous slot performance ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 233 to Fig. 238, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that variable display setting process 4 (see Fig. 233) is executed instead of variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 170), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 233, we will explain the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

After completing the processing of S2006, similar to the variable display setting processing 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 170), the processing of S2034 and S2035 is executed, and then a display mode is selected based on the display mode selection table 222cb and set in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

When the process of S2071 is completed, a stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similar to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 170), the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Figures 234 to 238, various in-effect processing of the slot effect processing (see Figure 174) of main processing 2 (see Figure 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be explained.

First, the first slot performance process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first slot performance process 2. When the first slot performance process 2 is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed, similar to the first slot performance process in the second control example described above (see FIG. 175). Then, when the process of S4707 is completed, next, a slot stop performance command for display of the set stop mode is set (S4751), and a slot performance command for display corresponding to the performance set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4752), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the current time is not the valid button press period (S4701: No), the process of S4710 to S4712 is executed, similar to the process during the first slot performance in the second control example described above (see FIG. 175), and this process ends.

Next, normal slot performance process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing the contents of normal slot performance process 2. When normal slot performance process 2 is executed, the processes of S4801 to S4803 are executed in the same manner as the normal slot performance process in the second control example described above (see FIG. 176), and if it is determined in the process of S4803 that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop performance command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot performance state is set to a wait-for-end state (S4807), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4803 that the value of the slot presentation counter 223p is not greater than 19,000 (i.e., less than or equal to 19,000) (S4803: No), a display slot stop presentation command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4852), and the slot presentation state is set to the second shortened slot presentation (S4809).

After completing the processing of S4809, the display slot performance command corresponding to the display mode of the second abbreviated slot performance set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, the first abbreviated slot performance in-progress process 2 (S4608) will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first abbreviated slot performance in-progress process 2 (S4608). When the first abbreviated slot performance in-progress process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, the processes of S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are executed, similar to the first abbreviated slot performance in-progress process in the second control example described above (see FIG. 177).

After completing the processing of S4904, the display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display slot effect command corresponding to the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4952), and this processing ends.

Next, the second shortened slot performance process 2 (S4610) will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second shortened slot performance process 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot performance process 2 (S4610) is executed, first, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed in the same manner as the second shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above. When the process of S5002 is completed, a display slot stop performance command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), a display slot performance command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5052), the slot performance state is set to a waiting for end state (S5004), and this process is terminated.

Figure 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension slot performance process 2 (S4612). When the extension slot performance process 2 (S4612) is executed, the processes of S5101 and S5102 are executed in the same manner as the extension slot performance process in the second control example described above (see Figure 179), and then a display slot stop performance command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5151), a display slot performance command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152), the slot performance state is set to a wait-for-end state (S5104), and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot presentation of the second control example described above, in each slot presentation executed in the continuous slot presentation, the pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

Furthermore, even during one slot performance, the dynamic display mode is changed when a certain condition (the number of revolutions of the pattern arrangement displayed on the reel, or the passage of a certain amount of time) is met, which makes it possible for the player to operate the operating means (frame button 22) more enthusiastically.

As a multiple dynamic display mode, it is preferable to change the number of dynamically displayed reels. This makes it possible to enlarge the dynamically displayed pseudo symbols in a limited display space. The size of the pseudo symbols may also be changed. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbols that are the subject of the current stopped display are dynamically displayed, which makes the player more eager to press the frame button 22.

In this case, the other symbols may be displayed in a reduced size, making the pseudo symbol that is the target of the stopped display relatively easier to see than the other symbols. This makes it possible to make the specified pseudo symbol easier to see without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Furthermore, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are the target of a stopped display) may be increased. This allows the player to easily identify the predetermined symbols. Also, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not the target of a stopped display) may be reduced, thereby relatively increasing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols. In this case, it is possible to reduce the total number of symbols that are dynamically displayed, making it easier to identify each of the dynamically displayed symbols.

As a dynamic display mode, the arrangement of the symbols on the dynamically displayed reels may be changed to set an area in which predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be displayed as stop symbols) are concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed in the slot presentation can be changed. This allows a variety of presentations to be executed, since it is possible to set dynamic displays that are easy to grasp and dynamic displays that are difficult to grasp for a specific pseudo symbol (the pseudo symbol that is the target of the stopped display) even with the same symbol arrangement.

The dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed down in the range in which a predetermined pseudo pattern (the pseudo pattern to be displayed as a stop display) is displayed, and may be made faster in other areas. This allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo pattern to be displayed as a stop display without changing the period in which the predetermined pattern arrangement is displayed.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be normal until the reels have completed a predetermined number of revolutions (e.g., two revolutions), and thereafter (e.g., the third revolution), the dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. This allows a player who has not operated the operation means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (the period during which the reels complete two revolutions) to easily grasp the predetermined pseudo pattern (the pseudo pattern that is the target of the stopped display), and encourages the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22).

In addition, in this control example, the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of each slot performance are determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol, so it is possible to predict the hit/miss judgment result of the special symbol based on the performance content of each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance. This has the effect of making the player interested in the performance content of the consecutive slot performance.

In this control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for each slot performance that may be executed in the consecutive slot performance (initial slot performance, normal slot performance, first shortened slot performance, second shortened slot performance, extended slot performance), so that the next slot performance can be executed smoothly regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, the initial slot performance executed first in the consecutive slot performance will have the same stopping mode regardless of whether the hit/miss determination result is a hit or a miss, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to tell immediately after the consecutive slot performance starts (at the end of the initial slot performance) whether or not the current consecutive slot performance is a consecutive slot performance executed when the hit/miss determination result is a hit.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of each slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance are set in advance, but when the slot performance executed in the consecutive slot performance is determined (when the next slot performance to be executed is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot performance), the dynamic display mode and stop display mode of that slot performance may be set.

Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the stop display mode in the special slot performance that is executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the initial slot performance is being executed may be set to the same timing as the other slot performances.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the sixth control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 239 to 248. This control example is a detailed explanation of the composite press performance of the above-mentioned second control example. The composite press performance of the above-mentioned second control example was configured to be executed based on one special symbol change.

In contrast, this control example differs in that it is configured to execute a composite press effect that is executed based on one special pattern change, and a composite effect that is executed based on multiple special pattern changes. In addition, a detailed explanation is added regarding the operation content of the frame button 22 for each press effect in the composite press effect that is executed based on one special pattern change, and the relationship between the executed press effect.

This sixth control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. In other respects, it is the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those in the second control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 239, the rear image displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. Fig. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of rear image data (the "Mountain" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and Fig. 239(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of rear image data (the "Sea" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

In this control example, the stage shown in Figures 239(a) and (b) can be selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. Details will be described later with reference to Figure 241, but a period during which operation of the frame button 22 is judged to be valid is set for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) after the special pattern starts to vary, and the stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third pattern display device 81 is switched by the player operating the frame button 22 during that period.

In addition, this control example is configured to execute an effect that corresponds to the displayed stage. Therefore, by operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the player can change the stage (for example, 5 seconds after the special symbol starts to change), and changing the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to execute a new effect, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

Next, the composite press performance in this control example will be explained with reference to Figure 240. Figure 240 is a timing chart showing an example of a composite press performance in this control example. Note that, for the composite press performance in this control example that overlaps with the composite press performance in the second control example described above, the same elements are given the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, a period during which the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the special pattern change is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the rapid-fire effect is executed for 10 seconds from when there are 12 seconds remaining in the change time of special pattern change 1 (60 s) to when there are 2 seconds remaining.

When the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during this rapid-fire performance (for example, an operation that results in 50 or more rapid hits), the operation mode for changing the background (stage) executed in the next special symbol variation is changed. Here, the operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be explained with reference to Figures 241 (b) and (c).

Figure 241(b) is a schematic diagram showing a background change operation mode in which the background of a currently executing special pattern variation can be changed, and Figure 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing a background change operation mode in which the background of the next special pattern variation being executed can be changed. First, in Figure 241(b), a background image corresponding to the currently selected background (the "sea" stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and stages selectable as a background selection screen (the "sea" stage and the "mountain" stage) are displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, and the currently selected stage is configured to be displayed larger than unselected stages.

Then, below the main display area Dm, a background change notification display saying "Press the button to change the background" is displayed to inform the player that the current period is one in which the background can be changed, and next to this is a display simulating a "button" indicating that the current period is one in which operation of the frame button 22 is valid.

This allows the player to easily understand that they are in a period in which they can change the background, and allows the player to select the background of their choice.

As shown in FIG. 240, an effect (e.g., a rapid-fire effect) may be executed that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special pattern change ends (e.g., 5 seconds until the special pattern change ends). In this case, the player may operate the frame button 22 enthusiastically, and as a result, may operate the frame button 22 even after the next special pattern change has started, causing a problem of unintentionally changing the background during the next special pattern change.

If this problem were to occur when an effect that spans multiple variations (so-called continuous effects) was being executed, there was a risk that the player would not be able to see the effect they were looking forward to, which would cause dissatisfaction for the player.

To prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring, this control example is configured so that if it is determined that a specific frame button operation (e.g., a rapid-fire operation) has been performed during a specified period until the special pattern change ends (e.g., 5 seconds until the special pattern change ends), the background change operation mode to be performed during the next special pattern change is changed to a specific background change operation mode.

Now, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the above-mentioned specific background change operation mode will be explained. As shown in FIG. 241(c), this specific background change operation mode differs from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241(b), in that the background does not change until the currently executing special pattern variation ends, even if the frame button 22 is operated. At the bottom of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, a display "Press button to select background for next variation" is displayed to inform the player that the current mode is a specific background change operation mode, and a selection content indicating the background to be displayed in the next variation is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

In this way, by changing the type of presentation using the frame button 22 that is executed at the next special pattern change based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the special pattern change, it is possible to prevent situations that cause dissatisfaction to the player.

In this control example, if it is determined that a specified operation has been performed on the frame button 22 within a specified period until the special pattern change ends, a configuration is used in which the operation mode of the effect of operating the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special pattern change (hereinafter referred to as the frame button operation effect) is changed, but other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special pattern change exceeds a predetermined number of times, the mode of the frame button operation presentation for the next special pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, if the end timing of the frame button operation presentation executed for the current special pattern change and the start timing of the frame button operation presentation executed in response to the next special pattern change are set within a predetermined interval (e.g., 10 seconds), the mode of the subsequent frame button operation presentation may be changed based on the fact that the operation content of the previously executed frame button operation presentation is determined to be the predetermined operation content.

Furthermore, in this control example, if the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation performance is determined to be a specified operation, the mode of the next frame button operation performance is changed, so that the next frame button operation performance can be changed only when the situation is such that the above-mentioned problem may actually occur, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation performance executed in response to the next special pattern change based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation performance executed in the current special pattern change and the start timing of the frame button operation performance executed in response to the next special pattern change are set within a specified interval (e.g., 10 seconds). This can reliably prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Also, a means may be provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated when the frame button operation effect is not set, and the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed if the determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (e.g., within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. This makes it possible to prevent an unintended background change from being executed when, for example, the player is informed that the current special pattern change has been a win/lose determination result even though the frame button operation effect has not been executed and the player is frustrated and operates (presses) the frame button 22 multiple times, causing the next special pattern change to start.

As described above, in this control example, for multiple frame button operation effects that are executed across multiple special pattern changes (the rapid-fire effect of special pattern change 1 and the background change effect of special pattern change 2 in FIG. 240), the manner of the frame button operation effect that is executed later can be changed based on the operation content during the previously executed frame button operation effect.

In addition, similar to the second control example described above, for multiple frame button operation effects (combined press effects) executed during one special pattern change, the manner of the frame button operation effect executed later can be changed based on the operation content during the previously executed frame button operation effect.

Returning to FIG. 240, the composite press performance will be explained. When special pattern change 2 (90s) is executed, a composite press performance is executed in which multiple frame button operation performances are executed in succession. This composite press performance is the same as the composite press performance executed in the second control example described above (see FIG. 157 to FIG. 159). Here, the operation content of the frame button 22 in each frame button operation performance executed in the composite press performance and the performance form of the frame button operation performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 242.

Figure 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the frame button 22 in a composite press effect and the effect mode executed. As shown in Figure 242, when a composite press effect is executed, press effect 1 is executed first. This press effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that encourages the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22, similar to the second control example described above (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the effective operation period is 7 seconds from 5 seconds after the effect starts) (see Figure 157 (b)).

During this pressing performance 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for pressing performance 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (5 seconds after the start of the operation valid period). The determined contents are classified into five types based on the operation content of the frame button 22: "weak repeated hits" determined when the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed (operation 3) and the number of repeated hits is small (50 times or less), "strong repeated hits" determined when the number of repeated hits is large (51 times or more), "long press" determined when the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for 2 seconds or more in pressing performance 1 (operation 4) and the auto repeated hit function is being executed, "no operation" determined when the frame button 22 is not operated even once during pressing performance 1, and "other operation" determined when an unnecessary frame button operation is executed for pressing performance 1.

Then, based on the result of the determination made at the operation determination timing of the press performance 1, the mode of the press performance 2, which is the frame button operation performance to be executed next, is set. Specifically, if the press performance 1 is determined to be a "weak continuous hit", the press performance 2 is set to a "timing press performance" (see FIG. 158(a)), if it is determined to be a "strong continuous hit", the press performance 2 is set to a "continuous hit performance" (see FIG. 243(a)), if it is determined to be a "long press", the press performance 2 is set to a "timing release performance" (see FIG. 158(b)), if it is determined to be "no operation", the press performance 2 is set to a "timing press performance" as in the case of the above-mentioned "weak continuous hit", and if it is determined to be "other operation", the press performance 2 is set to a "timing press performance (difficult)" (see FIG. 243(b)) which increases the difficulty of succeeding in the above-mentioned "timing press performance".

In this way, by setting the mode of the next press performance 2 to be executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in press performance 1, for example, for a player who has pressed the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times (50 times) in press performance 1 (a player who is good at rapid-fire operations), a performance can be executed in which the player continues to repeatedly press the frame button 22, thereby encouraging the player to participate in the frame button operation performance with enthusiasm.

In addition, for a player who is executing the auto-repeated function in press effect 1 (a player who is continuously pressing frame button 22), by executing an effect that asks the player to release the button rather than press the button, it is possible to execute an effect that corresponds to the current button operation state (pressed state), and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused by the content of the effect.

Furthermore, for players who perform unnecessary frame button operations for press performance 1, a penalty can be imposed that makes it more difficult for them to successfully perform the frame button operation operation for press performance 2.

Then, when press effect 2 ends, a rapid-fire effect (with a presentation period of 7 seconds and an effective operation period of 5 seconds from the start of the presentation) is executed in the same manner as the composite press effect of the second control example described above (see FIG. 159(b)), and the composite press effect ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 243(a), the continuous hit effect of press effect 2 that is executed when a "strong continuous hit" is determined in press effect 1 of Fig. 242 will be described. Fig. 243(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in press effect 2 in a composite press effect. Note that the same elements as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), when the rapid-fire effect is started with press effect 2, "High probability storage state" is displayed in the comment field, and "The meter may break through!?" is displayed, suggesting that the display state of the meter display section D1 will change. In addition, "Rapid fire" is displayed between the meter display section D1 and the small area Dm5, indicating that the currently executed frame button operation effect is a rapid-fire effect.

In the rapid-fire effect executed in this press effect 2, similar to the press effect 2 of the second control example described above, the meter area of the meter display unit D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the combined press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159(a)). Specifically, if the number of times the frame button is pressed exceeds 20 times during the period (3 seconds) in which the press effect 2 is executed, the operation condition is met, and the display of the meter display unit D1 changes based on the hit/miss judgment result of the special symbol for which the combined press effect was executed. For example, if the hit/miss judgment result shows that the special symbol has won the jackpot, and the reserved winning information also shows that the special symbol has won the jackpot, the meter of the meter display unit D1 is extended as shown in FIG. 159(a).

In this way, for a player who has performed sufficient rapid tapping operations in press performance 1, the player can continue to perform rapid tapping operations in press performance 2. Furthermore, because the presentation mode executed based on continued rapid tapping operations is different between press performance 1 and press performance 2, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 of his/her choice.

In this control example, the presentation mode is changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed repeatedly. However, for example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed repeatedly (operation condition) at which the presentation mode is changed may be determined by lottery from among a number of operation conditions. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the operation condition for the current press presentation, and allows the player to actively perform frame button operations until the end.

The following describes the timing press effect (difficult) of press effect 2 that is executed when press effect 1 in FIG. 242 is determined to be "other operation." FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in press effect 2 in a composite press effect. Note that elements that are the same as those in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the timing press performance (difficult) differs from the timing press performance of the second control example described above (see FIG. 158(a)) in that the display position of the target Db3 displayed within the timing gauge is different, and the moving object D3a is not displayed within the timing gauge.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the difficulty of succeeding (the difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the timing of the center of the target Db3) compared to the normal timing press effect. This makes it difficult for players who do not intentionally participate in the combined press effect to succeed in the timing press effect (makes it difficult to satisfy the operation conditions), and makes it difficult to execute the effect that is displayed when the operation conditions are satisfied (the effect that suggests the lottery result for the special pattern).

The method of increasing the difficulty of success is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration. For example, while the timing press performance is being performed, the target Db3 may be moved at high speed within the timing gauge to make it difficult to understand the timing of the press, the display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or contracted to change the speed of movement of the moving body D3a.

In addition, the conditions for setting the timing press effect (difficult) may include, other than when the result of the operation judgment in press effect 1 is judged to be "other operation", when the result of the operation judgment differs from the operation status at the time when press effect 2 is started, for example, when "long press" is set as the operation judgment result in press effect 1, but it is determined that frame button 22 is not pressed at the time when press effect 2 is executed, the timing press effect (difficult) may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the timing press performance (difficult) is executed for a player who is determined not to be intentionally participating in the combined press performance, but it may also be configured to be executed, for example, when the operation content for the frame button 22 during press performance 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of consecutive presses is 7), and when the timing press performance (difficult) is successful (when the operation conditions are met), a special symbol lottery result may be notified, a specific performance (image or video) may be displayed, or information that the player can accumulate may be provided, providing an advantageous benefit to the player.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 244. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described.

Figure 244 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Figure 244, the RAM 223 in this control example differs from the RAM 223 in each of the control examples described above in that a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a confirmation flag 223dc, and a press count counter 223dd have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (for example, the "sea" stage or the "mountain" stage) that is set by the player operating the frame button 22. In the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 247), when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation valid period, which is the operation period during which the background can be changed, this background information storage area 223da stores background information based on the operation content, and in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), when the confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON, a display background command is set based on the stored background information (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag that determines whether the frame button 22 is operated 5 seconds before the special pattern variation ends. When it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 is operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. This operation change flag 223bd is set to on (S6811 in FIG. 247) when it is determined that a frame button has been input during the 5 seconds (effective period before the end) until the special pattern variation ends (S6810: Yes in FIG. 247) in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 247), if it is determined that the first frame button operation is in the valid period (S6802 in FIG. 247: Yes) and it is determined that the checking flag 223dc is set to off (S6803 in FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

The checking flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether a performance in which the background of the next change is changed (see FIG. 241(c)) is being executed as a background change performance; when it is on, it indicates that a performance in which the background of the next change is changed is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that a performance in which the background of the next change is changed is not being executed. This checking flag 223dc is set on when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set on (S6804 in FIG. 247) in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 247), and is referenced when setting the display background command in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set off after the display background command is set (S2083).

The press count counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of operations of the frame button 22 executed during press performance 1 of the composite press performance. When it is determined that press performance 1 is in progress (normal press) in the auto press performance setting process 2 (S4510), this press count counter 223dd is incremented by one (S4551 in FIG. 246), and is referenced when determining whether the number of presses during press performance 1 has reached a predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246). When it is determined that the predetermined number (50 times) has been reached (S4552 in FIG. 246: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Although not shown, the counter value is also initialized to 0 at the timing when press performance 1 of the composite press performance ends.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 245 to Fig. 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that the variable display setting process 5 (see Fig. 245) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 170), the auto-press effect setting process (see Fig. 246) is executed instead of the auto-press effect setting process (see Fig. 173), and the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see Fig. 247) is explained in detail, but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be explained with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 5 (S1712). When this variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed in the same manner as variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various variable display setting processes are executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects are set based on the acquired variation pattern. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to S2033 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

After completing the processing of S2040, it is next determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to ON (S2081), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (i.e., during the previous special pattern change, an effect that changes the background with the next special pattern change is executed) (S2081: Yes), a display background command is set based on information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da (S2082).

Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then steps S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same manner as in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, the background (the "sea" stage, the "mountain" stage) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed at the timing when the next special pattern change starts, based on the information that sets the background of the next special pattern change (information that is set in the background information storage area 223da).

Next, the auto press performance setting process 2 (S4410) will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the auto press performance setting process 2 (S4410). This auto press performance setting process 2 (S4410) differs from the auto press performance setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above in terms of the processing contents in the case of a normal press (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246).

When the auto press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed in the same manner as the auto press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, if the process of S4510 determines that it is a normal press period (S4510 in FIG. 246: Yes), a display press command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the press count counter 223dd is incremented by 1 (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the processing of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the press count counter 223dd is not greater than 50 (50 or less) (S4552 in FIG. 246: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4522, if the value of the press count counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552 in FIG. 246: Yes), the press performance scenario is then changed to non-auto press 2 (4553), the value of the press count counter is initialized to 0 (S4554), and this process is terminated.

Next, frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and if it is determined that there is no input (S6801: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a signal has been input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801: Yes), it is then determined whether the current period is the first frame button operation valid period during which a background can be selected (S6802). If it is determined in the processing of S6802 that the first frame button operation valid period is in progress (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the checking flag 223dc is set to on (S6803), and if it is determined that the flag is not set to on (set to off) (S6803: No), it is then determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to on (S6804).

If it is determined in the processing of S6804 that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6806), and the processing proceeds to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processing proceeds to S6807, skipping the processing of S6804 to S6806.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether a confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation refers to the operation of the frame button 22 while the performance for setting the background for the next change is being executed, and if it is determined in the process of S6807 that a confirmation operation has been performed (the frame button 22 has been operated) (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this process is terminated.

The processing of S6808 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 241(c). When the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect of setting the background for the next change is being executed, the display is switched to one in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The background display ("sea" or "mountain") enlarged and displayed in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to which the next change will be transitioned when the next change is started. In other words, in the processing of S6808, when a confirmation operation is performed once for the background information currently set (for the current change) (the "mountain" stage in FIG. 241(c)), background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to which the next change will be transitioned, and when a confirmation operation is performed twice, background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da as the background to which the next change will be transitioned.

Returning to FIG. 247 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6804 that the operation change flag is not set to on (is set to off) (S6804: No), a display background command corresponding to the background next to the currently set background is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

This processing of S6809 is executed when the first frame button operation is valid and both the operation change flag 223db and the confirmation flag 223dc are set to off, that is, when the normal background change performance (see FIG. 241(b)) is executed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

If it is determined in the process of S6802 that the current period is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), it is then determined whether the current period is the pre-end period (S6810). This pre-end period is a period indicating that the remaining period until the special pattern variation ends is a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds). If it is determined that the current period is not the pre-end period (S6810: No), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that the current period is the pre-end period (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6811), and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, if it is determined that a specific frame button operation (e.g., a rapid-fire operation) has been performed during a specific period until the special pattern change ends (e.g., 5 seconds until the special pattern change ends), the background change operation mode performed during the next special pattern change is changed to a specific background change operation mode, thereby preventing the occurrence of situations that cause dissatisfaction to the player.

Furthermore, by changing the mode of presentation using the frame button 22 executed at the next special pattern change based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the special pattern change, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations that dissatisfy the player.

The mode of the frame button operation performance executed in response to the next special pattern change may be changed based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation performance executed in the current special pattern change and the start timing of the frame button operation performance executed in response to the next special pattern change are set within a predetermined interval (e.g., 10 seconds). This can reliably prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Also, a means may be provided for determining whether the frame button 22 is operated when the frame button operation effect is not set, and the mode of the next frame button operation effect may be changed if the determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (e.g., within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. This makes it possible to prevent an unintended background change from being executed when, for example, the player is informed that the current special pattern change has been a win/lose determination result even though the frame button operation effect has not been executed and the player is frustrated and operates (presses) the frame button 22 multiple times, causing the next special pattern change to start.

In this control example, if a "long press" is determined in press performance 1 of the composite press performance, a timing release performance is executed in press performance 2. However, for example, the composite press performance may be executed in its entirety by the player continuing to press the frame button 22. The performance executed in press performance 2 in this case will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

Figure 248 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a combined press effect, press effect 2, which is executed when a "long press" is determined at the operation determination timing of press effect 1. As shown in Figure 248, when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 and reaches the operation determination point while the auto rapid-fire function is being executed in press effect 1, the comment field displays "Auto timing is set by pressing and holding the button," and next to it is a schematic diagram of a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating the percentage at which the timing will be set.

In this case, during press effect 1, the auto-repeated press function is executed to cause the meter on the meter display unit D1 to rise, while the timing gauge displayed in the comment field determines the operation timing for the timing press effect by lottery.

Then, auto-timing is set for the period until press performance 2 is started, and in the timing press performance (see FIG. 158(a)) executed in press performance 2, the same performance is executed as if the frame button 22 had been operated at the set auto-timing. By configuring it in this way, the player can execute the rapid-fire performance and the timing press performance simply by continuously pressing (holding down) the frame button 22.

In the above example, the expectation level for which the auto timing is set may be set randomly or based on the results of a lottery for a special symbol. The expectation level may or may not be notified to the player. Furthermore, the timing set by the auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (before the press performance 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance.

For example, two timings may be provided for determining the operation content of press effect 1, and if the earlier determination timing determines that the operation is a "long press," the effect shown in FIG. 248 may be executed, and the auto-timing setting result may be notified to the player before the later determination timing. By configuring in this way, if the auto-timing setting is poor, the operation content may be changed from there (e.g., a rapid press operation), and a normal timing press effect may be executed as press effect 2.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 249 to FIG. 260. In the seventh control example, when the pressing performance in which the frame button 22 is pressed is set to be executed at a short interval (10 seconds in this control example) in comparison with the second control example described above, an additional performance is executed at that interval (10 seconds in this control example). Specifically, when the pressing performance (first pressing performance) ends and the next pressing performance (second pressing performance) starts after a short interval (for example, 10 seconds), an additional performance in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed between the first pressing performance and the second pressing performance. As a result, the pressing performance in which the frame button 22 is pressed or the additional performance is executed continuously from the start of the first pressing performance to the end of the second pressing performance.

Here, even though the player releases his/her hand from the frame button 22 when the first press effect ends, if a second press effect is executed after a short interval (e.g., 5 seconds), the player will have to move his/her hand back to the frame button 22 in a short interval, which increases the player's operational burden and may prevent the player from concentrating on the game. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the press effect or additional effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed continuously from the start of the first press effect until the end of the second press effect, so the player only needs to move his/her hand to the frame button 22 until the end of the second press effect, thereby suppressing (preventing) the above-mentioned problem.

First, referring to Figure 249, the flow for setting the additional effects in this seventh control example will be described. Figure 249 is a timing chart showing the flow for setting the additional effects. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the third pattern change effect (a change effect using the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81) corresponding to one special pattern change is configured to allow multiple operation effects (effects that cause the player to operate the frame button 22) to be set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for special pattern change 1 (special pattern change with a change time of 90 seconds), the third pattern change presentation is configured to be set by dividing it into a first change pattern (a change pattern corresponding to the period from 0 to 30 seconds after the special pattern change begins), a second change pattern (a change pattern corresponding to the period from 31 to 60 seconds after the special pattern change begins), and a third change pattern (a change pattern corresponding to the period from 61 to 90 seconds after the special pattern change begins).

Here, in recent years, there has been a demand to increase the variety of presentation patterns of the third pattern variation presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Therefore, the applicant has devised a process to divide the period during which the third pattern variation presentation is executed into multiple periods, as in this control example, and to create a series of presentation patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create the same type of presentation pattern with a smaller amount of data compared to storing each of a series of presentation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to create more presentation patterns using the same amount of data as when storing each of a series of presentation patterns, reduce the amount of data used for the third pattern variation presentation, and increase the amount of data used for other presentations (for example, presentations that move the reels and bonus presentations displayed during a jackpot, etc.), making it possible to set a variety of presentations within a limited data capacity, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

However, when multiple variation patterns are combined to create a series of presentation patterns, for example, an operation presentation may be set in each of the successive variation patterns in which a presentation is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. Furthermore, of the successive variation patterns, an operation presentation is executed in the latter half of the variation pattern that is executed first. When an operation presentation is executed in the first half of the variation pattern that is executed next, a presentation pattern is created in which multiple variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds).

Furthermore, by setting a long period for the operation presentation executed in at least one of the multiple variation patterns, it is possible to maintain a period during which the player is motivated to play and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early. When such a configuration is used, it becomes easier to create a presentation pattern in which multiple operation presentations are executed at short intervals (e.g., 3 seconds).

As described above, this control example solves the problems that arise when executing a process that can create multiple performance patterns with a small amount of data.

In the first variation pattern, an operation presentation with a valid operation period of 10 seconds ("Variation B") that effectively determines the operation of the frame button 22 can be set, in the second variation pattern, an operation presentation with a valid operation period of 25 seconds ("SP2"), and in the third variation pattern, an operation presentation with a valid operation period of 10 seconds ("SSP2") can be set.

Specifically, for "Change B," which can be set as the first change pattern, the effective operation period (10 seconds) is set 17 seconds after the first change pattern starts (after the special pattern change starts), and ends 3 seconds after the effective operation period has elapsed. In the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern changes at high speed during the first 17 seconds, and after a reach state in which the third patterns on the left and right stop at the same number is reached, an operation display (effective operation period 10 seconds) suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is executed, and an effect is executed in the remaining 3 seconds to notify the player of the result of the operation display.

In "SP2", which can be set as the second variation pattern, after the first variation pattern ends (30 seconds have passed since the start of the special pattern variation), a display is executed for 3 seconds explaining the content of the next operation performance (operation valid period 23 seconds), after which the operation valid period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation valid period ends 4 seconds later. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set to a long period of 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed (color change, comment change, etc.), the light emission mode of the light-emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be changed (color change, brightness change, change of lighting on or off), and the drive mode of the drive device (see FIG. 7) provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be changed (change of driving on or off, change of driving speed, change of driving range). Therefore, the player can change various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period (23 seconds in this control example).

In "SSP2", which can be set as the third variation pattern, after the second variation pattern ends (60 seconds have passed since the special symbol variation began), a display is executed for 4 seconds explaining the content of the next operation presentation (operation valid period 10 seconds), after which the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and the operation valid period ends 16 seconds after the operation valid period has elapsed, that is, 90 seconds after the special symbol variation began. In this "SSP2", an effect is executed in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed during the operation valid period. In addition, an effect for notifying the player of the result of the special symbol win/loss judgment (lottery result) is executed during the period in which the operation valid period is not set (the period from 15 seconds after the third variation pattern begins to the end).

When "Variation B" is set in the first variation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern, the interval between the effective operation period set in "Variation B" and the effective operation period set in "SP2" is 6 seconds. This 6-second interval is the interval at which additional performances can be executed. When "SP2" is set in the second variation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third variation pattern, the interval between the effective operation period set in "SP2" and the effective operation period set in "SSP2" is 8 seconds. This 8-second interval is the interval at which additional performances can be executed.

In addition, when the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "Variation B" is such that the remaining period until the effective operation period (25 seconds) set to "SP2" starts is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example), that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the effective operation period (10 seconds) set to "Variation B" is within 4 seconds, an additional performance will be executed. In addition, when the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "SP2" is such that the remaining period until the effective operation period (10 seconds) set to "SSP2" starts is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example), that is, when the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the effective operation period (25 seconds) set to "SP2" is within 2 seconds, an additional performance will be executed.

In this way, when multiple operation effects for which an operation valid period is set are executed, a configuration is used that determines whether to execute an additional effect based on the operation content of the previously executed operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 was operated), thereby preventing problems that occur when multiple operation effects for which an operation valid period is set are executed (i.e., a problem in which the player's operational burden increases due to the repeated act of operating and not operating the frame button 22 in a short period of time, making it difficult to concentrate on the game).

As described above, in this control example, when multiple operation effects for which an operation valid period is set are executed, it is determined whether to execute an additional effect based on the operation content of the previously executed operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 was operated). However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple operation effects for which an operation valid period is set are set at a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect may be executed at that predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as additional effects will be described with reference to Fig. 250 and Fig. 251. Fig. 250(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an operation effect when "SP2" is set as the second variation pattern, Fig. 250(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which "additional effects" are not being executed during the period in which "additional effects" set between "SP2" and "SSP2" can be executed, and Fig. 250(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an operation effect when "SSP2" is set.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), during "SP2", the third pattern display device 81 displays a valid period notification section S1 (a diagram simulating a frame button) that notifies the player that it is the valid period for operating the frame button 22, and a period display section M1 that indicates the valid period for operation in "SP2", and the period display section M1 displays the remaining period of the valid period for operation (a in the diagram). The words "Press the button" are then displayed in the comment section to encourage the player to operate the frame button 22.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the word "Chance" is displayed in the comment field as a result of the operation, as shown in FIG. 250(b). Note that the timing shown in FIG. 250(b) is a timing when the operation valid period is not set (i.e., the operation invalid period is set), so the valid period notification section S1 and period display section M1 are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(c), "SSP2" starts, and the third pattern display device 81 displays a valid period notification section S1 (a diagram simulating a frame button) that notifies that the frame button 22 is in an effective operation period, and a period display section M2 that indicates the effective operation period in "SSP2", and the remaining period of the effective operation period (a in the diagram) is displayed by the period display section M2. In addition, the word "repeated hits" that indicates the operation content during "SSP2" and the word "set the meter to MAX" that indicates the performance content are displayed.

As shown in Fig. 250(a) to (c), when multiple operation effects are executed, the valid period notification section S1 notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 is in the valid period, the period display section M2 indicating the valid period of operation, and the display encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22 are not displayed during the period between the operation effects (the period between the operation effects shown in Fig. 250(b)), so the player temporarily stops operating the frame button 22. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in Fig. 250(c) is displayed. If such a display (effect) is executed within a short period of time, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player becomes complicated, and there is a risk of the player's motivation to play decreasing. In contrast, in this control example, when multiple operation effects are executed, additional effects are executed during the period between the operation effects (the period between the operation effects shown in Fig. 250(b)), thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem. Next, the display (effect) content of the additional effect will be described with reference to Fig. 251.

Figure 251(a) is a schematic diagram showing one example of an additional effect displayed in this control example, Figure 251(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of an additional effect displayed in this control example, and Figure 251(c) is a schematic diagram showing yet another example of an additional effect displayed in this control example.

The example shown in FIG. 251(a) differs from the display content shown in FIG. 250(b) in that an additional valid period notification section Sa that notifies the effective operation period set by the additional performance and an additional period display section Ma that indicates the additional effective operation period are displayed, and the remaining period of the effective operation period (b in the figure) is displayed by the additional period display section Ma. By executing the additional performance in this manner, it is possible to continuously notify the player that the effective operation period is in effect from when the effective operation period for "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250(a)) until when the effective operation period for "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250(c)), and therefore it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming cumbersome and reducing his motivation to play.

Also, as shown in FIG. 251(a), the display mode (display form and display position) of the additional valid period notification unit Sa that notifies the operation valid period is the same as the display mode of the valid period notification unit S1 or S2, so there is no sense of incongruity in the fact that an additional performance is being executed. Furthermore, because the player operates the frame button 22 as an additional performance, an additional comment is displayed on the comment displayed by the "SP2" operation performance, so the player does not feel uncomfortable about the performance (operation performance) displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the example shown in FIG. 251(a), only the additional period display section Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation valid period will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b) and FIG. 251(c).

Figure 251 (b) shows the display contents when the additional performance is set so that the display contents of "SP2" shown in Figure 250 (a) are displayed continuously (extended). As shown in Figure 251 (b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the period display section M1 indicating the operation effective period of "SP2" is displayed with no remaining period, and the additional period display section Ma is displayed next to it (on the left side from the viewpoint of Figure 251 (b)). As a result, when the remaining period a in "SP2" decreases (moves to the left of the period display section M1) and there is no remaining period (when the operation effective period has ended), in other words, when the additional performance starts, the additional period display section Ma can be displayed, and it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the operation performance executed by the additional performance is an extension of the operation performance of "SP2".

In addition, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is such that the word "chance" displayed during the "SP2" operation effect is rewritten (updated), making it possible to make the player recognize that the operation effect executed by the additional effect is an extension of the "SP2" operation effect.

Figure 251 (c) shows the display contents when the additional performance is set so that the display contents of "SSP2" shown in Figure 250 (c) are displayed earlier. As shown in Figure 251 (c), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the period display section M2 indicating the operation effective period of "SSP2", and the additional period display section Ma is displayed next to it (to the right from the viewpoint of Figure 251 (b)). As a result, the remaining period b in the additional performance decreases (moves to the left of the period display section Ma), and when there is no remaining period (when the operation effective period ends), in other words, when the operation effective period of "SSP2" starts, the remaining period of the period display section M2 can be displayed as decreasing, and it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation performance executed by the additional performance is executed before the operation performance of "SSP2".

In addition, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 also changes the display form of the meter that is increased by the "SSP2" operation effect (for example, the color of the meter is changed or the effect around the meter is varied to suggest that the meter will reach MAX in the "SSP2" operation effect), so that the additional effect and the "SSP2" operation effect can be more easily recognized as being related to each other.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 252 to Fig. 254. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example differs from the second control example described above in that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, and the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 have been changed, but the rest of the differences are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 252, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

252(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252(a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a specifies various fluctuation pattern selection tables for selecting detailed fluctuation patterns according to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the main control device 110. Specifically, the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the performance mode (first fluctuation pattern) for the period of 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation (i.e., the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the performance mode (second fluctuation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the third fluctuation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the performance mode (third fluctuation pattern) for the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the additional performance selection table 222a4 for determining the performance mode of the additional performance are provided.

In this control example, the first to third fluctuation patterns and additional performances are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a according to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the main control device 110, and one fluctuation performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern that combines them. For example, if a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main control device 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and one fluctuation performance is executed based on the selected fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the main control device 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, the second fluctuation pattern is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2, the third fluctuation pattern is selected from the third fluctuation pattern selection table 222a3, and an additional performance is selected from the additional performance selection table 222a4, and one fluctuation performance is executed based on the selected first to third fluctuation patterns and additional performance.

Although not shown in the figure, if a fluctuation time other than the above-mentioned fluctuation times (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to that fluctuation time will be selected. For example, if a short miss (fluctuation time of 7 seconds) is selected in the main control device 110, a fluctuation pattern will be selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, which specifies a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds.

First, referring to FIG. 252(b), the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first fluctuation pattern (the performance mode for the period from 0 to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) will be described. FIG. 252(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252(b), the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 specifies the first fluctuation pattern (the performance mode for the period from 0 to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) in accordance with the value of the first performance counter 223f1.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 99" of the first effect counter 223f1, a variation A is defined as an effect mode in which a press effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is not executed. Although not shown in the figure, multiple types of effect modes are defined for variation A, and variation A is executed in one of these effect modes. This increases the variety of effect modes for variation A, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

For the value of the first effect counter 223f1 between 100 and 198, a variation B is defined as an effect mode in which a press effect is executed by pressing the frame button 22. Although not shown in the figure, multiple types of effect modes are defined for variation B, just like variation A, and variation B is executed in one of these effect modes. This increases the variety of effect modes for variation B, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Next, referring to FIG. 252(c), the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second fluctuation pattern (the performance mode for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation) will be described. FIG. 252(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252(c), the second variation pattern selection table 222a2 specifies the presentation mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of the variation, corresponding to the value of the second presentation counter 223f2.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 99" of the second effect counter 223f2, a variation SP1 is defined as an effect mode in which a press effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is not executed. As with variation A, multiple types of effect modes are defined for variation SP1, and the effect is executed in one of these effect modes. This increases the variety of effect modes for variation SP1, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

A variation SP2 is defined as a presentation mode in which a press presentation in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed for a value of "100 to 198" of the second presentation counter 223f2. As with variation B, multiple presentation modes are defined for variation SP2, and the presentation is executed in one of these presentation modes. This increases the variety of presentation modes for variation SP2, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Next, referring to FIG. 252(d), the third fluctuation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third fluctuation pattern (the performance mode for the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation) will be described. FIG. 252(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the third fluctuation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252(d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 specifies the presentation mode from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of the variation, corresponding to the value of the third presentation counter 223f3.

Specifically, for the value "0 to 99" of the third effect counter 223f3, a variation SSP1 is defined as a presentation mode in which a press effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is not executed. As with variation A, multiple presentation modes are defined for variation SSP1, and the presentation is executed in one of these presentation modes. This increases the variety of presentation modes for variation SSP1, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

A variable SSP2 is defined as a presentation mode in which a press presentation in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed for a value of "100 to 198" on the third presentation counter 223f3. As with variation B, multiple presentation modes are defined for variable SSP2, and the presentation is executed in one of these presentation modes. This increases the variety of presentation modes for variable SSP2, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

As will be described in detail later, the first effect counter 223f1, the second effect counter 223f2, and the third effect counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. These independent counters select the effect mode for each fluctuation period (the first fluctuation pattern being a period of 0 to 30 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern being a period of 31 to 60 seconds, and the third fluctuation pattern being a period of 61 to 90 seconds) as a detailed fluctuation pattern, thereby increasing the variety of the effect modes and enhancing the interest of the player.

Here, when the press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed consecutively in each change period (first change pattern, which is a period from 0 to 30 seconds; second change pattern, which is a period from 31 to 60 seconds; third change pattern, which is a period from 61 to 90 seconds), for example, when the press performance is executed in the period from 0 to 30 seconds and the period from 31 to 60 seconds, if the press of the frame button 22 is delayed in the press performance executed first (press performance executed in the period from 0 to 30 seconds), the press performance (press performance executed in the period from 31 to 60 seconds) will be executed with a short interval after pressing the frame button 22. In this case, even if the frame button 22 is pressed in the first press performance and the hand is released from the frame button 22, the second press performance will be executed with a short interval (for example, 5 seconds), and the player will have to move his hand to the frame button 22 again in a short interval, which increases the operational burden on the player and may prevent him from concentrating on the game.

In contrast, in this control example, when press effects are executed consecutively in one variable effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed late in the first press effect, an additional effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is selected and executed in the period from the end of the first press effect to the start of the next (second) press effect. As a result, the press effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed or the additional effect is executed continuously from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect, so it is sufficient to keep the hand on the frame button 22 until the second press effect ends, thereby suppressing (preventing) the above-mentioned problem.

Here, the contents of the additional performance selection table 222a4 will be described with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the additional performance selection table 222a4.

The additional effect selection table 222a4 is a table for selecting an additional effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed too late in the first press effect when press effects are executed consecutively in one variable effect as described above.

As shown in FIG. 253, an additional performance is specified when the fluctuation patterns (first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation performance form a specific combination (when press performances are consecutive), and if the frame button 22 is pressed too late in the first of the consecutive press performances, the specified additional performance is executed in the period from the end of the first press performance to the start of the next press performance.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation patterns (first to third fluctuation patterns) of each fluctuation period in one fluctuation performance do not form a specific combination (if the press performances are not consecutive), no additional performance is specified and no additional performance will be executed.

Specifically, we will first explain the case where the first change pattern is "Change A (no pressing effect)."

If the first fluctuation pattern is "Fluctuation A (no press effect)" and the second fluctuation pattern is "Fluctuation SP1 (no press effect)," even if the third fluctuation pattern is "none" (i.e. the fluctuation effect ends in 60 seconds), "Fluctuation SSP1 (no press effect)," or "Fluctuation SSP2 (with press effect)," no press effect is executed consecutively in one fluctuation effect, so no additional effects are specified and no additional effects are executed.

When the first variation pattern is "Variation A (no press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "Variation SP2 (with press effect)," if the third variation pattern is "none" or "Variation SSP1 (no press effect)," no additional effect is specified since press effects are not executed consecutively in variation effect 1. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "Variation SSP2 (with press effect)," press effects are executed consecutively in the second and third variation patterns, so additional effect 2 is specified.

When this additional effect 2 is specified, additional effect 2 will be executed if the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late in the pressing effect executed in the second variation pattern. Since additional effect 2 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to have the player continue to operate the frame button 22 for the period until the pressing effect in the third variation pattern is executed.

Next, we will explain the case where the first change pattern is "Change B (with press effect)."

If the first fluctuation pattern is "Fluctuation B (with press effect)" and the second fluctuation pattern is "Fluctuation SP1 (without press effect)," even if the third fluctuation pattern is "none" (i.e. the fluctuation effect ends in 60 seconds), "Fluctuation SSP1 (without press effect)," or "Fluctuation SSP2 (with press effect)," press effects are not executed consecutively in one fluctuation effect, so additional effects are not specified and no additional effects are executed.

When the first variation pattern is "Variation B (with press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "Variation SP2 (with press effect)," the press effect will be executed consecutively in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern regardless of whether the third variation pattern is "none," "Variation SSP1 (without press effect)," or "Variation SSP2 (with press effect)," so additional effect 1 is defined for each.

Furthermore, if the third variation pattern is "Variation SSP2 (with press effect)," the press effect will be executed consecutively in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so in this case, in addition to additional effect 1, additional effect 2 is specified.

When additional effect 1 is specified, additional effect 1 will be executed if the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is late in the pressing effect executed in the first variation pattern. Since additional effect 1 is an effect in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to have the player continue to operate the frame button 22 for the period until the pressing effect in the second variation pattern is executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example differs from the second control example described above in that the contents of the performance counter 223f have been changed and a valid period storage area 223ea has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The performance counters 223f include a first fluctuation counter 223f1 used to select the first fluctuation pattern described above, a second fluctuation counter 223f2 used to select the second fluctuation pattern, and a third fluctuation counter 223f3 used to select the third fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 254(b)).

The valid period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not the period is a period during which the effect is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (i.e., a period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is valid), and the period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is valid is set as the value of the elapsed time (ms) from the start of the variable effect. In the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256), when a variable pattern command for executing a press effect is set (S2031 in FIG. 256: Yes), the valid period storage area 223ea is set to a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the executed press effect is valid. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (see FIG. 257), when an additional effect is set (S6854 in FIG. 257: Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the additional effect is valid is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). Although not shown in the figure, when one variable effect ends, the contents of the valid period storage area 223ea are cleared.

Next, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a block diagram that shows a schematic of the electrical configuration in the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example differs from the second control example described above in that the contents of the work RAM 233 have been partially changed, but is otherwise the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example differs from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional performance data storage area 233n, an additional performance 1 flag 233p1, and an additional performance 2 flag 233p2 have been added.

The additional performance data storage area 233n is an area for storing performance data for executing (displaying) additional performance 1 or additional performance 2. When it is determined in variation pattern command processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) that additional performance data is included in the received variation pattern command (S2751: Yes), the additional performance data corresponding to the received command is stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n. Then, when it is determined in pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260) that an additional performance is to be executed at the update timing of each additional performance (the additional performance flag is on), the performance data stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. This causes the additional performance to be executed.

The additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of additional performance 1 has been decided. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of additional performance 1 has been decided, and if it is off, it is determined that the execution of additional performance 1 has not been decided. The additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is set to on when an additional performance command indicating additional performance 1 is received in the additional performance command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6903). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), if it is determined that it is time to update additional performance 1 (S3851: Yes), it is referenced (S3852), and if it is determined that the value of the additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), the performance data of additional performance 1 stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of additional performance 2 has been decided. If it is on, it is determined that the execution of additional performance 2 has been decided, and if it is off, it is determined that the execution of additional performance 2 has not been decided. The additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is set to on when an additional performance command indicating additional performance 2 is received in the additional performance command process (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6902). Then, in the pointer update process 2 (see FIG. 260), if it is determined that it is time to update additional performance 2 (S3855: Yes), it is referenced (S3856), and if it is determined that the value of the additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), the performance data of additional performance 2 stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to Figs. 256 and 257. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that variable display setting process 6 (see Fig. 256) is executed instead of variable display setting process 2 (see Fig. 170), and frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (see Fig. 257) is executed instead of frame button input monitoring and performance process (see S1707 in Fig. 137), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256. In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, when a variable pattern in which a press effect is executed is set for the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 170) (S2031: Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the executed press effect is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In the seventh control example, the press effect, slot effect, and point effect in the second control example are not executed, and the processing corresponding to these effects is not executed. However, it is also possible to execute the press effect, slot effect, and point effect in the second control example, and execute the processing corresponding to these effects. This makes it possible to execute a wide variety of effects, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In the variation display setting process 6 (S1712), first, similarly to the variation display setting process 2 in the second control example (see FIG. 170), the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed. Then, a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (i.e., the variation pattern received from the main control device 110) is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 222a (first variation pattern selection table 222a1 to third variation pattern selection table 222a3) and the performance counter 223f (first performance counter 223f1 to third performance counter 223f3) (S2091), and a variation pattern command for display is set (S2006).

When the process of S2006 is completed, the process proceeds to S2031. If the process of S2031 determines that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is for executing a press effect (S2031: Yes), the operation valid period of the frame button 22 corresponding to each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 is set in the valid period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process proceeds to S2007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2031 that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute a press effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2007.

After completing processing of S2031 or S2092, similar to the second control example, processing from S2007 to S2011 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 257. In the frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (S1707), a frame button press command is set based on the detection of pressing of the frame button 22 during the effective operation period of the frame button 22. Furthermore, when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the effective operation period of the press performance, the period until the start of the next press performance is determined, and if it is determined that the period until the start of the next press performance is short (10 seconds or less in this control example), an additional performance command is set to execute the additional performance.

Specifically, in frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the valid period storage area 223ea, it is determined whether or not the current period is a valid period for operating the frame button 22 (valid frame button operation period) (S6851). If it is determined in the process of S6851 that the current period is not a valid frame button operation period (S6851: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6851 that the frame button operation valid period is in progress (S6851: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801).

If it is determined in the processing of S6801 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6801: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6801 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: Yes), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. The display frame button press command set in the processing of S6852 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button press command, it determines the period for which the command is set from the received command (for example, the period of the press performance in the second variation pattern), and displays a performance corresponding to that period (for example, a comment display performance (see FIG. 250 (b))) on the third pattern display device 81.

After completing the process of S6852, it is determined whether or not the current period is a period during which a press effect is being executed (S6853). If it is determined in the process of S6853 that the current period is not a period during which a press effect is being executed (S6853: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6853 that the current period is a period during which a press effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), the processing proceeds to S6854 to determine whether or not to execute an additional effect.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether the remaining period until the next press effect is to start is 10 seconds or less. If it is determined in the process of S6854 that the remaining period until the next press effect is to start is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), an additional effect command for display is set to execute the additional effect (S6855), the valid period storage area 223ea is updated based on the valid period for pressing the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6854 that the remaining period until the next press performance is to start is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processing of S6855 and S6856 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control process executed by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 258 to Fig. 260, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described. In this control example, the difference from the second control example described above is that the command determination process 4 (Fig. 258) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (see Fig. 180), that the variation pattern command process 2 (see Fig. 259 (a)) is executed instead of the variation pattern command process (see Fig. 146 (a)), that the additional performance command process (see Fig. 259 (b)) is added, and that the pointer update process 2 (see Fig. 260) is executed instead of the pointer update process (see Fig. 153), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 258, details of command determination process 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described. Command determination process 4 (S2502) in this control example differs from command determination process 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above in that variable pattern command process 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) is executed instead of variable pattern command process (see FIG. 146(a)), and additional performance command process (see FIG. S259(b)) has been added, but otherwise is the same.

In command determination process 4 (S2502), first, as in the second control example, processes S2601 to S2604 are executed. If it is determined in the process of S2604 that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), variation pattern command process 2 is executed (S2605) and the process proceeds to S2601.

Now, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 259(a), the details of the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described. The variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) in this control example differs from the variation pattern command processing in the second control example described above (see FIG. 146(a)) in that, if there is additional performance data, the additional performance data is stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n, but otherwise is the same.

In the variation pattern command process 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command has additional performance data (S2751). If additional performance data is set as the variation pattern command, this is the case when the press performance is set (selected) consecutively in the first variation pattern to the third variation pattern, as described above with reference to FIG. 253.

If it is determined in the processing of S2751 that the received variation pattern command contains additional performance data (S2751: Yes), the additional performance data corresponding to the command (performance data corresponding to additional performance 1 or additional performance 2) is stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n (S2572), and processing proceeds to S2701.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2751 that the received variation pattern command does not contain additional performance data (S2751: No), the processing of S2752 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2701.

When the process proceeds to S2701, steps S2701 to S2706 are executed, as in the second control example described above, and the process ends.

In this way, when a variation pattern command that may result in the execution of an additional performance is received, the performance data required for the execution (display) of the additional performance is stored in advance in the additional performance data storage area 233n, so that when the additional performance is executed (displayed), the additional performance can be executed (displayed) without delay. However, this is not limited to this, and the performance data required for the execution (display) of the additional performance may be stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n only when the additional performance is executed. This eliminates the need to store performance data in the additional performance data storage area 233n when the additional performance is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load.

Returning to FIG. 258, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2604 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then, similarly to the second control example, the processing of S2606 to S2613 is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not an additional performance command has been received (S2639). If it is determined in the process of S2639 that an additional performance command has been received (S2639: Yes), additional performance command processing is executed (S2640), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, the details of the additional performance command processing (S2640) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 259(b). This additional performance command processing (S2640) is a process that is executed when an additional performance command indicating the execution of an additional performance is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional performance command process (S2640), the process first determines whether the received additional performance command is a command indicating the execution of additional performance 1 (S6901).

If it is determined in the processing of S6901 that the received additional performance command is a command indicating the execution of additional performance 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is set to on (S6903), and this processing ends. As described above, additional performance 1 is an additional performance that is executed between the press performance of the first variation pattern and the press performance of the second variation pattern.

By processing S6903, additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to on, and the display data table buffer is updated so that additional effect 1 is executed (displayed) at the timing when additional effect 1 starts to be executed (0.1 seconds before the timing when the press effect in the first variation pattern ends).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received additional performance command is a command indicating the execution of additional performance 2 (S6901: No), the additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is set to on (S6902), and this process ends. As described above, additional performance 2 is an additional performance that is executed between the press performance of the second variation pattern and the press performance of the third variation pattern.

By processing S6902, the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to on, and the display data table buffer is updated so that additional effect 2 is executed (displayed) at the update timing of additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the second variation pattern).

Returning to FIG. 258, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2639 that an additional performance command has not been received (S2639: No), processing of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to the processing of S2601.

Next, the details of pointer update process 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 260. Pointer update process 2 (S3605) differs from the pointer update process in the second control example described above (see FIG. 153) in that it is configured to determine the timing to start executing (displaying) the additional performance, and to execute (display) the additional performance at the update timing of the additional performance (one second before the end timing of the press performance in each variation pattern), but is otherwise the same.

In pointer update process 2 (S3605), first, pointer 233f is incremented by 1 (S3801). Then, based on the value of pointer 233f incremented in the process of S3801, it is determined whether or not it is time to update additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end of the pressing effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851).

If it is determined in the process of S3851 that it is time to update additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). If it is determined in the process of S3852 that additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the time to execute additional effect 1 (the frame button 22 was pressed too early or not pressed at all, or a press effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3852 that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), this is the case when additional effect 1 is to be executed (the time from pressing the frame button 22 to the start of the next press effect is within 10 seconds), so the additional effect 1 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set to off (S3854), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3853, the additional performance 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d where the display data to be executed one second later is stored. This allows additional performance 1 to be executed (displayed) one second after the update timing of additional performance 1 (one second before the end of the press performance in the first variation pattern). Note that the update timing is not limited to one second before the end of the press performance, and may of course be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d can be changed to match the change.

If it is determined in the processing of S3851 that it is not the timing to update additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to update additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the second variation pattern) (S3855).

If it is determined in the process of S3855 that it is time to update additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether or not additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). If it is determined in the process of S3856 that additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the time to execute additional effect 2 (the frame button 22 was pressed too early or not pressed at all, or a press effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3856 that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), this is the case when additional effect 2 is to be executed (the time from pressing the frame button 22 to the start of the next press effect is within 10 seconds), so the additional effect 2 data stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to off (S3858), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S3855 that it is not time to update additional effect 2 (S3855: No), similar to the second control example described above, the processing of S3802 to S3806 is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, in pointer update process 2 (S3605), at the update timing of each additional effect, the display data table buffer is overwritten (updated) in advance with the performance data for executing (displaying) that additional effect, so that the additional effect can be executed (displayed) without delay. However, this is not limited to this, and it is of course also possible to update the display data table buffer when an additional effect starts. For example, it is determined whether it is the start timing of additional effect 1, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of additional effect 1 and additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data for additional effect 1 can be overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

In addition, in pointer update process 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the timing to update each additional effect, and then it is determined whether the additional effect will be executed (whether the additional effect flag is on or not), but this is not limited to the above. If it is determined that an additional effect will be executed (i.e., if the additional effect flag is on), it may be determined whether it is the timing to update that additional effect. This eliminates the need to determine whether it is the timing to update that additional effect when an additional effect is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load.

In this control example, when multiple operation performances are executed with a predetermined interval between them, a configuration is used in which an additional performance is set for the interval between them, but other configurations may also be used. For example, when multiple operation performances are executed with a predetermined interval between them, multiple operation performances may be executed consecutively by processing to delay the start timing of the operation performance executed first by a predetermined interval, or the start timing of the operation performance executed later may be advanced by a predetermined interval.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple operation performances as one continuous operation performance without setting an additional performance between the multiple operation performances. In this case, for example, by advancing the start timing of the operation performance to be executed later by a predetermined interval (e.g., 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation performance to be executed later will also be advanced by a predetermined interval (e.g., 5 seconds). Therefore, it is advisable to set the above-mentioned additional performance after the end of the operation performance to be executed later, or to set the period of the performance that displays the result of the operation performance to be longer.

<Modification of the Seventh Control Example>
Next, referring to Fig. 261 to Fig. 263, a modified example of the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example described above, a case where multiple operation performances are set in the third pattern variation performance executed for one special pattern variation is described, but in this modified example, a case where multiple operation performances are set to span consecutive special pattern variations will be described. Note that the same elements as those in each of the above control examples are given the same symbols, and their description will be omitted.

First, the flow of setting additional effects in this modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects across multiple special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, as in the sixth control example described above, a background change effect in which the background (stage) of the third pattern display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 is set for a period of 1 to 6 seconds (5 seconds) after the special pattern variation starts. During this period, the player can switch the background (stage) of the third pattern display device 81 by operating the frame button 22.

When the first fluctuation pattern "Fluctuation A" and the second fluctuation pattern "SP2" are set as the fluctuation patterns of special pattern fluctuation 1 (60 seconds) (see FIG. 253), the operation display is executed when the remaining period of the special pattern fluctuation is 27 to 4 seconds (23 seconds). Since the end of the special pattern fluctuation in special pattern fluctuation 1 (60 seconds) coincides with the end timing of the second fluctuation pattern "SP2", the period between the end timing of the effective operation period of "SP2" in special pattern fluctuation 1 and the start timing of the effective operation period set in the background change display of special pattern fluctuation 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

During these 5 seconds, the same control as in the seventh control example described above is executed, and additional performance 3 is executed. Next, the display contents of additional performance 3 displayed in this modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 262.

Figure 262 is a diagram explaining the display contents of additional effects when multiple operation effects are set across consecutive special pattern changes, and Figure 262(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the normal background change effect period. Figure 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when additional effect 3 is executed, and Figure 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the background change effect period when additional effect 3 is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 262(a), in this modified example, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed, similar to the sixth control example described above. The display content is the same as that in FIG. 241(b) of the sixth control example described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when additional performance 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262(b), an additional valid period notification section Sa that notifies the valid period set by additional performance 3 and an additional period display section Ma that indicates the additional operation valid period are displayed, and the remaining period of the operation valid period (b in the figure) is displayed by the additional period display section Ma. Then, the words "Get a new background at MAX" that explain the game content during this additional performance 3 and a meter that can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly taps the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, a background that is normally unselectable becomes selectable in the background change effect.

Figure 262 (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of a background change effect when a new background is acquired in additional effect 3. As shown in Figure 262 (c), normally two types of backgrounds, the "sea" stage or the "mountain" stage, can be selected (see Figure 262 (a)), but because a new background has been acquired in additional effect 3, the "river" stage is displayed as selectable.

As explained above, in this modified example, even in multiple operation effects that are set to span multiple special pattern variations, an additional effect (additional effect 3) is executed in the same manner as in the seventh control example described above, so that the player's operations on the frame buttons across multiple special pattern variations can be prevented from becoming cumbersome.

In the additional performance 3, the condition for the meter to reach MAX may be when the operation content executed during the operation performance satisfies the operation condition, or when the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of the special pattern change 2 is judged in advance (so-called pre-reading) and the judgment result is a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot). Also, both may be combined.

In addition, the additional effects used in the seventh control example and the modified example of the seventh control example additionally set both the effect mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the effective operation period of the frame button 22, but as shown in FIG. 263, it is also possible to configure it so that only the effect mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed and the effective operation period of the frame button 22 is not changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 263, a case where only the presentation mode is changed without changing the operation valid period of the frame button 22 as an additional presentation will be described. FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation valid period from the display contents of FIG. 251(a) described above in a modified example of the seventh control example, FIG. 263(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation valid period and the display of the period display section M1 from the display contents of FIG. 251(b) described above in a modified example of the seventh control example, and FIG. 263(c) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents obtained by deleting the display of the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation valid period and the period display section M2 from the display contents of FIG. 251(c) described above in a modified example of the seventh control example.

As shown in Figures 263 (a) to (c), because the operation valid period of the frame button 22 has not been changed as an additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is executed is a period during which no operation valid period is set. Therefore, the period display sections M1 and M2 indicating the operation valid period and the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation valid period are not displayed.

However, as a presentation mode, the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the valid period notification section Sa shown in FIG. 251 as a notification to encourage the player to operate the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player from ceasing to operate the frame button 22 during the period between the valid operation periods (invalid operation period).

In this way, by executing a notification (display of the operation display section Sb) that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as a presentation mode without changing the effective operation period as an additional presentation, it becomes possible for the player to continuously operate the frame button 22 across multiple effective operation periods, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player frequently repeats the act of operating and stopping the act of operating the frame button 22.

In this case, the presentation mode of the additional effect may be one in which the display mode changes based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 even during the operation invalid period. This makes it possible to make the player believe that the operation is valid, that is, that the display mode is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22, even though the operation is actually invalid.

Specifically, as effects that are actually executed during the effective operation period, it is advisable to execute pseudo-effect modes that are executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(a), an effect in which the content of the comment changes midway based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(b), and an effect in which a meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(c).

This makes it possible to make the player believe that the display mode is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the pseudo performance mode described above changes may be switched based on the operation content (operation interval or number of operations) of the frame button 22 performed during the actual operation valid period. This makes it possible to make the player believe that the performance mode during the operation invalid period is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 264 to 266. Each of the above-mentioned control examples configures various effects as operation effects in which the player operates the frame button 22. This control example differs in that the control of the effect mode when the operation effect in each of the above-mentioned control examples is executed is different.

Specifically, control is executed to change the presentation mode when the frame button 22 is operated based on the remaining valid operation period set for each operation presentation. By configuring it in this way, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining valid operation period is a predetermined time or less (e.g., 5 seconds or less), a presentation mode is executed in which the amount of change in the presentation mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 (the amount of increase in the meter, the amount of increase in the numerical value, etc.) is greater (larger) than when the remaining valid operation period is a predetermined time or more (e.g., more than 5 seconds), allowing the operation presentation to be enjoyed until the end.

Furthermore, in an operation presentation in which the presentation state changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) (i.e., a long press operation), the period for determining that a long press operation has been performed is shortened (e.g., 1 second) when the remaining period of the effective operation period is equal to or less than a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds or less). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to experience the change in presentation state based on a long press operation even at the end of the operation presentation, so that the operation presentation can be enjoyed until the end.

This eighth control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been partially changed. In other respects, it is the same as each of the above-mentioned control examples. In the following, elements that are the same as each of the control examples are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the operation presentation in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 264(a) and Fig. 264(b). As shown in Fig. 264(a), a display mode is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly press the frame button 22 while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. A remaining time indicator M, which indicates the remaining time for which the frame button 22 can be pressed, is displayed below the symbol that resembles the shape of the frame button 22. The remaining time indicator M is configured to change its display color based on the reduction in the remaining time. In this control example, the remaining time period is displayed in red, and as the remaining time decreases, the corresponding amount is changed to white (the portion displayed in red decreases) (see Fig. 264(b)).

To the left of the remaining time indicator M, the words "Long press for auto-repeated press" are displayed, indicating that by pressing and holding the frame button 22, it will be automatically controlled (determined) to the same state as if it were being pressed repeatedly. At the top of the display area, an indicator is displayed whose color changes based on the successive pressing of the frame button 22. This indicator has a scale displayed, and the scale is set to the expectation that the result of the hit/miss judgment for the changing special symbol will be a win. When the frame button 22 is pressed repeatedly and the indicator scale changes color to a higher value (from white to red), the player can hope that the hit/miss judgment for the changing special symbol will be a win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 264(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (pressing the frame button 22 continuously for 3 or 1 second), the text "AUTO REPEATED" is displayed on the pattern imitating the frame button 22, indicating that the long press has been detected and the button is automatically set to a continuous press state. In this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be a long press is set variably according to the remaining time for which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time becomes 5 seconds or less, the setting that was determined to be a long press when the frame button 22 was pressed for 3 consecutive seconds up to that point is switched to a setting that is determined to be a long press when the frame button 22 is pressed for 1 consecutive second. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time is low, the indicator can be accumulated more, and the button effects can be enjoyed.

In this embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held is changed depending on the remaining time, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to increase the amount by which the indicator is changed or to speed up the change. Also, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 3 seconds or less), and the frame button 22 is operated, the indicator may be changed and displayed to the maximum value to which the indicator was changed or to a predetermined value (e.g., up to 1 mark if an effect in which the indicator is displayed up to the maximum scale has been selected).

Next, referring to FIG. 265, we will explain frame button input monitoring and performance processing 4 (S1707), which is one process within main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring and performance processing 4 (S1707).

In frame button input monitoring/performance process 4 (Fig. 265, S1707), it is first determined whether the SW effective time (frame button operation effective period) is greater than 0 (S7031). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (less than or equal to 0) (S7031: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (S7032). This process then ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is greater than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW valid time is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press judgment value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press judgment value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is incremented by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether it is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that it is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 within the range of the performance value set in the variation pattern (S7041), and a display command for displaying the updated SW indicator is set (S7042). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press judgment value (S7040: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7037 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), it is determined whether the period during which the frame button 22 is not pressed is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (S7043). If it is determined that the period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S7043: Yes), the SW press counter (not shown) is reset to its initial value of 0 (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process is terminated.

In this way, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after it was pressed, it is considered to be repeated pressing, and the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is updated by incrementing it by 1. Then, when it reaches or exceeds the long press judgment value, the SW indicator is set to change. The amount by which the SW indicator changes is preset for each variation pattern, and is set to represent the expected degree of the win/lose judgment result.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator by pressing and holding the button or by tapping repeatedly. Furthermore, since the long press judgment value is set variably depending on the SW effective time, the player can see the effect of changing the indicator even if the SW effective time is running low. Note that the speed at which the indicator is changed may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW effective time.

The SW press counter (not shown) described above is configured to count the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and also to be able to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. However, for example, a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (press count measuring counter) and a counter that counts the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (press duration measuring counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measuring counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the player starts pressing the frame button 22, and the press duration measuring counter starts measuring.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count counter is not incremented, but the value of the press duration counter is incremented, and the press duration determination means determines whether the value of the press duration counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds).

Then, when the pressing duration determination means determines that the value of the pressing duration measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it may be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held.

In this way, by providing a press count counter and a press duration counter, it becomes possible to control the press operation (repeated press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22 independently.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, a modified example of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described. In the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265), when the remaining period of the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the long press judgment value, which is a value for determining that the frame button 22 is being long pressed, is shortened (from 3 seconds to 1 second), so that the long press operation (auto-repeated tap) can be performed even when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. Furthermore, in a state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the speed at which the SW indicator is varied is increased, so that the SW indicator can be variably displayed to the end (up to the maximum range previously set to be variably) by the long press operation (auto-repeated tap) performed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short.

In contrast, this modified example differs in that when a long press operation (auto-repeated tap) is performed when the long press judgment value has been shortened, the SW press counter value is incremented by a larger amount than when a long press operation (auto-repeated tap) is performed when the long press judgment value has not been shortened.

In this modified example, when a long press operation (auto-repeated tap) is performed while the long press judgment value is shortened, the SW press counter value is incremented (the interval between auto-repeated taps is shortened), but other configurations may be used. For example, when the remaining period of the SW effective time (effective period of button operation) is within a predetermined period (e.g., within 5 seconds), the SW press counter value due to auto-repeated taps may be incremented.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of this modified example will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266).

When frame button input monitoring and performance process 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, the processes of S7031 to S7037 are executed in the same manner as frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the above-mentioned eighth control example. Then, in the process of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press judgment value is set to 1 second (S7051), and if it is determined that it is not 1 second (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processes of S7038, S7041, and S7042 are executed in the same manner as frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the above-mentioned eighth control example, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7051 that the time is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is incremented by 2 (S7052), the value of the SW indicator is incremented by 2 (S7053), a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and this processing ends.

Also, in the processing of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S7037: No), the processing of S7043 and S7044 is executed in the same manner as in the frame button input monitoring/performance processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the above-mentioned eighth control example, and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this modified example, when the remaining SW valid period (button operation valid period) falls below a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the value (time) at which it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held is shortened (from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter that is incremented by the auto-repeated operation is incremented more than usual.

This allows the SW indicator to be displayed variably to the end (up to the maximum range that is preset to be variably adjustable) by performing a long press operation (auto-repeated press) when there is little SW valid time (valid button operation period) remaining.

Furthermore, unlike the eighth control example described above, the value added to the SW press counter is configured to increase, so the value of the SW press counter and the value of the SW indicator can be associated, which has the effect of reducing the control load.

The above-mentioned SW press counter (not shown) is configured to count the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and also to be able to measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed; however, for example, a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (press count measuring counter) and a counter that counts the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (press duration measuring counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, the press count measuring counter is incremented by 1 at the timing when the player starts pressing the frame button 22, and the press duration measuring counter starts measuring.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the press count counter is not incremented, but the value of the press duration counter is incremented, and the press duration determination means determines whether the value of the press duration counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds).

Then, when the pressing duration determination means determines that the value of the pressing duration measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it may be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held.

In this way, by providing a press count counter and a press duration counter, it becomes possible to control the press operation (repeated press operation) and the long press operation of the frame button 22 independently.

The configurations described in each control example above may be combined as appropriate, and in particular, the configurations of the reach navigation effect described in the first control example may be combined with the configurations of the reach navigation effect described in the fourth control example, the configurations of the composite press effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configurations of the press effects in the sixth, seventh, and eighth control examples, the configurations of the consecutive slot effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configurations of the consecutive slot effect described in the fifth control example, and the configurations of the point effect described in the second control example may be combined with the configurations of the point effect described in the third control example.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Concept of the invention using slide unit 400 as an example>
Gaming machine A1 comprises a base member, a displacement member arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and an abutment member formed so as to be able to abut against the displacement member, wherein the displacement member comprises a first member arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second member having a rack gear with which the pinion gear engages and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the first member, wherein the base member has a rack gear with which the pinion gear engages, and the first member of the displacement member abuts against the abutment member.

Here, gaming machines are known that include a base member and a displacement member that is arranged on the base member so that it can be linearly displaced (for example, JP 2015-57166 A). In this case, for example, a machine in which the displacement member is brought into contact with an abutment member during displacement, and the abutment member is displaced together with the displacement member, or a machine in which an abutment member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member, and when the stopping position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to dimensional or control variations, the displacement member is brought into contact with the abutment member (the abutment member functions as a stopper).

However, the conventional configuration described above has a problem in that the displacement member and the abutment member may be damaged when the displacement member abuts against the abutment member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down to prevent damage, the dramatic effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member is lost.

In contrast, gaming machine A1 can prevent damage to the displacement member and the abutment member while ensuring the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member arranged on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. The rack gear of the second member meshes with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member. Therefore, when the first member is linearly displaced relative to the base member, the second member can be linearly displaced relative to the base member at a speed faster than that of the first member. This makes it possible to increase the displacement speed of the second member and ensure the performance effect associated with that displacement. On the other hand, the displacement member abuts the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, against the abutting member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the abutment and suppressing damage to the displacement member and the abutting member.

Examples of the form of driving the first member relative to the base member include a pinion gear arranged on the base member that is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member and the pinion gear is rotated to linearly displace the first member relative to the base member, and a tip of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported on the base member is connected to the first member, and the arm body is rotated to linearly displace the first member relative to the base member.

The displacement member and the abutment member may abut when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the protruding direction, or when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the retracting direction. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, abuts against the abutment member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of abutment and preventing damage to the displacement member and the abutment member.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the contact member in the gaming machine A1 is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the direction in which the contact member can be displaced is a direction that allows linear displacement of the displacement member when the displacement member is in contact with the base member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 has an abutment member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the direction in which the abutment member can be displaced is a direction that allows the displacement of the displacement member when the displacement member is abutted against it. This allows the abutment member to receive the displacement of the displacement member while escaping, thereby providing a cushioning effect, and as a result, it is easier to prevent damage to the displacement member and the abutment member.

Note that the direction that allows linear displacement of the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the abutting member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the abutting member does not need to be linear, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Also, if the displacement of the abutting member is linear, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, but may be inclined.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A2, the direction in which the abutment member can be displaced is set to a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has the advantage that the direction in which the abutting member can be displaced is set parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, so that the abutting member can smoothly move away when the displacement member comes into contact with it. This ensures a cushioning effect and makes it easier to prevent damage to the displacement member and the abutting member.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, a guide member is provided to guide the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the linear displacement of the abutment member is guided by the guide member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 is equipped with a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the linear displacement of the abutting member is guided by the guide member, so that the overall size of the device can be reduced. In other words, if a first guide member for guiding the displacement member and a second guide member for guiding the abutting member are arranged side by side at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement, the space in the direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement increases accordingly, resulting in an increase in size. In contrast, gaming machine A4 uses one of the guide members for both purposes, improving space efficiency and enabling a reduction in size.

A gaming machine A5 is any one of gaming machines A2 to A4, characterized in that the abutment member can be positioned in a position where it does not abut against the displacement member.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A4, the abutting member can be positioned in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member, so it is possible to create a state in which the displacement member does not come into contact with the abutting member. In other words, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the displacement member will be extended beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, so the displacement member is made to abut against the abutting member (the abutting member is made to function as a stopper), whereas when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to make the stop position of the displacement member coincide with the target position, so by placing the abutting member in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member and not making them come into contact, the number of abutments can be reduced, fatigue of the displacement member and abutting member due to abutment can be reduced, and their lifespan can be improved.

A gaming machine A6 is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, and is characterized in that it is provided with a contact member driving means that applies a driving force to the contact member, and the contact member is formed so that it can be displaced in a direction that pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means.

The displacement member includes a first member arranged on a base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member arranged on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable. The rack gear of the second member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and the linear displacement of the first member relative to the base member is utilized to linearly displace the second member relative to the base member at a speed faster than that of the first member, so that the force required for driving is relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (when the linear displacement starts from a stopped state), the force required for driving is maximum due to the influence of inertia. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from a stopped state) is slow, and there is a risk that the performance effect associated with the displacement will be hindered.

In this case, according to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A2 to A5, the abutment member is formed so that it can be displaced in a direction that pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the abutment member driving means, and this can assist the initial movement of the displacement member (the start of linear displacement from a stopped state). Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly displaced linearly from a stopped state. As a result, the initial movement can be made faster, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

Note that the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the direction of displacement of the abutting member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the abutting member does not have to be linear, but may be rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Also, if the displacement of the abutting member is linear, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member, but may be inclined.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in a direction that pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member contacts a first member of the displacement members.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, when the abutment member is displaced in a direction pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the abutment member driving means, it abuts against the first member of the displacement members, so that the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased. In other words, the abutment member abuts against the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, and pushes back the first member, so that the time during which the assisting force acts from the abutment member to the displacement member (first member) (i.e., the time from when the displacement member in a stopped state begins to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the abutment member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the abutment member) can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced relative to the base member by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a larger gear ratio than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of gaming machines A6 and A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced relative to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a gear ratio greater than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, making it easier to quickly displace the displaceable member from a stopped state, and after the linear displacement has begun, the speed of the linear displacement of the displaceable member (second member) can be increased, resulting in an improved presentation effect associated with the displacement.

In other words, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the abutting member to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, and the force pushing back against the displacement member by the abutting member can be strengthened, thereby reliably assisting the initial operation of the displacement member (the start of linear displacement from a stopped state). This allows the displacement member to be linearly displaced quickly from a stopped state. On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, and therefore the speed of linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly.

Note that a large (small) gear ratio means that the distance of linear displacement of the rack gear when the pinion gear rotates once is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to speed up the initial movement of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement will decrease. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement, the initial movement of the displacement member will decrease. In other words, it was previously impossible to both speed up the initial movement of the displacement member and increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after that initial movement, but by adopting a structure in which the abutting member pushes back the displacement member, it has become possible for the first time to achieve both.

<Concept of the invention using the lower combined unit 600 as an example>
Gaming machine B1 includes a driving means, a displacement member that is driven by the driving means and capable of being displaced toward a first position, and an abutted member against which the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts, characterized in that at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a pair of displacement members that are displaceable between a retracted position where the pair of displacement members are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and an abutment position (first position) where the pair of displacement members abut against each other (for example, JP 2015-51160 A). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the pair of displacement members that are retracted to the retracted position are displaced toward each other and abutted (combined) at the abutment position, thereby integrating the pair of displacement members to form a single character.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the pair of displacement members come into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated, causing the members to bounce off each other, for example, and thus making the position unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to reduce the impact when they come into contact, the time it takes for the pair of displacement members to be integrated to form a single character increases, causing the effect of the presentation to be hindered.

In contrast, with gaming machine B1, at least the component of the velocity of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so that the occurrence of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts against the abutted member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be suppressed from bouncing off the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the decrease in the component of the displacement member's speed in the direction toward the abutted member is configured to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased until it reaches the vicinity of the first position, thereby reducing the time it takes for the displacement member to become integrated with the abutted member to form a single character, and preventing the character from becoming drawn out. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be improved.

The abutted member may be a member stopped at the first position, or may be a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member may be positioned at the first position prior to the displacement member (i.e., the displacement member abuts against the abutted member which has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state), or may be positioned at the first position substantially simultaneously with the displacement member (i.e., the displacement member and the abutted member, which are in a displaced state with respect to each other, abut at the first position).

Examples of the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreasing near the first position include a component that decreases continuously as it approaches the first position, a component that decreases stepwise as it approaches the first position, and a combination of these.

In addition, a decrease in the component in the direction toward the contacted member does not only mean a decrease in the speed toward the contacted member, but also includes cases where the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes zero, and cases where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (i.e., the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

A gaming machine B2 is provided with a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member in the gaming machine B1, and the transmission means is configured such that, when the driving state of the driving means is constant, at least the component of the speed of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, the transmission means can reduce at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member near the first position while the drive state of the drive means is kept constant, so there is no need to perform complex control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive means depending on the displacement position of the displacement member. This simplifies the control of the drive means, reducing control costs and improving reliability.

In addition, an example of a state in which the driving state is constant is a state in which the supply current or supply voltage is constant if the driving means is an electric actuator (e.g., an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.). However, changes in state during the transient response at start-up and stop are ignored.

A gaming machine B3, which includes a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed in the gaming machine B2, and the transmission means includes a connecting member having a rotating base rotatably connected to the base member and a connecting tip formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotating base and rotatably connected to the displacement member, and which is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position by rotating the connecting member about the rotating base as the center of rotation in a direction that brings the connecting tip closer to the first position.

According to gaming machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement trajectory of the connecting tip of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotating base. That is, a displacement in the tangential direction of the arc is imparted to the displacement member. In this case, the connecting member is rotated around the rotating base as the center of rotation in a direction that brings the connecting tip closer to the first position, so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the first position (i.e., the abutted member) can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means interposes a connecting member between the base member and the displacement member, and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, so in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B2, the structure of the transmission means can be simplified.

A gaming machine B4, which is characterized in that it includes a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed in the gaming machine B2, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, the displacement member includes a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is formed such that at least the component of the speed of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in the direction toward the contacted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to gaming machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove extending from the base member that guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion that is guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove is formed such that at least the component of the speed of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove that guides the displacement member (guided portion) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove, so in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B2, the structure of the transmission means can be simplified.

A gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B2 to B3, and is characterized by having an interposed member whose one side is displaceably connected to the base member and whose other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member.

Gaming machine B5 has the same effects as any of gaming machines B2 to B3, but also includes an interposed member that is displaceably connected to the base member on one side and to the displacement member on the other side. This means that when the driving force of the drive means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means and the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the interposed member can be applied to the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of displacement due to the action of the transmission means and displacement due to the action of the interposed member. This makes it possible to complicate the form of displacement of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the presentation caused by that displacement.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the interposed member in gaming machine B5 is rotatably connected on one side and the other side to the base member and the displacement member by a pivot support.

According to gaming machine B6, the interposed member is rotatably connected on one side to the base member and the displacement member by a pivot, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposed member rotates around one side and the other side is displaced in an arc-shaped trajectory. This allows such an arc-shaped displacement (i.e., a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangent direction of the arc) to be applied from the interposed member to the displacement member. As a result, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be made more complex, enhancing the effect of the presentation caused by that displacement.

Gaming machine B7 is any one of gaming machines B2 to B6, characterized in that the transmission means is configured so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately zero at the first position.

According to gaming machine B7, in any of gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately zero in the first position, so that the occurrence of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts against the abutted member can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be suppressed from bouncing off the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

Gaming machine B8 is characterized in that in gaming machine B7, the transmission means is configured so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is a negative value at the first position.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of gaming machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is a negative value at the first position, i.e., the displacement member has a component in the direction moving away from the abutted member at the first position. Therefore, when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts against the abutted member, the displacement member can be moved away from the abutted member, thereby more reliably suppressing the occurrence of an impact. Therefore, for example, the displacement member can be prevented from bouncing off the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, if the first position is a negative value, even if the displacement member abuts against the abutted member before it reaches the first position due to dimensional or control variations, the probability that the displacement member's speed is slow (or a negative value) is increased, making it easier to suppress the occurrence of an impact.

A gaming machine B9 is any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, and is provided with a second drive means for driving the contacted member and a second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the contacted member, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means is formed so that, when the driving state of the second drive means is constant, at least the component of the speed component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B2 to B8, gaming machine B9 is able to enhance the effect of the presentation achieved by a pair of members abutting each other, since the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displaceable member in a direction approaching each other and abutting (merging) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form a single character.

In this case, gaming machine B9 is provided with a second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the contacted member, and the second transmission means is formed so that at least the component of the speed component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, so that the occurrence of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position contacts the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the contacted member and the displacement member can be suppressed from bouncing off each other, and the posture of the contacted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the decrease in at least the component of the speed of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member is configured to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so the speed of displacement of the abutted member can be increased until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. This reduces the time it takes for the abutted member to become integrated with the displacement member to form a single character for both the abutted member and the displacement member, preventing them from becoming drawn out. As a result, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the second transmission means can reduce at least the component of the speed of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member near the first position while the drive state of the second drive means is kept constant, so there is no need to perform complex control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the second drive means depending on the displacement position of the contacted member. This simplifies the control of the second drive means, reducing control costs and improving reliability.

The contact member, second drive means, and second transmission means in gaming machine B9 can be read as the displacement member, drive means, and transmission means in gaming machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposition member in gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the contact member.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
a first transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first member and the second member; and a first suppression means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first member and the second member, respectively; the first transmission means is capable of forming a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is applied to the drive means and a first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the first driving force applied in the first predetermined section is applied to the drive means; the second transmission means is capable of forming a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is applied to the drive means and a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force applied in the second predetermined section is applied to the drive means; and when the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and when the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a drive means, a first member and a second member that are displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a first transmission means and a second transmission means that transmit the drive force of the drive means to the first member and the second member, respectively (for example, JP 2015-53958 A). According to such a gaming machine, two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by one drive means, so the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in a configuration in which two members are displaced by one drive means, the drive forces for driving both members are overlapped, which increases the load on the drive means and reduces its durability. On the other hand, in a configuration in which two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one at a time), the load on the drive means is reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be created, hindering the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means is capable of forming a first predetermined section and a first suppression section that can reduce the load on the drive means compared to the first predetermined section, and the second transmission means is capable of forming a second predetermined section and a second suppression section that can reduce the load on the drive means compared to the second predetermined section. When the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and when the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section. In other words, when one is relatively heavily loaded, the other can be relatively lightly loaded, and when the other is relatively heavily loaded, the other can be relatively lightly loaded. Thus, the load on the drive means can be distributed, thereby reducing the load on the drive means and improving its durability.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one at a time), it is possible to create a state in which the first member and the second member are displaced together, which reduces the load on the drive means and improves the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes a cam member that is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and a cam friction member that rubs against the circumferential surface of the cam member to apply a displacement to the first member or the second member, and in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the amount of displacement of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member is reduced to the amount of displacement of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member in the first specified section or the second specified section, thereby reducing the load on the drive means.

In the gaming machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means comprises a crank member having a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body, and a crank friction member having a guide groove along which the pin portion of the crank member slides, the pin portion sliding along the guide groove to apply a displacement to the first member or the second member, and in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the amount of displacement of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member in the first specified section or the second specified section, thereby reducing the load on the drive means.

According to the gaming machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank friction member, so that the amount of displacement of the first member or the second member per unit rotation of the cam member and the crank member can be changed according to the outer shape of the cam member (the distance from the rotation center to the outer circumferential surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank friction member (the distance to the rotation center of the crank member). In other words, the load on the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even if the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to give a change to the speed of displacement of the first member and the second member. As a result, it is possible to create a change in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, thereby enhancing the presentation effect, while suppressing the load on the driving means in the first or second suppression section.

Gaming machine C4 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, characterized in that in the first specified section or the second specified section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has an upward displacement component in the direction of gravity, and in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first or second specified section, the displacement of the first or second member has an upward displacement component in the direction of gravity, and in the first or second suppression section, the displacement of the first or second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, so that by utilizing the weight of the first or second member, the load on the drive means in the first or second suppression section can be made smaller than the load on the drive means in the first or second specified section.

In addition, by using the weight of the first or second member to change the load on the drive means in this way, it is not necessary to change the speed of displacement of the first or second member when changing the load on the drive means, as is the case when using the interlocking of a cam member and a cam friction member or the interlocking of a crank member and a crank friction member, for example, and it is possible to change the load on the drive means while maintaining the speed of displacement of the first or second member constant.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means comprises a cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a cam friction member that rubs against the circumferential surface of the cam member to impart a displacement to the first member, and the second transmission means comprises a crank member having a main body that is rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body, and a crank friction member having a guide groove along which the pin portion of the crank member slides and imparts a displacement to the second member by the pin portion sliding along the guide groove, and the cam member and the crank member are formed integrally. C5 is characterized in that the cam member and the crank member are formed integrally.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C4, gaming machine C5 has a cam member and a crank member that are integrally formed, eliminating the need for space to place the cam member and the crank member separately, which allows for a more compact machine. Also, compared to when they are formed separately, deviations in the displacement of the first and second members can be suppressed, improving the accuracy of synchronization between the two members.

A gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, is characterized in that at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is capable of forming a non-transmission section in which the driving force of the drive means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, thereby maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and displacement of the first member or the second member begins after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is capable of forming a non-transmission section in which the driving force of the drive means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, thereby maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and displacement of the first member or the second member begins after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member in a stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when starting to displace the first or second member that is in a stopped state, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertia, slowing down the initial speed of the first or second member and making it difficult to displace it smoothly. However, by providing a non-transmission section in which the driving force of the driving means is not transmitted to the first or second member and the first or second member is maintained in a stopped state, the driving means can be made to spin freely in this non-transmission section to gain momentum, and after gaining momentum (i.e., after passing through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first or second member can be started. Therefore, the first or second member that is in a stopped state can be displaced smoothly.

Gaming machine C7 is characterized in that in gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means are capable of forming the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member begins after passing through each of the non-transmission sections.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can simultaneously form non-transmission sections, and the displacement of the first member and the second member begins after each of these non-transmission sections, so there is no need to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time the drive means can be made to rotate idly with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the drive means can be made stronger, and the first member or the second member, which is in a stopped state, can be smoothly displaced.

A gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in a state in which one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section in the gaming machine C6, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member has a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, so that when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state while the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be made stronger, and the first member or the second member in a stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Also, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced even while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state, it is possible to avoid both the first member and the second member being stopped, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In any of gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means comprises a crank member having a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body, and a crank friction member having a guide groove along which the pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to provide a displacement to the first member or the second member, the non-transmission section being the section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the center of rotation of the crank member, the pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member begins, and when the pin portion reaches a predetermined position in the guide groove, the sliding direction is changed and the pin portion slides toward the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section. C9.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C6 to C8, the non-transmission section is the section in which the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the center of rotation of the crank member, and when the pin portion of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member begins, and the pin portion reaches a predetermined position in the guide groove, changes its sliding direction, and slides toward the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that excessive load on the drive means can be avoided.

In other words, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction member into an arc shape concentric with the center of rotation of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmitting section can be formed). In a structure in which the pin portion of the crank member reciprocates in the guide groove, once the pin portion passes through the non-transmitting section and changes direction at a predetermined position, the shape of the non-transmitting section becomes a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member. Therefore, when the pin portion passes through the non-transmitting section after changing direction, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but the amount of displacement of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, causing an excessive load on the driving means. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmitting section, an excessive load on the driving means can be avoided.

<Concept of the invention using slide unit 2400 as an example>
Gaming machine D1 includes a base member, a slide member arranged on the base member so as to be slidably displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause it to slide, the gaming machine also includes a rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member, and a conversion means for converting the sliding displacement of the slide member relative to the base member into rotational motion of the rotating member, the conversion means being capable of creating a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a sliding member that is arranged on the base member so that it can be slidably displaced, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the sliding member to cause it to slide (for example, JP 2013-236802 A). Also known is a gaming machine in which a rotating member is arranged on the sliding member, and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member. With this gaming machine, the rotating member arranged on the sliding member can be rotated while the sliding member is slidably displaced (linearly moved), and an effect that combines linear and rotary motion can be produced.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the rotating member and the drive means for rotating the rotating member are disposed on the sliding member, which increases the weight of the sliding member as a whole, and creates a problem in that the load on the drive means for driving (displacing) the sliding member becomes large.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is equipped with a rotating member rotatably arranged on the sliding member, and a conversion means for converting the sliding displacement of the sliding member relative to the base member into rotational motion of the rotating member, so that the rotating member can be rotated in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member. In other words, since there is no need to arrange a drive means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the sliding member, the weight of the sliding member as a whole can be lightened accordingly, and the load on the drive means for driving (sliding) the sliding member can be reduced.

In this case, according to gaming machine D1, the conversion means can create a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member, so it is possible to create not only a form in which the rotating member rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also, for example, a form in which the sliding member is slidably displaced without the rotating member remaining non-rotating. This makes it possible to increase the number of combinations of motion (linear motion and rotational motion) of the sliding member and the rotating member, thereby enhancing the presentation effect accordingly.

In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means comprises a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member, a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member, and a release means formed to be able to release the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear and disposed on the base member, and is characterized in that the gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and a pinion gear formed to be meshable with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the sliding member, so that the sliding displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member by sliding the sliding member relative to the base member with the pinion gear meshed with the rack gear. In addition, the conversion means includes a release means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, so that a state can be formed in which the sliding displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, not only can the rotating member be rotated in association with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also, for example, a state in which the sliding member is slidably displaced without the rotating member being rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of the motions (linear motion and rotational motion) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be increased. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, the release means is disposed on the base member, and there is no need to dispose a means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and pinion gear on the slide member, so the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (displacing) the slide member can be reduced.

In gaming machine D2, the release means releases the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear by rotating at least the portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear. Gaming machine D3.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, the release means releases the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear by rotating at least the part of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby reducing the space required for such rotation (i.e., releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) and making it possible to achieve a smaller size.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, at least one of the teeth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction, so that when at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction, and the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, such meshing can be performed smoothly.

In gaming machine D2, the release means displaces at least the portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear. Gaming machine D5.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, the release means displaces at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear to release the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, so that after such release, when the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction and the rack gear and the pinion gear mesh, such meshing can be performed smoothly.

In gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the sliding member, and gaming machine D6 is characterized in that some of the teeth of the rack gear are missing.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the sliding member. With the pinion gear meshed with the rack gear, the sliding member is slid relative to the base member, and the sliding displacement can be converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member.

In this case, because the rack gear is missing a portion of its teeth, when the pinion gear passes through the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, a state can be created in which the sliding displacement is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member. In other words, with this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, but when the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, allowing the rotation of the rotating member to continue by its inertia force.

In this way, gaming machine D6 can produce not only the effect of gaming machine D1, but also the form in which the rotating member rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the form in which the rotating member rotates while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, thereby increasing the number of combinations of the movements (linear and rotational movements) of the sliding member and the rotating member. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, according to gaming machine D6, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released by removing some of the teeth from the rack gear, and since there is no need to provide a means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear on the sliding member, the weight of the sliding member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding) the sliding member can be reduced.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear adjacent to the missing portion are made to have higher rigidity than the other teeth.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D6, gaming machine D7 makes it possible to improve the durability of the teeth of the rack gear adjacent to the missing portion by making the teeth more rigid than the other teeth. In other words, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion are susceptible to damage due to collision with the teeth of the pinion gear that have passed through the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, but by making the teeth more rigid, it is possible to improve their durability.

One example of a method for increasing rigidity is to increase the width of the teeth. This method can increase rigidity without causing a deterioration in meshing with the pinion gear.

In gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member, a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the sliding member, and a one-way clutch disposed in the rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch is formed so that it can be switched between a state that allows the transmission of rotation and a state that blocks it. Gaming machine D8.

According to gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the sliding member. With the pinion gear meshed with the rack gear, the sliding member is slid relative to the base member, and the sliding displacement can be converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that it can be switched between a state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, and thus by changing the one-way clutch to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member can be created. That is, not only can the one-way clutch be set to a state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted and the rotating member rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also, for example, a state in which the one-way clutch is set to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked and the sliding member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating, or, by changing the one-way clutch from a state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked when the displacement of the sliding member is stopped, a state in which the rotation of the rotating member continues due to its inertia force can be created.

In this way, gaming machine D6 can produce not only the effect of gaming machine D1, but also a form in which the rotating member rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also a form in which the sliding member is slidably displaced while not rotating, or a form in which the rotating member rotates while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, thereby increasing the number of combinations of the movements (linear and rotational movements) of the sliding member and the rotating member. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it comprises a displacement member disposed displaceably on the slide member in the gaming machine D8, and a driving means disposed on the slide member and driving the displacement member, and the one-way clutch comprises an operator operated to change between a state permitting transmission of rotation and a state interrupting transmission of rotation, and the operator is operated by the displaced displacement member.

Gaming machine D9 has the same effects as gaming machine D8, but also includes a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the slide member, and a drive means that drives the displacement member and is arranged on the slide member. This makes it possible to combine the movement of the displacement member in addition to the movement of the slide member and the rotating member (linear movement and rotational movement), and to increase the number of combinations. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, the one-way clutch operator is operated by the displaced displacement member, so the displacement member can serve both to produce a performance through displacement and to operate the operator. In other words, there is no need to provide a separate means for operating the one-way clutch operator on the sliding member, so the weight of the sliding member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving (sliding and displacing) the sliding member can be reduced.

In the gaming machine D8, the one-way clutch is provided with an operator that is operated to change between a state in which the transmission of rotation is permitted and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, the base member is provided with an engagement portion that is located on the displacement trajectory of the operator when the sliding member is slidably displaced, and the operator is operated by the engagement portion when the sliding member is slidably displaced.

According to gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D8, the base member is provided with an engagement portion located on the displacement trajectory when the slide member is slid and displaced, and the operator is operated by the engagement portion when the slide member is slid and displaced. Therefore, there is no need to provide a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (i.e., operating the operator) on the slide member, and the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (sliding and displacing) the slide member can be reduced.

The position of the engagement part may be anywhere on the displacement trajectory of the above-mentioned operator. For example, it may be at one end or the other end of the displacement trajectory, or it may be midway along the displacement trajectory.

A gaming machine D10, comprising a second slide member disposed on the base member so as to be slidably displaceable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause it to slide, and characterized in that the position of the engagement portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member in accordance with the sliding displacement of the second slide member.

According to gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D10, the position of the engagement portion is formed to be changeable along the direction of the sliding displacement of the second sliding member as the second sliding member slides, so that it is possible to change the position at which the state of the one-way clutch is switched, i.e., the position at which the rotation of the rotating member is changed from a permitted state to a restricted state or from a restricted state to a permitted state. This makes it possible to change the position at which the rotation state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slidably displaced, or the position at which the rotating member rotates when the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, depending on, for example, the game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slidably displaced, which enhances the presentation effect. Since the second slide member serves both the role of producing the presentation through displacement and the role of changing the position of the engagement part, there is no need to provide a separate means for changing the position of the engagement part. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts, which in turn reduces product costs.

A gaming machine D12 is characterized in that it is provided with a second slide member arranged on the base member in a slidable manner in the gaming machine D10, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to cause it to slide, and the position of the engagement portion is formed so that it can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated in response to the sliding displacement of the second slide member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D10, gaming machine D12 is formed so that the position of the engagement part can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated in response to the sliding displacement of the second sliding member, so that when the sliding member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. In other words, it is possible to form a form in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the sliding member is being displaced from the starting end to the terminal end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the sliding member is being displaced from the starting end to the terminal end, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition to the sliding displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slidably displaced, which enhances the presentation effect. Since the second slide member serves both the role of producing the presentation through displacement and the role of changing the position of the engagement part, there is no need to provide a separate means for changing the position of the engagement part. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts, which in turn reduces product costs.

In gaming machines D11 and D12, the engagement portion may be disposed on the second slide member, or may be disposed on the base member. In the latter case, the engagement portion may be disposed displaceably on the base member, and the second slide member may displace the engagement portion directly or indirectly.

<Concept of the invention using slide unit 8400 as an example>
A gaming machine E1 comprising a base member and a shielding/opening means capable of forming a shielded state for shielding a specified area of the base member and an open state for opening the specified area, the shielding/opening means comprising a first member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, a second member having a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the first member, and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and with which the first side pinion gear is meshed, the shielded state being formed by the first member and the second member being linearly displaced to one side, and the open state being formed by the first member and the second member being linearly displaced to the other side opposite the one side.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member and a shielding/opening means that can form a shielding state in which a specified area of the base member is shielded and an open state in which the specified area is opened. For example, JP 2011-156058 A discloses a device in which multiple plate-shaped rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a specified area, and the plate faces of the multiple rotating plates are faced forward to shield the specified area (forming a shielding state), while each rotating plate is rotated 90 degrees to face the plate thickness portion (side surface) forward to provide a gap between the rotating plates, thereby opening the specified area (forming an open state).

However, with the conventional gaming machines described above, even when the open state is created, the rotating plates remain in a certain area rotated 90 degrees with the thick part (side surface) facing forward, which reduces the open area accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is made thinner, there is a limit to how thin it can be in order to ensure strength during rotation.

On the other hand, there is also a known gaming machine in which a single plate-shaped body having the same area as a predetermined area is displaceably arranged, and the predetermined area is shielded (a shielded state is formed) by displacing (placing) the plate-shaped body into the predetermined area, while the predetermined area is opened (an open state is formed) by retracting (displacing) the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area. With a gaming machine of this configuration, the predetermined area can be completely opened by retracting the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area.

However, in a gaming machine with such a configuration, because the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space of the same area as the predetermined area is required to accommodate the plate-shaped body that has been retracted from the predetermined area, resulting in a problem of larger size. In addition, because the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area or to place it back in the predetermined area from its retracted position, making it difficult to quickly switch between the covered state and the open state.

In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shielding/opening means includes a first member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, a second member having a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear meshes and arranged to be linearly displaceable on the first member, and a base side rack gear formed on the base member with which the first side pinion gear meshes; the first and second members are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielded state, and the first and second members are linearly displaced to the other side opposite the one side to form an open state.

In other words, the first and second members are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened up more widely. In addition, when the first and second members are retracted, the first and second members are overlapped, so that the space required to arrange the first and second members retracted from the predetermined area is reduced, making it possible to achieve a compact design.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced relative to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced relative to the base member at a speed faster than that of the first member, thereby shortening the time required to retract the first and second members from a specified area or to place them in the specified area from their retracted positions, thereby enabling rapid switching between the shielded state and the open state.

The shielded state in which a specified area is shielded does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the specified area is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and it is acceptable for there to be an open area in part of the specified area. Similarly, the open state in which a specified area is open does not need to be a state in which the entire surface of the specified area is completely open, and it is acceptable for there to be an area in part of the specified area that is shielded by a part of the first member or the second member. In other words, it is acceptable for the shielded state to have a relatively large shielded area compared to the open state, or in other words, it is acceptable for the open state to have a relatively large open area compared to the shielded state.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member comprises a first main body supported on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement part connected to the main body, and the second member comprises a second main body having the second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear meshes, supported on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement part connected to the second main body, and the first main body of the first member is supported on the base member outside the specified area. Gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body supported on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement part connected to the main body, and the second member includes a second main body having a second side rack gear with which the first side pinion gear is engaged and supported on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement part connected to the second main body. Since the first main body of the first member is supported on the base member outside the predetermined area, when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, only the trajectories of the first displacement part and the second displacement part can be overlapped on the predetermined area. In other words, the first main body and the second main body pass outside the predetermined area, and the trajectories can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined area. As a result, when an open state is formed, the first displacement part and the second displacement part are completely withdrawn from the predetermined area, and no part of the first member and the second member remains in the predetermined area, so that the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the shielding/opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first body of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear, and the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear, thereby displacing the first member linearly relative to the base member. In the gaming machine E3,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 has a shielding/opening means that includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and a first body portion of the first member that includes a first side rack gear that meshes with the drive gear, and the first side rack gear is driven by the drive gear to linearly displace the first member relative to the base member, so that the structure for linearly displacing the first member can be made compact. In other words, of the space required outside the specified area of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first and second displacement portions of the first and second members can be made smaller.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shielding/opening means is characterized in that it includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third member having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes and disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Gaming machine E4.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, the shielding/opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third member having a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear and arranged to be linearly displaceable on the second member. Therefore, when the second member is linearly displaced to one side in accordance with the linear displacement of the first member, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side in accordance with the displacement of the second member, and when the second member is linearly displaced to the other side in accordance with the linear displacement of the first member, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side in accordance with the displacement of the second member.

Thus, by linearly displacing the first, second and third members to one side, the first, second and third members can be positioned in a predetermined area to form a shielded state, and by linearly displacing the first, second and third members to the other side, the first, second and third members can be retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) to form an open state.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the space required to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member retracted from the predetermined area is reduced, and the size can be reduced.

In particular, with this structure in which a specific area is shielded by three members (first member, second member, and third member), the space required to dispose the third member retracted from the specific area can be made smaller than when the same specific area is shielded by two members. This is because the area can be made smaller by overlapping three parts of the specific area rather than by overlapping two parts of the area divided into two.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced relative to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced relative to the base member at a speed faster than the first member, and the third member is linearly displaced relative to the base member at a speed even faster than the second member. This reduces the time required to retract the first, second and third members from a specified area or to place them in the specified area from their retracted positions, allowing for faster switching between the shielded and open states.

In the gaming machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes, and is supported on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it includes a third main body portion and a third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes and is supported on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a third displacement part connected to the third body part. Therefore, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other, only the trajectories of the first displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part can be overlapped on the predetermined area. In other words, the first body part, the second body part, and the third body part pass outside the predetermined area, and the trajectories can be prevented from overlapping the predetermined area. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part are completely withdrawn from the predetermined area, and no part of the first member, the second member, or the third member remains in the predetermined area, so that the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical concept of gaming machine E4 or E5 (the relationship of the third member to the second member) may be expanded to create a gaming machine further equipped with a fourth member, a fifth member, ..., an nth member.

In other words, the shielding/opening means may be configured to include a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third member having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes and disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, so that the shielding/opening means may further include an nth side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the nth member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and an n+1th member having an nth side rack gear with which the nth side pinion gear meshes and disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member may be configured to have a third main body portion having a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear meshes and supported on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion, so that the n+1th member may be configured to have an n+1th main body portion having an n+1th side rack gear with which the nth side pinion gear meshes and supported on the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable, and an n+1th displacement portion connected to the n+1th main body portion (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the shielding/opening means is characterized in that it includes a third member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and a third relative displacement utilization means that linearly displaces the third member to one side or the other in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other. Gaming machine E6.

According to gaming machine E6, the shielding/opening means includes a third member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other. Therefore, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved.

That is, by linearly displacing the first, second and third members to one side, the first, second and third members can be positioned in a predetermined area to form a shielded state, and by linearly displacing the first, second and third members to the other side, the first, second and third members can be retracted from the predetermined area (displaced out of the predetermined area) to form an open state.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member, and the third member are overlapped, so that the space required to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member retracted from the predetermined area is reduced, and the size can be reduced.

In addition, with this structure in which a specific area is shielded by three members (first member, second member, and third member), the space required to dispose the third member retracted from the specific area can be made smaller than when the same specific area is shielded by two members. This is because the area is smaller when the specific area is divided into three parts and then overlapped, than when the area is divided into two parts and then overlapped.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced relative to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced relative to the base member at a speed that is faster than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member in response to the relative displacement between the first and second members, the linear displacement of the third member can be made faster than that of the first member at least by the amount that the speed of the second member is increased. This shortens the time required to retract the first, second and third members from a specified area or to place them in the specified area from the retracted position, thereby enabling faster switching between the shielded state and the open state.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the lifting unit 800 as examples>
A gaming machine F1 is provided with a first member and a second member which are formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, characterized in that the first member is positioned at the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is positioned at the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner which includes at least a rotational displacement.

Here, gaming machines are known that have a first member and a second member that are each formed so that they can be linearly displaced between a retracted position and an extended position (for example, JP 2007-252533 A). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member that are retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the extended position and brought close to or into contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) the two and allowing the player to visually recognize them as a single character.

In this case, in order to enhance the dramatic effect, it is effective to be able to form a larger character when the first and second members are displaced to the extended position. To achieve this, it is necessary to form the first and second members large.

However, in the conventional technology described above, the first member and the second member are each displaced to the protruding position by linear displacement, so if the first member and the second member are made larger, there is a risk that they will interfere with each other while being displaced to the protruding position. As a result, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed simultaneously, and each displacement must be staggered, which results in a long and drawn-out time until the character is formed, hindering the dramatic effect.

In contrast, with gaming machine F1, the first member is positioned at the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is positioned at the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner that includes at least rotational displacement, so that the first member and the second member can be prevented from interfering with each other during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed simultaneously, shortening the time until a character is formed and enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine F2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1, the second member is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, and is positioned in the extended position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the second member to be positioned in the extended position by being displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, so that a curved trajectory can be formed. This makes it easier to prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F2, it has a linear base member that is displaced linearly, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that it is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, a linear base member that is displaced in a straight line is provided, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that the second member is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement. This makes it easier to prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position, and increases the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position. In other words, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the extended position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation can be used as a displacement to avoid interference with the first member, rather than a movement to the extended position, and as a result, it is easier to prevent interference between them. In addition, this allows the posture of the second member at the retracted position to be specified independently of the posture at the extended position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a liquid crystal display device arranged in the play area in the gaming machine F2 or F3, the retracted position of the second member is set on one or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the play area, and the second member is arranged in a horizontal orientation in the extended position and in a vertical orientation in the retracted position.

Here, if the second member is formed in a horizontal shape and placed in a horizontal orientation in the extended position to form a character together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed and the presentation effect cannot be fully achieved. That is, since the play area is formed vertically while the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one and the other sides of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the play area are relatively narrow, making it difficult to secure space to arrange the components. Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the retracted position, it was necessary to form the second member small.

In this case, according to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontal orientation in the extended position and in a vertical orientation in the retracted position, so that the arrangement space for the members on one or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the second member can be made larger accordingly, and as a result, the character formed together with the first member in the extended position can be made larger.

Amusement machine F5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member, in the gaming machine F3.

Amusement machine F5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F3, is equipped with a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member, so that the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, thereby improving the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member. As a result, it is easier to prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position.

In addition, since there is no need to provide a separate drive means for rotating the second member, the second member can be made larger, and the character formed together with the first member in the protruding position can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure space to install a member, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the play area, the second member can be made large while a retraction position for the second member is set in such an area.

A gaming machine F6 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, and is provided with a third member that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the third member is positioned at a different position in the front-to-rear direction from the first and second members in the extended position.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a third member is provided that is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so that a larger character can be formed together with the first and second members, and the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, the third member is disposed at a different front-to-rear position from the first and second members at the extended position, so that the third member does not come into contact with the first and second members at the extended position. That is, when the members are to come into contact with each other at the extended position, or when there is a possibility of them coming into contact, it is necessary to set the displacement speed taking into consideration damage caused by the impact at the time of contact, but since the third member does not come into contact with the first and second members, the displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the earlier first and second members at the extended position, and the presentation effect when forming a character can be enhanced.

Gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the third member in gaming machine F6 has a protruding portion formed to protrude toward the side that is in the same front-to-rear position as the first and second members.

Here, if the front-to-rear positions of the first and second members and the third member are different, the front-to-rear dimensions of the gaming machine will increase in size accordingly. If the front-to-rear dimensions of the first and second members and the third member are each made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress such front-to-rear dimensions, it will become difficult to ensure rigidity.

In contrast, according to gaming machine F7, the third member has a protruding portion formed to protrude toward the side that is at the same front-to-rear position as the first and second members, so that the front-to-rear dimension of the whole (the sum of the first and second members and the third member) can be suppressed, making the gaming machine smaller in the front-to-rear direction, while the front-to-rear dimension of the third member can be increased to ensure its rigidity.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized by having an abutment member that is disposed on the first member and against which a portion of the second member abuts in the extended position.

In gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member is provided with an abutment member against which a part of the second member abuts in the extended position, so that the displacement of the second member can be stopped by abutting against the abutment member.

The abutment member may be formed at a position where the second member will constantly abut when the first member and the second member are placed in the extended position, or may be formed at a position where the second member will abut when the first member and the second member are placed in the extended position and the two come closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

A gaming machine F9 is characterized in that in the gaming machine F8, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction approaching and moving away from the first member, and the first member is positioned in a protruding position with the contact member spaced away from the first member.

According to gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the first member is disposed in the extended position with the contact member spaced away from the first member, enabling reliable contact with the second member in the extended position. Also, since the contact member is displaced in a direction away from the first member in the extended position, the character formed by the first and second members can be made larger.

A gaming machine F10, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F9, after the first member is placed in the extended position, the contact member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member.

According to gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of gaming machine F9, after the first member is placed in the extended position, the abutted member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member, so that a space for the second member to be displaced can be formed. In other words, when the first member is placed in the extended position, the abutted member is separated from the first member and plays a role in receiving the displacement of the second member, and thereafter, the abutted member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member, and the space formed by this displacement can be used as a displacement space for the second member, and the displacement of the second member can enhance the presentation effect.

In gaming machine F8, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction approaching and moving away from the first member, and the first member is characterized in that the contact member is in a state in which it is in proximity to the first member at least in the retracted position. Gaming machine F11.

According to gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction toward and away from the first member, and the abutted member is brought into close proximity to the first member at least in the retracted position of the first member, so that the arrangement space of the first member in the retracted position can be reduced. Also, when the abutted member is displaced in a direction away from the first member in the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger accordingly.

A gaming machine F12 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F11, the abutted member is maintained in a state close to the first member until the first member is positioned in the extended position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F11, gaming machine F12 maintains the abutted member in close proximity to the first member until the first member is positioned in the extended position, preventing the abutted member from interfering with the second member during displacement to the extended position. This shortens the time it takes for a character to be formed, enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine F13 is any one of gaming machines F9 to F12, and is characterized in that it has two pairs of the second member and the abutted member, and is configured so that when the second member abuts against the abutted member in one pair, the abutted member in the other pair is displaced toward the second member upon the abutment.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F9 to F12, two sets of a second member and an abutted member are provided, and when the second member abuts against the abutted member in one set, the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the abutment. For example, when the second member in one set is displaced beyond a reference position and abuts against the abutted member, the abutted member in the other set can be displaced toward the second member due to the abutment. Therefore, by the abutted member abutting against the second member in the other set, the impact caused by the abutment of the second member against the abutted member in one set can be received not only by the first member but also by the second member in the other set. This allows the kinetic energy to be dispersed, making it easier to stop the displacement of the second member in one set and suppressing damage to each member.

Examples of structures in which the abutted member in one set is displaced toward the second member when the abutment occurs in the other set include a structure in which the displacement of the abutted member in one set is transmitted to the abutted member in the other set, which displaces the abutted member in the other set toward the second member when the displacement occurs; a structure in which the displacement of the abutted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, which displaces the first member when the displacement occurs, which displaces the abutted member in the other set integrally with the first member toward the second member; and structures that combine these.

A gaming machine F14 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F13, and is characterized by having a periodic displacement member that is abutted against the first member and the second member at the extended position and is formed to allow periodic displacement.

Gaming machine F14 has the same effects as any of gaming machines F1 to F13, but also includes a periodic displacement member that is formed to be able to come into contact with the first and second members at the extended position. The periodic displacement member is formed to be able to displace periodically, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member can be used to periodically displace the first and second members. In other words, the character formed by the first and second members and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, which can enhance the presentation effect. In addition, in this case, the structure shares the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member by abutting against each other, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first and second members separately. This can reduce product costs accordingly.

In addition, the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other in the extended position, or may be spaced apart (non-contacting).

Amusement machine F15 is characterized in that in gaming machine F14, the periodically displacing member is positioned in a position in the forward-backward direction in the extended position that is forward of the first member and the second member.

In gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F14, the periodic displacement member is positioned in a position where its longitudinal position in the extended position is further forward than the first and second members, so that the member (periodic displacement member) disposed closer to the player can be periodically displaced (vibrated). In other words, the character is vibrated by using the member closer to the player, which is easier for the player to see, as the vibration source, so that an effect can be created that easily conveys the impact of the vibration to the player.

Amusement machine F16 is the same as gaming machine F14 or F15, but is characterized in that in the extended position, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F14 and F15, since the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the extended position, the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Furthermore, the first member and the second member can be displaced (vibrated) periodically in different manners without being related to each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), they are vibrated in different manners even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member. Therefore, the part formed by the first member and the part formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide multiple different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 700, and the lower combined unit 800 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein when each displacement means of the first group is positioned at the extended position, a first presentation pattern is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and when each displacement means of the second group is positioned at the extended position, a second presentation pattern is formed by each displacement means of the second group, characterized in that the gaming machine G1 comprises a dual purpose means that serves both as one displacement means of the first group and as one displacement means of the second group.

Here, a gaming machine is known that has a first group consisting of multiple displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and a second group consisting of multiple displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position (for example, JP 2014-176578 A).

According to this gaming machine, when the displacement means of the first group are placed in the extending position, the displacement means of the first group are associated (integrated) and are recognized by the player as one character (first presentation mode), while when the displacement means of the second group are placed in the extending position, the displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated) and are recognized by the player as different characters (second presentation mode). That is, in the first gaming state, the displacement means of the second group are retreated to the retreat position while the displacement means of the first group are placed in the extending position, thereby forming a first character in the gaming area by the displacement means of the first group, and in the second gaming state, the displacement means of the first group are retreated to the retreat position while the displacement means of the second group are placed in the extending position, thereby forming a second character in the gaming area by the displacement means of the second group.

In this case, in order to enhance the dramatic effect, it is effective to be able to create larger characters. To achieve this, each of the displacement means of the first group and each of the displacement means of the second group must be formed large.

However, as with the conventional technology described above, when multiple characters (performance modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required to form the multiple characters also increases accordingly, and since the area (space) for storing each displacement means is limited, it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means, which is a problem. As a result, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (performance mode).

In contrast, gaming machine G1 is provided with a shared means that serves both one displacement means of the first group and one displacement means of the second group, so the total number of displacement means required to form multiple (first and second) presentation modes can be reduced accordingly, and each displacement means can be made larger. As a result, each presentation mode (character) can be made larger.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the extension position of the dual-purpose means in forming the first presentation mode and the extension position in forming the second presentation mode are different positions.

Here, if the shared means is placed in the same projecting position when the first presentation mode is formed and when the second presentation mode is formed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a common displacement means (shared means) is being used for the first and second presentation modes, which reduces interest. Also, if it is necessary to form the first and second presentation modes using shared means placed in the same position (projecting position), the degree of freedom is accordingly reduced, making it difficult to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

In contrast, with gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, the extension position where the dual-purpose means is placed when forming the first presentation mode and the extension position where it is placed when forming the second presentation mode are different positions, making it difficult for players to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used for both the first and second presentation modes, preventing loss of interest. Also, since the dual-purpose means can be placed in different positions (extension positions) for the first and second presentation modes, the degree of freedom can be increased, making it easier to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

A gaming machine G3, which is characterized in that the dual-purpose means in the gaming machine G1 or G2 has a different posture when forming the first presentation mode and when forming the second presentation mode.

Here, if the shared means is in the same position when the first presentation mode is formed and when the second presentation mode is formed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a common displacement means (shared means) is being used for the first and second presentation modes, which reduces interest. Also, if it is necessary to use a shared means in the same position to form the first and second presentation modes, the degree of freedom is accordingly reduced, making it difficult to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

In contrast, with gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, the dual-purpose means has a different posture when forming the first presentation mode and when forming the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used for both the first and second presentation modes, preventing loss of interest. Also, since the dual-purpose means can be in different postures for the first and second presentation modes, the degree of freedom can be increased, making it easier to create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first and second presentation modes.

A gaming machine G4, in which the dual-purpose means, when placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode in the gaming machine G2 or G3, is positioned in a different front-to-rear direction relative to at least one displacement means of the first group and overlaps at least partially when viewed from the front.

Here, the combined means is in different extension positions and/or different postures when the first performance mode is formed and when the second performance mode is formed, and multiple stop states must be formed, which complicates the control or structure and makes it easier for the stop states (installation positions and/or postures) to vary. In this case, in a structure in which the combined means abuts against the one displacement means in the extension position (where the front-to-rear positions are the same in at least a portion), if the installation position or posture of the combined means does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between it and the one displacement means, while if the installation position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, it pushes out the one displacement means, causing a positional shift. This makes it difficult to maintain a relationship with the one displacement means.

In contrast, according to gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines G2 and G3, when the combined means is placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode, the combined means has a different front-to-rear position with respect to at least one of the displacement means in the first group and at least a portion of the combined means overlaps when viewed from the front, making it easier to maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means even if there is variation in its stopped state (extended position and/or posture). In other words, by partially overlapping when viewed from the front, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the one displacement means even if the displacement of the combined means is insufficient, and by having different front-to-rear positions, it is possible to prevent the one displacement means from being pushed out and causing a positional shift even if the displacement of the combined means is excessive. As a result, it is easier to maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means.

A gaming machine G5, in which the one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are positioned in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode in the gaming machine G4.

According to gaming machine G5, in gaming machine G4, when one displacement means and other displacement means of the first group are placed in the protruding position when forming the first performance mode, they come into contact with each other, so that the one displacement means and other displacement means are associated (integrated) with each other, making it easier for the player to recognize the whole as a specified character.

In this case, as described above, the combined means is prone to variation in its stopped state (extended position and/or posture), and in a structure in which the combined means abuts against the one displacement means at the extended position when forming the first performance mode (at least a portion of the front-to-rear direction positions coincide), if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the combined means and the one displacement means, and association (integration) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, the one displacement means is pushed out, causing a positional shift, and association (integration) is hindered. In other words, when the one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group abut against each other at the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (where the front-to-rear direction positions are different and where a portion of the displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front) is particularly effective.

A gaming machine G6, in which the dual-purpose means, when placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode, is positioned forward in the front-to-rear direction from the one displacement means and the other displacement means, and overlaps the portions where the one displacement means and the other displacement means abut against each other in a front view.

According to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G5, when the combined means is placed in the protruding position when forming the first presentation mode, it is positioned forward in the front-to-rear direction from the first displacement means and the other displacement means, and overlaps in a front view with respect to the portions where the first displacement means and the other displacement means abut against each other. Therefore, for example, if a deviation occurs in the target position of the first displacement means and/or the other displacement means and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the combined means can block such gap, making it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the first displacement means and the other displacement means from being impaired, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

A gaming machine G7, which is any one of gaming machines G2 to G6, is provided with a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that it is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, the extension position of the dual-purpose means that is arranged when forming the first presentation mode and the extension position of the dual-purpose means that is arranged when forming the second presentation mode are different positions, and the attitude of the dual-purpose means when forming the first presentation mode and the attitude of the dual-purpose means when forming the second presentation mode are different attitudes.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G2 to G6, gaming machine G7 is equipped with a linear base member that is displaced in a straight line, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, so that it is displaced in a manner that combines rotational and linear displacement, thereby increasing the degree of freedom of the protruding position and attitude when forming the first or second presentation mode.

A gaming machine G8, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine G7, the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G7, the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means in the first group is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means, so that the dual-purpose means can be positioned closer to the front, making it easier for the player to see, while the longitudinal positions of the one displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be brought closer together. Thus, by associating (integrating) the one displacement means and the dual-purpose means, it is easier for the player to recognize the whole as a specified character.

A gaming machine G9, characterized in that, in a gaming machine G8, when one of the displacement means of the first group and the dual-purpose means are arranged in a retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged in a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view.

According to gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect of gaming machine G8, when one of the displacement means and the combined means of the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the one displacement means and the straight base member are arranged in a position where they overlap in a front view, so that when the one displacement means and the straight base member (combined means) are displaced to the extended position to form the first presentation mode, the one displacement means can be prevented from abutting against the side of the straight base member.

A gaming machine G9, in which, when the other displacement means and the combined means of the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged in a position that does not overlap the linear base member in a front view, and when the other displacement means and the combined means are displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means are arranged in a position that overlaps the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is configured such that at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps in a front view has a smaller front-to-rear dimension than the area where the one displacement means overlaps in a front view.

According to gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G9, when the other displacement means and the combined means of the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged in a position where they do not overlap with the straight base member in a front view, and when the other displacement means and the combined means are displaced toward the protruding position, the other displacement means are arranged in a position where they overlap with the straight base member in a front view, and the straight base member has a smaller front-to-rear dimension in at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps in a front view than the area where the first displacement means overlaps in a front view, so that when the other displacement means and the straight base member (combined means) are displaced to the protruding position to form the first performance mode, the other displacement means can be prevented from abutting against the side of the straight base member.

A gaming machine G10, comprising a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose means, the conversion mechanism being disposed in an area where one of the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in a front view when in a retracted position.

Amusement machine G11, in addition to the effects of gaming machine G10, is equipped with a drive means that applies a drive force to the linear base member to cause linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means, so that the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the combined means can be synchronized, improving the relative positional accuracy (attitude) of the combined means with respect to the linear base member. Therefore, by associating (integrating) the displacement means and the combined means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the whole as a specified character.

In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a separate drive means for rotating the dual-purpose means, the dual-purpose means can be made larger, and the character formed in the protruding position can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure space to install components, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the play area, the dual-purpose means can be made large while setting a retraction position for the dual-purpose means material in such an area.

In this case, the conversion mechanism is disposed in an area of the linear base member that overlaps with one of the displacement means in the retracted position when viewed from the front, and therefore the front-to-rear dimension of the other area of the linear base member (the area where the conversion mechanism is not disposed) can be reduced accordingly. This makes it possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side of the linear base member when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the extended position.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
A gaming machine H1 characterized by having a presentation mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of presentation modes, a display means capable of displaying the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, a stage information display means for displaying a plurality of stages of stage information on the display means, a stage information varying means for varying the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, a specific presentation execution means for executing a specific presentation when the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information by the stage information varying means, and a switching means for switching the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, multiple presentation modes can be set as the presentation style displayed on the display device, and when a specific presentation mode is set, a predetermined score is awarded to the player, and a presentation based on the accumulated score is executed (for example, JP 2007-215579 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, points are awarded only in a specific presentation mode, and when switching to another presentation mode, all accumulated points acquired are discarded, which reduces the player's motivation to earn points and causes the player to quickly become bored with the game. In addition, in order to reliably execute a presentation using the awarded points, it is necessary to fix the presentation mode to a specific presentation mode from the time the points are awarded until the presentation based on those points is executed, which causes the presentation to become monotonous.

In contrast to this, in gaming machine H1, one of a plurality of presentation modes is set by the presentation mode setting means, and the set presentation mode is displayed on the display means. On the display means, stage information display means displays a plurality of stages of stage information that can be changed by the stage information changing means, and when the stage information is changed to a predetermined stage information, a specific presentation is executed by the specific presentation execution means. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to a display mode corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

As a result, even if a different presentation mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the currently set presentation mode, making it possible to continue to execute presentations using the stage information even if the presentation mode changes. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the gaming machine H1 has a stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means displays the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means when the display mode is switched by the switching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 provides the following effects. Stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored in the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, stage information is displayed by the stage information display means based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

This makes it possible to display stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means, even if the display mode is switched by the switching means. Therefore, even if a different presentation mode is set, it is possible to continuously execute presentations using the stage information, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Note that a display mode corresponding to the presentation mode may be, for example, a display mode in which identification information that can identify the score to be awarded is displayed using numbers, letters, or symbols used in the currently set presentation mode or characters that appear in that presentation mode. Also, a display mode in which an image associated with the identification information that can identify the score to be awarded is displayed using an image that corresponds to a motif (e.g., the sea or a mountain) used in the currently set presentation mode. In this way, by displaying the stage information in a display mode that corresponds to the currently set presentation mode, even if the presentation mode changes while a presentation that displays the stage information is being executed, the stage information can be displayed without creating a sense of incongruity in relation to the changed presentation mode.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that in gaming machine H2, the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of gaming machine H2, at least the predetermined stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that a different presentation mode is set when the predetermined stage information is displayed, and even if the display mode is switched, the predetermined stage information can be displayed in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand even if the presentation mode is switched while a presentation in which stage information is displayed is being executed.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that in gaming machine H2 or H3, the stage information storage means stores approximate stage information that is at least similar to the specified stage information.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines H2 or H3, approximate stage information that is at least approximate to the specified stage information is stored by the stage information storage means, so that even if a different presentation mode is set when the approximate stage information is displayed and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the display mode after the switch. Therefore, when the presentation mode is switched while approximate stage information indicating that the specified stage information will soon be displayed is displayed, there is an effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play from being caused by stage information that is not approximate to the specified stage information being displayed.

Here, as the approximate stage information in gaming machine H4, for example, in the case where an indicator capable of displaying stage information in seven stages is used, stage information indicating the seventh stage (MAX) may be set as the predetermined stage information, and stage information indicating the sixth stage may be set as the approximate stage information.

Note that multiple pieces of this approximate stage information may be set according to the degree of approximation to the specified stage information. This allows different presentation modes to be set, and makes it possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player when the display mode is switched.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines H1 to H4, the presentation mode setting means has a specific presentation mode setting means that sets the specific presentation mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means.

Gaming machine H5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means.

This makes it possible to switch the presentation mode depending on the displayed stage information, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of presentations that display stage information.

Here, if the gaming machine has the configuration of gaming machine H3, it is advisable to set the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information differently. By doing so, the presentation mode changes when the predetermined stage information is not displayed, which has the effect of further enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation that displays the stage information.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine has the configuration of H4, it is advisable to set the approximate stage information and the specific stage information differently. By doing so, the presentation mode changes when the approximate stage information is not being displayed, which has the effect of further enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation that displays the stage information.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that in gaming machine H5, the stage information display means displays the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means.

According to gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine H5, when a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means, the stage information display means displays predetermined stage information as stage information.

This allows a specific presentation mode to be set when specific stage information is displayed, and allows the specified stage information to be displayed when the display mode is switched. This has the effect of making the player look forward to the display mode being switched in a presentation in which stage information is displayed, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Here, if the gaming machine has the configuration of gaming machine H3, it is advisable to set the predetermined stage information differently from the specific stage information. In this way, the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the presentation mode when the predetermined stage information is not displayed, which has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation and further enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine has the configuration of H4, it is advisable to set the approximate stage information and the specific stage information differently. In this way, when neither the specified stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, when the expectation of a jackpot is low in the presentation in which the stage information is displayed, the presentation mode is switched to display the specified stage information, which has the effect of providing the player with a surprising presentation and further enhancing the presentation effect.

Among any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, gaming machine H7 is characterized by having a variable amount determination means for determining the amount of variation of the stage information varied by the stage information varying means, and a variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means based on the variable amount determined by the variable amount determination means.

Gaming machine H7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines H1 to H6. That is, the variable amount of the stage information varied by the stage information varying means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and variable information corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means is displayed by the variable information display means based on the determined variable amount.

This allows the player to easily grasp the amount by which the stage information is changed by grasping the variable information. This has the effect of enabling the execution of effects that are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, since the amount by which the stage information is changed is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set presentation mode, there is an effect that the variable information can be displayed without giving the player a sense of incongruity even if the presentation mode is switched.

The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information that specifically indicates the variable amount or information that suggests the variable amount (for example, information such as a large variable amount or a small variable amount), and further, if multiple stage information is displayed, information indicating the stage information that is the subject of the variation among the multiple stage information may be used.

The timing for displaying the variable information may be set appropriately based on the variable information to be displayed. For example, if information specifically indicating a variable amount is displayed as variable information, the variable information may be displayed after the stage information has been changed by the stage information changing means. This allows the player to focus on the manner in which the stage information changes, enhancing the presentation effect.

On the other hand, if information suggesting a variable amount or information showing the stage information to be varied is displayed as variable information, it is advisable to display the variable information before the stage information is varied by the stage information varying means. This allows the viewer to focus on how the stage information is specifically varied after understanding the displayed variable information, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

A gaming machine H8 is characterized in that it has a variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display timing setting means for setting the display timing at which the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means is displayed.

Gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine H7. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is differentiated into multiple small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing for displaying the small variable information is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display the variable information for varying the stage information multiple times, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Here, as a method of differentiating the variable information using the variable information differentiating means, if the variable information displays a specific numerical value (such as a score), the numerical value (score) may be divided into multiple numerical values (sub-scores), and if the variable information displays a suggestion of the variable content of the stage information (such as the degree of variation or the variable target), the suggestion may be divided to display the suggested content in stages. This allows the player to continue to focus on the presentation in which the stage information is varied, making it possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, when displaying variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, it is advisable to display variable information that is advantageous to the player (variable information with a high probability of changing stage information to a predetermined stage information) later. This configuration has the effect of enabling the performance to be executed while keeping the player's sense of expectation until the very end.

Gaming machine H9 is characterized in that, among gaming machines H1 to H8, the presentation mode setting means has a setting restriction means that restricts the setting of a specific presentation mode according to the presentation mode that has been set.

According to gaming machine H9, the setting restriction means restricts the setting of a specific presentation mode according to the set presentation mode, so that in a configuration in which a variety of presentations can be executed by using multiple presentation modes, it is possible to easily restrict the switching of the specific presentation mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the stage information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to prevent the setting of a presentation mode that does not easily convey to the player that the presentation displaying the stage information is being executed continuously. This has the effect of providing a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Among gaming machines H1 to H9, the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on a plurality of setting conditions when any of the plurality of setting conditions is established, and has a priority setting means for setting priorities for the plurality of setting conditions, and when multiple of the plurality of setting conditions are established, the presentation mode is set based on the setting condition with the highest priority set by the priority setting means. Among gaming machines H10, the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on a plurality of setting conditions when any of the plurality of setting conditions is established, and has a priority setting means for setting priorities for the plurality of setting conditions.

Gaming machine H10 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines H1 to H9. That is, when any of the multiple setting conditions is met, the presentation mode is set based on the setting conditions. Priorities are then set for the multiple setting conditions by a priority setting means, and when multiple setting conditions are met, the presentation mode is set based on the setting condition with the highest priority set by the priority setting means.

This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect because the presentation mode is set based on the setting conditions with the highest priority.

<Feature J Group> (Display Position Setting)
Gaming machine J1 is provided with a display means having a display area, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period of time, and a second effect execution means for executing a predetermined second effect on the display means while the first effect execution means is being executed, characterized in that the second effect execution means executes the second effect in the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are some that execute an effect in which points indicating a predetermined value are displayed on a display device, and when the points reach a predetermined number, a special bonus effect is awarded (for example, JP 2012-179176 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, a dedicated area on the display device is provided for displaying points, which causes the problem of the manner in which points are displayed being monotonous. In addition, if points are displayed without a dedicated area on the display device, the display of another effect being executed on the display device will overlap with the display of points, reducing the effect of the effect.

In contrast, in gaming machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed for a predetermined period of time by a first effect execution means on a display means having a display area, and while the first effect execution means is executing, a predetermined second effect is executed by a second effect execution means on the display area of the display means that corresponds to the display mode of the first effect.

This has the effect of making it possible to display the position at which the second effect is displayed in accordance with the first effect being executed, thereby preventing the first and second effects from being displayed overlapping each other.

In the gaming machine J1, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means, and the gaming machine J2 is characterized in having an area varying means that varies the allowable area based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

Gaming machine J2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine J1. That is, a second effect is executed in a predetermined allowable area of the display area of the display means by a second effect execution means. Then, the allowable area is varied by an area varying means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

This makes it possible to vary the allowable area in which the second performance is executed based on the display area in which the first performance is displayed. This has the effect of enhancing the performance effect, as it becomes possible to execute the second performance in an area related to the first performance.

A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it has a first effect discrimination means for discriminating a subject display area in which a subject image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect execution means, and the area variation means varies the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed based on the display area discriminated as the subject display area by the first effect discrimination means.

Gaming machine J3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine J2. That is, the first effect execution means determines the subject display area in which the subject image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area. Then, the area varying means varies the allowable area in which the second effect can be executed based on the display area determined to be the subject display area by the first effect discrimination means.

This makes it possible to vary the allowable area for executing the second performance based on the display area in which the main image in the first performance is displayed. This has the effect of further enhancing the performance effect, as it becomes possible to execute the second performance in an area related to the first performance.

In gaming machine J3, the area varying means sets the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect discrimination means as a prohibited area in which it is difficult to execute the second effect, and sets the area other than the main display area as the permitted area. Gaming machine J4.

Gaming machine J4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine J3. That is, the display area determined to be the main display area by the first effect determination means is made into a prohibited area in which it is difficult to execute the second effect by the area variation means. Then, the area outside the main display area is made into an allowed area by the area variation means.

This has the effect of preventing the display area in which the main image of the first performance is displayed from overlapping with the display area in which the second performance is executed, which would result in a reduction in the performance effect.

In gaming machine J3, the first effect discrimination means has a specific subject display area discrimination means for discriminating a specific subject display area in which the main image will no longer be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from among the display areas discriminated as the main display area, and the area variable means sets the display area discriminated as the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area discrimination means as the allowable area. Gaming machine J5.

Gaming machine J5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine J3. That is, among the display areas determined to be the subject display area, a specific subject display area in which the subject image will no longer be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed is determined by the specific subject display area determination means, and the display area determined to be the specific subject display area is made an allowable area by the area variation means.

This makes it possible to set the display area after a certain period of time has elapsed as the allowable area for executing the second performance. This allows for more flexibility in the timing for executing the second performance, which has the effect of providing the player with a surprising performance and enhancing the performance effect.

A gaming machine J6, which is any one of gaming machines J2 to J5, has a value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value as the second performance, and second value information having a higher value than the first value information, and an allowable area setting means capable of setting the allowable area to a first allowable area and a second allowable area different from the first allowable area, and is characterized in that the second performance execution means sets the first value information to be displayed in the first allowable area and the second value information to be displayed in the second allowable area.

Gaming machine J6 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines J2 to J5. That is, as the second performance, first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set by the value information setting means, and the allowable range setting means sets the allowable range to a first allowable range and a second allowable range different from the first allowable range. Then, the second performance execution means is set to display the first value information in the first allowable range and the second value information in the second allowable range.

This allows the value information to be displayed in multiple small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in multiple places in the display area, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, because it allows value information indicating different values to be displayed in different small areas, for example, even when the same value is displayed in total, multiple display methods can be set, such as displaying the first value information multiple times in the first allowable area and displaying the second value information only once in the second allowable area. Therefore, the player will look at the value information displayed on the display means while paying attention to the place and number of times the value information is displayed, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

A gaming machine J8 is characterized in that it has a display image creation means for creating a display image to be displayed on the display means in any one of gaming machines J1 to J7, and the display image creation means creates the display image by synthesizing at least a first image layer on which the first effect is displayed and a second image layer on which the second effect is displayed, and executes a first synthesis process for overlaying the first image layer on the front side of the second layer, and a second synthesis process for making transparent the display area of the first image layer that corresponds to the display area in which the second effect is executed.

Gaming machine J8 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any one of gaming machines J1 to J7. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creation means by compositing at least a first image layer on which the first performance is displayed and a second image layer on which the second performance is displayed. Then, the first compositing process overlays the first image layer on the front side of the second image layer, and the second compositing process makes the display area of the first image layer corresponding to the display area in which the second performance is executed transparent.

This has the effect of making it easy to simultaneously display the first and second effects on the display means, thereby reducing the control load.

A gaming machine J8 is characterized in that the second image layer is such that the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

Gaming machine J9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine J8. That is, the display area of the second image layer is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second performance is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

Therefore, there is no need to change the display content of the second image layer to match the area in which the second effect is displayed, and only the second effect displayed in the display area of the second image layer that corresponds to the transparent display area of the first image layer is visible to the player. This has the effect of easily displaying the first and second effects simultaneously on the display means, thereby reducing the control load.

<Feature K group> (Change the performance navigation midway)
a game machine including a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a performance execution means for executing a performance based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a display means for displaying a performance mode based on the performance executed by the performance execution means, the game machine K1 having: a period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of the performance executed by the performance execution means; a progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating the period that has elapsed since the start of the specific period; a specific performance mode information display means for displaying specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode to be granted to a player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specified condition; and a performance mode changing means for changing the specific performance mode information based on the progress information displayed by the progress information display means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a time gauge that displays the progress of the presentation to the player (for example, JP 2015-6280 A). In such conventional gaming machines, the player plays the game by predicting the lottery results while watching the progress of the progress meter, but there is a problem that the player's motivation to enjoy the game decreases when watching the progress meter because the fluctuation of the meter ends halfway through, or the presentation continues even after the meter reaches the end.

In contrast, in gaming machine K1, a discrimination is made by a discrimination means based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus is given to the player by a bonus granting means when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a performance based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed by a performance execution means, and a performance mode based on the performance is displayed on a display means. Then, specific period information indicating a specific period of the performance executed by the performance execution means is displayed by a period information display means, and progress information indicating the elapsed period since the start of the specific period is displayed by a progress information display means. Furthermore, specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode to be granted to the player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by a specific performance mode information display means, and the specific performance mode information is changed by a performance mode changing means based on the progress information displayed by the progress information display means.

This makes it possible to vary specific presentation mode information, which indicates the content of a specific presentation mode that is applied when the elapsed information, which indicates the elapsed time since the start of a specific period, satisfies a predetermined condition, based on the elapsed information. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play the game due to seeing the elapsed information, and increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the specific performance mode information display means displays, as the specific performance mode information, a specific performance mode indicating the specific performance mode and a plurality of pseudo specific performance modes different from the specific performance mode, and the performance mode changing means changes the pseudo specific performance mode of the specific performance mode information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 has the following effects. That is, the specific performance mode display means displays, as the specific performance mode information, a specific performance mode indicating the specific performance mode and a plurality of pseudo specific performance modes different from the specific performance mode, and the pseudo specific performance modes among the specific performance mode information are changed by the performance mode changing means.

As a result, the pseudo-specific presentation mode that is displayed in a simulated manner can be changed based on the progress information, making it possible to have the player pay attention to the displayed content based on the progress information. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play the game due to seeing the progress information, and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine K3, which is characterized in that it has an expectation level display means capable of displaying the expectation level that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition, and the presentation mode variable means is capable of varying the specific presentation mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

Gaming machine K3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, the expectation level where the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result can be displayed by the expectation level display means when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition, and the specific presentation mode information can be changed by the presentation mode changing means when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

This makes it possible to simultaneously display the expectation level and change the specific presentation mode information. This has the effect of preventing players from losing their enthusiasm to play the game due to seeing the progress information, and increasing their interest in the game.

Gaming machine K4 is characterized in that it has a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined presentation mode is given as the specific presentation mode in any of gaming machines K1 to K3.

According to gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines K1 to K3, when a specific presentation mode is given as a specific presentation mode, the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, so it is possible to set the specific period according to the presentation. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play the game due to looking at the progress information, and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine K5 is characterized in that it has an extended period information display means for displaying the extended period extended by the specific period extension means using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K4, gaming machine K5 has the effect of reducing the capacity of the display data for displaying the extended period, since the extended period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extended period information display means using at least a portion of the specific period information.

A gaming machine K6, which is one of the gaming machines K4 and K5, is characterized by having an extended progress information display means that displays progress information indicating the elapsed period since the extension period extended by the specific period extension means began, using at least a part of the progress information displayed by the progress information display means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K4 and K5, gaming machine K6 has the effect of reducing the capacity of the display data for displaying the elapsed information of the extended period, since the period elapsed since the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extended elapsed information display means using at least a part of the elapsed information.

Gaming machine K7 is any one of gaming machines K4 to K6, characterized in that it has an expectation display conversion means capable of converting the expectation displayed by the expectation display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K4 to K6, gaming machine K7 has the advantage that when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation displayed by the expectation display means is converted by the expectation conversion means, making it possible to play the game while expecting the specific period to be extended. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine K8, which is characterized in that in any of the gaming machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display means displays the extension period includes a period during which the specific display condition for the expectation display means to display the expectation can be established, and when the extension progress information display means indicates that the extension progress information has passed the established period, the expectation conversion means converts the expectation.

Gaming machine K8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine K7. That is, when the extension period is displayed by the extension period information display means, specific period information is used that includes an established period during which a specific display condition for the expectation display means to display the expectation can be established. When the extension progress information passes the established period, the expectation is converted by the expectation conversion means.

As a result, when the expectation level is converted by the expectation level conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation level display displayed during the period in which the display is being executed by the period information display means and the progress information display means. This has the effect of making it possible to clearly display to the player that the expectation level is being converted.

Gaming machine K9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving object moving on the time gauge.

Gaming machine K9 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines K1 to K8. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as specific period information, and the progress information display means displays a moving object moving on the progress information time gauge.

This allows the player to easily grasp a specific period of time using the time gauge, and allows the player to easily grasp elapsed information based on the movement status of the moving object. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine K9, the expectation display means displays the expectation when the condition is met and the expectation is met when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving object to a specific position on the time gauge. A gaming machine K10.

According to the gaming machine K10, when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, the condition is met and the expectation level display means displays the expectation level. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Furthermore, the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the moving object to a specified position on the time gauge.

This makes it possible to display the extension period using a time gauge and a moving object. This makes it possible to display the extension period in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. Furthermore, since the display data for displaying a specific period can be reused as the display data for displaying the extension period, there is an advantage in that data capacity can be reduced.

Gaming machine K11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K9 or K10, the time gauge has multiple paths along which the moving object can move.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K9 and K10, gaming machine K11 has multiple paths along which a moving object can move, allowing the player to predict which path the moving object will take. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine K12, in which the extension progress information display means in the gaming machine K11 moves the moving body to a position where the moving body can pass through a branching position where the time gauge branches into the multiple paths.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 has an extension progress information display means that moves the moving object to a position where it can pass through a branching position where the time gauge branches into multiple routes, so that if the specific period is extended, the player can again predict which route the moving object will take. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

<Feature L group> (varies each performance mode of consecutive slot performance)
A gaming machine L1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, an effect execution means that can execute an effect based on an operation on the operation means, and a display means that displays the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means executes a specific effect that can be executed multiple times within a specific period, and an operation validity period is set during which at least an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid, and the gaming machine L1 has an effect mode changing means that changes the effect mode of other operation effects based on information regarding the operation for at least one of the multiple operation effects executed during the specific effect.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and an effect in which predetermined symbols are aligned is executed by operating the operating means (for example, JP 2012-223651 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, a valid period is set during which operation of the operating means is valid, and a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within that valid period, which creates the problem that the game becomes monotonous and players quickly become bored with the game.

In contrast to this, in gaming machine L1, an effect based on an operation on an operation means operable by a player is executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, a specific effect that can be executed multiple times within a specific period is executed by the effect execution means, and an operation effect having a valid operation period during which at least an operation on the operation means is determined to be valid is set, and among the multiple operation effects executed during the specific effect, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of the other operation effects based on information regarding the operation on at least one operation effect.

As a result, in a specific performance in which multiple operation effects are executed, the performance mode of one operation effect can be changed based on the operation content of the operation means in the other operation effect. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game because it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.

Gaming machine L2 is characterized in that in gaming machine L1, the presentation mode changing means changes the effective operation period of the other operation presentation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine L1, gaming machine L2 has the effect of varying the effective operation period of other operational effects by the effect mode varying means, making it possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that in gaming machine L1 or L2, the presentation mode changing means changes the number of times the other operation presentation is performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L1 and L2, gaming machine L3 has a presentation mode changing means that changes the number of other operational presentations, making it possible to provide a variety of presentations to players, and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Among any of gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation presentation executes a pattern presentation that dynamically displays a pattern that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the effective operation period, and gaming machine L4 is characterized in that it has a bonus granting means that grants a bonus to a player when the patterns stopped and displayed by the multiple operation presentations in the specific presentation form a predetermined combination.

Gaming machine L4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines L1 to L3. That is, when the operation means is operated during the effective operation period, a pattern effect is executed as the operation effect, which dynamically displays a pattern that is stopped and displayed, and when the patterns stopped and displayed by multiple operation effects in a specific effect form a predetermined combination, a bonus is awarded to the player by the bonus awarding means.

This allows the player to focus on the symbols that are stopped and displayed for each of the multiple operation effects that are executed during the specific effect. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early during the period when the specific effect is being executed.

Gaming machine L5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines L1 to L4, it has an operation timing discrimination means for discriminating the timing at which the operation means is operated during the operation effective period set in the operation presentation, and the presentation mode variable means varies the presentation mode of the other operation presentation based on the discrimination result of the operation timing discrimination means in the one operation presentation.

Gaming machine L5 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines L1 to L4. That is, the timing at which the operation means is operated during the effective operation period set in the operation presentation is determined by the operation timing determination means. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means in one operation presentation, the presentation mode of the other operation presentation is changed by the presentation mode changing means.

This makes it possible to change the presentation mode of one operation presentation depending on the operation timing of the operating means in another operation presentation. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly, as it is possible to provide a variety of presentations to the player.

In the gaming machine L5, the presentation mode changing means increases the number of times the other operation presentation is performed when the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the effective operation period of the one operation presentation has started. Gaming machine L6.

Gaming machine L6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine L5. That is, when the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the start of the operation effective period of one operation effect, the presentation mode changing means increases the number of times the other operation effect is performed.

This makes it possible to increase the number of times the operation effects are performed by operating the operation means early on. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operation means and enhancing the effect of the effects.

In gaming machine L5 or L6, the presentation execution means is capable of executing the other operation presentation multiple times, and when the operation timing discrimination means determines that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period since the start of the operation valid period of the first operation presentation, a first operation presentation is executed as the other operation presentation, and when the operation timing discrimination means determines that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period since the start of the operation valid period of the first operation presentation, the operation presentation is executed the same number of times as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period since the start of the operation valid period of the first operation presentation. Gaming machine L7.

Gaming machine L7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines L5 or L6. That is, when the effect execution means executes another operation effect multiple times and the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated beyond a predetermined period since the start of the operation effective period of the first operation effect, the effect execution means executes a first operation effect as another operation effect. Then, when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period since the start of the operation effective period of the first operation effect, the operation effect is executed the same number of times as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period since the start of the operation effective period of the first operation effect.

As a result, even if the operation means cannot be operated within a predetermined period in one operation presentation, it is possible to execute the same number of operation presentations as if the operation means were operated within the predetermined period in one operation presentation by operating the operation means within the predetermined period during the next first operation presentation. Therefore, for players who do not notice that an operation presentation has been executed or who are too focused on the operation presentation and are unable to operate the operation means early on, an opportunity to increase the number of operation presentations can be provided, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines L1 to L7, the effect execution means executes a normal effect in which the effective operation period is not set if the operation means is not operated during the effective operation period of one of the operation effects.

Gaming machine L8 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines L1 to L7. That is, if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period of one operation effect, the effect execution means executes a normal effect in which the operation effective period is not set.

This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play from being caused by repeatedly executing the operation presentation for players who have not operated the operating means during the valid operation period, i.e., players who do not like the operation presentation.

A gaming machine L9, which is one of the gaming machines L4 to L8, is characterized in that the more times the operation effects are executed by the effect execution means, the more likely the bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L4 to L8, gaming machine L9 has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play, since the more operation effects executed by the effect execution means, the more likely it is that the bonus will be awarded by the bonus awarding means.

<Feature M Group> (changing the mode of slot presentation based on the remaining period of the operation validity period)
A gaming machine M1 having an operation means operable by a player, an operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which operations on the operation means are judged to be valid, an effect execution means for executing an effect for which the operation valid period is set, and a display means for displaying an effect mode based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation valid period is set, executes a dynamic display effect in which a predetermined identification information is statically displayed from the plurality of identification information by operating the operation means, and when the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect becomes a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode during the operation valid period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode and dynamically displayed.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and an effect in which predetermined symbols are aligned is executed by operating the operating means (for example, JP 2012-223651 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, a valid period is set during which operation of the operating means is valid, and a specific effect is executed by operating the operating means within that valid period, which creates the problem that the game becomes monotonous and players quickly become bored with the game.

In contrast, in gaming machine M1, a valid operation period during which operations on an operation means operable by a player are judged to be valid is set by a valid operation period setting means, a performance for which the valid operation period is set is executed by a performance execution means, and a performance mode based on that performance is displayed on a display means. Then, the performance execution means dynamically displays multiple identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the valid operation period is set, a dynamic display performance is executed in which a predetermined identification information is statically displayed from the multiple identification information dynamically displayed by operating the operation means, and when the valid operation period in that dynamic display performance reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the valid operation period is changed and dynamically displayed.

As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed varies depending on the remaining period of the valid operation period during which operation of the operating means is valid, making it possible for the player to operate the operating means at various times. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game because it is possible to provide a variety of presentations to the player.

In the gaming machine M1, the performance execution means dynamically displays the multiple identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time, and the gaming machine M2 is characterized in having a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the effective operation period in the dynamic display performance, and a dynamic display mode changing means for changing at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode to the variable dynamic display mode when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period.

Gaming machine M2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine M1. That is, the performance execution means dynamically displays multiple pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time, and the remaining period of the effective operation period in the dynamic display performance is determined by the remaining period determination means. Then, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period, at least a portion of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to a variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the operation valid period reaches a specified remaining period, eliminating the need to set the dynamic display mode in advance to correspond to the operation valid period. This has the effect of reducing the data volume required when executing the dynamic display mode.

A gaming machine M3 is characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when a specific identification information is displayed in a static manner by the dynamic display effect in the gaming machine M1 or M2, and the variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which the specific identification information among the multiple identification information is easier to identify than the other identification information.

According to gaming machine M3, when specific identification information is statically displayed by the specific effect execution means through a dynamic display effect, a specific effect is executed, and the dynamic display mode is such that the specific identification information among the multiple identification information is more easily identifiable than the other identification information as a variable dynamic display mode.

As a result, the specific identification information that will execute a specific effect when displayed in a static state will be displayed in a dynamic manner that is easier to identify than other identification information, making it possible to increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means. This has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine M3, the effect execution means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set multiple times, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect when a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed in the multiple dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect satisfies a predetermined condition, and the variable dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode that dynamically displays a variable pattern that satisfies the predetermined condition by being stopped and displayed in the one dynamic display effect. In the gaming machine M4,

Gaming machine M4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine M3. That is, the effect execution means executes a continuous dynamic display effect in which a dynamic display effect is set multiple times, and if a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the multiple dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. Then, a dynamic display mode is achieved in which a variable pattern that satisfies the predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in one dynamic display effect as a variable dynamic display mode.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the effective operation period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute multiple dynamic display effects, a variable pattern that satisfies a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed in one dynamic display effect. This makes it possible to increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means during continuous dynamic display effects. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine M5, which is any one of gaming machines M2 to M4, is characterized in that the operation valid period setting means sets the operation valid period multiple times during the period during which the dynamic display performance is being executed, and the remaining period determination means determines whether the remaining period is the specified remaining period based on the remaining number of times the operation valid period has been reached.

Gaming machine M5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, the operation valid period is set multiple times during the period in which the dynamic display performance is being executed by the operation valid period setting means. Then, the predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determination means based on the remaining number of times the operation valid period is executed.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode based on the number of times remaining in the effective operation period, making it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means during the remaining effective operation period. This has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine M6, which is any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, has an array information storage means for storing array information in which the plurality of identification information are set in a predetermined array, and a start position setting means for setting a start position of the dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is capable of setting a first start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is unlikely to be displayed on the display means during the effective operation period set by the effective operation period setting means.

Gaming machine M6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines M1 to M5. That is, array information in which multiple pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined array is stored by an array information storage means, and a start position setting means sets a start position of dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means. Then, predetermined identification information is set at the predetermined position of the array information. Within the effective operation period set by the effective operation period setting means, a first start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means and a second start position at which the predetermined position of the array information is unlikely to be displayed on the display means are set by the start position setting means.

This makes it possible to use the same array information to perform dynamic display in which the specified identification information is likely to be displayed on the display means and dynamic display in which the specified identification information is unlikely to be displayed. This has the effect of reducing the data capacity of the display data for performing the dynamic display.

Gaming machine M7 is any one of gaming machines M1 to M6, characterized in that the performance execution means has a dynamic display speed variable means for varying the speed of the dynamic display.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines M1 to M6, gaming machine M7 has a dynamic display speed variable means that varies the speed of dynamic display, making it possible to vary the number of times that a given piece of identification information is displayed within the effective operation period. This has the effect of providing a variety of presentations to the player and preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature N group> (Determine the next button performance based on the button operation)
The gaming machine N1 is characterized in having: an operation means that can be operated by a player; a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation of the operation means when the operation means is operated; a discrimination means that discriminates the signal output by the signal output means; an operation presentation execution means that can execute a predetermined operation presentation mode based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means; a judgment means that judges the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means during a period in which the operation presentation mode is being executed by the operation presentation execution means; and an execution control means that, when a second operation presentation mode is executed by the operation presentation execution means within a period in which a predetermined condition is established after a first operation presentation mode is executed, switches the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode and executes it based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are some operation effects using operation buttons that include an operation of actually pressing an operation button, and an operation in which a rapid-fire operation is automatically performed by pressing an operation button for a predetermined period of time (for example, JP 2014-180364 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, in operation effects that require multiple operation of an operation button (for example, a rapid-fire effect), a player can enjoy the operation effect by actually pressing the operation button multiple times, or by pressing the operation button continuously for a predetermined period of time or longer to automatically execute a rapid-fire operation. However, when an operation effect is executed multiple times in succession, there is a problem that an operation on a frame button executed during an earlier operation effect may end up being executed in a later operation effect, reducing the effect of the later operation effect.

Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are equipped with operation effects that cause the player to perform different operations, such as the above-mentioned operation effect (rapid tap effect) and an operation effect that causes the player to operate the operation button at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing press effect), as operation effects for operating the operation button. In this case, if a timing press effect is executed after a rapid tap effect is executed, the timing press effect starts while the operation executed during the rapid tap effect (rapid tap operation) is being continuously executed, causing the player to operate the operation button without aiming for the predetermined timing during the timing press effect, which reduces the performance effect of the timing press effect.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, effects are generally executed based on the period during which special symbols change, so in order to execute multiple operation effects within the limited period of time that is the period during which special symbols change, it was necessary to shorten the intervals between execution of multiple operation effects. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem could not be solved by the easy method of lengthening the intervals between execution of multiple operation effects.

In contrast, in gaming machine N1, when an operation means operable by a player is operated, a signal based on that operation is output by signal output means and discriminated by discrimination means. Based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, a predetermined operation presentation mode is executed by operation presentation execution means. During the period in which the operation presentation mode is executed by the operation presentation execution means, the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means is judged by judgment means. If a second operation presentation mode is executed by the operation presentation execution means within the period in which a predetermined condition is established after the first operation presentation mode is executed, the execution control means switches the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode and executes it based on the result of discrimination by the judgment means.

As a result, if the second operation presentation mode is executed within a period during which a predetermined condition is met after the first operation presentation mode is executed, it becomes possible to switch to and execute the second operation presentation mode with a specific operation presentation mode based on the operation performed by the player on the operating means while the first operation presentation mode is being executed, which has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In the gaming machine N1, the determination means determines the determination result determined by the determination means during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed as at least a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the execution control means executes the operation presentation mode corresponding to the first determination result as the specific operation presentation mode when the determination means determines that the first determination result is obtained. Gaming machine N2.

Gaming machine N2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N1. That is, during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the determination means determines the determination result determined by the determination means to be either the first determination result or a second determination result different from the first determination result. Then, when the determination means determines that the result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes an operation presentation mode based on the first determination result as a specific operation presentation mode.

This makes it possible to execute, as the second operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation presentation modes are executed consecutively, the presentation effect is not reduced. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect by executing the operation presentation modes consecutively.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operating means has been performed multiple times, and the execution control means switches, as the specific operation presentation mode, to an operation presentation mode in which the operating means is operated multiple times. Gaming machine N3.

Gaming machine N3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N2. That is, the determination means determines as a first determination result that the operation of the operation means has been performed multiple times, and the execution control means switches to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is operated multiple times as a specific operation presentation mode.

As a result, when the player operates the operation means multiple times in the first operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode in which the player operates the operation means multiple times is executed as the second operation presentation mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the presentation effect of the second operation presentation mode does not decrease, which has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

A gaming machine N4 has an operation count measuring means for measuring the number of times the operation means is operated during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, and a number discrimination means for discriminating the number of times measured by the operation count measuring means, and the discrimination means discriminates between the first discrimination result and a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result based on the discrimination result of the number discrimination means.

Gaming machine N4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N3. That is, during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the number of times the operation means is operated is measured by the operation count measuring means, and the number of times measured by the operation count measuring means is judged by the number of times discrimination means. Then, based on the discrimination result of the number of times discrimination means, the judgment means judges a first judgment result and a third judgment result different from the first judgment result.

This makes it possible to switch the operation presentation mode of the second operation presentation mode based on the number of times the operating means is operated during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed.

Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that in gaming machine N4, the determination means determines that the first determination result is true when the determination result of the number determination means is greater than a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of gaming machine N4, when the determination result of the number determination means is determined to be more than a predetermined number of times, the determination means determines that this is the first determination result. As a result, when the operation means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, it is possible to execute the operation presentation mode corresponding to the first determination result as the second operation presentation mode. This has the effect of enabling the player to continue to operate the operation means with enthusiasm.

Gaming machine N6 is characterized in that in gaming machine N4, the determination means determines the third determination result when the number determination means determines that the number of times is less than a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of gaming machine N4, when the determination result of the number determination means is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines a third determination result. As a result, if the operation means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the operation presentation mode corresponding to the first determination result is not executed as the second operation presentation mode.

In gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operating means has been continuously performed for a predetermined period of time, and the execution control means switches, as the specific operation presentation mode, to an operation presentation mode in which the operating means is continuously operated. Gaming machine N7.

Gaming machine N7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N2. That is, the determination means determines as a first determination result that the operation of the operation means has been continuously performed for a predetermined period of time. Then, the execution control means switches to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is continuously operated as a specific operation presentation mode.

As a result, when the player continues to operate the operation means for a predetermined period in the first operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is continued is executed as the second operation presentation mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operation means, the presentation effect of the second operation presentation mode does not decrease, which has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Gaming machine N8 is characterized in that any one of gaming machines N1 to N7 has a notification means for notifying that the specific operation presentation mode will be executed by the execution control means, and the notification means notifies that the specific operation presentation mode will be executed before the second operation presentation mode is executed.

Gaming machine N8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines N1 to N7. That is, the notification means notifies the player that a specific operation presentation mode will be executed by the execution control means before the second operation presentation mode is executed. This makes it possible for the player to play without confusion, even when a specific operation presentation mode is executed as the second operation presentation mode. This has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Gaming machine N9 is characterized in that in gaming machine N8, the determination means executes the determination while the first operation presentation mode is being executed, and the notification means notifies the player that the specific operation presentation mode will be executed between the time the determination means executes the determination and the time the first operation presentation mode ends.

Gaming machine N9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine N8. That is, while the first operation presentation mode is being executed, a judgment is made by the judgment means, and the notification means notifies the user that a specific operation presentation mode will be executed between the time the judgment is made and the time the first operation presentation mode ends.

This has the effect of reliably informing the user that a specific operation presentation mode will be executed before the second operation presentation mode is started.

Gaming machine N10 is characterized in that it has a mode display means for displaying the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means, and an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation performance mode, in the gaming machine N8 or N9, and the notification means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation performance mode by the operation content display means.

According to the gaming machine N10, the operation presentation mode executed by the operation presentation execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation presentation mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation presentation mode is displayed by the operation content display means.

As a result, the operation content of the operating means corresponding to a specific operation presentation mode is displayed, allowing the player to play without confusion. This has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Gaming machine N11 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation presentation execution means is capable of executing a continuous operation presentation mode in which the first operation presentation mode and the second operation presentation mode are executed consecutively.

According to the gaming machine N11, a continuous operation presentation mode in which a first operation presentation mode and a second operation presentation mode are executed consecutively is executed by the operation presentation execution means. This makes it possible to execute a presentation in which the player can operate the operation means in a short period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine N12 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N11, it has a performance result display means for displaying the performance result of the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means, and the performance result display means displays the performance result based on the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine N11, gaming machine N12 provides the following effect. That is, the performance result of the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means is displayed by the performance result display means. The performance result is displayed based on the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode.

This makes it possible to associate the first and second operation presentation modes, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature P group> (Change the interval between auto-hits)
a first setting means for setting a first presentation mode in which a specific presentation is executed when a result of the determination by the signal determination means satisfies a first condition; a specific presentation execution means for executing the specific presentation for a first period when a result of the determination by the signal determination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition while the first presentation mode is set; and a period variable setting means for varying and setting an execution period for the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means to a second period different from the first period when a predetermined variable condition is established when the first presentation mode is being executed.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are some that use operation buttons to automatically perform a rapid-fire operation by pressing the operation button for a specified period of time (for example, JP 2014-180364 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, in effects that require multiple operation of an operating button (e.g., rapid-fire effects), the player can enjoy the rapid-fire effects simply by continuously pressing the operating button. However, in other operational effects (e.g., timing effects), automatic rapid-fire operations are executed, which ruins the other operational effects, causing players to quickly become bored with the game.

In response to this, in the gaming machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of an operating means operable by a player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a first condition, a first presentation mode in which a specific presentation is executed is set by the first setting means, and when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition while the first presentation mode is set, a specific presentation is executed for each first period by the specific presentation execution means. Furthermore, when the first presentation mode is being executed, the execution period of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means is variably set to a second period different from the first period by the period variable setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition.

This makes it possible to vary the intervals between specific effects executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, while the specific effect execution means is being executed, various effects can be executed using the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in a gaming machine P1, and a reward granting means for granting a reward to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and that a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine P2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine P1. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and if the result of the determination is a predetermined determination result, a benefit is granted to the player by the bonus granting means. Then, a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

This makes it possible to understand the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on by focusing on the specific effect executed based on the player's operation.

Gaming machine P3 is characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying that the second condition is met by the signal discrimination means in gaming machine P1 or P2.

In gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of gaming machines P1 or P2, the notification means notifies the player that the second condition has been met by the signal discrimination means, so that when the player operates the operation means and the second condition is met, the effect is that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period for a specific presentation is changed.

Gaming machine P4 is characterized in that in gaming machine P3, the notification means notifies the execution period set by the period variable setting means.

In gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of gaming machine P3, the notification means notifies the player of the execution period set by the period variable setting means, making it possible to notify the player of the timing when the next specific effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period of the specific effect is changed.

A gaming machine P5, which is any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, has a validity period setting means for setting a validity period for validly determining the operation of the operating means, and a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the validity period set by the validity period setting means, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is established when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, and has a determination period changing means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period that is shorter than the first determination period when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period.

Gaming machine P5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines P1 to P4. That is, a valid period for validly determining the operation of the operating means is set by a valid period setting means, and the remaining period of the valid period is determined by a remaining period determination means. When the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is established, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period, the determination period varying means varies the first determination period to a second determination period that is shorter than the first determination period.

This has the effect of making it easier for the specific presentation that has been changed to the second period to be executed when the remaining period of the validity period during which the operation of the operating means is judged to be valid reaches a predetermined period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine P6 is characterized in that in gaming machine P5, the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determination means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

According to gaming machine P6, the remaining period discrimination means discriminates the remaining period to be a period shorter than the first discrimination period as the predetermined period, so that it is possible to execute a specific presentation that has been changed to the second period even when there is little remaining in the valid period, thereby achieving the effect of enhancing the presentation effect until the end of the valid period.

<Feature Q> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
a game machine that includes an operation means operable by a player, a determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which the determination means determines that the operation of the operation means is valid, a notification means for notifying the player of an operation notification mode for allowing the player to operate the operation means, an operation presentation execution means for executing an operation presentation based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the determination means, and a notification control means for causing the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode across the first validity period and the second validity period when at least a first validity period and a second validity period are set by the validity period setting means under predetermined conditions.

Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that can execute multiple operational effects using operation buttons (for example, JP 2014-180364 A).

In such conventional gaming machines, multiple operation effects are executed, which increases the opportunities for the player to operate the operation button and increases the player's motivation to play. However, if these multiple operation effects are set too frequently, the player will frequently alternate between operating and not operating the operation button, which can cause a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases.

Furthermore, conventional gaming machines are configured so that a valid period is set during which operation of the operation button can be accepted, and effects based on operation of the operation button are executed during the valid period, but are not executed outside the valid period, i.e., during an invalid period. Therefore, when a player operates the operation button multiple times, some of those operations may occur during an invalid period, and no effects may be executed despite the operation of the operation button, resulting in a decrease in motivation to play.

In contrast, in gaming machine Q1, the discrimination means discriminates that an operating means operable by the player has been operated, the valid period during which the discrimination means discriminates that the operation of the operating means is valid is set by the valid period setting means, and the notification means notifies the player of an operation notification mode for causing the player to operate the operating means. Furthermore, the operation presentation is executed by the operation presentation execution means based on the discrimination means discriminating that the operation of the operating means has been performed.

Then, when at least the first valid period and the second valid period are set by the valid period setting means under a predetermined condition, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode across the first valid period and the second valid period.

As a result, when the first valid period and the second valid period are set under predetermined conditions, a specific operation notification mode is notified across the first valid period and the second valid period, making it possible to notify multiple valid periods as if they were continuous. This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping operating the operating means between the first valid period and the second valid period. This has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to frequent repetition of the act of operating and not operating the operating means.

In this case, it is desirable for the predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period to be a short interval (for example, within 5 seconds). Setting such a condition has the effect of further suppressing a decline in motivation to play.

In addition, as a method for determining whether the first validity period and the second validity period are set under a predetermined condition, a method for determining the actual period may be used, or a method for determining whether multiple operation effects are set in a predetermined combination may be used.

Furthermore, possible operation effects in gaming machine Q1 include, for example, a display mode displayed on a display device provided in the gaming machine, a drive mode of a drive mechanism provided in the gaming machine, an audio mode output from an audio output device provided in the gaming machine, and a light emission mode output from a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine. In this way, it is sufficient that the player who operates the operating means can recognize the effects that are executed based on the determination of an operation on the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in gaming machine Q1 may be anything that can be operated by the player, such as a button device that the player can press, a sensor device that detects and reacts to contact or proximity by the player, a dial device that the player can rotate, or a lever device that the player can operate back and forth and left and right.

A gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it has a notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means in the gaming machine Q1.

According to gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation execution means, so that a specific operation notification mode that is notified across the first valid period and the second valid period can be set based on the operation presentation executed during the first valid period or the second valid period.

This has the effect of making it possible to clearly notify the player of a specific operation notification mode that is notified across the first and second validity periods.

Gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extended presentation mode based on the first operation presentation that is executed when the first valid period is set.

In gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets an extended presentation mode based on the first operation presentation executed when the first effective period is set as a specific operation notification mode, making it possible to make the first effective period appear to continue until the second effective period begins. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play caused by frequently repeating the act of operating and not operating the operating means.

Gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a pre-effect mode based on the second operation effect that is executed when the second valid period is set.

In gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines Q2 and Q3, the notification mode setting means sets a pre-effect mode based on the second operation effect that is executed when the second valid period is set as a specific operation notification mode, making it possible to make the second valid period appear to be set consecutively to the first valid period. This has the effect of further suppressing the decline in motivation to play caused by the player frequently repeating the act of operating and not operating the operation button.

Gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, it has a pseudo-effect execution means for simulating the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means during an invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period.

Gaming machine Q5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4. That is, during an invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the pseudo-effect execution means executes a pseudo-operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means.

By doing this, the operation effects are displayed in a simulated manner, making it appear to the player that the first valid period and the second valid period are set consecutively, which has the effect of further reducing the decline in motivation to play caused by frequently alternating between operating and not operating the operation button.

As a pseudo-operation presentation in gaming machine Q5, it is advisable to execute a presentation in which the presentation mode is variable. This has the effect of making a player who continues to operate the operation means believe that the presentation mode is changing as a result of operating the operation means during the period between the first valid period and the second valid period, during which an invalid period is actually set, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, with a configuration including gaming machine Q3, it is possible to execute pseudo-operation effects so that the operation effects executed during the first valid period are extended, which has the effect of providing the player with effects that are easier to understand.

In addition, with a configuration including gaming machine Q4, it is possible to execute pseudo-operation effects so that the operation effects executed during the second valid period are executed consecutively with the first valid period, which has the effect of providing the player with effects that are easier to understand.

Gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined operation condition has been established during the first valid period.

Gaming machine Q6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Q1 to Q5. That is, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined operation condition has been established during the first effective period.

As a result, even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set with a short interval between them, if the player does not operate the operation means during the first valid period, the specific operation notification mode will not be notified. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent a specific operation notification mode from being unnecessarily notified to a player who does not like operation presentations, which has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play.

Even if the first valid period and the second valid period are set at a short interval, if the player does not operate the operation means during the first valid period, the problem described above, that is, the problem of a decrease in motivation to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation means and not operating it, does not occur, so the player's motivation to play will not decrease even if a specific operation notification mode is not notified. Rather, there is an effect that the processing for notifying a specific operation notification mode can be reduced and the performance executed in the normal state can be provided to the player.

As a predetermined operation condition in the gaming machine Q6, for example, it is preferable to set the operation condition that the operation means is operated multiple times during the first valid period. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the willingness of a player who is actively operating the operation means to play. In addition, a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period of the first valid period may be provided, and the operation condition may be set to the operation of the operation means in a state in which the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), or a means for determining the period until the start of the second valid period may be provided, and the operation condition may be set to the operation of the operation means in a state in which the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in willingness to play caused by frequently repeating the act of operating and not operating the operation means.

In gaming machine Q6, the discrimination means has an operation count measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operation means is operated, and the operation condition is met when a predetermined number of operations are measured by the operation count measuring means during the first valid period. Gaming machine Q7.

Gaming machine Q7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q6. That is, the number of times the operation means is operated is measured by the operation count measuring means of the discrimination means. The operation condition is met when the number of operations measured by the operation count measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first valid period.

This allows a specific operation notification mode to be notified when a predetermined number of operations are performed during the first valid period. Therefore, for example, when an operation effect of repeatedly tapping the operation means is performed during the first valid period, it is possible to make a specific operation notification mode be notified to a player who is actively operating the operation means. This has the effect of preventing a situation in which a player who is actively operating the operation means is forced to frequently stop operating the operation means, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, with a configuration including gaming machine Q5, by executing an operation performance in which the performance mode is frequently changed as a simulated operation performance, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution of the simulated operation performance. In addition, it is preferable to make it possible to execute multiple operation performances corresponding to the number of times the performance mode is changed by the simulated performance execution means, and to set the operation performance based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation count measurement means.

Gaming machine Q8 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period.

In gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the timing of the end of the first valid period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the second valid period has been set until the end of the first valid period. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the presentation effect caused by the player being aware of the operation presentation to be executed later.

Gaming machine Q9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q8, it has a validity period changing means for changing the validity period so that the first validity period and the second validity period are continuous when at least the first validity period and the second validity period are set by the validity period setting means under the predetermined conditions.

Gaming machine Q9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines Q1 to Q8. That is, when at least a first valid period and a second valid period are set under a predetermined condition by the valid period setting means, the valid period is changed by the valid period changing means so that the first valid period and the second valid period are continuous.

This makes it possible for multiple valid periods to be consecutive valid periods when multiple valid periods are set. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, which has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation to play due to the presentation not changing despite the operation of the operating means.

Here, making the valid periods in gaming machine Q9 continuous means that there is no period between the first and second valid periods during which the presentation does not change despite the player operating the operating means. The valid periods may be changed so that the first and second valid periods are actually connected, or there may be a period between the first and second valid periods that is shorter than the period required to determine that the operating means has been operated.

Gaming machine Q10 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q9, the validity period change means adds a period between the first validity period and the second validity period to the validity period.

In gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Q9, the valid period change means sets an additional valid period between the first valid period and the second valid period. This has the effect of reducing the control load of the valid period change means, since multiple valid periods can be made continuous without changing the first valid period and the second valid period.

Gaming machine Q11 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the validity period change means delays the start of the first validity period.

In gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects of gaming machines Q9 and Q10, the start of the first valid period is delayed by the valid period change means. This makes it possible to make the first valid period and the second valid period continuous, eliminating the need to set a new valid period and reducing the control load on the valid period change means.

Gaming machine Q12 is one of gaming machines Q9 to Q11, characterized in that the validity period change means advances the start of the second validity period.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q9 to Q11, gaming machine Q12 has the effect of hastening the start of the second valid period by the valid period change means. This makes it possible to make the first valid period and the second valid period continuous, eliminating the need to set a new valid period and reducing the control load on the valid period change means.

Gaming machine Q13 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has a validity period display means for causing the display means to display the operation notification mode, and has a validity period display change means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the validity period display means based on the validity period being changed by the validity period change means.

Gaming machine Q13 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines Q9 to Q12. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display means by the validity period display means, and the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display change means based on the validity period being changed by the validity period change means.

This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand, since it is possible to display to the player that the validity period has been changed by the validity period changing means.

Gaming machine Q14 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q13, the validity period display change means changes the operation notification mode based on the lapse of the first validity period.

In gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effect of gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display change means based on the lapse of the first validity period. This has the effect of preventing a situation in which the player becomes aware of the content of the operation presentation to be executed later (the operation presentation for which the second validity period is set) before the first validity period has lapsed, thereby reducing the effect of the presentation.

Gaming machine Q15 is characterized in that it has, in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for a predetermined period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, the period performance execution means being capable of executing a composite performance in which a plurality of effective periods are set, and the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine Q15 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Q1 to Q14. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition is a specific determination result, a benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. Then, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a composite effect with multiple valid periods set as a period effect for a predetermined period is executed by the period effect execution means.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest by enabling a composite presentation to be executed based on the results of the discrimination made by the discrimination means.

Gaming machine Q16 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a period performance execution means for executing a period performance for a predetermined period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode when the first effective period set in the first period performance executed first and the second effective period set in the second period performance executed later are set under a predetermined condition among the consecutive period performances.

Gaming machine Q16 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Q1 to Q14. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition is a specific determination result, a benefit is granted by the bonus granting means. Also, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a period performance execution means executes a period performance for a predetermined period. Then, when, among the successive period performances, a first effective period set in a first period performance executed first and a second effective period set in a second period performance executed later are set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play, which would otherwise occur if the player frequently alternates between operating the operating means and not operating it, even if the first and second effective periods are set across multiple period presentations.

Gaming machine Q17 has a discrimination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of discrimination information items based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a pre-determination means for determining in advance the discrimination information stored in the discrimination condition storage means, and the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the result of the determination made by the pre-determination means for the second period presentation.

Gaming machine Q17 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Q16. That is, the discrimination condition storage means stores a plurality of pieces of discrimination information based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the plurality of stored discrimination information is judged by the advance judgment means. Then, based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means for the second period presentation, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when a first effective period and a second effective period are set across a first period performance and a second period performance, a specific operation notification mode is notified based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means corresponding to the second period performance that is executed later. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definite identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins and medals.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine in any of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17. In particular, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is as follows: "A gaming machine equipped with variable display means which dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, variation of the identification information is started due to operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and which is equipped with special game state generating means which generates a special game state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, which uses balls as gaming media, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured so that a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state is generated."
＜Other＞
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines that use an operation button to automatically perform a rapid-fire operation by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period of time (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2014-180364 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the above-mentioned pachinko machines.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to increase the enjoyment of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises an operating means operable by a player, a signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operating means, a signal discrimination means for discriminating the signal output by the signal output means, a first setting means for setting a first presentation mode in which a specific presentation is executed when a discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a first condition, a specific presentation execution means for executing the specific presentation for a first period when a discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition while the first presentation mode is set, and a period variable setting means for variably setting an execution period for the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means to a second period different from the first period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition when the first presentation mode is executed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, which has a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means.
The gaming machine of technical concept 3 is the gaming machine according to technical concept 1 or 2, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discrimination means.
A gaming machine according to a fourth technical concept is the gaming machine according to the third technical concept, wherein the notification means notifies the player of the execution period set by the period variable setting means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, which has a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validly determining operation of the operating means, and a remaining period discrimination means for discriminating the remaining period of the valid period set by the valid period setting means, and the signal discrimination means discriminates that the second condition is established when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first discrimination period, and has a discrimination period varying means for varying the first discrimination period to a second discrimination period shorter than the first discrimination period when the remaining period discrimination means discriminates that the remaining period is a predetermined period.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of an operation means operable by a player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a first condition, a first presentation mode in which a specific presentation is executed is set by the first setting means, and when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition while the first presentation mode is set, a specific presentation is executed for each first period by the specific presentation execution means. Furthermore, when the first presentation mode is executed, the execution period of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means is variably set to a second period different from the first period by the period variable setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition.
This makes it possible to execute various effects using the operating means while the specific effect execution means is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and when the result of the determination is a predetermined determination result, a benefit is granted to the player by the bonus granting means. Then, a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the determination by the determination means.
This makes it possible to grasp the result of the determination by the determination means based on the execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by focusing on the specific effect executed based on the player's operation.
The gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3 has the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, since the notification means notifies the player that the second condition has been met by the signal discrimination means, when the player operates the operating means and the second condition is met, the player will not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period of a specific presentation is changed.
In addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 3, the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 4 has an execution period set by the period variable setting means notified by the notification means, so that it is possible to notify the player of the timing when the specific effect will be executed next. Therefore, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution period of the specific effect is changed.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines according to Technical Ideas 1 to 4. That is, a valid period for validly determining the operation of the operating means is set by a valid period setting means, and the remaining period of the valid period is determined by a remaining period determination means. When the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is established, and when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period, the determination period varying means varies the first determination period to a second determination period that is shorter than the first determination period.
This has the effect of making it easier for a specific presentation that has been changed in the second period to be executed when the remaining period of the effective period during which the operation of the operating means is judged to be valid reaches a predetermined period, thereby improving the interest in the game.

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
S2006 first performance execution means
S2038 second performance execution means

Claims (1)

a first performance execution means for executing a first performance , which is capable of changing a performance mode from at least a first mode to any one of a plurality of second modes different from the first mode, and which does not change from the second mode to the first mode, during a predetermined performance period ;
A gaming machine including a second performance execution means for executing a second performance different from the first performance,
The first performance execution means is capable of executing the first performance so as to hide the second performance in a situation where an execution position of the first performance executed in the first mode overlaps with an execution position of the second performance,
The second performance execution means includes:
The second performance can be executed at a position where the first performance is more easily recognized by a player when the first performance is executed in the second mode than when the first performance is executed in the first mode,
As the second performance, the second performance including a first value mode in which a value given to the player is a first value, and the second performance including a second value mode in which a value given to the player is a second value different from the first value can be executed;
The gaming machine includes:
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in which the performance mode of the first mode is not changed to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution position of the second performance is configured to differ depending on a variable aspect of the first performance executed by the first performance execution means.

Images